JP7111190B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

2. Description of the Related Art In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as structure, control, and presentation for the purpose of improving the enjoyment of games (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2011-172988 A

In the gaming machines as described above, there is a demand for further technical improvements in order to make the game more interesting.

The present invention has been made to solve at least part of the above problems, and can be implemented as the following modes.

[form]
a shooting means for shooting game balls toward the game area;
a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball circulating in the game area;
Passage detection means through which game balls circulating in the game area can pass;
By operating one opening/closing means between a closed state and an open state, the ball entering state of the game ball into the ball entering means can be changed to the state where the entering of the game ball into the ball entering means is impossible or difficult. state transition means for transitioning between a first state that is a state and a second state that is a state in which a game ball can or easily be entered into the ball entry means;
Control means for controlling the state transition means triggered by the passage of the game ball through the passage detection means;
Distributing means for distributing arriving game balls to a plurality of paths;
a first path configured to allow the distributed game balls to pass through the passage detection means;
a second path configured so that the distributed game balls cannot pass through the passage detection means;
A gaming machine comprising
The sorting means is
The game balls that have reached can be distributed to the first route,
A game ball that arrives after the game ball that is distributed to the first path can be distributed to the second path,
A game ball that arrives after the game ball that is distributed to the second path can be distributed to the first path,
The first path and the second path are arranged so that the distributed game ball can enter the ball entering means when the ball entering state is the second state. is composed of
The control means is
The length of the transition start waiting time, which is the time from when the game ball passes through the passage detecting means until when the ball entering state starts to transition from the first state to the second state, is set in a plurality of types. can be set to a length of
When the ball-entering means transitions the opening/closing means from the closed state to the open state and then to the closed state, the time during which the ball-entering state is in the second state is the first state. The game balls distributed to the second route and the game balls distributed to the second route are configured to be the same
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the above aspect, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

1 is a perspective view of a pachinko game machine as an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pattern and display surface which are variably displayed in a pattern display apparatus. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is explanatory drawing explaining the content of the various counters used for a jackpot lottery. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a success/failure table stored in a success/failure table storage area; It is an explanatory view explaining the contents of the distribution table set in the pachinko machine. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart which shows winning a prize processing for start mouths. It is a flow chart which shows winning a prize processing for through. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing; It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing. 4 is a flowchart showing data setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows fluctuation start processing. 9 is a flow chart showing display duration setting processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows a game state transition process. It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize mouth opening and closing processing. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing processing for electric support. 4 is a flow chart showing an electrical opening/closing process; 2 is a block diagram mainly showing electrical configurations of a sound emission control device and a display control device; FIG. It is a time chart which shows an example of the déjà vu notice executed by the pachinko machine of this embodiment. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the pattern display device when the déjà vu notice is executed; 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light MPU; 4 is a flowchart showing command handling processing; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the update process at the time of winning a prize. It is a flow chart which shows confirmation processing. 10 is a flow chart showing a process for an advance notice of a sense of vision; 10 is a flow chart showing a deja vu prediction generating lottery process. It is a flow chart which shows production setting processing. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing processing for setting an effect corresponding to an advance notice of a feeling of déjà vu; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing update processing at the start of fluctuation. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device; FIG. 11 is a time chart showing an example of increasing the number of effect elements having the same content executed multiple times over time; FIG. It is a time chart which shows an example of the déjà vu notice performed by the pachinko machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a time chart which shows an example of the déjà vu previous notice performed by the pachinko machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is an explanatory view for explaining the display surface when the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment is executing the déjà vu notice. It is a time chart which shows an example of the déjà vu notice performed by the pachinko machine of 4th Embodiment. It is an explanatory view explaining an outline of processing which is performed in the main control device and sound emission control device of a pachinko machine in a 5th embodiment. It is a time chart which shows an example of the déjà vu notice performed by the pachinko machine of 6th Embodiment. 10 is a flow chart showing a flow when a pachinko machine selects a button effect XA as an effect element for the previous notice and executes the button effect XA twice. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the effect modes XA1 and XA2 and the suggestive effect F which are executed in the button effect XA; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when a button effect XA is executed as a effect element for announcing the feeling of déjà vu; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a flow when a pachinko machine selects a button effect XB as a effect element for the previous notice and executes the button effect XB twice. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of effect modes XB1, XB2, and XB3 and suggestive effect F executed in button effect XB; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when a button effect XB is executed as a effect element for announcing the feeling of déjà vu; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a flow when a pachinko machine selects a button effect XC as an effect element for the previous notice and executes the button effect XC twice. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of effect modes XC1 and XC2 and suggestive effect F executed in button effect XC; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when a button effect XC is executed as a effect element for giving an advance notice of a feeling of déjà vu; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a flow when a pachinko machine selects a button effect XA as an effect element for a pre-visualization notice and executes the button effect XD twice. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing contents of an effect selection screen XD1, an effect mode XD2, and a suggestive effect F which are executed in the button effect XD; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when a button effect XD is executed as a effect element for announcing the feeling of déjà vu; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a flow when a pachinko machine selects a button effect XE as an effect element for the previous notice and executes the button effect XE twice. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the effect selection screen XE1, the effect mode XE2, and the suggestive effect F executed in the button effect XE. 10 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when a button effect XE is executed as a effect element for a déjà vu preview. 10 is a flow chart showing a flow when a pachinko machine selects a button effect XF as an effect element for the previous notice and executes the button effect XF twice. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the effect modes XF1 and XF2 and the suggestive effect F which are executed in the button effect XF; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when a button effect XF is executed as a effect element for giving an advance notice of a feeling of déjà vu; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a flow when a pachinko machine selects a button effect XG as a effect element for the previous notice and executes the button effect XA twice. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the effect modes XG1 and XG2 and the suggestive effect F which are executed in the button effect XG; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when a button effect XG is executed as a effect element for foretelling a sense of déjà vu; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a flow when a pachinko machine selects a button effect XH as an effect element for the previous notice and executes the button effect XH twice. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of effect modes XH1, XH2, and XH3 and suggestive effect F executed in button effect XH; 10 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when a button effect XH is executed as a effect element for a déjà vu preview. It is an explanatory view showing the game board of the pachinko machine of the eighth embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing the configuration of the second starter unit provided in the pachinko machine of the eighth embodiment. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the behavior of the second starting port unit when the first high-frequency support mode is being executed; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the behavior of the second startup unit when the second high-frequency support mode is being executed; It is an explanatory view showing the contents of the distribution table in the pachinko machine of the eighth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prize-winning process for starting holes performed by the pachinko machine of 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the transition processing at the time of the opening-and-closing execution mode completion|finish performed by the pachinko machine of 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the processing for electric support performed by the pachinko machine of 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electric opening-and-closing process performed by the pachinko machine of 8th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the 2nd start opening unit with which the pachinko machine of 9th Embodiment is provided. It is an explanatory view showing the trajectory of the game ball when the game ball enters the second starter unit provided in the pachinko machine of the ninth embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of the distribution table in the pachinko machine of the ninth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prize-winning process for starting holes performed by the pachinko machine of 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the transition processing at the time of the opening-and-closing execution mode completion|finish performed by the pachinko machine of 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electric opening-and-closing process performed by the pachinko machine of 9th Embodiment. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing another example of the configuration of the second starting port unit; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram specifically showing another example of the configuration of the second starting port unit; In the pachinko machine of the tenth embodiment, it is an explanatory diagram showing the behavior of the second starting opening unit when winning the first type electric role opening. It is a timing chart showing the timing at which the game ball reaches the through gate and the opening and closing ball entry device, and showing the control mode of the opening and closing door when winning the first type electric role opening. In the pachinko machine of the tenth embodiment, it is an explanatory diagram showing the behavior of the second starter unit when the second type electric role opening is won. It is a timing chart showing the timing when the game ball reaches the through gate and the opening and closing ball entry device, and also shows the control mode of the opening and closing door when winning the second type electric combination opening. It is a flowchart which shows the transition processing at the time of the opening-and-closing execution mode completion|finish performed by the pachinko machine of 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electric support performed by the pachinko machine of 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electric opening-and-closing process performed by the pachinko machine of 10th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the control aspect of the opening-and-closing door in the 1st high frequency support mode which the pachinko machine of 11th Embodiment performs. It is a timing chart which shows the control aspect of the opening-and-closing door in the 2nd high frequency support mode which the pachinko machine of 11th Embodiment performs. It is a timing chart which shows the control aspect of the opening-and-closing door in the 3rd high frequency support mode which the pachinko machine of 11th Embodiment performs. It is a timing chart which shows the control aspect of the opening-and-closing door in the low frequency support mode which the pachinko machine of 11th Embodiment performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the distribution table in the pachinko machine of 11th Embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of the distribution table in the pachinko machine of the 12th embodiment. It is a timing chart showing the control mode of the opening and closing door when the variation time of the normal figure unit is set to 0.95 seconds during the high frequency support mode executed by the pachinko machine of the thirteenth embodiment. It is a timing chart showing the control mode of the opening and closing door when the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit is set to 0.25 seconds during the high frequency support mode executed by the pachinko machine of the thirteenth embodiment. It is a timing chart showing the control mode of the opening and closing door when the variation time of the normal figure unit is set to 0.05 seconds during the high frequency support mode executed by the pachinko machine of the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram showing a variable time table for high-frequency support mode in the pachinko machine of the thirteenth embodiment; It is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an increase or decrease in the number of game balls held by the player during the high-frequency support mode executed by the pachinko machine of the thirteenth embodiment.

An embodiment of a game machine according to the present invention will be described in the following order with reference to the drawings.
A. First embodiment:
A1. Game machine structure:
A2. Electrical configuration of the game machine:
A3. Various processing executed in the main controller:
A4. Electrical configuration of sound emission control device and display control device:
A5. Déjà vu notice:
A5-1. Déjà vu preview overview:
A5-2. Control related to déjà vu notice:
B. Second embodiment:
C. Third embodiment:
D. Fourth embodiment:
E. Fifth embodiment:
F. Sixth embodiment:
G. Seventh embodiment:
H. Eighth embodiment:
I. Ninth embodiment:
J. Tenth embodiment:
K. Eleventh embodiment:
L. Twelfth embodiment:
M. Thirteenth Embodiment:
N. Variant:
O. Regarding the group of inventions extracted from each of the above embodiments:

A. First embodiment:
A1. Game machine structure:
FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter also referred to as a "pachinko machine") as one embodiment of the present invention. A pachinko machine 10 has a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 . A pachinko machine body 12 has an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 by metal hinges 15 . The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13 . On the back of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. - 特許庁The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation using a dedicated key on the cylinder lock 17 .

A substantially central portion of the front door frame 14 is formed with an open window portion 18 . Around the window part 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and electrical decoration parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The electrical parts are composed of light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the performance effect by lighting or blinking at each game played by the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won, when a ready-to-win game is generated, or the like. A glass unit 19 composed of two sheets of plate glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14 , and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19 . A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13 , and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19 . Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed in a box shape with an open top, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12 . The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball shooting mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. - 特許庁The game ball shooting mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operation handle 25, and shoots the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower tray 21 is arranged below the upper tray 20 and is shaped like a box with an open top. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 20. - 特許庁A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21 . A lever 23 is provided below the ejection port 22 , and the player can switch the ejection port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23 . When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and is discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A presentation operation button 24 as an operation receiving means is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 . The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10 . When a player operates a performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, a game performance reflecting the operation is performed by the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Further, on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front, an operation handle 25 is provided for the player to operate. When the player operates the operation handle 25, a game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there are a touch sensor for permitting the driving of the game ball shooting mechanism, a wait button for stopping shooting of game balls by the game ball shooting mechanism when pressed by the player, and a rotation of the operation handle 25. A variable resistor is provided for detecting a dynamic operation amount based on a change in electrical resistance. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation. A game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism to the front of the game board with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor.

Next, the configuration of the rear surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁

FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. As shown, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, and a third control unit 53. As shown in FIG. Specifically, these mechanical parts are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13 .

The first control unit 51 has a main controller 60 . The main control device 60 has a main control board having a function of controlling the main game and a function of monitoring the power supply. The main control board is housed in a board box made of transparent resin material.

The second control unit 52 includes an audio emission control device 90 and a display control device 100 . The sound emission control device 90 controls emission means such as speakers and various lamps provided in front of the pachinko machine 10 based on commands transmitted from the main control device 60 . The display control device 100 controls the pattern display device based on commands transmitted from the sound emission control device 90 . The pattern display device has a liquid crystal display for displaying patterns and images for presentation.

The third control unit 53 has a payout control device 70 and a launch control device 80 . The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. When an instruction to shoot a game ball is input from the main control device 60, the shooting control device 80 shoots a game ball with strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Controls the ball launching mechanism. In addition, on the back of the inner frame 13, there is a tank 54 to which the game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially supplied, and a slope which is connected to the lower part of the tank 54 and is gently inclined so that the game balls flow downstream. , a case rail 56 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, a game ball is supplied from the case rail 56, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out according to an instruction from the payout control device 70. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as a payout device 71, are provided.

Next, the game board will be explained. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13. - 特許庁

FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 30. FIG. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area GA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area GA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. A game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released above the game area GA, and then flows down the game area GA. In the game area GA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and accessories such as windmills are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills distribute and organize the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area GA.

The game board 30 is formed with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device . Also, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45 . The main display section 45 has a special figure unit 37 , a normal figure unit 38 , and a round display section 39 .

As illustrated, a plurality of general winning holes 32 are provided on the game board 30 . In the present embodiment, when game balls enter the general winning hole 32, 10 game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls.

The first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 are both open upward, and arranged vertically so that the first starting port 33 is higher than the second starting port 34 . In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls. The second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the electric accessory 34a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second starting port 34. - 特許庁On the other hand, when the electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the game ball can enter the second starting port 34. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, four game balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, an out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that do not enter various winning ports are discharged from the game area GA through the out port 43.例文帳に追加

The through gate 35 has a through hole extending vertically. When a game ball wins the through gate 35, that is, when the game ball passes through the through hole of the through gate 35, the main controller 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory open lottery) with the winning as a trigger. As a result of the internal lottery, when the electric role open is won, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the electric role open state in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flowing direction of the game ball, the game ball that has entered the through gate 35 flows down the game area GA after winning the prize and enters the second It is possible to win a prize to the starting port 34. - 特許庁In addition, in this embodiment, even if a game ball enters the through gate 35, the prize ball is not paid out.

The variable winning device 36 includes a large winning opening 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30, and an opening/closing door 36b for opening and closing the large winning opening 36a. The opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the big winning opening 36a. As a result of the internal lottery (big win lottery) by the main controller 60, when a big win is won and the opening/closing execution mode is shifted, the opening/closing door 36b repeats the open state in which game balls can win and the closed state. The open/close execution mode is the result of the jackpot lottery by the main control device 60 triggered by the winning of the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, and when the jackpot is won, the opening/closing door 36b is in the open state. This is a mode that repeats the closed state. That is, when a big win is won as a result of the jackpot lottery based on the winning to the first starting port 33, the operation shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the winning to the big winning port 36a of the variable prize winning device 36 becomes possible. Similarly, when a big win is won as a result of the jackpot lottery based on the winning to the second starting port 34, the operation shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the prize to the big winning port 36a of the variable prize winning device 36 is possible. In the present embodiment, when game balls enter the big winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

The special figure unit 37 includes a first result display section 37a and a second result display section 37b. Each of the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the jackpot lottery triggered by winning the first starting port 33 is performed, the first result display unit 37a changes the display mode until the segment display displays a display corresponding to the lottery result. A predetermined display is performed. When the lottery ends, the first result display unit 37a causes the segment display to display a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result. The second result display unit 37b, when the jackpot lottery triggered by the winning of the second starting port 34 is performed, changes the display mode until the segment display displays a display corresponding to the lottery result. A predetermined display is performed. When the lottery ends, the second result display unit 37b causes the segment display to display a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The special figure unit 37 is further provided with a first pending display portion 37c and a second pending display portion 37d made of LED lamps at positions adjacent to the first result display portion 37a and the second result display portion 37b. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the first starting port 33 are reserved. The first reservation display portion 37c displays the number of reservations for the first starting port 33 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit. Further, in the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have won the second starting port 34 are reserved. The second reservation display part 37d displays the number of reservations of the second starting port 34 according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit.

The normal figure unit 38 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electric accessory open lottery triggered by the winning of the through gate 35 is performed, the normal figure unit 38 causes the light-emitting display to display in a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined mode as a display mode. When the electric accessory open lottery ends, the normal figure unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result. In addition, the special figure unit 37 and the general figure unit 38 are not limited to being composed of a segment display device or a light emitting display device using an LED lamp. It may be configured by various display devices capable of showing the lottery process and lottery results.

The round display section 39 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the open/close execution mode or displays corresponding thereto. A round game means that a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses, or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins in the variable winning device 36 until either one of the conditions is satisfied. It is a game that continues the open state of 36b. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the shift. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode is finished and a new game is started.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area GA. The variable display unit 40 has a pattern display device 41 . The pattern display device 41 is composed of a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display. The display contents of the pattern display device 41 are controlled by the display control device 100 . Note that the pattern display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be configured by various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, for example.

When the first result display unit 37a performs a variable display or a predetermined display based on the winning to the first starting port 33, the symbol display device 41 performs the variable display or predetermined display of the symbols accordingly. Further, when the second result display unit 37b performs variable display or predetermined display based on the winning to the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 performs variable display or predetermined display of the symbols accordingly. . The symbol display device 41 performs not only the display performance triggered by the winning of the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, but also the display performance during the opening/closing execution mode which is shifted when the jackpot is won. Details of the pattern display device 41 will be described below.

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing the symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 and the display surface 41a. FIG. 4(a) is an explanatory diagram showing symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. FIG. As shown in FIG. 4A, the pattern display device 41 variably displays patterns representing numbers 1 to 8. As shown in FIG. As the symbols to be variably displayed, symbols such as characters may be added to the symbols representing the numbers 1 to 8. FIG.

FIG. 4B is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. As shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, the display surface 41a displays three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 on the left, middle and right. In each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, the patterns of numbers 1 to 8 shown in FIG. A variable display that scrolls upward is performed. As shown in FIG. 4(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stationary state on the activated line L. As shown in FIG. Specifically, when a game ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled in a predetermined direction to start a variable display. Then, the symbols to be scrolled are switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . When the variable display of the symbols is finished and the display is stopped, and when the result of the big win lottery by the main control device 60 is a big win, a predetermined predetermined combination of symbols appears on the activated line L. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the activated line L.

In addition, in this specification, one game cycle means that the first start port 33 or the second start port is It is the period from when the variable display is started based on the winning of any of 34 until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and the next variable display is started. Also, the time required for one game round is also referred to as display duration time. The display continuation time is the variable display time, which is the time from the start of the variable display until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and the variable display time, which is the time after the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and the next game round starts to change. stop display time, which is the time until The pattern display device 41 is not limited to the above-described patterns, but the number of pattern rows, the number of active lines, the direction of pattern display variation in the pattern rows, and the patterns in each pattern row. Various modes can be adopted for the mode of variable display of symbols such as numbers.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4B, the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41 displays a first reserved display area Ds1 and a second reserved display area Ds2. In the first pending display area Ds1, the pending number based on the winning to the first starting port 33 is displayed. In the second pending display area Ds2, the pending number based on the winning to the second starting port 34 is displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, the number of reserved game balls that have won the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is up to four at maximum.

A2. Electrical configuration of the game machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main controller 60 , a sound emission control device 90 , and a display control device 100 . The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main game. The main control board 61 has an MPU 62 composed of elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 in which various control programs and fixed value data are recorded, and a RAM 64 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. A part of the functions of the MPU 62 may be provided by another element. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port. Various detection sensors 67a to 67e, a payout control device 70, and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85 are connected to the input side of the MPU62. The MPU 62 receives power supply of stable 24 V DC from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86 . The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power supply into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc., to each device supply power. In addition, the MPU 62, as various detection sensors 67a to 67e, is provided in various winning ports such as the general winning port 32, the first starting port 33, the second starting port 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36. It is connected to a detection sensor, and determines whether or not a game ball flowing down the game area GA during a game has won a prize in each prize winning port. Further, the MPU 62 executes a jackpot lottery based on winnings to the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34, and executes an electric accessory opening lottery based on winnings to the through gate 35.

On the output side of the MPU 62, a variable winning drive unit 36c that opens and closes the open/close door 36b of the variable winning device 36, an electric accessory drive unit 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34, and a main display. 45 are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning driving section 36c so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed. Further, as a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, when the electric role opening is won, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 34b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. In each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first result display portion 37a or the second result display portion 37b in the main display portion 45, and in the opening/closing execution mode, the round display portion 39 in the main display portion 45. display control.

A payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the MPU 62 . A prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the winning judgment result, for example. When the main controller 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. FIG. Specifically, when the winning to the general winning opening 32 is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, and the winning to the first starting opening 33 is specified. When it does, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, and when the winning to the second start port 34 is specified, it corresponds to the payout of one game ball. A prize command is transmitted from the main controller 60 . The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main controller 60 to pay out prize balls. A discharge control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70 . The shooting control device 80 controls shooting of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 . The game ball shooting mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met.

The sound emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main controller 60 transmits various commands, the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to. Details of these various commands are described later.

In addition, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 controls the driving of various lamps 47 composed of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14, and the driving control of the speaker 46. and control the display control device 100 . Also, the effect operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, a game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls the various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, and the like.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the pattern display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 . Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps the display duration time of the pattern in the pattern display device 41 and the type of combination of patterns to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90. At the same time, the presence/absence of occurrence of ready-to-win, contents of ready-to-win effect, contents of notice effect to be executed in each game round, etc. are grasped.
The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used for a jackpot lottery or the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 sets the jackpot lottery, the display of the main display unit 45, the display of the symbols of the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery, and a jackpot type counter C2 is used when judging jackpot types such as probability variable jackpot results and normal jackpot results, and patterns to be displayed on the pattern display device 41. A reach random number counter C3 is used for a reach lottery to determine whether or not to generate a reach when fluctuating out of line, and a random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, when determining the display continuation time in the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b of the main display section 45 and the pattern display device 41, a variation type counter CS is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory opening counter C4 is used for the electric accessory opening lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 is to be opened.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the counter value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. FIG.

The RAM 64 is provided with a pending information storage area 64b. The pending information storage area 64b includes a first result display portion pending area Ra, a second result display portion pending area Rb, an execution area AE, and a total pending number storage area. When the game ball enters the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 sequentially, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of winning is chronologically stored in the reservation information storage area 64b. stored in

Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery as described above. The jackpot random number counter C1 is, for example, configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 599 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. When the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the reservation information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start hole 33 or the second start hole . Specifically, the updated value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball wins the first start hole 33, and the second start hole At the timing when the game ball wins in 34, it is stored in the second result display portion reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b. The values of the random numbers for winning the jackpot are stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 as a success/failure table.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the success/failure table stored in the success/failure table storage area 63a. A low-probability mode and a high-probability mode are set in the pachinko machine 10 as a lottery mode for a jackpot lottery. FIG. 7(a) shows the success/failure table for the low-probability mode, and FIG. 7(b) shows the success/failure table for the high-probability mode. As shown in FIG. 7(a), under the game state in which the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is referred to for the jackpot lottery, the number of random numbers that will win the jackpot is two. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 7(b), under the gaming state in which the win/loss table for the high-probability mode is referred to in the jackpot lottery, there are 21 random numbers that will win the jackpot. Also, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 for winning the jackpot in the low probability mode is included in the value group for the jackpot random number counter C1 for winning the jackpot in the high probability mode. As long as the probability of winning is higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode, the number and value of random numbers for winning are arbitrary.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when judging jackpot types such as variable probability jackpots and normal jackpots. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the pending information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole . More specifically, it is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b (RAM 64) at the timing when the game ball wins the first start hole 33, and the game ball wins the second start hole 34. It is stored in the reservation area Rb for the second result display section of the reservation information storage area 64b (RAM 64) at the timing.

Here, the jackpot types in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Aspect of opening/closing control of variable winning device 36 in opening/closing execution mode (2) Lottery mode for big winning lottery after completion of opening/closing execution mode (3) Electric accessory 34a of second start port 34 after completion of opening/closing execution mode Support mode

In the pachinko machine 10, as a form of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above-described (1) opening/closing execution mode, the frequency of occurrence of winning to the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that is relatively high or low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the opening/closing door 36b is opened/closed 15 times from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. It can be set to continue until the number of On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening and closing door 36b is opened and closed twice from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and each opening is performed until 0.2 sec elapses or the number of winnings to the opening and closing door 36b. can be set to continue until there are six.

When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball shooting mechanism 81 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is shot toward the game area GA every 0.6 sec. In the case of the above specific example, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 36b is 0.2 sec. In other words, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the open/close door 36b is shorter than the shooting cycle of the game ball. Therefore, substantially no winning of game balls occurs in the opening/closing execution mode associated with the low-frequency winning mode. However, even in the opening and closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode, it may be set so that the winning of the game ball can occur.

The number of opening/closing times of the opening/closing door 36b, the opening limit time for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are determined by the variable winning device 36 during the period from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode, the open mode of the opening/closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, if the high frequency winning mode has more opening and closing times than the low frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is longer, or the opening limit number for one opening is set more good. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the open/close execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, substantially no winning to the variable winning device 36 may occur.

The pachinko machine 10 has a variable probability lottery mode for performing a jackpot lottery using a high probability win/fail table as a win/fail table, and a win/fail table as a win/fail table. A normal lottery mode in which a jackpot lottery is performed using a success/failure table for low probability can be set. As described with reference to FIG. 7, when the jackpot lottery is performed using the high-probability win-or-fail table, the jackpot is won more than when the jackpot lottery is performed using the low-probability win-or-fail table. likely to.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the end of the above-mentioned (3) opening and closing execution mode, shooting of game balls continues in a similar mode to the game area GA. A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are selected so that the frequency of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 being in the open state per unit time is relatively high or low when compared in the situation where can be set.

Specifically, in the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role opening lottery in the electric role item opening lottery using the electric role item opening counter C4 is the same, but in the high frequency support mode The number of times that the electric accessory 34a is in the open state when the electric role opening win is set more than in the low frequency support mode, and the opening time for one time may be set longer. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, in the case where the open state of the electric accessory 34a occurs multiple times due to the electric role open winning, the closing time from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state is , may be set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time for the next electric accessory open lottery after one electric accessory open lottery is performed is set shorter than the low-frequency support mode. may

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second starting port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the first start-up port 33 is higher than in the second start-up port 34, but in the high-frequency support mode, the second start-up is more likely than the first start-up port 33. The probability of winning a prize to the mouth 34 is increased. When a prize is won in the second starting port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high-frequency support mode, the player should play the game while not reducing the number of balls he has. can be done.

In addition, the configuration in which the frequency of the high-frequency support mode to be in the electric role open state per unit time is higher than the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above. A configuration may be adopted in which the probability of winning an open role is increased. In addition, in a configuration in which a plurality of types of secured time are prepared after one electric accessory open lottery is performed and the next electric accessory open lottery is performed, the high frequency support mode has a low frequency It may be set so that a shorter reserved time is more likely to be selected or the average reserved time is shorter than in the support mode. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the secured time secured when the next electric accessory open lottery is performed after one electric accessory open lottery is performed (that is, , shortening the duration of one display in the normal figure unit 38), shortening the average time of the securing time, and increasing the probability of winning, applying any one or any combination of conditions , the advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode may be increased.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 can be set with a plurality of types of jackpots. In this embodiment, when a big win is won in a big win lottery, a plurality of types of big wins are sorted using a big win type counter C2. The distribution destination of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 as a distribution table.

FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the distribution table set in the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. FIG. 8(a) shows the sorting table for the first result display section, and FIG. 8(b) shows the sorting table for the second result display section.

As shown in the distribution table for the first result display section of FIG. 8(a), in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot types based on the first start port 33 are 8R normal jackpot, 16R normal jackpot, 8R jackpot. A probability variable jackpot and a 16R probability variable jackpot are set. In the 8R normal jackpot and the 16R normal jackpot, the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, and the lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the low-probability mode. It is a jackpot in which the support mode after the end of is a high-frequency support mode. The high frequency support mode in the 8R normal jackpot and 16R normal jackpot shifts to the low frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times) after shifting to the high frequency support mode.

In the 8R probability variable jackpot and the 16R probability variable jackpot, the aspect of the opening/closing control of the variable prize winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency prize winning mode, and the winning/failure lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is ended is the high probability mode, and the opening/closing execution mode. It is a jackpot in which the support mode after the end of is a high-frequency support mode. The high-frequency support mode in the 8R probability variable jackpot and the 16R probability variable jackpot continues until the next jackpot winning.

In the distribution table for the first result display section, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 5" correspond to the 8R normal jackpot, and "6 to 8" correspond to the 16R normal jackpot. It corresponds to the jackpot, "9 to 23" corresponds to the 8R probability variable jackpot, and "24 to 29" corresponds to the 16R probability variable jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as the types of jackpots. Therefore, the aspect of the jackpot is diversified. When these four types of jackpots are compared, the degree of advantage for the player is the highest for the 16R variable variable jackpot, the next highest for the 8R variable variable jackpot, followed by the 16R normal jackpot, and finally the 8R normal jackpot. By thus setting a plurality of types of jackpots with different degrees of advantage for the player, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and increase the degree of attention to the game.

Next, as shown in the distribution table for the second result display section in FIG. A jackpot, an 8R probability variable jackpot, and a 16R probability variable jackpot are set. In the distribution table for the second result display section, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 2" correspond to the 8R normal jackpot, and "3 to 8" correspond to the 16R normal jackpot. It corresponds to the jackpot, "9 to 14" corresponds to the 8R probability variable jackpot, and "15 to 29" corresponds to the 16R probability variable jackpot. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won, the jackpot types are distributed according to the jackpot win based on the winning to the first start port 33 and the second jackpot win. It is different from the case where the jackpot is won based on the winning to the starting port 34.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, in both the distribution table for the first result display section and the distribution table for the second result display section, the probability of being distributed to the probability variable jackpot when winning the jackpot is the same. That is, in both the distribution table for the first result display unit and the distribution table for the second result display unit, the number of values of the jackpot type counter C2 assigned to the 16R probability variable jackpot and the number assigned to the 8R probability variable jackpot The total number of the values of the jackpot type counter C2 is the same 21. However, the probability of occurrence of the 16R probability variable jackpot, which has the highest degree of advantage for the player among the probability variable jackpots, is higher when the jackpot is won based on the winning to the second start port 34. It will be higher than when a jackpot is won based on the winning prize.

In this way, the mode of distributing the jackpot types between the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 has a clear difference in the advantages for the player. Therefore, the player plays the game expecting to win a prize in the second starting hole 34 out of the first starting hole 33 and the second starting hole 34 . In addition, when the win/loss lottery results in a failure, there is no transition to the open/close execution mode, and the win/fail lottery mode and the support mode do not change.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs the jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and the jackpot type using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. However, the MPU 62 further uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the stop result of the symbols displayed in the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b to decide. The stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to for the determination.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is, for example, incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 238, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the pending information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port . Specifically, the update value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 33, and the game ball enters the second start port 34. The updated value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the reservation area Rb for the second result display section of the RAM 64 at the winning timing. Then, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first result display portion reservation area Ra or the second result display portion reservation area Rb is moved to the execution area AE, and then the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 is collated with the reach determination table stored in , and it is determined whether or not to generate reach. However, as a result of the jackpot lottery, if the player wins the jackpot and shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 decides whether to generate a reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

The ready-to-win means that, for some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, there is a possibility that a combination of symbols corresponding to a big win will be established, and some combinations of symbols are stopped. It refers to a display state in which symbols are displayed and the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the combination of symbols corresponding to the big win refers to the combination of the same symbols on a predetermined pay line. Specifically, on the display surface 41a of FIG. 4(b), the symbols are first stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbols as Z1 are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3, thereby forming the reach line. , in a situation where the reach line is formed, the symbol row Z2 performs a variable display of the symbol to achieve a reach. Then, when a big win occurs, the same symbols as the symbols forming the reach line are stop-displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the ready-to-win state, while the ready-to-win line is formed, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to create a ready-to-win effect. It includes a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a after displaying a combination of patterns in which a reach line is formed in a reduced size or not. In addition, when the ready-to-win effect is being performed or before the ready-to-win display is performed, the determination of whether or not to perform a notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is performed using the reach-to-win random number counter C3 or other counters. may

Next, details of the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The fluctuation type counter CS is, for example, incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the display duration time in the first result display section 37 a and the second result display section 37 b and the display duration time of the pattern in the pattern display device 41 . The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation display in the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b and at the start of variation of the symbols by the symbol display device 41. A display continuation time table stored in the display continuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used when determining the display continuation time in the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b.

Next, the details of the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, configured to be incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 249, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric role holding area 64c of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. - 特許庁Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state using the stored value of the electric accessory opening counter C4. For example, if C4=0 to 199, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be open, and if C4=200 to 249, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be closed.

In addition, one combination of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first result display section reservation area Ra corresponds to the reservation information related to the first start port 33, A combination of a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2 and a reach random number counter C3 stored in the reservation area Rb for the second result display section corresponds to the reservation information related to the second start port 34, and these reservation information. corresponds to special information in the present invention.

A3. Various processing executed in the main controller:
Next, timer interrupt processing and normal processing executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 to advance the game of each game round will be described. In addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing that is activated by the input of a power failure signal, but the description of these processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is started periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 .

In step S101, reading processing of various detection sensors 67a to 67e is executed. That is, it reads the states of various detection sensors 67a to 67e connected to the main controller 60, determines the states of the sensors, and saves detection information (winning detection information). After that, the process proceeds to step S102.

In step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . After that, the process proceeds to step S103.

In step S103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4, and when each of these counter values reaches the maximum value, each Clear to 0. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM64. After that, the process proceeds to step S104.

In step S104, a prize winning process for the starting opening associated with the winning of the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is executed. The details of the winning process for the start opening in step S104 will be described later. After executing step S104, the process proceeds to step S105.

In step S105, a prize-winning process for through accompanying the prize-winning to the through gate 35 is executed. The details of the winning process for through in step S105 will be described later. After executing step S105, the MPU 62 terminates the timer interrupt processing.

<Winning processing for the starting gate>
Next, the prize winning process for the start opening will be described. The prize winning process for the starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9: S104).

FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the winning process for the starting gate. In step S201, it is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first start hole 33 whether or not the game ball has won the first start hole 33 (start win). In step S201, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting hole 33 (S201: YES), the process proceeds to step S202, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls to set. After that, the process proceeds to step S203.

In step S203, external signal setting processing is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that a game ball has entered the first starting hole 33. FIG. After that, the process proceeds to step S204.

In step S204, the pending start number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as the first pending start number RaN), which is the value stored in the pending number storage area of the first result display holding area Ra, is read out, and the first pending start number is read. RaN is set as a target of processing described later. The first start suspension number RaN indicates the number of suspensions based on the winning to the first start port 33 . After that, the process proceeds to step S209.

In step S201, if it is determined that the game ball has not won the first starting port 33 (S201: NO), the process proceeds to step S205, whether the game ball has won the second starting port 34 (start winning) Whether or not is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34 .

In step S205, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (S205: YES), the process proceeds to step S206, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out four game balls to set. After that, the process proceeds to step S207. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S205 that the game ball has not won the second starting hole 34 (S205: NO), the winning process for this starting hole ends.

In step S207, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal that the game ball has entered the second starting hole 34 to the management control device on the game hall side. After that, the process proceeds to step S208.

In step S208, the pending start number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as the second pending start number RbN), which is the value stored in the pending number storage area of the second result display area Rb, is read, and the second pending start number is read. RbN is set as a target of processing described later. The second start pending number RbN indicates the number of pending starts based on winnings to the second start port 34 . After that, the process proceeds to step S209.

In step S209, it is determined whether or not the number of start suspensions N (RaN or RbN) set in step S204 or step S208 is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). In step S209, when the number N of starting suspensions is not less than the upper limit (S209: NO), the winning process for this starting opening is terminated. On the other hand, in step S209, if the number N of start suspensions is less than the upper limit value (S209: YES), the process proceeds to step S210, and after adding 1 to the number N of start suspensions in the corresponding result display holding area, Proceeding to step S211, 1 is added to the value stored in the total pending number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total pending number CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the sum of the first pending start number RaN and the second pending start number RbN. After that, the process proceeds to step S212.

In step S212, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 is stored in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the corresponding result display holding area, that is, step In S210, it stores in the storage area corresponding to the pending number to which 1 is added. Specifically, when the first start suspension number RaN is set as a processing target, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 is set to the It is stored in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the one-result display holding area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start holding number RaN to which 1 is added in step S210. In addition, when the second start pending quantity RbN is set as a processing target, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 are displayed as the second result. It is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas of the reserve area for division Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start suspension number RbN to which 1 is added in step S210. After executing step S212, the process proceeds to step S213.

In step S213, processing for setting a pending command is executed. Specifically, information (holding information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the holding command. After that, the prize-winning process for the start opening is terminated. The hold command is the occurrence of the winning to the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 and the hold information acquired based on the winning to the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device which are sub-side control devices In addition to making the 100 recognize, whether or not the pending information related to the winning of this time corresponds to the jackpot, if it corresponds to the jackpot, which type of jackpot it corresponds to, and whether it corresponds to the occurrence of reach. It is a command for making the sub-side control device confirm whether or not the reservation information is subject to the big winning lottery by the main control device 60 before the reservation information becomes a target. This hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the external output process (FIG. 12: step S402) of the normal process described later, and the sound emission control device 90 that receives the hold command executes the confirmation process (FIG. 27: Step S1602, FIG. 29), whether or not the reservation information related to the winning of this time corresponds to the jackpot, and if it corresponds to the jackpot, it corresponds to which type of jackpot, and the occurrence of reach. Before the reservation information becomes an object of the big winning lottery by the main control device 60, it is confirmed whether or not there is a lottery.

In addition, when the sound emission control device 90 receives the hold command transmitted based on the winning to the first start port 33, the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 is increased. to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first reserved display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reserved characters. On the other hand, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the winning to the second start port 34, the sound emission control device 90 increases the number of hold display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reserved display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reserved characters.

In addition, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 is based on the information (holding information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the storage area due to this prize winning. Confirmation processing for confirming whether the pending information related to corresponds to the jackpot, if it corresponds to the jackpot, which type of jackpot it corresponds to, whether it corresponds to reach occurrence, etc. ( 27 and the confirmation process in FIG. 29), and setting the confirmation result to the hold command. In this case, the confirmation process (FIG. 27: step S1602, FIG. 29) by the sound emission control device 90 can be omitted.

<Prize processing for through>
Next, the prize winning process for through will be described. Winning processing for through is executed by MPU 62 of main controller 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9: S105).

FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing the winning process for through. In step S301, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the through gate 35. In step S301, when it is determined that the game ball has won the through gate 35 (S301: YES), the process proceeds to step S302, and whether or not the number SN of reserved accessories is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). determine whether Incidentally, the reserved accessory number SN is a value indicating the number of winnings to the through gate 35 reserved for performing the electric accessory open lottery. In this embodiment, the maximum value of the number SN of reserved accessory items is four. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S301 that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (S301: NO), the through winning process is terminated.

In step S302, when it is determined that the reserved role item number SN is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) (S302: YES), the process proceeds to step S303, and 1 is added to the reserved role item number SN. After that, the process proceeds to step S304. On the other hand, in step S302, if it is determined that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is not less than the upper limit (S302: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is equal to or greater than the upper limit, The winning process for this through is ended without storing the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4.

In step S304, the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the first storage area of the free storage areas of the electrician holding area 64c of the RAM64. After that, the prize winning process for this through is ended.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be described. The normal processing is processing started by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 when the power is turned on. In normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step S401, start-up processing is executed. Specifically, initialization of each control device upon power-on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. After that, the process proceeds to step S402.

In step S402, output data such as commands set in the timer interrupt process or the previously executed normal process are transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70 . In addition, when commands related to effects such as variation commands and type commands are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After executing step S402, the process proceeds to step S403.

In step S403, the change type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . After that, the process proceeds to step S404.

In step S404, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step S405. In step S405, game round control processing for controlling the game in each game round is executed. In the game round control process, a jackpot lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b, and the like are performed. Details of the game round control process will be described later. After executing step S405, the process proceeds to step S406.

In step S406, game state transition processing is executed to shift the game state. By executing the game state transition process, the game state shifts to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like. Details of the game state transition processing will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step S407.

In step S407, an electric role support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided at the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric role support process, it is determined whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a. The details of the electronic support process will be described later. After that, the process proceeds to step S408.

In step S408, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current normal processing (strictly speaking, the start of the external output processing in step S402). That is, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next normal process. In step S408, if it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the normal processing this time (S408: NO), in steps S409 and S410, until the execution timing of the next normal processing Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step S409, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . Further, in step S410, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64 . On the other hand, if it is determined in step S408 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has passed since the start of the normal processing (S408: YES), the process returns to step S402, and each process from step S402 to step S407 is performed. Run.

Since the execution time of each process from step S402 to step S407 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be randomly updated.

<Game Round Control Processing>
Next, game round control processing will be described. The game round control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 12: S405).

FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing game round control processing. In step S501, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode flag is stored in the opening/closing execution mode flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 . The opening/closing execution mode flag is stored when the game state is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode in the later-described game state transition processing, and is erased when the opening/closing execution mode is ended in the game state transition processing.

In step S501, when it is determined that the open/close execution mode is in progress (S501: YES), the game round control process is terminated without executing any of the processes after step S502. In other words, when the open/close execution mode is in progress, the game cycle is not started regardless of whether or not the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 has won a prize. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S501 that the open/close execution mode is not in progress (S501: NO), the process proceeds to step S502.

In step S502, it is determined whether or not the main display section 45 is performing variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not one of the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b is in the process of changing display. This determination is made by determining whether or not a variable display flag is stored in the variable display flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64 e of the RAM 64 . The variable display flag is stored when the variable display is started for either the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b, and is erased when the variable display ends.

In step S502, when it is determined that the main display unit 45 is not performing variable display (S502: NO), the process proceeds to step S503 to step S505 for game round start processing. In step S503, it is determined whether or not the total pending number CRN is "0". When the total pending number CRN is "0", it means that the start pending number is "0" for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. FIG. Therefore, when it is determined in step S503 that the total number of reserved coins CRN is "0" (S503: YES), this game round control process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S503 that the total pending number CRN is not "0" (S503: NO), the process proceeds to step S504.

In step S504, data setting processing for setting the data stored in the first result display portion reservation area Ra or the second result display portion reservation area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and in step S505 move on. Details of the data setting process will be described later.

In step S505, a variation start process for starting the variation display on the main display section 45 and the variation display on the pattern display device 41 is executed. After that, the game round control process is terminated. The details of the fluctuation start process will be described later.

In step S502, when it is determined that the main display unit 45 is performing variable display (S502: YES), processing for game turn progress in steps S506 to S509 is executed.

In step S506, it is determined whether or not the variation display time for the current game round has elapsed. The variable display time, as described above, is the time from when the symbol row starts to change until all the symbol rows stop, and is part of the display duration time. Specifically, in step S506, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable display time information stored in the variable display time counter area of the RAM 64 has become "0". The value of the variable display time information is set in the display duration setting process ( FIG. 15 : S714), which will be described later. The set value of the variable display time information is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started.

If it is determined in step S506 that the variable display time has not elapsed (S506: NO), the process proceeds to step S507 to execute variable display processing. The variable display process is a process of changing the display mode in the result display section for the current game round. After executing step S507, the game round control process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S506 that the variable display time has elapsed (S506: YES), the process proceeds to step S508, and variable end processing is executed. In the fluctuation end processing, the result display section is displayed so that the form of the symbol to be displayed in the result display section determined in the fluctuation start processing (S505) described later is displayed in the result display section related to the current game round. Control. After executing step S508, the process proceeds to step S509.

In step S509, a fluctuation end command is set. The fluctuation end command set in step S509 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S402 of the normal processing (FIG. 12). The sound emission control device 90 terminates the effect in the game round based on the received variation end command. In addition, the variation end command is transmitted from the sound emission control device 90 to the display control device 100, and the display control device 100 receives the variation end command to confirm and display the final stop symbol in the game turn (final stop display). After executing step S509, the game round control process is terminated.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured not to use the variable end command. In this case, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 measure the elapsed time from the start of the game round with a timer counter or the like, and based on the elapse of a predetermined time, It is only necessary to end the effect or to confirm and display (final stop display) the final stop symbol in the game cycle.

<Data setting process>
Next, data setting processing will be described. The data setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 13: S504) of the game round control process.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing data setting processing. In step S601, it is determined whether or not the second start pending number RbN stored in the second result display holding area Rb is "0". If it is determined in step S601 that the second start suspension quantity RbN is "0" (S601: YES), data setting processing for the first result display section in steps S602 to S607 is executed. If it is determined that the second start pending number RbN is not "0" (S601: NO), data setting processing for the second result display section of steps S608 to S613 is executed.

Here, the case where the data setting process is executed is the case where the total pending number CRN is 1 or more, as described in FIG. 13 (see FIG. 13: S503). In this case, in the data setting process, it is determined whether or not the second start suspension number RbN is "0". If so, regardless of whether or not the first start suspension number RaN is 1 or more, the data stored in the second result display portion suspension area Rb is the object of this data setting process. As a result, when the reservation information is stored in both the first result display section reservation area Ra and the second result display section reservation area Rb, the second result display section corresponding to the second start port 34 Priority is given to the pending information stored in the pending area Rb.

In step S602, 1 is subtracted from the first start suspension number RaN in the first result display area Ra, and then the process proceeds to step S603 to subtract 1 from the total suspension number CRN. After that, the process proceeds to step S604. In step S604, the data stored in the first area of the first result display holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. After that, the process proceeds to step S605.

In step S605, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first result display section reservation area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step S605, the process proceeds to step S606.

In step S606, if the second result display section flag is stored in the various flag storage area 64e, the flag is erased, and if it is not stored, that state is maintained. The second result display section flag is information for specifying which of the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b is the target for starting the variable display this time. After that, the process proceeds to step S607.

In step S607, a shift command is set. The shift time command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information indicating that the reservation area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the first result display section reservation area Ra, that is, the first start port 33 is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After that, the data setting process is terminated.

The shift command set in step S607 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S402 of the normal processing (FIG. 12). The sound emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a command for changing the display in the first reservation display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations, based on the received shift command. do. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first reserved display area Ds1 of the pattern display device 41 to correspond to the decrease in the reserved number.

If it is determined in step S601 that the second start suspension quantity RbN is not "0" (S601: NO), the data setting process for the second result display section in steps S608 to S613 is executed as described above. do.

In step S608, 1 is subtracted from the second start pending quantity RbN in the second result display portion pending area Rb. After that, the process proceeds to step S609. In step S609, 1 is subtracted from the total pending number CRN, and the process proceeds to step S610 to move the data stored in the first area of the second result display portion pending area Rb to the execution area AE. After that, the process proceeds to step S611.

In step S611, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second result display portion reservation area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After executing step S611, the process proceeds to step S612.

In step S612, if the second result display section flag is not stored in the second result display section flag storage area provided in the various flag storage area 64e, the flag is stored. maintain state. After that, the process proceeds to step S613.

In step S613, a shift command is set. The shift time command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information indicating that the reservation area to which the data is to be shifted this time corresponds to the second result display section reservation area Rb, that is, the second start port 34 is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . After that, the data setting process is terminated.

The shift time command set in step S613 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S402 of the normal processing (FIG. 12). Based on the received shift time command, the sound emission control device 90 sends a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second reservation display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations. Send. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reserved display area Ds2 of the pattern display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the reserved number.

<Variation start processing>
Next, fluctuation start processing will be described. The fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game round control process (FIG. 13: S505).

FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing the fluctuation start process. In step S701, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a high-probability mode flag is stored in a high-probability mode flag storage area provided in the various flag storage area 64 e of the RAM 64 . The high-probability mode flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode in the MPU 62, and in this embodiment, it is stored at the end of the opening and closing execution mode related to winning the probability variable jackpot, After that, it will be erased when the normal jackpot is won.

If it is determined in step S701 that the lottery mode is not the high-probability mode (S701: NO), the process proceeds to step S702, and the success/failure determination is performed by referring to the success/failure table for the low-probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as jackpot winning in the success/failure table for the low probability mode shown in FIG. 7(a). determine whether On the other hand, if it is determined in step S701 that the mode is the high-probability mode (S701: YES), the process advances to step S703, and the success/failure determination is performed by referring to the success/failure table for the high-probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as jackpot winning in the success/failure table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. 7(b). determine whether After executing step S702 or step S703, the process proceeds to step S704.

In step S704, it is determined whether or not the result of the success/fail determination (big hit lottery) in step S702 or step S703 is a big win. In step S704, if the result of the winning/failure determination is the jackpot winning (S704: YES), in steps S705 to S712, to set the game result in the case of jackpot winning and to set the stop result process.

In step S705, it is determined whether or not the RAM 64 stores the second result display section flag. If it is determined in step S705 that the flag for the second result display section is not stored (S705: NO), the flow advances to step S706 to display the distribution table for the first result display section (see FIG. 8A). Refer to to make a distribution judgment. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of the numerical range of the 8R normal jackpot, the numerical range of the 16R normal jackpot, the numerical range of the 8R probability variable jackpot, and the numerical range of the 16R probability variable jackpot. determine whether it is contained in

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S705 that the second result display section flag is stored (S705: YES), the process proceeds to step S707, and the distribution table for the second result display section (FIG. 8B) See) to determine the allocation. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of the numerical range of the 8R normal jackpot, the numerical range of the 16R normal jackpot, the numerical range of the 8R probability variable jackpot, and the numerical range of the 16R probability variable jackpot. determine whether it is contained in After executing the process of step S706 or step S707. The process proceeds to step S708.

In step S708, it is determined whether or not the type of jackpot sorted out in step S706 or step S707 is the variable probability jackpot. In step S708, when it is determined that the game result is a variable probability jackpot (S708: YES), the process proceeds to step S709.

In step S709, stop result setting processing for probability variable jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for the probability variable jackpot means that in the current game round that will be won by the probability variable jackpot, the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b is displayed. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the probability variable jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S706 or step S707 is obtained. It acquires and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step S709, the process proceeds to step S710.

In step S710, a flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type sorted in step S706 or step S707 is stored in the corresponding area in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM64. Specifically, in the case of the 8R probability variable jackpot, the 8R probability variable flag is stored, and in the case of the 15R probability variable jackpot, the 15R probability variable flag is stored. After that, the process proceeds to step S714.

In step S708, when it is determined that the type of jackpot distributed in step S706 or step S707 is not the variable probability jackpot (S708: NO), that is, when the type of jackpot distributed is the normal jackpot, the process proceeds to step S711.

In step S711, a stop result setting process for normal jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for the normal jackpot means that in the current game turn in which the normal jackpot is won, the first result display portion 37a or the second result display portion 37b fluctuates in a state in which the stop result is displayed. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the normal jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type sorted in step S706 or step S707 is obtained. It acquires and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step S711, the process proceeds to step S712.

In step S712, a flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type sorted in step S706 or step S707 is stored in the corresponding area in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM64. Specifically, when the 8R normal jackpot is obtained, the 8R normal flag is stored, and when the 15R normal jackpot is obtained, the 15R normal flag is stored. After that, the process proceeds to step S714.

In step S704, if the result of the big win lottery in step S702 or step S703 is not a big win (S704: NO), the process proceeds to step S713 to execute stop result setting processing for loss. The stop result setting process for the time of loss is to end the variable display in a state in which either stop result is displayed in the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b in the current game turn that results in a loss. This is a process for setting whether Specifically, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is obtained by referring to the stop result table for when the stop result table is stored in the stop result table storage area 63e. and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 . After executing step S713, the process proceeds to step S714.

In step S714, display duration setting processing is executed. The display continuation time setting process sets the display continuation time, which is the time required for the current game round in the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b, based on the presence or absence of a big win or the occurrence of reach. This is a process for The details of the display duration setting process will be described later. After executing step S714, the process proceeds to step S715.

In step S715, it is determined whether or not the RAM 64 stores the second result display section flag. If it is determined in step S715 that the second result display section flag is not stored in the RAM 64 (S715: NO), the process proceeds to step S716 to set the first variation command. The first variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning to the first start port 33, and presence or absence of reach occurrence. and information on the display duration set in step S714. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S715 that the second result display section flag is stored (S715: YES), the process proceeds to step S717 to set the second variation command. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning to the second start port 34, and whether or not reach has occurred. and information on the display duration set in step S714. After executing step S716 or step S717, the process proceeds to step S718.

In step S718, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence or absence of a big hit and the result of distribution determination. In other words, the type command includes 8R probability variable jackpot information, 16R probability variable jackpot information, 8R normal jackpot information, 16R normal jackpot information, or loss result information as jackpot type information.

The variation command and type command set in steps S716 to S718 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S402 in the normal process (FIG. 12). The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game round based on the received variation command and the type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. After executing step S718, the process proceeds to step S719.

In step S719, the result display portion corresponding to the current game round out of the first result display portion 37a and the second result display portion 37b is caused to start the variable display of symbols. Specifically, when the second result display section flag is not stored in the RAM 64, it is specified that the result display section corresponding to the current game round is the first result display section 37a, and the variable display is started. When the second result display section flag is stored, the second result display section 37b is specified as the result display section corresponding to the current game round, and the variable display is started. After executing step S719, the fluctuation start process is terminated.

<Display duration setting processing>
Next, a display duration setting process will be described. The display continuation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 15: S714).

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing display duration setting processing. In step S801, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is obtained and stored in the MPU 62 register. After that, the process proceeds to step S802.

In step S802, it is determined whether reach occurs in the current game round. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a variable probability jackpot flag or a normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 64, and if either flag is stored, it is determined that reach occurs (S802: YES ) and proceed to step S803. Also, even if none of the above flags is stored, if the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of reach, reach occurs. Then, it determines (S802: YES), and proceeds to step S803. It should be noted that the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to when identifying the presence or absence of reach occurrence using the value of the reach random number counter C3.

In step S803, the display duration table for reach occurrence stored in the display duration table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to, and the display duration information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. Then, in step S804, variable display time information included in the display duration information is set in a variable display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the display continuation time setting process ends.

In step S802, when it is determined that the reach does not occur in the current game round (S802: NO), the process proceeds to step S805, and the reach non-occurrence display duration table stored in the display duration table storage area 63d to acquire the display duration corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS. Then, in step S806, variable display time information included in the display duration information is set in a variable display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. FIG. After that, the display continuation time setting process ends.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the display duration information stored in the reach non-occurrence display duration table is set so that the display duration becomes shorter as the number of the total pending number CRN increases. there is However, it is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured so as not to depend on the number of the total pending number CRN, and may be set so that the smaller the number of the total pending number CRN, the shorter the display duration. . Further, when the second start-holding number RbN is "0", the larger the number of the first start-holding number RaN, the shorter the display continuation time. may be set such that the larger the number of second start suspension numbers RbN is, the shorter the display continuation time is. Further, when the second start-holding number RbN is "0", the larger the number of the first start-holding number RaN, the longer the display continuation time. may be set such that the larger the number of the second start-up pending number RbN, the longer the display continuation time is, or the display duration is constant regardless of the respective pending numbers RaN and RbN.

In addition, in the situation where the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, compared to the case where the number of pending information is the same, compared to the situation where the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the reach non-reach is selected so that a shorter display duration is selected. A display duration table for occurrence may be set. However, it is not limited to this, and the selected display duration time may be the same, or the above relationship may be reversed.

Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the display duration at the occurrence of ready-to-win, and the display duration that is likely to be selected and the display duration that is difficult to be selected are different between when the big win is won and when the winning is about to occur. may be configured. Also, the variable probability jackpot display duration table, the normal jackpot display duration table, the win reach display duration table, and the complete win display duration table may be individually set. As described above, the display continuation time of each game round is determined using the presence/absence of a big hit, the presence/absence of reach occurrence, the number of pending information and the value of the variation type counter as parameters.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing will be explained. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of normal process (FIG. 12: S406).

FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram showing the game state transition process. In step S901, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. In step S901, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (S901: NO), the process proceeds to step S902, and the symbol fluctuation display in the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b of one game cycle is displayed. It is determined whether or not it is the end timing. In step S902, when it is determined that it is not the timing when the variable display ends (S902; NO), the game state transition processing is terminated as it is.

In step S902, if it is determined that it is time for the variable display to end (S902: YES), the process proceeds to step S903, and the game result of the current game round (the result of the jackpot lottery) changes to the opening/closing execution mode. It is determined whether or not they correspond. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any one of the 8R variable probability flag, the 16R variable probability flag, the 8R normal flag, and the 16R normal flag is stored in the RAM 64 . When it is determined that none of the above flags is stored (S903: NO), this game state transition processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S903 that any one of the above flags is stored (S903: YES), the process advances to step S904 to start round display start processing for notifying the current open/close execution mode type. Run. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is confirmed. Based on the confirmed address information, stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from among the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is determined from the specified stop result data. Confirm. After that, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 . As a result, the round display section 39 displays the round information related to the output. After executing step S904, the process proceeds to step S905.

In step S905, the number of rounds of the current open/close execution mode is determined. Specifically, the jackpot type flags (16R probability variation flag, 16R normal flag, 8R probability variation flag, 8R normal flag) stored in the RAM 64 are checked. In step S905, if it is determined that the jackpot type flag stored in the RAM64 is the 16R probability variable flag or the 16R normal flag (S905: YES), proceed to step S906, provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM64 "16" is set in the first round counter area RC1. The first round counter area RC1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the door 36b has been opened. On the other hand, in step S905, when it is determined that the jackpot type flag stored in the RAM64 is the 8R probability variable flag or the 8R normal flag (S905: NO), the process proceeds to step S907, provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM64 "8" is set in the first round counter area RC1. After executing step S906 or step S907, the process proceeds to step S908.

In step S908, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 at step S402 in the normal processing (FIG. 12). This opening command includes information on the number of rounds in the current open/close execution mode. The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the presentation corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the presentation is executed. After executing step S908, the game state transition processing is terminated.

In step S901, when it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress (S901: YES), the process proceeds to step S909 to execute the big winning opening opening/closing process. Specifically, when the big winning opening 36a is closed, the variable winning driving unit 36c is brought into a driving state on the condition that the first round counter area RC1 is "1" or more, thereby winning a big prize. The mouth 36a is opened. In addition, when the large winning opening 36a is open, the variable winning driving unit is operated under the condition that the opening limit time has passed since the opening of the large winning opening 36a or the number of opening limits has been won. The driving state of 36c is stopped, and the big winning opening 36a is closed. The details of the big winning opening opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step S909, the process proceeds to step S910.

In step S910, it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". When it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S910: NO), this game state transition processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S910: YES), the process advances to step S911 to set an ending command. The set ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S402 in the normal processing (FIG. 12). Upon receiving the ending command, the sound emission control device 90 terminates the effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode. After executing step S911, the process proceeds to step S912.

In step S912, transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is executed. The transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is a process for setting various modes of the game round after the current opening/closing execution mode ends. The details of the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends will be described later. After executing step S912, the process proceeds to step S913.

In step S913, round display end processing is executed. In this process, the display control of the round display portion 39 in the main display portion 45 is terminated so that the round display portion 39 is turned off. Thereafter, the process advances to step S914 to execute opening/closing execution mode end processing. Specifically, if the 16R probability variable flag, 8R probability variable flag, 16 normal flag, and 8R normal flag are stored, these flags are erased, and if these flags are not stored, the state is maintained. do. After executing step S914, the game state transition processing is terminated.

<Opening and closing processing of the grand prize opening>
Next, the big winning opening opening/closing process will be described. The big winning opening opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 17: S909) of the game state transition process.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the big winning opening opening/closing process. In step S1001, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening 36a is being opened. Specifically, the determination is made based on the drive state of the variable winning drive section 36c. If it is determined in step S1001 that the big winning opening 36a is not open (S1001: NO), the process proceeds to step S1002 to determine whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". If it is determined in step S1002 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S1002: YES), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1002 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S1002: NO), the process proceeds to step S1003.

In step S1003, it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer counter area T1 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closed continuation time of the big winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S1003 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (S1003: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S1003, when it is determined that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (S1003: YES), the process proceeds to step S1004, and the variable winning driving unit is operated to open the big winning opening 36a. 36c is driven. After that, the process proceeds to step S1005.

In step S1005, setting processing for each round is executed. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, all of the set winning modes are high-frequency winning modes, so "15000" (that is, 30 seconds) is set in the first timer counter area T1. Furthermore, in order to count the winning number of game balls into the big winning opening 36a, "10" is set in the winning counter area PC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM64. The count value set in the first timer counter area T1 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec. If the pachinko machine 10 is set to the low-frequency winning mode, for example, "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1, and "6" is set in the winning counter area PC. ” may be set. After executing step S1005, the process proceeds to step S1006.

In step S1006, an open command is set. After that, the main prize winning opening opening/closing process is ended. The open command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, recognize that the opening of the big winning opening 36a has started. It is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the external output process ( FIG. 12 : step S402). Based on the received opening command, the sound emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the big prize opening 36a for one round has been started, and the content of the effects in the various lamps 47 and the speakers 46 is set to the big prize opening 36a. is updated to the content corresponding to the start of opening. Further, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the above-described open command to the display control device 100 while maintaining its information format. Based on the received opening command, the display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the big winning opening 36a for one round has started, and also changes the content of the effect on the pattern display device 41 to the opening of the big winning opening 36a. Update to the content corresponding to being started.

In step S1001, when it is determined that the big winning opening 36a is open (step S1001: YES), the process proceeds to step S1007, and it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0". do. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening continuation time of the big winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S1007 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (S1007: NO), the process proceeds to step S1008.

In step S1008, it is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the variable prize winning device 36 whether or not the game ball has won the prize winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S1008 that no prize has been won (S1008: NO), the main prize winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1008 that a prize has been won (S1008: YES), the process proceeds to step S1009, and 1 is subtracted from the value of the prize counter area PC. After that, the process proceeds to step S1010.

In step S1010, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter area PC is "0". If it is determined in step S1010 that the value of the winning counter area PC is not "0" (S1010: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1007 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (S1007: YES), or if it is determined that the value of the winning counter area PC is "0" in step S1010 (S1010: YES), the process advances to step S1011 to execute the big winning opening closing process. Specifically, the variable winning drive unit 36c is brought into a non-driving state in order to close the big winning opening 36a. After that, the process proceeds to step S1012.

In step S1012, 1 is subtracted from the value of the first round counter area RC1. Thereafter, the process advances to step S1013 to determine whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". If it is determined in step S1013 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S1013: YES), the main winning opening opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1013 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S1013: NO), "1000" (that is, 2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing continuation time of the big winning opening 36a. After executing step S1014, the process advances to step S1015 to set a close command. After that, the big winning opening opening/closing process is terminated.

This set closing command is a command including information for making the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, recognize that the opening of the big prize opening 36a is completed, and is a command that includes information for normal processing. is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the external output process ( FIG. 12 : step S402). Based on the received closing command, the sound emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the big prize opening 36a for one round has been completed, and also changes the contents of the effects in the various lamps 47 and the speakers 46 to the large prize winning opening 36a. The content is updated to correspond to the end of opening. Further, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the above-described closing command to the display control device 100 while maintaining its information format. Based on the received closing command, the display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the large winning opening 36a for one round has been completed, and displays the content of the effect on the pattern display device 41. Update to match what you have done.
Execute the corresponding process.

<Transition processing at the end of open/close execution mode>
Next, transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends will be described. The transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition processing (FIG. 17: S912).

FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends. In step S1101, it is determined whether or not the RAM 64 stores a flag corresponding to the variable probability jackpot as the jackpot type flag. That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM 64 stores the 16R probability variation flag or the 8R probability variation flag.

In step S1101, when it is determined that the 16R probability variation flag or the 8R probability variation flag is stored in the RAM 64 (S1101: YES), the process proceeds to step S1102 to execute the flag erasing process. The flag erasing process is a process of erasing information for specifying a game state. Specifically, when the open/close execution mode flag, high probability mode flag, and high frequency support flag are stored, they are deleted, and when these flags are not stored, the state is maintained. do. After executing step S1102, the process proceeds to step S1103.

In step S1103, the high-probability mode flag is stored, and then the process advances to step S1104 to store the high-frequency support flag. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the game state shifts to a game state in which the winning/failure lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next jackpot winning occurs. After that, the process proceeds to step S1105.

In step S1105, a high-probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. do. After that, the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode ends.

If it is determined in step S1101 that the 16R normal flag or 8R normal flag is stored in the RAM 64 (S1101: NO), the process advances to step S1106 to execute the flag erasing process. After that, the process proceeds to step S1107.

In step S1107, after storing the high-frequency support flag, the process proceeds to step S1108, and "100" is set in the number-of-games counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM64. The value set in the number-of-games counter area is a value indicating the number of games when the number of games is limited and the high-frequency support mode is executed. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the game state shifts to a game state in which the win/fail lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. However, in this case, the high-frequency support mode ends after 100 game rounds are executed, after which the win/fail lottery mode is a low-probability mode and the support mode is a low-frequency support mode, shifting to a normal game state. . After step S1108 is executed, the transition processing at the end of the open/close execution mode ends.

<Electronic support processing>
Next, the processing for electric support will be described. The electric service support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 12: S407).

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing processing for electric support. In step S1201, it is determined whether support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a supported flag is stored in a supported flag storage area provided in the various flag storage area 64 e of the RAM 64 . The flag during support is a flag that is stored when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is opened and deleted when it is returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step S1201 that the supported flag is not stored (S1201: NO), the process proceeds to step S1202.

In step S1202, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag is stored in the support winning flag storage area provided in the various flags storage area 64e of the RAM 64 or not. The support winning flag is a flag that is stored when the open state is won in the electric role product open lottery for whether or not to open the electric role product 34a, and is erased when the supporting flag is stored. . If it is determined in step S1202 that the support winning flag is not stored (S1202: NO), the process proceeds to step S1203.

In step S1203, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the display continuation time of the normal figure unit 38. FIG. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec.

If it is determined in step S1203 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S1203: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S1203: YES), the process proceeds to step S1204.

In step S1204, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the variable display of symbols in the normal unit 38 . If it is determined in step S1204 that it is time to end the variable display (S1204: YES), the process advances to step S1205 to set off display, and then ends the electronic role support process. By setting the deviation display, the variable display of the symbols in the general pattern unit 38 is terminated while the deviation display is stopped. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1204 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (S1204: NO), the process proceeds to step S1206.

In step S1206, it is determined whether or not the value of the reserved accessory number SN is greater than "0". If it is determined in step S1206 that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is "0" (S1206: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1206 that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is larger than "0" (S1206: YES), the process proceeds to step S1207.

In step S1207, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode is in progress, and then the flow advances to step S1208 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. If it is not the opening/closing execution mode at step S1207 (S1207: NO) and if it is the high-frequency support mode at step S1208 (S1208: YES), the process proceeds to step S1209 to perform an electric accessory opening lottery. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64c is shifted, and when the value of the electric role item opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric role item opening lottery be elected. Also, at the same time as the electric accessory open lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "750" (that is, 1.5 sec). The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started. After that, the process proceeds to step S1210.

In step S1210, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory open lottery in step S1209 is support winning. In step S1210, when it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is support winning (S1210: YES), the process proceeds to step S1211, stores the support winning flag, and is provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 "3" is set in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is released. After that, the process proceeds to step S1212. On the other hand, in step S1210, when it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is not support winning (S1210: NO), the process proceeds to step S1212 without executing the process of step S1211.

In step S1212, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the low probability mode. When it is determined in step S1212 that the lottery mode is the low probability mode (S1212: YES), the process proceeds to step S1213. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1212 that the winning/failure lottery mode is not the low-probability mode (S1212: NO), the electronic support process is terminated.

In step S1213, it is determined whether or not the number-of-games counter area is "0". The number-of-games counter is decremented by one each time one game round is completed in the low-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode. In step S1213, when it is determined that the number-of-games counter area is not "0" (S1213: NO), the electronic role support process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1213 that the number-of-games counter area is "0", the process proceeds to step S1214 to clear the high frequency support flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S1215.

In step S1215, a low-frequency support command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. do. After that, the electronic support processing is terminated.

The low-frequency support command set in step S1215 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the external output process ( FIG. 12 : step S402) of the normal process. Upon receiving the low-frequency support command, the sound emission control device 90 identifies that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, and executes corresponding processing.

If it is determined in step S1207 that it is in the opening/closing execution mode (S1207: YES), or if it is determined in step S1218 that it is not in the high-frequency support mode (S1208: NO), the process proceeds to step S1216, and the electric accessory opening lottery I do. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64c is shifted, and when the value of the electric role item opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric role item opening lottery be elected. At the same time as the electric accessory open lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "14750" (that is, 29.5 sec). After that, the process proceeds to step S1217.

In step S1217, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory open lottery in step S1216 is support winning. In step S1217, if it is determined that the support has not been won (S1217: NO), the electronic role support process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S1217, if it is determined that the support is won (S1217: YES), the process advances to step S1218 to store the support win flag and after setting "1" to the second round counter area RC2, End the electronic support process.

If it is determined in step S1202 that the support winning flag is stored (S1202: YES), the process advances to step S1219 to determine whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the display continuation time of the normal figure unit 38. FIG. In step S1219, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S1219: NO), since the pattern is being changed and displayed in the general pattern unit 38, the main electric role support process is performed as it is. exit. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1219 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S1219: YES), the process proceeds to step S1220.

In step S1220, a win display is set. As a result, the variation display of the pattern in the normal pattern unit 38 is terminated while the win display is stopped. After that, the process advances to step S1221 to store the supported flag and erase the supported winning flag. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

In step S1201, when it is determined that the supporting flag is stored (S1201: YES), the process advances to step S1222 to execute electric opening/closing processing for opening/closing control of the electric accessory 34a. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

<Electrical opening/closing process>
Next, the electrical opening/closing process will be described. The electric power opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 as a subroutine of the electric power support process (FIG. 20: S1222).

FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing the electrical opening/closing process. In step S1301, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is being opened is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive unit 34b is in a driving state. When it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is open (S1301: YES), the process proceeds to step S1302.

In step S1302, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step S1302 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S1302: NO), the main electric opening/closing process is terminated. In other words, if the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the main electric opening/closing process is terminated.

In step S1302, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S1302: YES), the process proceeds to step S1303 to perform closing processing for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the closed state, "250" (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed, and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated this time. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration time of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step S1303, the process proceeds to step S1304.

In step S1304, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process advances to step S1305 to determine whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". If it is determined in step S1305 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (S1305: NO), the electric opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1305 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (S1305: YES), the process advances to step S1306 to clear the supported flag. After that, the main electrical opening/closing process is terminated.

In step S1301, when it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is not open (S1301: NO), the process proceeds to step S1307 to determine whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration time of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step S1307 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S1307: NO), the electric opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1307 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S1307: YES), the process advances to step S1308 to execute opening processing for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the open state. . After that, the process proceeds to step S1309.

In step S1309, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (S1309: NO), the process advances to step S1310 to determine whether or not the high-frequency support mode is in effect. do.

If it is determined in step S1310 that the high frequency support mode is in effect (S1310: YES), the process advances to step S1311 to set "800" (that is, 1.6 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the main electrical opening/closing process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1309 that the opening/closing execution mode is set (S1309: YES), or if it is determined that the high-frequency support mode is not set in step S1310 (S1310: NO), the process proceeds to step S1312, and the second "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. After that, the main electrical opening/closing process is terminated.

A4. Electrical configuration of sound emission control device and display control device:
Next, electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 22 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. As shown in FIG. A part of the configuration such as the power supply device 85 is omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on an audio emission control board 91 provided in the audio emission control device 90 . The MPU 92 is a device containing a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, part of the area of the ROM 93 includes a reservation confirmation table storage area 93a, a déjà vu notice occurrence table storage area 93b, a déjà vu notice notice effect table storage area 93c, and a déjà vu notice stop pattern table storage area. An area 93d, a variable display pattern table storage area 93e, and the like are provided. Details of these will be described later.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93 . For example, in a part of the area of the RAM 94, various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, déjà vu notice effect storage areas 94d, and the like are provided. Details of these will be described later. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. A main controller 60 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92 . Various commands are received from the main controller 60 . The display control device 100 is connected to the output side of the MPU 92 as well as the effect operation button 24, the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 are connected.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, to generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for background images.

A work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 102 .

The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 41 . The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc., and intervenes in the reading and writing of data.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as patterns displayed on the pattern display device 41 . The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table and the like that are referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106 . It is also possible to configure the character ROM 106 to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 .

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, and by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107, the display content of the pattern display device 41 is changed.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, main ROM 63, and main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound and light side MPU 92 and the sound and light side, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound/light side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102 .

A5. Déjà vu notice:
A5-1. Déjà vu preview overview:
Next, an overview of the preview of the déjà vu performed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 23 is a time chart showing an example of an advance notice executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the pattern display device 41 when the déjà vu notice is executed. The déjà vu notice means that at least one effect element is executed multiple times with the same content, thereby giving the player a sense of déjà vu that the same effect element has been executed multiple times. It is a performance to give. A production element is a unit that constitutes a game production. Various types of effects, such as an object announcement effect that displays the image in front (mini character announcement effect), a background change announcement effect that changes the background image in a manner different from normal, a role announcement effect that makes a specified role perform a specified action, etc. A lamp light emission performance of lighting a lamp in a prescribed pattern, a pattern row variation performance of varying a pattern row in a prescribed scroll pattern, and a remaining one pattern in a state where two identical patterns are stopped on at least one effective line. A ready-to-win effect of changing the row, a pattern pseudo-stop effect of pseudo-stopping a predetermined pattern combination, a pattern complete stop effect of completely stopping a predetermined pattern combination, and the like can be mentioned.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment determines whether or not the condition for generating the déjà vu advance notice is satisfied, that is, determines whether or not to generate the déjà vu advance notice, based on the hold information. Then, when it is determined that the conditions for generating the advance notice of déjà vu have been satisfied, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a , at least one performance element is executed a plurality of times with the same content. Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment determines whether or not the condition for generating the déjà vu advance notice is satisfied before the pending information subject to the determination is subject to the jackpot lottery. .

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment confirms that the following conditions are satisfied when a game ball wins the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 and the reservation information is acquired. Then, the déjà vu notice occurrence lottery process, which will be described later, is executed. If the player wins the déjà vu notice generation lottery process, the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied.
(Condition 1) Reservation information corresponding to a jackpot is not included in the already stored reservation information. The total pending number CRN including the pending information is 2 or more (Condition 3) When the game ball wins in the second start port 34, the second start pending number RbN including the pending information related to this winning is 2 or more

The reason for the condition 1 is that even if the game times related to the reservation information corresponding to the big win and the game times related to the reservation information that won this time are used, even if the production element of the same content is executed multiple times, it corresponds to the big win. Since the jackpot performance is executed after the game round related to the reserved information, the continuity of the performance elements of the same content executed a plurality of times is interrupted, and it is difficult to give the player a sense of déjà vu. The reason for the condition 2 and the condition 3 is that if the number of pending prizes including the pending information related to the current winning prize is 2 or more, the déjà vu notice can be executed over a plurality of game rounds. In the condition 3, the reason why the second start hold number RbN is the reference is that in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the hold information acquired by winning the second start hole 34 is the first start hole 33 This is because the winning lottery will take precedence over the reserved information acquired by the winning. However, these conditions are examples, and other conditions may be imposed, or there may be no conditions. For example, these conditions may be omitted in a configuration in which the same performance element is executed multiple times in one game round.

In the déjà vu advance notice generation lottery process of the present embodiment, only when the pending information related to the current winning is the pending information that will result in a big win or a ready-to-win event when the player is selected for a big win lottery later, the déjà vu notice is performed. It is designed to be eligible for occurrence. The reason for this is that a relatively long display continuation time is set in a game cycle related to the pending information that results in winning a jackpot or generating a ready-to-win, so that it is easy to execute a suggestive effect, a battle effect, and the like, which will be described later. Then, when the lottery process for generating a sense of déjà vu is won, the conditions for generating a sense of déjà vu announcement are satisfied, and the pachinko machine 10 is held when it is determined that the conditions for generating a sense of déjà vu announcement have been met. At least one performance element is executed a plurality of times with the same contents until the game round related to the information is completed.

In the example 1 shown in FIG. 23(A), the game balls enter the first starting port 33 at the timing when the total number of reservations CRN is 2, and the total number of reservations CRN becomes 3, based on the reservation information related to the winning. As a result of the above determination, the condition for generating the advance notice of déjà vu is satisfied. Then, the game round P03 shown as the third game round is the game round related to the hold information determined to satisfy the conditions for generating the déjà vu advance notice.

In Example 1 shown in FIG. 23A, the pachinko machine 10 selects a cut-in notice effect A with the same content as the effect element A to be executed multiple times with the same content, and The advance notice effect A is executed once in each of the three game rounds P01, P02 and P03. That is, the pachinko machine 10 executes the cut-in notice effect A in all successive game rounds by the time the game rounds related to the holding information for which it is determined that the condition for generating the déjà vu announcement is satisfied is completed. there is

In addition, in Example 1 shown in FIG. 23, the pachinko machine 10 has a symbol complete stop effect in which the winning symbol A (for example, a combination of symbols "1, 2, 3") is completely stopped in the first game round P01. is executed, and the symbol complete stop performance for completely stopping the same lost symbol A is also executed in the second game round P02. That is, the pachinko machine 10 selects the same design complete stop performance of completely stopping the same losing pattern A as a performance element to be executed a plurality of times with the same content, and the same content of the pattern complete stop performance is selected. The performance is being executed multiple times.

In addition, in Example 1 shown in FIG. 23, the pachinko machine 10 executes a symbol pseudo-stop effect for pseudo-stopping the losing symbol A after executing the cut-in notice effect A in the third game round P3. there is Strictly speaking, the symbol pseudo stop effect is different from the symbol complete stop effect in that the symbol is not completely stopped. However, the mode of presentation that the player can perceive is very similar between the pseudo stop of the combination of symbols and the complete stop of the combination of symbols. Therefore, in this specification, if the content of the combination of symbols to be pseudo-stopped is the same, the symbol pseudo-stop effect is considered to be the effect element of the same content as the symbol complete stop effect to completely stop the symbols. In the following, the combination of the symbol complete stop effect and the symbol pseudo stop effect is also called a symbol stop effect.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment executes a suggestive effect suggesting to the player that the same effect element has been executed multiple times after executing the same effect element a plurality of times. . In the example shown in FIG. 24, the suggestive effect is to display on the pattern display device 41 an image in which a female character throws a message such as "Did you mean deja vu!?" This is a mode of outputting to the speaker 46 and various lamps 47 . However, the suggestive effect may take other forms as long as it can suggest to the player that the effect element with the same content has been executed multiple times. , ``Is it deja vu?'', ``Deja vu?'', ``Maybe déjà vu is a sign of a big hit?'' The pattern display device 41 displays an image containing messages such as "This is the feeling of déjà vu!?" It may be a production or the like that causes

In the example shown in FIG. 23, the pachinko machine 10 executes the suggestive effect, then executes the battle effect in which the player side character and the enemy side character confront each other, and then the result corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery. A performance (victory performance in the case of winning a jackpot, defeat performance in the case of a losing result, etc.) is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 24, the battle production is such that an image of a confrontation between a female character on the player side and a male character on the enemy side is displayed on the pattern display device 41, and the sound and light accompanying the image are displayed on the speaker 46. and various lamps 47 to output. However, the battle presentation may be in another aspect, and may be omitted. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 24, the victory presentation is such that an image of a female character on the player side who is delighted with the victory is displayed on the symbol display device 41, and sound and light associated with the image are emitted through the speaker 46 and various lamps 47. It is a mode to output to . However, the victory effect as the result effect may be in another mode, or may be omitted. After that, when a big win is won, a big win performance corresponding to the type of the big win is executed.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the effect element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, the player has a sense of déjà vu that the effect element of the same content has been executed a plurality of times. can give A player who recognizes the sense of déjà vu has a sense of expectation that the sense of déjà vu has a special meaning, for example, that there is a possibility of winning a big prize. Furthermore, when the player experiences winning a jackpot after the performance element of the same content is executed multiple times, the performance element is executed in anticipation of the performance element of the same content being executed multiple times. Every time it is done, I always pay attention to the production elements with high expectations. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player's attention is made to see whether or not the effect elements of the same content are executed a plurality of times, and the degree of attention of the player to the effect elements that are sequentially executed is increased. It is possible to suitably increase it, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to set a different degree of reliability (expectation) for each type of effect element that is executed in a single shot. When it is executed multiple times, the player strongly expects that the possibility of winning the jackpot is very high. Also, the player comes to expect that the effect element is executed a plurality of times with the same content, and the degree of attention of the player to the effect element can be preferably increased.

In addition, even if the effect directly suggesting that there is a high possibility of winning the jackpot, for example, the effect of lighting the look-ahead pending lamp in a different color than usual, the same content is performed. A game can be added in which attention is paid to whether or not the effect element of is executed a plurality of times.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the suggestive effect is executed, the player can be made to recognize that the effect element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, and the same content of the effect element is executed. It is possible to convince the player that there is a special meaning in executing the performance element multiple times. Then, when the effect element with the same content is executed a plurality of times, the player asks whether it is just a coincidence that the effect element with the same content is executed a plurality of times, or a sense of déjà vu accompanied by the suggestive effect. Whether or not it was an advance notice is confirmed by whether or not the suggestive effect is executed, and the player expects that the suggestive effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment can execute an operation acceptance effect element (button effect) including content suggesting acceptance of the operation of the effect operation button 24 by the player as the effect element. When the condition for generating the déjà vu preview is satisfied, the button effect is not selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times. The reason for this will be explained. When the button effect is executed a plurality of times, it is executed with different contents depending on the mode of input operation of the effect operation button 24 by the player (for example, whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed, timing, number of times of pressing, etc.). may occur. Therefore, even if the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied and the pachinko machine 10 executes the same type of button effect multiple times, depending on the mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24, the button In some cases, the effect is executed with different contents, and it becomes impossible to give the player a sense of déjà vu. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the button effect is not selected as the effect element to be executed multiple times, different contents are executed depending on the mode of input operation of the effect operation button 24 by the player. It is possible to suppress the putting away, and to surely give the player a sense of déjà vu. However, the pachinko machine 10 cancels the execution of the notice of déjà vu when the button effect is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times even when the condition for generating the notice of déjà vu is satisfied. may be configured.

In addition, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment determines whether or not the condition for generating the déjà vu advance notice is satisfied before the reservation information becomes the target of the jackpot lottery. If it is determined that the conditions for the occurrence of visual notice have been met, the pending information that has been determined to have met the conditions for the occurrence of visual notice will be executed multiple times before becoming the target of the jackpot lottery. Start execution of the effect element. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for the sense of deja vu over a plurality of game rounds.

Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment determines the display continuation time, which is the time required for each game round, immediately before starting each game round. Therefore, if the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied and the type of effect element (for example, cut-in notice effect) to be executed multiple times in the déjà vu notice is randomly selected, within the display duration time of each game round, In some cases, you may end up selecting a performance element that is too long to execute. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied, an effect that can be executed within the shortest display duration among the display durations that can be selected in each game round. An element is selected as a target effect element to be executed a plurality of times, and the selected effect element is executed in each game round. In this way, even if the display continuation time determined for each game round is different, the effect element having the same content can be reliably executed in each game round.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the length of the display continuation time of the game round for which the selected effect element is to be executed is a length that allows the selected effect element to be executed multiple times, , the selected effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times in the one game.

In Example 2 shown in FIG. 23(B), the display duration time T2 of the second game round P02 is twice as long as the time required for the effect element A (for example, the cut-in notice effect A). , the pachinko machine 10 executes the same effect element A twice in the game round P02. It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10, after the end of the first effect element A in the second game round P02, is the same lost symbol A (for example, "1, 2 , 3” symbol combination) is executed once. Therefore, the sense of déjà vu given to the player can be further strengthened.

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect element having the same content to be executed multiple times (hereinafter also referred to as the effect element for déjà vu notice) can be executed more times. , the player can be made to strongly recognize a sense of déjà vu. In addition, since the number of times the performance element for déjà vu preview is executed increases or decreases depending on the length of the display continuation time of one game, it is possible to inflate the player's expectation.

Furthermore, since the effect element for déjà vu notice is a effect element that can be executed within the shortest display duration time among the display duration times that can be determined for each game round, the time required for one execution is , is equal to or less than the display continuation time of one game. Therefore, even if the effect element for the foretelling of déjà vu is executed once in one game, surplus time may occur in the display continuation time. According to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the length of the display continuation time of one game is a length that allows the performance element for the déjà vu announcement (the performance element of the same content) to be executed multiple times. Since the effect element of the same content is executed a plurality of times in the one game, the surplus time of the display duration can be minimized.

Note that, in the above example, the pachinko machine 10 sets the effect element A in all of the continuous game rounds until the game rounds related to the holding information determined to satisfy the condition for generating the déjà vu advance notice is completed. However, the pachinko machine 10 may execute the effect element having the same content a plurality of times. For example, the effect element A may be executed only in the game rounds P01 and P03.

In the following, when a specific advance notice effect is selected as an effect element to be executed multiple times with the same content in the déjà vu notice, the selected notice effect is also referred to as “the notice effect for the déjà vu notice”. In addition, when selecting a pattern stop effect to completely stop or pseudo-stop a combination of specific patterns as a effect element to be executed multiple times with the same content in the déjà vu notice, in the selected pattern stop effect A combination of specific symbols that cause a stop or a pseudo-stop is also called a "stop symbol for déjà vu notice".

A5-2. Control related to déjà vu notice:
Next, a specific example of control for executing the above-described déjà vu notice in the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

<Various processing executed in the sound emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the sound and light side MPU 92 . Timer interrupt processing is repeatedly executed at a relatively short period (eg, 4 msec). Processing of each step executed in timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step S1401, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound and light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62 . The sound and light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , are read out sequentially according to the order in which they are stored. After executing step S1401, the process proceeds to step S1402.

In step S1402, command handling processing for performing processing corresponding to the received command is executed. Details of the command handling process will be described later. After executing step S1402, the process proceeds to step S1403.

In step S1403, light emission control processing for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read out in the command handling process of step S1402. After executing step S1403, the process proceeds to step S1404.

In step S1404, audio output control processing for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the voice output control process, voice output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the voice output data read out in the command handling process of step S1402. After executing step S1404, the timer interrupt processing ends.

<Command response processing>
Next, command handling processing will be described. The command response process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 25: S1402).

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing command handling processing. As described above, in the command correspondence process, the process corresponding to the command received from the main MPU 62 is executed. Processing of each step executed in the command handling processing will be described below.

In step S1501, it is determined whether or not a pending command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S1501 that a pending command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S1501: YES), the process advances to step S1502 to execute pending command processing. In the pending command handling process, the process related to the above-described déjà vu preview is executed based on the information set in the pending command. Details of the pending command handling process will be described later. After executing step S1502, the process proceeds to step S1503. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1501 that no pending command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S1501: NO), the process proceeds to step S1503 without executing step S1502.

In step S1503, it is determined whether or not a variation command and a type command have been received from the main MPU62. In step S1503, when it is determined that the command for variation and the type command have been received (S1503: YES), the process advances to step S1504 to execute effect setting processing. In the effect setting process, the advance notice effect to be executed in the current game round, the stop pattern, the variable display pattern, etc. are set. Details of the effect setting process will be described later. After executing step S1504, the process advances to step S1505. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1503 that the command for variation and the type command have not been received (S1503: NO), the process proceeds to step S1505 without executing step S1504.

In step S1505, it is determined whether an opening command has been received from the main MPU 62 or not. In step S1505, when it is determined that an opening command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S1505: YES), the process advances to step S1506 to execute opening effect setting processing. In the opening effect setting process, the type of the jackpot contained in the opening command received this time is specified, the contents of the opening effect corresponding to the type of the jackpot are set, and the information corresponding to the effect content is set. An opening effect command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. - 特許庁After that, the process proceeds to step S1507. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1505 that the opening command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S1505: NO), the process proceeds to step S1507 without executing step S1506.

In step S1507, it is determined whether or not an ending command has been received. In step S1507, when it determines with having received the ending command (S1507:YES), it progresses to step S1508 and performs an ending effect setting process. In the ending effect setting process, the content of the game state after the open/close execution mode included in the ending command received this time is specified, the content of the ending effect corresponding to the content of the game state is set, and the content of the effect is set. An ending effect command in which corresponding information is set is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. - 特許庁After that, the process proceeds to step S1509. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1507 that no ending command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S1507: NO), the process proceeds to step S1509 without executing step S1508.

In step S1509, other setting processing is executed. In the other setting process, for example, setting of effect contents corresponding to the open command and setting of effect contents corresponding to the close command are performed. Further, when the effect operation button 24 is pressed, the effect operation command for recognizing that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed is transmitted to the display side MPU 102 .

<Processing for pending command>
Next, pending command handling processing will be described. The pending command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the command handling process (FIG. 26: S1502).

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing. As described above, the pending command handling process is a process that is executed when a pending command is received from the main MPU 62 . Processing of each step executed in the pending command handling processing will be described below.

In step S1601, update processing at the time of winning is executed. In the update process at the time of winning, the number of pending information acquired based on winning to the first starting port 33, the number of pending information acquired based on winning to the second starting port 34, and these pending A process for enabling the sound and light side MPU 92 to specify the total number of pieces of information is executed. Details of the update process at the time of winning in step S1601 will be described later. In the following, the number of pending information acquired based on the winning of the first starting port 33 is also referred to as "first pending number", and the number of pending information acquired based on the winning of the second starting port 34 It is also referred to as the "second reserved number", and the total number of the first reserved number and the second reserved number is also referred to as the "total reserved number". After executing step S1601, the process proceeds to step S1602.

In step S1602, confirmation processing is executed. In the confirmation process, a process for enabling the sound and light side MPU 92 to specify whether or not the pending command read this time corresponds to a big hit, whether or not to reach occurrence, etc. is executed. Details of the confirmation process in step S1602 will be described later. After executing step S1602, the process proceeds to step S1603.

In step S1603, deja vu preview processing is executed. In the déjà vu notice process, a process for determining whether or not the above-described conditions for generating the déjà vu notice are satisfied, and if the conditions for generating the déjà vu notice are satisfied, the Executes setting processing for executing an advance notice. Details of the deja vu preview process in step S1603 will be described later. After executing step S1603, this pending command handling process ends.

<Update processing at the time of winning>
Next, update processing at the time of winning will be described. The update process at the time of winning is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the pending command handling process (FIG. 27: S1601).

FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing update processing at the time of winning. In step S1701, it is determined whether or not the pending command read out this time has been transmitted based on the winning to the first start port 33. FIG. In step S1701, if it is determined that the pending command read this time is based on the winning to the first start port 33 (S1701: YES), the process proceeds to step S1702, sound light The update processing of the first reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the side RAM 94 is executed. The first pending number counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of pending information acquired based on the winning to the first start port 33 in the sound and light side MPU 92 . In the process of updating the first pending number counter area, the information in the first pending number counter area is updated to the pending number information included in the pending command read this time. After executing step S1702, the process advances to step S1704.

In step S1701, if it is determined that the pending command read this time was not transmitted based on the winning to the first starting port 33 (S1701: NO), that is, the pending command is the second starting port 34, the process advances to step S1703 to update the second pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound and light side RAM 94. . The second pending number counter area is a counter area for specifying, in the sound and light side MPU 92 , the number of pieces of pending information acquired based on the winning to the second starting port 34 . In the process of updating the second reserved number counter area, the information in the second reserved number counter area is updated to the information of the reserved number included in the command read this time. After executing step S1703, the process proceeds to step S1704.

The reason why steps S1702 and S1703 are performed as described above will be described. In this embodiment, while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, while backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90. not. For this reason, when the power is cut off in a situation where the hold information relating to the winning of the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main controller 60, the hold information is not displayed in the main controller 60. While the information is held in memory, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that there is no hold information. In this case, if a configuration is adopted in which the first pending number counter area or the second pending number counter area is counted up each time a pending command is received in the sound emission control device 90, the main controller 60 actually stores the pending memory. Inconvenience may occur in that the number of on-hold information received does not match the number of on-hold information grasped by the sound emission control device 90 . On the other hand, as in the above-described embodiment, the main controller 60 transmits a hold command including information on the number of holds, and the sound emission control device 90 responds to the hold command each time it receives the hold command. By adopting a configuration in which information on the contained number of reserved items is set in the first reserved number counter area or the second reserved number counter area, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above inconveniences.

In step S1704, update processing of the total pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound and light side RAM 94 is executed. In the total pending number counter area, the sum of the number of pending information acquired based on the winning of the first starting port 33 and the number of pending information acquired based on the winning of the second starting port 34 is displayed. This is a counter area for specifying in the side MPU 92 . In the update process, the information of the total pending number counter area is the sum of the information of the pending number measured in the first pending number counter area and the information of the pending number measured in the second pending number counter area. update to After executing step S1704, the update process at the time of the main prize is ended.

<Confirmation process>
Next, confirmation processing will be described. The confirmation process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the pending command handling process (FIG. 27: S1602). It should be noted that, as described above, if information such as the presence or absence of jackpot winning, the jackpot type, and the presence or absence of reach occurrence is already set in the pending command, this confirmation process can be omitted.

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing confirmation processing. As described above, the confirmation process is a process that is executed when it is determined that a pending command has been received from the main MPU 62 . Processing of each step executed in the confirmation processing will be described below. The contents of each table stored in the reservation confirmation table storage area 93a of the sound and light side ROM 93 described in the following steps are the success/failure table storage area 63a of the main side ROM 63, the distribution table storage area 63b, and the It is the same as the contents of each table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c.

In step S1801, the information of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included in the pending command to be read this time is grasped. After that, the process advances to step S1802 to determine whether or not the current lottery mode is the low-probability mode. Specifically, when the high-probability mode flag is not stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound and light side RAM 94, it is determined that the mode is the low-probability mode, and when the high-probability mode flag is stored, , is not the low-probability mode, that is, it is determined to be the high-probability mode. The high-probability mode flag is stored when a high-probability mode command is received from the main MPU 62 .

In step S1802, if it is determined that the mode is the low-probability mode (S1802: YES), the process proceeds to step S1803, and the low-probability mode propriety table stored in the hold confirmation table storage area 93a of the sound and light side ROM 93 is stored. refer. After that, the process proceeds to step S1805, and as a result of referring to the low-probability mode success/failure table, it is determined whether or not the value information of the big win random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the big win. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1802 that it is not in the low-probability mode (S1802: NO), the process proceeds to step S1804, and the high-probability mode yes/no table stored in the hold confirmation table storage area 93a of the sound/light side ROM 93 See After that, the process proceeds to step S1805, and as a result of referring to the high-probability mode success/failure table, it is determined whether or not the value information of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot.

In step S1805, when it is determined that the information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot (S1805: YES), the process proceeds to step S1806, and the pending command that was read this time The information of the value of the included jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. Thereafter, the process advances to step S1807 to refer to the distribution table stored in the hold confirmation table storage area 93a of the sound and light side ROM 93. FIG. Specifically, when the pending command read this time is the one transmitted based on the winning to the first starting port 33, the distribution table for the first starting port is referred to, and the second If it is transmitted based on the winning to the starting port 34, the distribution table for the second starting port is referred to.

In step S1808, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the value information of the big hit type counter C2 grasped this time corresponds to the probability variable big hit. In step S1808, when it is determined that the probability variable jackpot is supported (S1808: YES), the process proceeds to step S1809, and the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 temporarily stores the probability variable jackpot information. After that, the confirmation process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1808 that the variable probability jackpot is not supported (S1808: NO), the process advances to step S1810 to temporarily store the normal jackpot information in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 . After that, the confirmation process is terminated.

In step S1805, if it is determined that the information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time does not correspond to the jackpot (S1805: NO), proceed to step S1811, to the pending command that was read this time The information of the value of the included reach random number counter C3 is grasped. After that, the process advances to step S1812 to refer to the ready-to-reach determination table stored in the hold confirmation table storage area 93a of the sound and light side ROM 93. FIG. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1813, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value information of the reach random number counter C3 grasped this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

In step S1813, if it is determined that reach occurrence is supported (S1813: YES), the flow advances to step S1814 to temporarily store reach occurrence information in the register of sound and light side MPU 92. FIG. After that, the confirmation process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1813 that the reach occurrence is not supported (S1813: NO), this confirmation process is terminated.

<Déjà vu notice processing>
Next, the déjà vu preview process will be described. The déjà vu notice process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the hold command handling process (FIG. 27: S1603).

FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing the process for prior notice of the sense of sight. In step S1901, it is determined whether or not the pending command read out this time has been transmitted based on the winning to the first start port 33. FIG. In step S1901, if it is determined that the pending command read this time was not transmitted based on the winning to the first starting port 33 (S1901: NO), that is, the winning to the second starting port 34 If it is determined that the message has been transmitted based on the above, the process advances to step S1902.

In step S1902, it is determined whether or not the first déjà vu notice flag is stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the RAM 94 on the sound and light side. The first déjà vu notice flag is stored when the above-described déjà vu notice is started with the hold information based on the winning to the first starting port 33 as a trigger, and is erased when the déjà vu notice ends. is a flag that

If it is determined in step S1902 that the first déjà vu notice flag is stored (S1902: YES), the process advances to step S1903 to erase the first déjà vu notice flag, and the process advances to step S1904. "0" is set in the déjà vu notice counter area of the sound and light side RAM 94 . After that, the process proceeds to step S1905.

In the déjà vu notice counter area, when the déjà vu notice is set to be executed, the sound and light side MPU 92 specifies how many times the déjà vu notice is to be executed after that. It is a measuring means for As will be described later, information on the number of reserved items is set in the déjà vu notice counter area, and updated to be decremented by 1 each time a game round is newly started. Then, when the information stored in the déjà vu notice counter area after the update is the initial value of “0”, the déjà vu notice flag stored at that time is erased.

Here, if the pending command is transmitted based on the winning to the second starting port 34, in other words, if there is a winning to the second starting port 34, the first déjà vu notice flag Explain why you want to clear the . In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the reservation information related to the winning of the second start port 34 is prioritized over the reservation information related to the winning of the first start port 33, so that the second When there is a prize at the starting port 34, the order of the jackpot lottery of the reservation information is changed, and the premise of the already set déjà vu notice with the winning at the first starting port 33 as a trigger collapses. end up Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when there is a prize in the second starting port 34, by erasing the first déjà vu forewarning flag, the premise is collapsed and the déjà vu forewarning is performed. I decided to cancel the execution.

If it is determined in step S1902 that the first déjà vu notice flag is not stored (S1902: NO), the process proceeds to step S1905 without executing steps S1903 and S1904.

In step S1901, if it is determined that the pending command read this time is based on the winning to the first start port 33 (S1901: YES), step S1902, step S1903 and step Without executing S1904, that is, without executing the erasing of the first déjà vu notice flag, the process proceeds to step S1905.

In the processing from step S1905 to step S1911 which will be described below, the processing relating to the jackpot pending flag is executed. Therefore, prior to the explanation of the processing from step S1905 to step S1911, the first erasing counter area and the second erasing counter area used for determining whether or not to erase the jackpot pending flag and the jackpot pending flag will be explained. do.

The jackpot pending flag includes pending information corresponding to the big win in the pending information stored in the first result display portion pending area Ra or the second result display portion pending area Rb of the main controller 60. This is information for specifying it in the sound and light side MPU 92, if there is. In the process of erasing the jackpot pending flag, in a situation where the jackpot pending flag is stored, both the information stored in the first erasing counter area and the second erasing counter area, which will be described later, are initial values of "0". is executed if

In the first erasing counter area, when the reservation information corresponding to the big win is stored in the first result display section reservation area Ra, the reservation information becomes a target for starting the game cycle. It is a measuring means for specifying the timing of erasing from the reservation area Ra by the sound and light side MPU 92 . The information of the reserved number set in the first erasure counter area is, as will be described later, the reserved information stored in the first result display section reserved area Ra (that is, Retained information acquired based on this information) is updated so that 1 is subtracted each time a new game round is started.

The second erasing counter area is used for the second result display section when the reservation information corresponding to the big win is stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb. It is a measuring means for specifying the timing of erasing from the reservation area Rb by the sound and light side MPU 92 . The information of the pending number set in the second erasure counter area is, as will be described later, the pending information stored in the second result display portion pending area Rb (that is, Retained information acquired based on this information) is updated so that 1 is subtracted each time a new game round is started. Hereafter, it returns to description of the process regarding a jackpot pending|holding flag.

In step S1905, it is determined whether or not the pending command read out this time is a pending command corresponding to a big hit. In step S1905, if it is determined that the pending command to be read this time is a pending command corresponding to the jackpot (S1905: YES), the process proceeds to step S1906, the pending command to be read this time is the second It is determined whether or not it is transmitted based on the winning to the 1 start port 33 .

In step S1906, if it is determined that the pending command read this time has been transmitted based on the winning to the first start port 33 (S1906: YES), proceed to step S1907, this time The information of the first reserved number included in the read target reserved command is specified, and the specified information of the first reserved number is set in the first erasure counter area. After executing step S1907, the process advances to step S1909.

In step S1906, if it is determined that the pending command to be read this time was not transmitted based on the winning to the first starting port 33 (S1906: NO), that is, the pending command is the second starting port 34, the process advances to step S1908 to specify the information of the second pending number included in the command to be read this time, and to specify the specified second number. 2 Information on the number of reserved data is set in the second erasure counter area. After executing step S1908, the process advances to step S1909.

In step S1909, it is determined whether or not the sound and light side RAM 94 stores a jackpot pending flag. When it is determined that the jackpot suspension flag is stored in step S1909 (S1909: YES), this suspension command corresponding processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1909 that the jackpot pending flag is not stored (S1909: NO), the process proceeds to step S1910, and the jackpot pending flag is stored in the sound and light side RAM94. After executing step S1910, the process proceeds to step S1912.

In step S1905, if it is determined that the pending command that is read this time is not a pending command corresponding to the jackpot (S1905: NO), the process proceeds to step S1911, and the jackpot pending flag is stored in the sound and light side RAM 94. determine whether or not there is

In step S1911, when it is determined that the jackpot holding flag is not stored in the sound and light side RAM 94 (S1911: NO), the process proceeds to step S1912. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1911 that the jackpot suspension flag is stored in the sound and light side RAM 94 (S1911: YES), this suspension command corresponding process is terminated.

As explained in the processing from step S1905 to step S1911 above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot pending flag is already stored (S1909: YES, S1911: YES), the déjà vu Various settings for executing the notice are not performed. As a result, in a situation where the reservation information corresponding to the big win is already stored in the first result display section reservation area Ra or the second result display section reservation area Rb of the main control device 60, the first start port 33 or the second Even if new hold information is acquired based on the winning at the 2 start port 34, various settings for executing the déjà vu announcement are not performed.

In step S1912, it is determined whether or not the sound and light side RAM 94 stores the first déjà vu notice flag. If it is determined in step S1912 that the first déjà vu notice flag is stored (S1912: YES), this suspension command handling process is terminated. In other words, when the first déjà vu notice flag is stored, the déjà vu notice occurrence lottery process in step S19 is not executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1912 that the first déjà vu notice flag is not stored (S1912: NO), the process proceeds to step S1913.

In step S1913, it is determined whether or not the sound and light side RAM 94 stores the second déjà vu notice flag. If it is determined in step S1913 that the second déjà vu previous notice flag is stored (S1913: YES), this suspension command handling process is terminated. That is, when the second déjà vu notice flag is stored, the déjà vu notice occurrence lottery process in step S1917 is not executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1913 that the second déjà vu notice flag is not stored (S1913: NO), the process proceeds to step S16.

That is, in a situation in which it has already been set to execute the déjà vu announcement based on either the pending information related to the winning of the first starting port 33 or the pending information related to the winning of the second starting port 34. does not make new settings for executing the déjà vu announcement even if a new pending command is received.

In step S1914, it is determined whether or not the pending command read out this time has been transmitted based on the winning to the first start port 33. FIG. In step S1914, if it is determined that the pending command read this time has been transmitted based on the winning to the first start port 33 (S1914: YES), the process proceeds to step S1915, total pending It is determined whether or not the number of pending items counted in the number counter area is two or more.

In step S1915, when it is determined that the total number of pending items is two or more (S1915: YES), the process proceeds to step S1917 to execute a deja vu prediction occurrence lottery process. The details of the déjà vu notice occurrence lottery process will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1915 that the total pending number is not two or more (S1915: NO), this pending command handling process is terminated without executing the déjà vu previous notice occurrence lottery process in step S1917. .

In step S1914, if it is determined that the pending command to be read this time was not transmitted based on the winning to the first starting port 33 (S1914: NO), that is, the pending command is the second starting port 34, the process advances to step S1916 to determine whether or not the number of pending items counted in the second pending number counter area is two or more. .

If it is determined in step S1916 that the second reserved number is two or more (S1916: YES), the process advances to step S1917 to execute a deja vu prediction occurrence lottery process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1916 that the second reserved number is not equal to or greater than 2, the deja vu notice process ends without executing the deja vu notice generation lottery process in step S1917.

That is, when the pending command that is read out this time is transmitted based on the winning to the first start port 33, only when the total pending number is 2 or more, the notice of deja vu Execute the occurrence lottery process. On the other hand, if the pending command read this time was transmitted based on the winning to the second starting port 34, only when the second pending number is 2 or more, the deja vu An advance notice generation lottery process is executed. The reason for this is that the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment executes the déjà vu notice using two or more game rounds. In addition, when the pending command is transmitted based on the winning to the second starting port 34, the reason for using the second pending number as a reference is that in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the second starting port 34 This is because the reservation information acquired by the winning of 1 is prioritized over the reservation information acquired by the winning of the first start port 33 and becomes the object of the jackpot lottery.

<Déjà vu notice occurrence lottery process>
Next, the déjà vu notice occurrence lottery process will be described. The déjà vu notice generation lottery process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the déjà vu notice process (FIG. 30: S1917).

FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing the deja vu prediction generating lottery process. In step S2001, it is determined whether or not the pending command read this time corresponds to the occurrence of a big hit or reach. If it is determined in step S2001 that neither the big hit nor the occurrence of ready-to-win is supported (S2001: NO), this déjà vu notice occurrence lottery process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2001 that the jackpot or ready-to-win event is supported (S2001: YES), the flow advances to step S2002, and a random number counter for déjà vu notification is obtained from the lottery counter area 94c of the sound and light side RAM 94. While reading out the value (numerical information), the déjà vu prediction generation table stored in the déjà vu prediction generation table storage area 93b of the sound and light side ROM 93 is referred to, and in step S2003, the read out déjà vu prediction generation table is stored. It is determined whether or not the random number counter value corresponds to the déjà vu notice occurrence winning.

It should be noted that the probability of winning the déjà vu notice occurrence can be arbitrarily set. For example, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to refer to a déjà vu notice generation table for a big win when a hold command corresponding to a big win is received. The advance notice occurrence table is set so that the pending notice occurrence wins with a probability of 7/10. On the other hand, when a hold command corresponding to the occurrence of reach is received, the déjà vu prediction generation table for reach is referred to. It is set so that the pending advance notice occurrence wins with a probability of 1.

If it is determined in step S2003 that the random number counter value for déjà vu announcement does not correspond to the déjà vu announcement occurrence winning (S2003: NO), this déjà vu announcement lottery process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2003 that the random number counter value for déjà vu notice corresponds to winning of déjà vu notice occurrence (S2003: YES), the conditions for generating déjà vu notice are met. , and the process proceeds to step S2004.

In step S2004, processing for determining the notice effect for the notice of deja vu is executed. Specifically, the random number counter value (numerical information) for the notice effect is read out from the lottery counter area 94c of the sound and light side RAM 94, and is stored in the sound and light side ROM 93 in the notice effect table storage area 93c for the notice effect. A pre-announcement effect table for a pre-announcement feeling is referred to, and a pre-announcement effect for a pre-announcement feeling corresponding to a random number counter value for a pre-announcement effect is determined. The notice effect table for notice of déjà vu contains contents of the notice effect that can be executed within the shortest display duration time among the display duration times stored in the display duration table of the main ROM 63, and a random number counter for notice effect. values are associated with each other and stored. In this embodiment, the random number counter value for notice effect determined by lottery and the notice effect table for notice effect of déjà vu are used to determine the notice effect for notice of déjà vu. The predetermined advance notice effect obtained may be used as the notice effect for the déjà vu notice. In this case, the predetermined advance notice effect is a notice effect that can be executed within the shortest display duration time among the display duration times stored in the display duration table of the main ROM 63 . Also, for example, the notice effect for the present notice of déjà vu is the notice effect A, and the notice effect for the notice of déjà vu that will be decided when the condition for generating the notice of déjà vu next time is satisfied is the notice effect B. In addition, the order of the announcement effect for the announcement of the déjà vu to be determined may be set in advance. In this way, the pachinko machine 10 can intentionally and actively determine the type and content of the forewarning effect for the forewarning to be executed in each game round by adopting various methods.

After step S2004 is executed, the process advances to step S2005 to store the determined type information of the foretelling effect for the foretelling of déjà vu in the foretelling effect storage area for the foretelling of déjà vu of the sound/light side RAM 94 d. After that, the process proceeds to step S2006.

In step S2006, processing for determining a stop symbol for an advance notice of the sense of sight is executed. Specifically, the stop symbol random number counter value (numerical information) is read out from the lottery counter area 94c of the sound/light RAM 94, and is stored in the stop symbol table storage area 93d of the sound/light ROM 93. A stop symbol table for notice of déjà vu is referred to, and a stop symbol corresponding to the value of the random number counter for stop symbol is determined. It should be noted that the stop pattern for the result of losing is determined as the stop pattern for the notice of déjà vu. After step S2006 is executed, the process advances to step S2007 to store the decided type information of the stop pattern for notice of déjà vu in the sound and light side RAM94. After that, the process proceeds to step S2008.

In step S2008, it is determined whether or not the pending command read out this time has been transmitted based on the winning to the first start port 33. FIG. In step S2008, if it is determined that the pending command read this time has been transmitted based on the winning to the first start port 33 (S2008: YES), the process proceeds to step S2009, sound light A first déjà vu notice flag is stored in the various flag storage area 94 a of the side RAM 94 . After that, the flow advances to step S2010 to set the information stored in the total pending number counter area of the sound and light side RAM 94 in the déjà vu preview counter area of the sound and light side RAM 94 . After that, the present déjà vu notice processing is terminated. As a result, a state is set in which the notice of déjà vu should be executed, triggered by the hold information related to the first start port 33 .

In step S2008, if it is determined that the pending command read this time was not transmitted based on the winning to the first start port 33 (S2008: NO), the process proceeds to step S2011, the sound and light side A second déjà vu preview flag is stored in the various flag storage area 94 a of the RAM 94 . After that, the process advances to step S2012 to set the information stored in the second reserved number counter area of the sound and light side RAM 94 in the déjà vu preview counter area of the sound and light side RAM 94 . After that, the present déjà vu notice processing is terminated. As a result, a state is set in which the notice of déjà vu should be executed, triggered by the hold information relating to the second start port 34 .

<Production setting processing>
Next, the effect setting process will be described. The effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the command handling process (FIG. 26: S1504).

FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing effect setting processing. As described above, the effect setting process is a process executed when it is determined that the variation command and the type command are received, and is a process for setting the contents of the effect to be executed in the current game round. . Specific processing of the effect setting processing will be described below.

In step S2101, the variable command received this time is read, information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence and display duration information is specified from the command, the type command received this time is read, and the 16R probability variable jackpot is determined from the command. information, 8R probability variable jackpot information, 16R normal jackpot information, 8R normal jackpot information, or loss result information. Then, in step S2101, from the specified information, information on the presence or absence of jackpot winning, information on the type of jackpot in the case of winning the jackpot, information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence in the case of non-winning in the jackpot, and display duration time information is grasped, and the grasped information is stored in the register of the sound and light side MPU 92 . After executing step S2101, the process proceeds to step S2102.

In step S2102, it is determined whether or not the sound and light side RAM 94 stores a déjà vu notice flag. If it is determined in step S2102 that the déjà vu notice flag is stored (S2102: YES), that is, if the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied, the process advances to step S2103, and the déjà vu To execute the setting processing of the performance corresponding to the notice. In this process, in the current game round in which the déjà vu announcement is to be executed, the announcement effect for the déjà vu announcement determined in S2004 of FIG. 31 is executed, and the déjà vu announcement decided in S2006 of FIG. Set to execute the symbol stop effect using the stop symbol for. The details of the processing for setting the effect corresponding to the preview of the déjà vu will be described later.

If it is determined in step S2102 that the déjà vu notice flag is not stored (S2102: NO), the process advances to step S2104 to execute notice effect occurrence lottery processing. In the notice effect generation lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not the normal notice effect is executed in the current game round. Normal notice effect can occur in any game round when reach display is performed and when reach display is not performed, but when reach display is performed than when reach display is not performed is set to occur with high probability. In addition, in the notice effect generation lottery process, the game round corresponding to the big win is more likely to generate the notice effect than the game round corresponding to the result of losing, and furthermore, the notice effect with a low appearance rate is more likely to occur. lottery. After executing step S2104, the process proceeds to step S2105.

In step S2105, as a result of the announcement effect generation lottery process in step S2104, it is determined whether or not the announcement effect generation is won. In step S2105, when it is determined that the announcement effect generation has been won (step S2105: YES), the process proceeds to step S2106, and the winning announcement effect is set to be executed in the current game round. After that, the process proceeds to step S2107. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2105 that the announcement effect generation has not been won (step S2105: NO), the process proceeds to step S2107 without executing step S2106.

In step S2107, stop symbol setting processing is executed. In the stop symbol setting process, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the current game round is a 16R variable variable jackpot, an 8R variable variable jackpot, a 16R normal jackpot, or an 8R normal jackpot, the same pattern is displayed on the activated line L. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination is established is set as the information of the stop symbol of this time. Specifically, when the result of the jackpot lottery of the game round this time is the 16R probability variable jackpot or the 8R probability variable jackpot, the same combination of odd-numbered symbols can be selected as the combination of the same symbols, and the same Even symbol combinations may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the selection rate is the same for the combination of the same odd-numbered symbols and the combination of the same even-numbered symbols. A configuration in which the ratio is high may be adopted, and the latter may be configured to have a higher selection ratio than the former. Also, the combination of "7" symbols is selected only in the case of a 16R probability variable jackpot. In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game round is the 16R normal jackpot or the 8R normal jackpot, the same combination of even-numbered symbols is selected as the same combination of symbols.

If the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game round is a result of losing, it is determined whether or not the ready-to-win is generated from the content of the command for variation. When it is determined that it corresponds to the occurrence of ready-to-win, it corresponds to the stop result that the combination of the same symbols on the effective line L does not materialize and the combination of the ready-to-win symbols on the effective line L does. information is determined as the information of the result of this stop. On the other hand, when it is determined that it does not correspond to the occurrence of ready-to-win, the result is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbols on the effective line L does not materialize and the combination of the ready-to-win symbols on the effective line L does not materialize. The corresponding information is set as the information of the current stop symbol. After executing step S2107, the process proceeds to step S2108.

In step S2108, processing for determining the variation display pattern of the current game round is executed. In this process, information on the display duration of the current game round is specified from the content of the variable command received this time, and information on the display duration, information on the variable display time included in the display duration, And, a variable display pattern corresponding to the combination of information of the stop symbols specified in step S2107 is selected. When selecting the variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93e of the sound and light side ROM 93 is referred to.

After executing the setting processing of the effect corresponding to the previous notice in step S2103, or after setting the variable display pattern in step S2108, the process proceeds to step S2109.

In step S2109, the type information of the notice effect set in the current game round, the number of execution times of the notice effect, the stop pattern type information, and the variable display pattern type information are set in the effect command. After that, the process advances to step S2110 to transmit the effect command to the display side MPU 102 . The display-side MPU 102 executes processing for displaying the effect contents corresponding to the received effect command on the pattern display device 41 . After executing step S2110, the process proceeds to step S2111, and after executing update processing at the start of fluctuation, this effect setting processing ends. The details of the update process at the start of fluctuation will be described later.

<Processing for Setting Effects Corresponding to Déjà vu Notice>
Next, the process of setting an effect corresponding to the preview of the feeling of déjà vu will be described. The effect setting process corresponding to the previous notice is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the effect setting process (FIG. 32: S2103).

FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing processing for setting an effect corresponding to the previous notice of déjà vu. As described above, this setting process is a process executed when the current game round is one of a plurality of game rounds for which the déjà vu notice is to be executed, and is executed in the current game round. It is a process of setting the advance notice effect, the symbol stop effect, and the variable display pattern. Processing of each step executed in this setting processing will be described below.

In step S2201, the type information of the foretelling effect for foretelling the sense of sight stored in the foretelling effect for foretelling effect for detached sense stored in the memory area 94d of the RAM 94 on the sound and light side is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step S2202, and the kind information of the stop pattern for the notice of déjà vu stored in the sound/light side RAM 94 is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step S2203.

In step S2203, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the déjà vu preview counter area of the sound and light side RAM 94 is "1". That is, it is determined whether or not the game round to be executed this time is the game round related to the hold information in which the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game round related to the hold information in which the condition for generating the déjà vu advance notice is satisfied is the game round related to the occurrence of the big win or reach. Therefore, in the case of the game cycle related to the hold information in which the condition for generating the déjà vu announcement is satisfied, a relatively long display duration time is set.

In step S2203, if it is determined that the value stored in the déjà vu notice counter area is not "1" (S2203: NO), that is, if the game round to be executed this time does not meet the déjà vu notice generation condition. If it is not a game round related to the reserved information that has been satisfied, the process advances to step S2204, and within the display continuation time of the game round to be executed this time, it is possible to execute the notice effect for the déjà vu notice grasped in step S2201 multiple times. Determine whether or not

In step S2204, if it is determined that the forewarning effect for foretelling the sense of vision cannot be executed a plurality of times within the display duration time (S2204: NO), the process proceeds to step S2205, and the foretelling effect for foretelling the sense of vision is reduced by one. set to run times. After that, the process proceeds to step S2208.

If it is determined in step S2204 that the forewarning effect for foretelling the sense of sight can be executed a plurality of times within the display duration time (S2204: YES), the process proceeds to step S2206, where the foretelling effect for foretelling the sense of vision is performed. Set to run multiple times. Specifically, if it is possible to execute the advance notice effect for the forewarning of the feeling of déjà vu twice within the display duration time, the notice effect is set to be executed twice, and the déjà vu effect is set to be executed within the display duration time. When the advance notice effect for advance notice can be executed three times, the advance notice effect is set to be executed three times. Note that the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is set so that the forewarning effect for the foretelling of the feeling of deja vu is executed up to three times in one game round. However, the maximum number of notice effects executed in one game round may be set to one or two times, or may be set to four times or more.

Also, let M be the number of executions of the notice effect for foretelling the déjà vu within the display continuation time in the current game round, and N be the number of actual executions of the notice effect for the foretelling of the sense of déjà vu in the current game round. times, the relationship between M and N is not restricted to M=N. The value of N can be arbitrarily set as long as it satisfies the relationship of M≧N≧1. For example, if the number of times that the notice effect for deja vu preview can be executed within the display duration in the current game round is 5 times, the actual number of times the notice effect for deja vu notice is executed is from 5 times. It can be set arbitrarily within the range of one time. The value of N can be determined by various methods such as determination by lottery or determination using table data in which M and N are associated. In this way, it is possible to intentionally and actively determine the number of executions of the effect element having the same content.

After executing step S2206, the process advances to step S2207, and in the current game turn, after executing the notice effect for notice of déjà vu, the stop pattern for notice of déjà vu grasped in step S2202 is stopped in a pseudo manner. Set to execute symbol pseudo stop effect. After that, the process proceeds to step S2208.

After step S2205 or step S2207 is executed, in step S2208, the stop symbol for déjà vu notice grasped in step S2202 is set as the stop symbol in the current game round. After that, the process proceeds to step S2212.

If it is determined in step S2203 that the value stored in the déjà vu notice counter area is "1" (S2201: YES), that is, the game round to be executed this time meets the conditions for generating the déjà vu notice. is a game cycle related to the reserved information that is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S2209, and the advance notice effect for the déjà vu notice is set to be executed once, and the above-mentioned suggestion effect, battle effect, jackpot or A result presentation corresponding to the result of the deviation is set to be executed in the current game round. As described above, the game rounds related to the pending information in which the conditions for generating the déjà vu announcement are satisfied are the game rounds related to the occurrence of a big hit or reach, so a relatively long display duration time is set. When selecting each type of suggestive effect, battle effect, and result effect, within the time required for the notice effect for deja vu notice from the display duration set in this game round Select a combination of viable renditions. After executing step S2209, the process proceeds to step S2210.

In step S2210, in the current game turn, after executing the notice effect for foretelling the sense of sight, the stop pattern for notice of sense of sight grasped in step S2202 is simulated to stop. set to After that, the process proceeds to step S2211.

In step S2211, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game round is set. The details of this stop symbol setting process are the same as the process in step S2107 of FIG. 32, so the description thereof is omitted. After that, the process proceeds to step S2212.

In step S2212, processing for determining the variation display pattern of the current game round is executed. In this process, information on the display duration of the current game round is specified from the content of the variable command received this time, and information on the display duration, information on the variable display time included in the display duration, And, the variable display pattern corresponding to the combination of the information of the stop symbol for the preview of the déjà vu specified in step S2202 is selected. When selecting the variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93e of the sound and light side ROM 93 is referred to. After executing step S2212, this setting process ends.

<Update processing at the start of fluctuation>
Next, update processing at the start of fluctuation will be described. The update process at the start of fluctuation is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the effect setting process (FIG. 32: S2111).

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing update processing at the start of fluctuation. In the processing from step S2301 to step S2311 described below, along with the start of the game cycle, the counter values of the various reserved number counter areas are updated, and the processing for erasing the big hit reserved flag is executed.

The jackpot pending flag is, as already described, stored in the pending information stored in the first result display portion pending area Ra or the second result display portion pending area Rb of the main controller 60. A flag that is stored if the corresponding pending information is included. Further, when the hold information corresponding to the big win is stored in the first erasing counter area, what is the order in which the hold information becomes the object for starting the game round in the first result display holding area Ra? Information is stored for specifying whether the In addition, when the hold information corresponding to the big win is stored in the second erasing counter area, what is the order in which the hold information becomes the object for starting the game round in the second result display portion hold area Rb? Information is stored for specifying whether the Therefore, when both the value of the first erasure counter area and the value of the second erasure counter area are "0" as the initial value, the first result display section reservation area Ra of main controller 60 or It means that the pending information corresponding to the big win is not included in the pending information stored in the second result display portion pending area Rb, and in this case, the big win pending flag is erased. Processing of each step executed in the update processing at the start of fluctuation will be described below.

In step S2301, the information in the total pending number counter area is updated so that the total pending number stored in the total pending number counter area of the sound and light side RAM 94 is decremented by one. After that, the process proceeds to step S2302.

In step S2302, it is determined whether or not the variation command received this time is the first variation command. If it is determined in step S2302 that it is the command for the first variation (S2302: YES), the process advances to step S2303 to subtract 1 from the pending number stored in the first pending number counter area of the sound and light side RAM 94. The information in the first reserved number counter area is updated as follows. After that, the process proceeds to step S2304.

In step S2304, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the first erasure counter area of the sound and light side RAM 94 is 1 or more. If it is determined in step S2304 that the value stored in the first erasure counter area is greater than or equal to 1 (S2304: YES), the process advances to step S2305 to determine the value stored in the first erasure counter area. is decremented by 1, the information in the first erasure counter area is updated. After that, the process proceeds to step S2309.

If it is determined in step S2304 that the value stored in the first erasure counter area is not equal to or greater than 1 (S2304: NO), the process advances to step S2312 without executing steps S2305 and 09 to S2311.

If it is determined in step S2302 that it is not the first variation command (S2302: NO), that is, if the variation command received this time is the second variation command, the process proceeds to step S2306, and Information in the second reserved number counter area is updated so that one is subtracted from the reserved number stored in the second reserved number counter area. After that, the process proceeds to step S2307.

In step S2307, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the second erasure counter area of the sound and light side RAM 94 is "1" or more. If it is determined in step S2307 that the value stored in the second erasure counter area is 1 or more (S2307: YES), the process advances to step S2308 to determine the value stored in the second erasure counter area. is decremented by 1, the information in the second erasure counter area is updated. After that, the process proceeds to step S2309.

If it is determined in step S2307 that the value stored in the second erasure counter area is not equal to or greater than 1 (S2307: NO), the process advances to step S2312 without executing steps S2308, 09 to S2311.

In step S2309, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the first erasure counter area is "0". If it is determined in step S2309 that the value stored in the first erasure counter area is "0" (S2309: YES), the process proceeds to step S2310. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2309 that the value stored in the first erasure counter area is not "0" (S2309: NO), the process proceeds to step S2312 without executing steps S2310 and S2311. .

In step S2310, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the second erasure counter area is "0". In step S2310, when it is determined that the value stored in the second erasing counter area is "0" (S2310: YES), the process proceeds to step S2311 to erase the jackpot pending flag. That is, when the value stored in the first erasing counter area is "0" and the value stored in the second erasing counter area is "0", the jackpot pending flag is erased. . After that, the process proceeds to step S2312. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2310 that the value stored in the second erasure counter area is not "0" (S2310: NO), the process proceeds to step S2312 without executing step S2311.

In the processing from step S2312 to step S2317 which will be described next, processing relating to erasure of the déjà vu notice flag is executed. Specific processing will be described below.

In step S2312, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the déjà vu preview counter area of the sound and light side RAM 94 is "1" or more. If it is determined in step S2312 that the value stored in the déjà vu preview counter area is not greater than or equal to "1" (S2312: NO), the update process at the start of this variation ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2312 that the value stored in the déjà vu preview counter area is greater than or equal to "1" (S2312: YES), the process proceeds to step S2313.

In step S2313, the information in the déjà vu announcement counter area is updated so that the value stored in the déjà vu announcement counter area of the sound/light RAM 94 is decremented by one. After that, the process proceeds to step S2314.

In step S2314, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the déjà vu preview counter area of the sound and light side RAM 94 is "0". If it is determined in step S2314 that the value stored in the déjà vu preview counter area is not "0", the update process at the start of this fluctuation ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value stored in the déjà vu notice counter area is "0", the process advances to step S2315.

In step S2315, it is determined whether or not the variation command received this time is the first variation command. If it is determined in step S2315 that the command is the first variation command, the flow advances to step S2316 to erase the first déjà vu notice flag in the sound/light side RAM 94 . After that, the update process at the start of this fluctuation ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2315 that it is not the first variation command, that is, if the variation command received this time is the second variation command, the flow advances to step S2317 to display the second variation command in the sound and light side RAM 94. Clear the warning flag. After that, the update process at the start of this fluctuation ends.

<Various processing executed in the display control device>
Next, processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 mainly includes a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and a main processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound emission control device 90. There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing of an image for one frame is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of commands and detection of V interrupt signals. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command interrupt processing is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step S2401, initialization processing is executed. Specifically, first, processing for initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107 . Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107 and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107 . Also, perform other necessary settings for initialization. After that, the process proceeds to step S2402.

In step S2402, interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, in the main processing, infinite loop processing is executed until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, which will be described below, are executed in accordance with the reception of a command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt processing is processing that is executed each time a command is received from the sound emission control device 90 .

<Command interrupt processing>
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. In step S2501, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in work RAM 104 . Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. FIG. As described above, V interrupt processing is processing that is executed when a V interrupt signal from VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command storage area are executed by the command interrupt process. Execute the displayed instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed and that is transmitted to the MPU 102 . Therefore, the MPU 102 executes V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, so that drawing instructions to the VDP 105 are issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame worth of image is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to suppress the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information is stored. Details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step S2601, command handling processing is executed. In the command handling process, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interruption process (FIG. 36) are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when a performance command is stored, image drawing and display control is started so that the performance mode specified by the performance command is displayed on the pattern display device 41.例文帳に追加

If the effect operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, and if it is determined that it is the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, the effect operation is performed. Control of image drawing and display is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the depression of the button 24 is displayed on the pattern display device 41 . On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the period for accepting pressing of the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

In the command processing (S2601), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the state of the effect such as the advance notice effect and the stop pattern set by the sound emission control device 90, and display the effect image according to the state. The rendering of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the device 41 .

In step S2602, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, based on the type of screen to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 set by the command handling process (S2601), etc., the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the pattern display device 41 is specified. . After that, the process proceeds to step S2603.

In step S2603, task processing is executed. In the task processing, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 specified by the display setting processing (S2602), the type of character (sprite, display object) that constitutes the image is determined. Along with specifying, for each character (sprite), various parameters required for drawing, such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc., are determined. After that, the process proceeds to step S2604.

In step S2604, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, which are determined by the task process (S2603), are transmitted to the VDP 105. FIG. The VDP 105 executes an image drawing process based on these pieces of information, and together with a drive signal to cause the pattern display device 41 to display an image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt process. The image data is transmitted to the pattern display device 41 . After that, the process advances to step S2605, and after executing other processes, the V interrupt process ends.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the effect element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, the player is told that the effect element of the same content is executed a plurality of times. It can give a sense of déjà vu. A player who has recognized the sense of déjà vu has a sense of expectation that the sense of déjà vu has a special meaning, for example, that a privilege may be given. Furthermore, when the player experiences winning a jackpot after the performance element of the same content is executed multiple times, the performance element is executed in anticipation of the performance element of the same content being executed multiple times. Every time it is done, I always pay attention to the production elements with high expectations. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the performance element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, and to suitably increase the degree of attention of the player to the performance element which is sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game. can be achieved.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the condition for generating the advance notice of déjà vu is satisfied and the advance notice of déjà vu is to be executed, the type and content of the effect element to be executed multiple times are intended. can be set Also, it is possible to intentionally set the number of executions of the effect element having the same content. Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to arbitrarily set the occurrence probability (occurrence frequency) of the déjà vu announcement when a big win is won or when a reach occurs.

Incidentally, the pachinko machine 10 may control the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed multiple times. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may increase the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed multiple times over time. A specific example will be described below with reference to the drawings.

FIG. 38 is a time chart showing an example of increasing the number of effect elements having the same content executed multiple times over time. In the example shown in FIG. 38, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect element A in the first game round P01 and also executes the effect element A in the next game round P02. The number of elements is one. The pachinko machine 10 further executes the effect element B in addition to the effect element A in the game round P02, and executes the effect element A and the effect element B in the next game round P03. The number of content rendering elements is two. That is, the pachinko machine 10 increases the number of effect elements having the same contents to be executed multiple times with the lapse of time. In this way, the number of effect elements for which the player recognizes the sense of déjà vu increases with the lapse of time, so the player's sense of expectation can be increased with the lapse of time.

In the example shown in FIG. 38, control to increase the number of effect elements having the same content executed multiple times has been described, but control to decrease the number may be performed. The pachinko machine 10 increases or decreases the player's expectations by increasing or decreasing the number of performance elements having the same content executed a plurality of times, or by giving an intonation to the player's expectations. change can be given.

B. Second embodiment:
Next, a second embodiment will be described. The difference between the present embodiment and the above-described first embodiment is the content of the processing relating to the advance notice of the sense of sight. In the following description, description will be made mainly on the advance notice of déjà vu performed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. In addition, description is abbreviate|omitted about the structure same as the said 1st Embodiment.

FIG. 39 is a time chart showing an example of an advance notice executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment. FIGS. 39A and 39B show examples 1 and 2, which are two examples of the advance notice of déjà vu in this embodiment.

In example 1, at the timing when the total reserved number CRN is 2, game balls enter the first starting port 33 and the total reserved number CRN becomes 3, and the reservation information related to the winning indicates that the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is given. It shows the case when it is satisfied. That is, the game round P03 indicated as the third game round is the game round related to the hold information that satisfies the condition for generating the déjà vu notice.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the hold information relating to the game round P03 satisfies the condition for generating the advance notice of déjà vu, the game round prior to the game round P03 related to the hold information satisfying the condition for causing the advance notice of déjà vu The content of the game effect A executed at P01 is stored. That is, the pachinko machine 10 stores the contents of the game effect A to be executed in the game round P01 to be executed after determining that the pending information of the game round P03 satisfies the occurrence of the déjà vu advance notice. Then, the game round P02 is a game round after the game round P01 in which the content of the game effect A is stored and before the game round P03 related to the holding information that satisfies the condition for generating the déjà vu advance notice. And in the game round P03, the content of the game effect A stored in the game round P01 is reproduced.

In the first embodiment, the same "effect element" is executed a plurality of times as the déjà vu notice. A "game presentation" is executed a plurality of times as one unit. That is, for a certain period of time in each of the game rounds P02 and P03, exactly the same game effects as in the game round P01 are reproduced as they are. By doing so, it is possible to suitably give the player a sense of déjà vu.

Further, in the game round P03, after the game effect A is executed, the suggestive effect, the battle effect, and the result effect (in this example, the victory effect) are executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment. Then, after the big winning symbols are stopped in the game round P03, the big winning performance is executed.

Specific processing will be described. When it is determined that the hold information related to the game round P03 satisfies the generation condition of the déjà vu notice, the sound emission control device 90 of the pachinko machine 10 executes the game production A for the game production A of the game round P01 to be executed thereafter. Stores various setting data for The various setting data includes setting data for operating hardware that actually executes effects such as various lamps 47, data for setting commands to be transmitted to the display control device 100, and the like.

After the game round P01 ends, the sound emission control device 90 controls the hardware (various lamp 47, speaker 46, etc.). Immediately before the game round P02 starts, the game effect B to be executed is determined based on the hold information relating to the game round P02. The game performance A is preferentially executed without executing it in a mode appearing in the behavior of wear. The processing based on the setting data of the game effect B is executed as an internal process within a range that does not appear in the behavior of the hardware (various lamps 47, speakers 46, etc.) that executes the game effect.

As shown in FIG. 39A, when the display duration time of the game round P02 is longer than the time for executing the game effect A, the sound emission control device 90 determines that the game is played in the game round P02. At the same time when the execution of the performance A is finished, the processing based on the set data of the game performance B, which has been executed as internal processing within the range that does not appear as the behavior of hardware, is switched to the processing that appears as the behavior of hardware. That is, in the game round P02, the player recognizes that the game effect B is executed from the middle after the game effect A is executed. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment. In this manner, the pachinko machine 10 executes the déjà vu announcement shown in the first example.

Next, an example 2 of the déjà vu notice according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 39(B). In Example 2, similarly to Example 1, game balls enter the first starting port 33 at the timing when the total reserved number CRN is 2, and the total reserved number CRN becomes 3. It shows the case where the condition for generating the warning notice is satisfied. That is, the game round P13 shown as the third game round is the game round related to the hold information that satisfies the conditions for generating the déjà vu advance notice.

In example 2, the sound emission control device 90 stores the content of the game effect C1 which is the game effect during a part of the game effect C0 executed in the game round P11. Then, a game round P12 which is a game round after the game round P11 in which the content of the game effect C1 is stored and which is a game round before the game round P13 related to the holding information satisfying the condition for generating the déjà vu advance notice. And in the game round P13, the content of the stored game effect C1 is reproduced. Specifically, since the display duration time of the game round P12 is shorter than the time required to execute the game effect C1, the sound emission control device 90 causes the game of the part of the period of the stored game effect C1 to be played in the game round P12. A game performance C1a, which is a performance, is reproduced. On the other hand, since the display continuation time of the game round P13 is longer than the time required to execute the game performance C1, the sound emission control device 90 reproduces the entire contents of the stored game performance C1 in the game round P13. Further, in the game round P13, after the game effect C1 is executed, the suggestion effect, the battle effect, and the result effect (in this example, the victory effect) are executed. Then, after the big winning symbols are stopped in the game round P03, the big winning performance is executed.

As a specific process, when it is determined that the hold information related to the game round P13 satisfies the conditions for generating the advance notice of déjà vu, the sound emission control device 90 determines that the game to be executed after the conditions for generating the advance notice of déjà vu are satisfied. It stores various setting data for executing a game performance C1 which is a game performance during a part of the game performance C in the cycle P11. The various setting data includes setting data for operating hardware that actually executes effects such as various lamps 47, data for setting commands to be transmitted to the display control device 100, and the like. In this embodiment, when the length (time) of the game effect to be stored is set in advance, since the display duration time of the game effect C0 is longer than the set length, part of the game time C0 A game performance C1, which is a game performance for a period, is stored.

Furthermore, since the display duration time of the game round P12 is shorter than the time required to execute the stored game effect C1, the sound emission control device 90 controls the game round P12 to be a part of the stored game effect C1. The game performance C1a is reproduced. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment. In this manner, the pachinko machine 10 performs the advance notice of déjà vu shown in the second example.

In the above description, the sound emission control device 90 stores the setting data transmitted to the display control device 100, thereby reproducing the game effect executed in the game round P01 in the game rounds after the game round P01. However, the display control device 100 stores the moving image data reproduced by the symbol display device 41 in the game round P01 as it is in the buffer, and in the game rounds after the game round P01, the stored moving image data is displayed again. The device 100 may transmit to the pattern display device 41 and reproduce.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the content of the executed game effect is stored and reproduced, the same game effect can be played for at least a part of the period. person will experience. Therefore, it is possible to suitably give the player a sense of déjà vu.

Also, as in the first embodiment, the player who recognizes the sense of déjà vu may have a special meaning for the sense of déjà vu, for example, may be given a privilege. I come to have a sense of expectation that there will be. When the player experiences that the privilege is given after the game effect of the same content is executed multiple times, the game effect is executed in anticipation of the game effect of the same content being executed multiple times. Every time I play, I always pay attention to the game production with a high sense of expectation. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the game performance of the same content is executed a plurality of times, and to suitably increase the degree of attention of the player to the game performance which is sequentially executed, thereby improving the amusement of the game. can be achieved.

As shown in FIGS. 39A and 39B, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 provides the same suggestive effect to the player that the same game effect has been reproduced. is executed after the game effect of the contents is reproduced. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the game performance of the same content has been reproduced, and to convince the player that the reproduction of the game performance of the same content has a special meaning. be able to.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment may not select the operation acceptance effect including the content suggesting acceptance of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 by the player as the target of the game effect to be stored and reproduced. When the operation acceptance effect is reproduced as a game effect, it may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a sense of déjà vu. Since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment does not select the operation acceptance effect as the game effect to be stored and reproduced, it is possible to suppress the execution of different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. It is possible to reliably give the player a sense of déjà vu.

C. Third embodiment:
Next, a third embodiment will be described. The difference between the present embodiment and the above-described first embodiment is the content of the processing relating to the advance notice of the sense of sight. In the following description, description will be made mainly on the advance notice of déjà vu performed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. In addition, description is abbreviate|omitted about the structure same as the said 1st Embodiment.

FIG. 40 is a time chart showing an example of an advance notice executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment. FIGS. 40A and 40B show examples 1 and 2, which are two examples of the advance notice of déjà vu in this embodiment. In example 1, at the timing when the total reserved number CRN is 3, game balls enter the first starting port 33 and the total reserved number CRN becomes 4, and the reservation information related to the winning indicates that the condition for generating the déjà vu advance notice is satisfied. It shows the case when it is satisfied. That is, the game round P04 indicated as the fourth game round is the game round related to the hold information that satisfies the conditions for generating the déjà vu notice.

In the pachinko machine 10 in Example 1, when the hold information relating to the game round P04 satisfies the conditions for generating the advance notice of déjà vu, the game rounds P04 and earlier related to the hold information satisfying the conditions for producing the advance notice of déjà vu are continuously played. The total time of the shortest display continuation times that can be determined as the display continuation times T1, T2, T3, and T4 of the game times P01, the game times P02, the game times P03, and the game times P04 is calculated. The actually determined display duration of each of the game rounds P01 to P04 is Tre (Tre=T1+T2+T3+T4), and the shortest display duration that can be determined as the display duration of each of the game rounds P01 to P04. Assuming that the total time is Tsu, the relationship Tsum≦Tre is established.

Then, the pachinko machine 10, until the game round P04 related to the holding information that satisfies the generation condition of the déjà vu advance notice is completed, produces the effect element of the same content that can be executed multiple times within the calculated total time Tsum. Run multiple times. In the example 1 shown in FIG. 40, the pachinko machine 10 has effect elements of the same content which can be executed multiple times within the time Tsum which is equal to or less than the time Tre which is the display duration time of each of the game rounds P01 to P04 actually determined. A, effect element B, and effect element C are executed. Further, in the game round P04, after the game effect A is executed, the suggestion effect, the battle effect, and the result effect (in this example, the victory effect) are executed.

The pachinko machine 10 of Example 1 executes the effect element A four times, the effect element B three times, and the effect element C twice within the time Tsum. More specifically, the effect elements to be executed multiple times are first effect element A only, then effect element A and effect element B, and then effect element A, effect element B, and effect element C, and so on. To increase the number of performance elements having the same contents to be executed a plurality of times with the lapse of time.

Further, as shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 10 of Example 1 executes the effect element A that is executed for the second, third, and fourth times across game rounds. In other words, the timing at which the variable display of symbols is stopped is different from the timing at which the performance element A ends once. Description will be made below with reference to FIG.

FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display surface 41a when the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is executing the déjà vu notice. In the present embodiment, the display surface 41a is divided into a display area 41aS and a display area 41aL when the déjà vu preview is executed. Then, in the display area 41aS, the variable display and stop display of the symbols are executed. The variable display and stop display of the symbols in the display area 41aS are executed in the same cycle as the display duration time of each game round P01 to P04.

On the other hand, in the display area 41aL, displays corresponding to the effect element A, the effect element B, and the effect element C are displayed. As the effect element A, for example, a visual effect element using the entire display area 41aL is displayed. More specifically, a moving image is displayed as the background image of the display area 41aL, or a moving image that is a combination of a background image and an object image displayed in front of the background image is displayed. Effect element B and effect element C include, for example, a cut-in notice effect in which a predetermined image is displayed in front of a background image, an object notice effect in which a predetermined object image is displayed in front of a background image, and a normal background image. A background change notice effect that changes to a different mode from the time, a role announcement effect that causes a specified role object to perform a specified action, a lamp light emission effect that causes various lamps to emit light in a specified pattern, and a pattern row that is scrolled in a specified scroll pattern. There are a variation performance of symbol rows, a ready-to-win performance of varying the remaining one symbol row in a state where two identical symbols are stopped on at least one effective line, and the like. Incidentally, the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment executes the jackpot effect executed after the game round P04 is completed by displaying a moving image using the entire display surface 41a.

As described with reference to FIG. 41, for example, the display surface 41a is divided into the display area 41aS and the display area 41aL. By executing the display at different cycles, the cycle of the variable display and stop display of the symbols (that is, the cycle synchronized with the actual display duration), the effect element A, the effect element B and the effect element C are executed. It is possible to make the period different.

Next, an example 2 of the déjà vu preview according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 40(B). In Example 2, similarly to Example 1, game balls enter the first starting port 33 at the timing when the total number of reservations CRN is 3, the total number of reservations CRN becomes 4, and the reservation information related to the winning becomes 4. It shows the case where the condition for generating the warning notice is satisfied. That is, the game round P14 shown as the fourth game round is the game round related to the hold information that satisfies the conditions for generating the déjà vu advance notice.

In example 2, the time required for effect element A, which is to be executed multiple times, is longer than the display duration of game round P11. That is, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect element A once across game rounds. The pachinko machine 10 of Example 2 executes the effect element A as a effect element that can be executed three times in the total time Tsum of the shortest display duration that can be determined as the display duration of the four game times P11 to P14. . As shown in Example 2, the number of game rounds required to execute the effect element with the same content multiple times (in Example 2, the number of game rounds is 4) and the number of times the effect element with the same content is executed (Example 2 However, it may be different from the effect element A three times). The type of effect element to be executed multiple times as the same content and the number of executions thereof may be determined according to the value of the calculated total time Tsum. In this case, the table data that associates the total time Tsum with the type of effect element and the number of times of execution may be used to determine the type of effect element to be executed multiple times as the same content and the number of times of execution thereof.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the same content that can be executed multiple times within the total time (Tsum) of the shortest display duration that can be determined as the display duration of each game round Since the performance element is executed, one performance element to be executed multiple times can be completed within the display duration time (T1, T2, T3, T4) which is the time actually required for one game. Not restricted. In other words, it is possible to execute the effect element of the same content multiple times across a plurality of successive game rounds before the game round related to the hold information that satisfies the conditions for generating the déjà vu notice. As shown in Example 2, it is also possible to execute one performance element A, which is to be executed multiple times, across game rounds. Therefore, it is possible to select an effect element to be executed a plurality of times without considering the relationship between the execution time of one effect element and the display duration time of one game.

Furthermore, since the effect element with the same content that can be executed multiple times within the total time (Tsum) of the shortest determinable display duration is executed multiple times, the effect element with the same content is executed multiple times. The required time is less than the total time (Tre) of the actual display duration of each game round. Therefore, when the performance element of the same content is executed a plurality of times across a plurality of consecutive game rounds before the game round related to the holding information that satisfies the conditions for generating the déjà vu advance notice, it is possible to prevent the lack of time. It is possible to avoid this and reliably execute the production element with the same content a plurality of times.

In addition, as in the first embodiment, since the effect element with the same content is executed a plurality of times (at least twice), the player will not feel that the effect element with the same content has been executed a plurality of times. It can give you a sense of déjà vu. A player who has recognized the sense of déjà vu has a sense of expectation that the sense of déjà vu has a special meaning, for example, that a privilege may be given. When the player experiences that the privilege is granted after the performance element with the same content is executed multiple times, the performance element is executed in anticipation of the performance element with the same content being executed multiple times. Every time I play, I always have a high sense of expectation and pay attention to the production elements. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the performance element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, and to suitably increase the degree of attention of the player to the performance element which is sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game. can be achieved.

As shown in FIGS. 40A and 40B, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 provides the same suggestive effect to the player that the effect element of the same content has been reproduced. Executes after the effect element with the contents of is executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect element of the same content is executed multiple times, and to inform the player that the effect element of the same content is executed multiple times has a special meaning. can convince people.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment may not select the operation acceptance effect element including the content suggesting acceptance of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 by the player as the effect element to be executed multiple times. When the operation acceptance effect element is executed multiple times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a sense of déjà vu. Since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment does not select the operation acceptance effect element as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times, it is possible to suppress the execution of effect elements with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. It is possible to reliably give the player a sense of déjà vu.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 is composed of a display of a moving image as a background image of the display area 41aL, and a combination of the background image and an object image displayed in front of the background image as effect elements to be executed a plurality of times with the same content. Video display, cut-in notice effect, notice effect by displaying object images such as predetermined characters in front of the background image, background change notice effect that changes the background image in a different manner than usual, reach effect, In addition, various production elements such as production by physically moving characters provided on the front door frame 14 and the game board 30, production by lighting and blinking of various lamps 47, etc. can give you a feeling. Therefore, it is possible to direct the player's attention to various effect elements, whether or not the same effect element is executed a plurality of times.

The pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment controls the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed multiple times. In Example 1 of the present embodiment, the effect element A is executed first, the number of effect elements having the same content is one, and then the game effect B is executed, and the number of effect elements having the same content is reduced to two. Then, the effect element C is executed, and the number of effect elements having the same content becomes three. In this embodiment, control is performed to increase the number of effect elements having the same content that are executed multiple times, but control may be performed to decrease the number. The pachinko machine 10 increases or decreases the expectation of the player by increasing or decreasing the number of performance elements having the same contents to be executed multiple times, or by giving an intonation to the expectation. change can be given.

In addition, in Example 1 of the present embodiment, only the effect element A is first, then the effect element A and the effect element B, and then the effect element A, the effect element B, and the effect element C, and so on. During the period from when it is determined that the conditions for generating the feeling of advance notice are satisfied until the game round (game round P04) related to the hold information that satisfies the conditions for generating the feeling of déjà vu is completed, the same content is executed multiple times. The number of production elements is increased with the lapse of time. Therefore, since the number of effect elements for which the player recognizes the sense of déjà vu increases with the lapse of time, the expectation of the player can be increased with the lapse of time.

D. Fourth embodiment:
Next, a fourth embodiment will be described. The difference between the present embodiment and the above-described first embodiment is the content of the processing relating to the advance notice of the sense of sight. In the following description, description will be made mainly on the advance notice of déjà vu performed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. In addition, description is abbreviate|omitted about the structure same as the said 1st Embodiment. Specific processing in this embodiment will be described below.

FIG. 42 is a time chart showing an example of an advance notice executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. In the first embodiment, the determination as to whether or not the condition for generating the déjà vu advance notice based on the pending information is satisfied is performed before the pending information becomes the target of the big winning lottery. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, it is determined whether or not the condition for generating the déjà vu advance notice based on the pending information is satisfied when the pending information becomes the target of the big winning lottery. That is, a determination as to whether or not a condition for generating a déjà vu preview based on the hold information is satisfied, and a big winning lottery based on the hold information are performed immediately before the start of the game round P01 related to the hold information.

Further, in the first embodiment, as an embodiment of the déjà vu notice, the performance element having the same content is executed a plurality of times over a plurality of game rounds. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, as a form of advance notice, an effect element A, an effect element B, and an effect element C that can be executed multiple times during the display duration time of the game round. , is executed a plurality of times in one game round P01 related to the holding information determined to satisfy the condition for generating the déjà vu notice. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect element A four times, the effect element B three times, and the effect element C twice in the game round P01. More specifically, the effect elements to be executed multiple times are first effect element A only, then effect element A and effect element B, and then effect element A, effect element B, and effect element C, and so on. To increase the number of performance elements having the same contents to be executed a plurality of times with the lapse of time.

As in the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment executes the effect element A a plurality of times with a suggestive effect suggesting to the player that the effect element of the same content has been executed a plurality of times. run later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 executes a battle effect and a result effect (victory effect) after executing the suggestive effect. Then, after the game round P01 ends, a big win effect is executed.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in at least one game round, an effect element that can be executed multiple times during the display duration of the game round is displayed multiple times with the same content. Since it is executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of déjà vu in one game. Also, as in the first embodiment, since the effect element with the same content is executed a plurality of times, the player may experience a sense of déjà vu that the effect element with the same content has been executed a plurality of times. can give. A player who has recognized the sense of déjà vu has a sense of expectation that the sense of déjà vu has a special meaning, for example, that a privilege may be given. Furthermore, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the effect element with the same content is executed multiple times, the player anticipates that the effect element with the same content will be executed multiple times, and the effect element is executed. Every time it is executed, they always pay attention to the production element with a high sense of expectation. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the performance element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, and to suitably increase the degree of attention of the player to the performance element which is sequentially executed, thereby improving the amusement of the game. can be achieved.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestive effect suggesting to the player that the effect element of the same content has been executed a plurality of times after executing the effect element of the same content a plurality of times. do. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect element of the same content is executed multiple times, and to inform the player that the effect element of the same content is executed multiple times has a special meaning. can convince people.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment may not select the operation acceptance effect element including the content suggesting acceptance of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 by the player as the effect element to be executed multiple times. When the operation acceptance effect element is executed multiple times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a sense of déjà vu. Since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment does not select the operation acceptance effect element as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times, it is possible to suppress the execution of effect elements with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. It is possible to reliably give the player a sense of déjà vu.

The pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment controls the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed multiple times. In this embodiment, the effect element A is executed first, the number of effect elements having the same contents is one, the game effect B is executed next, the number of effect elements having the same contents becomes two, and then Then, the effect element C is executed, and the number of effect elements having the same content becomes three. In the present embodiment, control is performed to increase the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed multiple times, but control may be performed to decrease the number. The pachinko machine 10 increases or decreases the expectation of the player by increasing or decreasing the number of performance elements having the same contents to be executed a plurality of times, or by giving an intonation to the expectation. change can be given.

Also, in this embodiment, only the effect element A is executed first, then the effect element A and the effect element B, and then the effect element A, the effect element B, and the effect element C, and so on. The number of production elements in the contents is increased with the lapse of time. Therefore, since the number of effect elements for which the player recognizes the sense of déjà vu increases with the lapse of time, the expectation of the player can be increased with the lapse of time.

E. Fifth embodiment:
Next, a sixth embodiment will be described. The difference between the present embodiment and the above-described first embodiment is the content of the processing relating to the advance notice of the sense of sight. In the following description, description will be made mainly on the advance notice of déjà vu performed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. In addition, description is abbreviate|omitted about the structure same as the said 1st Embodiment.

In the above-described embodiment, the display duration time of each game cycle is not controlled based on the determination of whether or not to execute the déjà vu notice. In the present embodiment, when executing the déjà vu notice, for at least two game rounds out of the game rounds before the game rounds related to the hold information in which the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied, Control is performed so as to ensure a predetermined length of display continuation time. Then, in each game round in which the display duration of a predetermined length is ensured, the effect element having the same content that can be executed within the display duration of the predetermined length is executed. A specific description will be given below.

FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an outline of processing executed by the main controller 60 and the sound emission control device 90 of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, the main controller 60 executes the content of processing that was executed by the sound emission control device 90 as the hold command handling processing in the first embodiment. That is, main controller 60 executes the déjà vu advance notice generation lottery process. Then, when the lottery for generating the déjà vu notice is won, for example, when the déjà vu notice is executed using three game rounds, the display duration of the three game rounds is determined as the déjà vu. Reserve a certain length for the execution of the notice. Specifically, in the main controller 60, when determining the display continuation time of each of the three game rounds in which the déjà vu notice is to be executed, the value of the variation type counter CS related to each of the three game rounds, In collation with the display duration table stored in the display duration table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, the display duration table stored in advance in the display duration table storage area 63d as the display duration table used for collation is executed. Use the display duration table for

The main controller 60 controls and determines the display duration time of the three game rounds to the length for executing the notice of déjà vu, and then emits sound using information on the determined display duration time of each game round as a command. Send to control device 90 . The sound emission control device 90 determines the execution elements of the same content that can be executed within the display duration time of each game cycle, the length of which is secured for execution of the déjà vu notice in the main control device 60 . By doing so, the length of the display continuation time of the game round can be controlled for execution of the déjà vu notice.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a predetermined length of display continuation time is secured for execution of the déjà vu notice, and a predetermined length of display continuation time is secured. Since the performance element of the same executable content is executed in each game round, the shortage of the time required for executing the same performance element is avoided in each game round, and the same content is ensured in each game round. can be executed.

In addition, the effect elements used for the déjà vu notice include a cut-in notice effect in which a predetermined image is displayed in front of the background image, an object notice effect in which a predetermined object image is displayed in front of the background image, and a background image. Background change notice effect that changes in a manner different from normal time, character object notice effect that causes a predetermined character to perform a predetermined action, lamp light emission effect that causes various lamps to emit light in a predetermined pattern, and pattern rows in a predetermined scroll pattern symbol row variation production to change the pattern row variation effect, reach performance to change the remaining one symbol row in a state where two identical symbols are stopped on at least one effective line, and symbol stop to stop the combination of predetermined symbols You can use directing, etc. A sense of déjà vu can be given to the player by using various performance elements, so that the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the same contents are executed a plurality of times for the various performance elements. .

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a suggestive effect that suggests to the player that the effect element with the same content has been executed a plurality of times is executed after the effect element with the same content is executed a plurality of times. do. To make a player recognize that a performance element with the same content is executed a plurality of times, and to let the player know that the performance element of the same content is executed a plurality of times has a special meaning. I can convince you.

Also, as in the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 may control the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed multiple times. By increasing or decreasing the number of production elements with the same content that are executed multiple times, it is possible to increase or decrease the player's expectation, or to change the player's expectation, such as by inflating the expectation. can.

Furthermore, during the period from when it is determined that the condition for generating the advance notice of déjà vu is satisfied until the game cycle related to the hold information that satisfies the condition for generating the advance notice of déjà vu is completed, the production of the same content is executed multiple times. The number of elements may increase over time. Since the number of effect elements for which the player recognizes déjà vu increases with the lapse of time, the player's sense of expectation can be increased with the lapse of time.

Further, in the present embodiment, first, the display duration of each game round for which the déjà vu notice is to be executed is determined, and then the effect element to be executed as the déjà vu notice is determined based on the determined display duration. Although determined, other processing modes can be adopted without being limited to such a processing mode.

For example, the effect element to be executed as the déjà vu preview may be determined first, and then a display duration of a length capable of executing the effect element to be executed as the déjà vu preview may be secured in each game round. . As a specific process, for example, when the main controller 60 performs the déjà vu prediction generation lottery process and decides to execute the déjà vu prediction, first, the same content as the déjà vu prediction is performed. determine the elements. After that, the main controller 60 secures a display continuation time long enough to execute the performance element of the same content as the déjà vu notice in each game round. Then, the main controller 60 transmits, as a command, the display duration of each game round for which the déjà vu notice is to be executed and the content of the effect element to be executed as the déjà vu notice to the sound emission control device 90 .

By adopting such a processing mode, it is possible to secure a display duration time in each game cycle that is long enough to execute the effect element of the same content, so the time required to execute the same effect element. is avoided in each game round, and performance elements with the same content can be reliably executed in each game round.

F. Sixth embodiment:
Next, a sixth embodiment will be described. The difference between this embodiment and the above-described first embodiment is that the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment has a function of acquiring time information, and the details of the processing relating to the previous notice. In the following description, description will be made mainly on the advance notice of déjà vu performed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. In addition, description is abbreviate|omitted about the structure same as the said 1st Embodiment.

The pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment has a function of acquiring time information and a function of executing a time-linked effect element, which is a effect element that is continuously executed with the passage of time based on the acquired time information. . In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 has an RTC module (RTC: Real Time Clock), and acquires time information from the RTC module. Acquisition of the time information is not limited to acquisition from the RTC module. For example, acquisition from the outside of the pachinko machine 10, or other technically possible method of acquiring time information may be adopted.

Further, in this description, among the effect elements executed by the pachinko machine 10, the effect elements that are continuously executed with the passage of time based on the time information are referred to as "time-linked effect elements". A production element that is executed without a time is called a "non-time-linked production element".

FIG. 44 is a time chart showing an example of the déjà vu notice executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. In addition, FIG. 44 also shows, for comparison, a time-linked effect element executed by another pachinko machine of the same model as the pachinko machine 10 installed in the same game hall as the pachinko machine 10 .

As illustrated, the pachinko machine 10 and other pachinko machines start executing time-linked effect elements at time T0. Then, the pachinko machine 10 and other pachinko machines continuously execute the time-linked effect element with the lapse of time. In this description, other pachinko machines execute a series of preset time-linked effect elements. For convenience of explanation, in order to indicate the temporal position of a series of time-linked effect elements, a series of time-linked effect elements executed by other pachinko machines has a time position as an index indicating the temporal position of the time-linked effect element. TP1 to TP20 are illustrated. It should be noted that each temporal position shown in the figure is described in a format in which the symbol "TP" is omitted.

As shown, in the pachinko machine 10, the game balls enter the first starting port 33 at the timing when the total number of reservations CRN is 3, the total number of reservations CRN becomes 4, and the reservation information related to the winning becomes 4. It shows a case where the condition for generating a feeling of foretelling is satisfied and the foretelling of déjà vu is executed. That is, the game round P04 indicated as the fourth game round is the game round related to the hold information that satisfies the conditions for generating the déjà vu notice.

The pachinko machine 10 stores the temporal position TP of the time-linked performance element being executed at the timing when the game round P01 is started after it is determined that the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied as a specific temporal position. . In the example shown in FIG. 44, the pachinko machine 10 stores the temporal position TP3 of the time-linked effect element as the specific temporal position. Then, the pachinko machine 10 is a game cycle which starts to be executed after it is determined that the condition for generating the advance notice of déjà vu is satisfied, and before the game cycle P04 related to the holding information determined to satisfy the condition for generating the advance notice of déjà vu. Triggered by the timing of starting each game round P01, game round P02, game round P03, and game round P04, which are game rounds of the above, the time-linked effect element is set to a time that is a specific temporal position previously stored. Execute the target position TP3 as the starting position.

Furthermore, as shown in the figure, when the pachinko machine 10 determines that the condition for generating the déjà vu advance notice is satisfied and the non-time-linked effect element is executed together with the time-linked effect element, the time-linked effect A production element and a non-time-linked production element are executed a plurality of times. Then, the pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestive effect suggesting to the player that the same effect element has been executed multiple times after executing the effect element (the time-linked effect element and the non-time-linked effect element) a plurality of times. do. After executing the suggestive effect, the battle effect and the result effect (victory effect) are executed.

Moreover, the pachinko machine 10 can control the number of non-time-linked effect elements to be executed multiple times. In this embodiment, the non-time-linked effect elements to be executed multiple times are: only the non-time-linked effect element A in the game cycle P01; Then, non-time-linked effect element A, non-time-linked effect element B, and non-time-linked effect element C, non-time-linked effect element A, non-time-linked effect element B, and non-time-linked effect element C in game cycle P04. To increase the number of non-time-linked performance elements having the same content to be executed multiple times with the lapse of time.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the time-linked effect element executed during at least a part of the period is executed a plurality of times. can provide. In addition, since the time-linked effect element that is executed in at least a part of the period is executed multiple times, the player has a sense of déjà vu that the time-linked effect element of the same content has been executed multiple times. can give A player who has recognized the sense of déjà vu has a sense of expectation that the sense of déjà vu has a special meaning, for example, that a privilege may be given.

Furthermore, when the player experiences that the privilege is granted after the time-linked effect element is executed multiple times, the time-linked effect element is executed in anticipation of the time-linked effect element being executed multiple times. Each time, he always has a high sense of expectation and pays attention to the time-linked production element. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the time-linked effect element is executed a plurality of times, and to preferably increase the player's attention to the time-linked effect element executed based on the time information, It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when a plurality of pachinko machines having the same features as the pachinko machine 10 are installed in the game hall like other pachinko machines shown in FIG. Between the machine 10 and a pachinko machine that does not satisfy the condition for generating the déjà vu notice, even if the same time-linked effect is started at the same time T0, there is a time difference ( deviation) occurs. As a result, not only the player of the pachinko machine 10 but also the players of the surrounding pachinko machines recognize that the pachinko machine 10 has generated the déjà vu notice. Therefore, it is possible to give a feeling of superiority to the player who is playing the game with the pachinko machine 10 satisfying the condition for generating the déjà vu notice.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 10 executes the time-linked effect element with the start position at the temporal position TP3, which is a specific temporal position, in each of the game rounds P01 to P04, , a strong sense of déjà vu can be recognized for the portion after the temporal position TP3, which is the specific temporal position of the time-linked effect element. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 synchronizes the start timing of the time-linked effect elements to be executed a plurality of times with the start timing of each game round (game round P01 to game round P04) to create a stronger sense of déjà vu. can give to anyone.

In addition, assuming that the start position of the time-linked effect element that starts at the timing of the start of each game cycle is set in advance as the processing of the déjà vu notice, even one of the time-linked effect elements There is a possibility that the déjà vu announcement using the time-linked effect element will be executed from the time position where it has not been executed. For example, when setting is made to execute a time-linked effect element from a specific time position "TP10" each time with the start timing of each game round P01 to game round P04 as a trigger, the game round P01 ~The time-linked effect elements that have been executed as a continuous flow (temporal positions TP1 to TP2) until the first game round P01 of the game round P04 is started are replaced with the start of the first game round P01. , and the time-linked effect element is started and executed from a specific temporal position TP10 that has never been executed. Also, the execution is not performed until the temporal positions TP3 to TP9.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is executed at the timing when the game round P01 is started after the processing for determining that the game round P04 satisfies the generation condition of the déjà vu advance notice. The temporal position TP3 of the time-linked effect element is stored as a specific temporal position, and the stored specific temporal position TP3 is stored for the second and subsequent times (game round P02 to game round P04) out of a plurality of executions. Since it is the start position of the time-linked effect element, it is the second and subsequent time-linked effect elements that are executed multiple times as a continuous flow of time-linked effect elements (temporal positions TP1 to TP5). A temporal position TP3 can be set as the starting position of . Therefore, until the first game round 01 out of the game rounds P01 to P04 is started, the time-linked effect elements that have been executed as a continuous flow (temporal positions TP1 to TP2) are Abrupt interruption at the start timing of the game round P01 can be avoided, and the start/execution of the time-linked performance element from a specific temporal position TP10 which has never been executed can be avoided. In addition, all parts of the time-linked effect elements (temporal positions TP1 to TP20) are executed, enabling the player to experience all parts of the time-linked effect elements.

Furthermore, since the pachinko machine 10 executes the non-time-linked effect element a plurality of times in addition to the time-linked effect element, it is possible to give the player a stronger sense of deja vu. Moreover, the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment can control the number of non-time-linked effect elements to be executed multiple times. Therefore, by increasing or decreasing the number of non-time-linked effect elements to be executed multiple times, it is possible to increase or decrease the player's expectation, or to change the player's expectation, such as by giving an intonation to the expectation. can be done. In the pachinko machine 10, since the number of non-time-linked performance elements increases with the lapse of time, the player's sense of expectation can be increased with the lapse of time.

The pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment may not select the operation acceptance effect element including the content suggesting acceptance of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 by the player as the non-time-linked effect element to be executed multiple times. When the operation acceptance effect element is executed multiple times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a sense of déjà vu. Since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment does not select the operation acceptance effect element as the non-time-linked effect element to be executed multiple times, it is possible to suppress the execution of effect elements with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. can do. Further, since the pachinko machine 10 executes the suggestive effect, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect element (time-linked effect element, non-time-linked effect element) of the same content has been executed a plurality of times. At the same time, it is possible to convince the player that there is a special meaning in the fact that the performance element with the same content is executed multiple times.

G. Seventh embodiment:
The pachinko machine 10 of the first to sixth embodiments has a configuration in which the operation acceptance effect element is not selected as the effect element for the déjà vu notice, but the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has the déjà vu notice. A button effect, which is one of the operation acceptance effect elements, may be selected as the effect element for . In the following, a case will be described in which the conditions for generating a déjà vu preview are satisfied, the pachinko machine 10 selects a button effect as the effect element for the déjà vu preview, and executes the button effect a plurality of times.

<Example 1 of Déjà vu notice using button effect>
FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing the flow when the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect XA as the effect element for the déjà vu preview and executes the button effect XA twice. FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the effect modes XA1 and XA2 and the suggestive effect F executed in the button effect XA.

When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts executing the first button effect XA, it executes the effect mode XA1 including content suggesting the player to press the effect operation button 24 (S2701). In the example shown in FIG. 46, the presentation mode XA1 is a presentation mode in which an image of a treasure box is displayed, and characters and an image prompting the user to press the presentation operation button 24 are displayed. However, the presentation mode XA1 may be another mode.

If the effect operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time after the effect mode XA1 is executed (S2702: YES), the pressing of the effect operation button 24 triggers the effect mode XA1. executes a different presentation mode XA2 (S2703). In the example shown in FIG. 46, the presentation mode XA2 is a presentation mode in which a female character appears from inside a treasure chest. However, the presentation mode XA2 may be another mode. On the other hand, if the effect operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time (S2702: NO), the effect mode XA2 is not executed while the effect mode XA1 is being executed.

When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts executing the second button effect XA, it executes the effect mode XA1 (S2704 or S2707) in the same manner as the first button effect XA. Then, when the effect mode XA2 is being executed when the first button effect XA is executed, the effect operation button 24 may or may not be pressed after the effect mode XA1 is executed (S2704). In either case (S2705), the effect mode XA2 is executed (S2706). Specifically, if the effect operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time (S2705: YES), the effect mode XA2 is executed in response to the pressing of the effect operation button 24 ( S2706). On the other hand, if the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed within the predetermined time (S2705: NO), the effect mode XA2 is executed when the predetermined time has elapsed (S2706).

On the other hand, if the effect mode XA2 was not executed when the first button effect was executed, the effect operation button 24 was pressed or not after the effect mode XA1 was executed (S2707). In either case (S2708), the effect mode XA2 is not executed while the effect mode XA1 is being executed.

When the second button effect XA ends, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment suggests to the player that the same button effect XA has been executed a plurality of times (two times in the above example). Effect F is executed (S2709). In the example shown in FIG. 46, the suggestive effect F is a effect in which a female character throws a message such as "Did you mean deja vu!?" to the player. However, the suggestive effect F may be in another form. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 executes other effects such as the battle effects described above.

When the button effect XA is executed three times or more, the same control as when the second button effect XA is executed is repeatedly executed, and the suggestive effect F is executed after the last button effect XA is completed. good.

As described above, when the button effect is executed a plurality of times, it is executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player (for example, whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed, the timing, the number of times of pressing, etc.). may be In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the button effect XA is executed a plurality of times as the effect element for the déjà vu preview, when the effect mode XA2 is executed in the first button effect XA, the input by the player Regardless of the operation mode of the operation, when the effect mode XA2 is executed in the second and subsequent button effects XA, and when the effect mode X A2 is not executed in the first button effect XA, the input by the player. Regardless of the operation mode of the operation, the effect mode XA2 is not executed in the second and subsequent button effects XA. Therefore, even when the button effect XA is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the button effect XA to be executed for the first and subsequent times can be the same. Then, as in the above embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of déjà vu that the same button effect XA has been executed multiple times.

A player who has recognized the sense of déjà vu has a sense of expectation that the sense of déjà vu has a special meaning, for example, that a privilege may be given. Furthermore, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the effect element with the same content is executed multiple times, the player anticipates that the effect element with the same content will be executed multiple times, and the effect element is executed. Every time it is executed, they always pay attention to the production element with a high sense of expectation. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the performance element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, and to suitably increase the degree of attention of the player to the performance element which is sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game. can be achieved.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the suggestive effect F is executed, the player can be made to recognize that the button effect XA with the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the same It is possible to convince the player that the fact that the button effect XA of the content is executed multiple times has a special meaning. However, it is not essential to execute the suggestive effect F, and the pachinko machine 10 may be configured not to execute the suggestive effect F.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player presses the effect operation button 24 within a predetermined period of time, the effect mode XA2 is performed with the pressing of the effect operation button 24 as a trigger. Since it is executed, the player can be actively involved in the button effect XA, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game. Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even if the player does not press the effect operation button 24 within the predetermined time, the effect mode XA2 is executed when the predetermined time elapses. can do. Furthermore, even if the player does not press the performance operation button 24 within a predetermined time, the performance mode XA2 is executed, so that the game can be given unexpectedness, and the game can be improved in interest. can be done. However, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to execute the effect mode XA2 at a predetermined timing without being triggered by the pressing of the effect operation button 24 or the passage of the predetermined time.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment selects the button effect XA as the effect element for the déjà vu notice when the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied, and repeats the button effect XA a plurality of times. In the case of execution, the time parameter indicating whether or not it is within the time during which pressing of the effect operation button 24 can be accepted is not displayed. The reason for this will be explained. The player may press the effect operation button 24 at different timings in each of the button effects executed a plurality of times. Here, if the time parameter is displayed, the player will recognize that the player presses the effect operation button 24 at different timings in each of the button effects executed a plurality of times, and the button effects will be the same. is executed a plurality of times, there is a risk that the player will be less likely to feel a sense of déjà vu with respect to the button effects that have been executed a plurality of times. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the time parameter is not displayed when the button effect is executed a plurality of times as the effect element for the déjà vu notice, so that the player hardly feels the déjà vu. It can be suppressed. However, the pachinko machine 10 selects a button effect as an effect element for the déjà vu notice and executes the button effect a plurality of times when the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied. The configuration may be such that the parameters are displayed.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment determines whether or not the condition for generating the déjà vu advance notice is satisfied before the reservation information becomes a target of the jackpot lottery, and generates the déjà vu advance notice. When it is determined that the conditions are satisfied, the button performance XA which is the object of execution multiple times before the reservation information determined to be the conditions for generating the déjà vu advance notice is the object of the jackpot lottery. start executing. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for the sense of deja vu over a plurality of game rounds. However, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the condition for generating the notice of déjà vu is satisfied when the reservation information becomes an object of the jackpot lottery, and performs a button presentation in one game round related to the reservation information. The configuration may be such that XA is executed multiple times.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with changing means for changing the mode of the effect operation button 24 to the mode when it is pressed (that is, the mode depressed by pressing). Then, if the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed (S2705: NO) and the effect mode XA2 is to be executed (S2706), the changing means changes the mode of the effect operation button 24 to the state that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. It is good to change to the aspect in a case. By providing such a changing means, the mode of the effect operation button 24 is changed, so that the game can be given unexpectedness, and the effect mode XA2 is changed even though the effect operation button 24 is not pressed. It can be persuasive to be carried out. The changing means can be realized by, for example, providing an actuator such as a solenoid or a motor inside the production operation button 24 .

In the present embodiment, control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XA is executed based on whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed. The control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XA may be executed based on whether or not the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 satisfies a predetermined operation condition, such as the pressed time or number of times. .

Further, in the above example, the effect operation button 24 is used as an example of operation receiving means for receiving an input operation by a player, but the operation receiving means is not limited to this. For example, as the operation receiving means, adopt a stick or lever that the player operates back and forth or left and right, a button that detects the hand held up by the player, a touch sensor that detects the hand approaching the LCD screen, etc. can be done. An example of the button effect XA processing will be described below.

FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when a button effect XA is executed as an effect element (announcement effect) for announcing the feeling of deja vu. In step S2801, it is determined whether or not the flag storage area 94a of the RAM 94 on the sound and light side stores an initial execution completion flag. The first executed flag indicates that after the déjà vu notice flag is stored, that is, after the conditions for generating the déjà vu notice are met, the notice effect for the notice of déjà vu (button effect XA) has already been executed once. This is a flag for specifying in the sound and light side MPU 92 whether or not it has been completed.

If it is determined in step S2801 that the first execution completion flag is not stored (S2801: NO), that is, if the button effect XA has not been executed even once after the déjà vu notice flag was stored. , the process advances to step S2802 to cause the pattern display device 41, the speaker 46 and various lamps 47 as the effect executing means to execute the above-described effect mode XA1. The effect mode XA1 includes contents suggesting that the player should press the effect operation button 24 . After that, the process proceeds to step S2803.

In step S2803, it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. In step S2803, if it is determined that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S2803: YES), the process proceeds to step S2804, and the symbol display device 41, speaker 46 and various lamps 47 as effect execution means are displayed as described above. The performance mode XA2 is executed. After executing step S2804, the process advances to step S2805 to store the button depression flag in the various flag storage area 94a of the RAM 94 on the sound and light side. The button depression flag is a flag for specifying in the sound and light side MPU 92 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed when the first button effect XA is executed. After executing step S2805, the process advances to step S2807.

If it is determined in step S2803 that the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed (S2803: NO), the process advances to step S2806 to determine whether or not a predetermined period of time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S2806 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S2806: NO), the process returns to step S2803 to determine whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, the presence or absence of pressing of the effect operation button 24 is monitored until a predetermined time has elapsed. In step S2806, if it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (S2806: YES), that is, if the effect operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time, step S2804 and step S2805 are not executed. Proceed to S2807.

In step S2807, after the first execution completion flag is stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound and light side RAM 94, the first button effect XA is finished.

If it is determined in step S2801 that the first execution completion flag is stored (S2801: YES), that is, if the button effect XA has already been executed at least once after the déjà vu notice flag is stored. , the process advances to step S2808 to cause the pattern display device 41, the speaker 46 and various lamps 47 as the effect execution means to execute the effect mode XA1. After that, the process advances to step S2809.

In step S2809, it is determined whether or not a button depression flag is stored in the flag storage area 94a of the RAM 94 on the sound and light side. If it is determined in step S2809 that the button depression flag is not stored (S2809: NO), that is, if the effect operation button 24 is not pressed when the first button effect XA is executed, The process advances to step S2810 to wait until a predetermined time elapses, and after the predetermined time elapses, the second and subsequent button effects XA are terminated without executing the effect mode XA2 (step S2812).

If it is determined in step S2809 that the button depression flag is stored (S2809: YES), that is, if the effect operation button 24 is pressed when the first button effect XA is executed, , the process advances to step S2811 to determine whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed in the button effect XA being executed this time.

In step S2811, if it is determined that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S2811: YES), the process proceeds to step S2812, and the pattern display device 41, the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 as effect execution means are displayed in effect mode XA2. is executed, the second and subsequent button effects XA are terminated.

If it is determined in step S2811 that the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed (S2811: NO), the process proceeds to step S2813 to determine whether or not a predetermined period of time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S2813 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S2813: NO), the process returns to step S2811 to determine whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, the presence or absence of pressing of the effect operation button 24 is monitored until a predetermined time has elapsed. In step S2813, if it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (S2813: YES), that is, if the effect operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time, the process proceeds to step S2812, and symbol display as effect execution means. After causing the device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 to execute the presentation mode XA2, the second and subsequent button presentations XA are terminated.

According to the above processing, the button effect XA can be executed multiple times with the same content regardless of the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 . Note that the processing described above is an example, and the processing of the button effect XA may be realized by another algorithm.

<Example 2 of Déjà vu notice using button effect>
FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing the flow when the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect XB as the effect element for the déjà vu preview and executes the button effect XB twice. FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the effect modes XB1, XB2, XB3 and the suggestive effect F executed in the button effect XB.

When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts executing the first button effect XB, it executes the effect mode XB1 including content suggesting the player to press the effect operation button 24 (S2901). In the example shown in FIG. 49, the presentation mode XB1 is a presentation mode in which an image of a treasure box is displayed, and characters and an image prompting the user to press the presentation operation button 24 are displayed. However, the effect mode XB1 may be another mode.

If the effect operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time after the effect mode XB1 is executed (S2902: YES), the effect mode XB1 and the effect mode XB1 executes a different presentation mode XB2 (S2903). In the example shown in FIG. 49, the presentation mode XB2 is a presentation mode in which a female character appears from a treasure chest. However, the effect mode XB2 may be another mode. On the other hand, if the effect operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time (S2902: NO), the effect mode XB3, which is different from the effect mode XB1 and the effect mode XB2, is executed after the predetermined time has elapsed (S2907). . In the example shown in FIG. 49, the presentation mode XB3 is a presentation mode in which a fish character carries away a treasure chest. However, the effect mode XB3 may be another mode.

When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts executing the second button effect XB, it executes the effect mode XB1 (S2904 or S2908) in the same manner as the first button effect XB. Then, if the effect mode XB2 is executed when the first button effect XB is executed, the effect operation button 24 may or may not be pressed after the effect mode XB1 is executed (S2904). In either case (S2905), the effect mode XB2 is executed (S2906). Specifically, when the effect operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time (S2905: YES), the effect mode XB2 is executed with the pressing of the effect operation button 24 as a trigger ( S2906). On the other hand, if the effect operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time (S2905: NO), the effect mode XB2 is executed when the predetermined time has elapsed (S2906).

On the other hand, if the effect mode XB3 was executed when the first button effect XB was executed, the effect operation button 24 was pressed or not after the effect mode XB1 was executed (S2908). In either case (S2909), the effect mode XB3 is executed (S2910). Specifically, when the effect operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time (S2909: YES), the effect mode XB3 is executed with the pressing of the effect operation button 24 as a trigger ( S2910). On the other hand, if the effect operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time (S2909: NO), the effect mode XB3 is executed when the predetermined time has elapsed (S2910).

When the second button effect XB ends, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment suggests to the player that the same button effect XB has been executed a plurality of times (two times in the above example). Effect F is executed (S2911). In the example shown in FIG. 49, the suggestive effect F is a effect in which a female character throws a message such as "Did you mean déjà vu!?" to the player. However, the suggestive effect F may be in another form. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 executes other effects such as the battle effects described above.

When the button effect XB is executed three times or more, the same control as when the button effect XB is executed for the second time is repeatedly executed. good.

As described above, when the button effect is executed a plurality of times, it is executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player (for example, whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed, the timing, the number of times of pressing, etc.). may be In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the button effect XB is executed a plurality of times as the effect element for foretelling the déjà vu, when the effect mode XB2 is executed in the first button effect XB, the input by the player Regardless of the operation mode of the operation, when the effect mode XB2 is executed in the second and subsequent button effects XB, and on the other hand, when the effect mode XB3 is executed in the first button effect XB, the operation mode of the input operation by the player. Regardless, the effect mode XB3 is executed in the second and subsequent button effects XB. Therefore, even when the button effect XB is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the button effect XB to be executed for the first and subsequent times can be the same. Then, as in the above-described embodiment, the player can be given a sense of déjà vu (déjà vu) that the same button effect XB has been executed multiple times.

A player who has recognized the sense of déjà vu has a sense of expectation that the sense of déjà vu has a special meaning, for example, that a privilege may be given. Furthermore, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the effect element with the same content is executed multiple times, the player anticipates that the effect element with the same content will be executed multiple times, and the effect element is executed. Every time it is executed, they always pay attention to the production element with a high sense of expectation. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the performance element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, and to suitably increase the degree of attention of the player to the performance element which is sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game. can be achieved.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the suggestive effect F is executed, the player can be made to recognize that the button effect XB having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the same It is possible to convince the player that there is a special meaning in the fact that the content of the button effect XB is executed multiple times. However, it is not essential to execute the suggestive effect F, and the pachinko machine 10 may be configured not to execute the suggestive effect F.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player presses the production operation button 24 within a predetermined time, the production mode XB2 or the production mode XB2 or Since the effect mode XB3 is executed, the player can be actively involved in the button effect XB, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game. Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even if the player does not press the effect operation button 24 within the predetermined time, the effect state XB2 or the effect is triggered by the elapse of the predetermined time. Aspect XB3 may be implemented. Furthermore, even if the player does not press the performance operation button 24 within the predetermined time, the performance mode XB2 or the performance mode XB3 is executed, so that the game can be given a sense of surprise, and the game becomes more interesting. can be improved. However, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to execute the effect mode XB2 or the effect mode XB3 at a predetermined timing without being triggered by the pressing of the effect operation button 24 or the passage of the predetermined time.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment selects the button effect XB as an effect element for the déjà vu notice when the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied, and repeats the button effect XB a plurality of times. In the case of execution, the time parameter indicating whether or not it is within the time during which pressing of the effect operation button 24 can be accepted is not displayed. The reason for this will be explained. The player may press the effect operation button 24 at different timings in each of the button effects executed a plurality of times. Here, if the time parameter is displayed, the player will recognize that the player presses the effect operation button 24 at different timings in each of the button effects executed a plurality of times, and the button effects will be the same. is executed a plurality of times, there is a risk that the player will be less likely to feel a sense of déjà vu with respect to the button effects that have been executed a plurality of times. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the time parameter is not displayed when the button effect is executed a plurality of times as the effect element for the déjà vu notice, so that the player hardly feels the déjà vu. It can be suppressed. However, the pachinko machine 10 selects a button effect as an effect element for the déjà vu notice and executes the button effect a plurality of times when the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied. The configuration may be such that the parameters are displayed.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment determines whether or not the condition for generating the déjà vu advance notice is satisfied before the reservation information becomes a target of the jackpot lottery, and generates the déjà vu advance notice. When it is determined that the condition is satisfied, the button performance XB to be executed a plurality of times before the reservation information determined to satisfy the condition for generating the déjà vu notice becomes the object of the jackpot lottery. start executing. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for the sense of deja vu over a plurality of game rounds. However, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the condition for generating the notice of déjà vu is satisfied when the reservation information becomes an object of the jackpot lottery, and performs a button presentation in one game round related to the reservation information. The configuration may be such that XB is executed multiple times.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with changing means for changing the mode of the effect operation button 24 to the mode when it is pressed (that is, the mode depressed by pressing). Then, when the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed (S2905: NO) and the effect mode XB2 is to be executed (S2906), the changing means changes the mode of the effect operation button 24 to the state where the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. It is good to change to the aspect in a case. If such a changing means is provided, the mode of the effect operation button 24 is changed, so that the game can be given an unexpectedness, and the effect mode XB2 can be changed even though the effect operation button 24 is not pressed. It can be persuasive to be carried out. The changing means can be realized by, for example, providing an actuator such as a solenoid or a motor inside the production operation button 24 .

In the present embodiment, control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XB is executed based on whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed. The control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XB may be executed based on whether or not the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 satisfies a predetermined operation condition, such as the time or number of times the button is pressed. .

Further, in the above example, the effect operation button 24 is used as an example of operation receiving means for receiving an input operation by a player, but the operation receiving means is not limited to this. For example, as the operation receiving means, adopt a stick or lever that the player operates back and forth or left and right, a button that detects the hand held up by the player, a touch sensor that detects the hand approaching the LCD screen, etc. can be done. An example of the processing of the button effect XB will be described below.

FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when a button effect XB is executed as an effect element (announcement effect) for foretelling a sense of deja vu. In step S3001, it is determined whether or not the sound and light side RAM 94 stores an initial execution completion flag. If it is determined in step S3001 that the first execution completion flag is not stored (S3001: NO), that is, if the button effect XB has not been executed even once after the déjà vu notice flag was stored. , the process advances to step S3002 to cause the pattern display device 41, the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 as the effect executing means to execute the above-described effect mode XB1. The effect mode XB1 includes contents suggesting that the player should press the effect operation button 24 . After that, the process proceeds to step S3003.

In step S3003, it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. In step S3003, if it is determined that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S3003: YES), the process proceeds to step S3004, and the symbol display device 41, speaker 46 and various lamps 47 as effect execution means are displayed as described above. The effect mode XB2 is executed. After that, the process advances to step S3005 to store the button depression flag in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound and light side RAM 94. FIG.

If it is determined in step S3003 that the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed (S3003: NO), the process advances to step S3006 to determine whether or not a predetermined period of time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S3006 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S3006: NO), the process returns to step S3003 to determine whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, the presence or absence of pressing of the effect operation button 24 is monitored until a predetermined time has elapsed. In step S3006, if it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (S3006: YES), that is, if the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed within the predetermined time, the process proceeds to step S3007, and symbol display as effect execution means. The device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 are caused to execute the above-described effect mode XB3. After that, the process proceeds to step S3008.

In step S3008, after the first execution completion flag is stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound and light side RAM 94, the first button effect XB is terminated.

If it is determined in step S3001 that the first execution completion flag is stored (S3001: YES), that is, if the button effect XB has already been executed at least once after the déjà vu notice flag is stored. , the process advances to step S3009 to cause the pattern display device 41, the speaker 46 and various lamps 47 as the effect executing means to execute the effect mode XB1. After that, the process proceeds to step S3010.

In step S3010, it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. If it is determined in step S3010 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S3010: YES), the process proceeds to step S3012. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3010 that the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed (S3010: NO), the process advances to step S3011 to determine whether or not a predetermined period of time has elapsed. In step S3011, when it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S3011: NO), the process returns to step S3010 to determine whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, the presence or absence of pressing of the effect operation button 24 is monitored until a predetermined time has elapsed. In step S3011, if it is determined that the predetermined time has passed (S3011: YES), that is, if the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed within the predetermined time, the process proceeds to step S3012.

In step S3012, it is determined whether or not a button depression flag is stored. In step S3012, when it is determined that the button depression flag is stored (S3012: YES), the process proceeds to step S3013, and the pattern display device 41, the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 as the effect execution means display the effect mode XB2. After the execution, the second and subsequent button effects XB are terminated. On the other hand, in step S3012, when it is determined that the button depression flag is not stored (S3012: NO), the process proceeds to step S3014, and the pattern display device 41, the speaker 46 and various lamps 47 as the effect executing means are displayed in the effect mode. After executing XB3, the second and subsequent button effects XB are terminated.

According to the above processing, the button effect XB can be executed multiple times with the same content regardless of the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 . Note that the processing described above is an example, and the processing of the button effect XB may be realized by another algorithm.

<Example 3 of Déjà vu notice using button effect>
FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing the flow when the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect XC as the effect element for the déjà vu preview and executes the button effect XC twice. FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the effect modes XC1 and XC2 and the suggestive effect F executed in the button effect XC.

When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts executing the first button effect XC, it executes the effect mode XC1 including content suggesting the player to press the effect operation button 24 (S3101). In the example shown in FIG. 52, the presentation mode XC1 is a presentation mode in which an image of a treasure box is displayed, and characters and an image prompting the user to press the presentation operation button 24 are displayed. However, the effect mode XC1 may be another mode.

After executing the performance mode XC1, regardless of whether the performance operation button 24 is pressed or not (S3102), the performance mode XC2 different from the performance mode XC1 is executed (S3103). . Specifically, if the effect operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time (S3102: YES), the effect mode XC2 is executed with the pressing of the effect operation button 24 as a trigger ( S3103). In the example shown in FIG. 52, the presentation mode XC2 is a presentation mode in which a female character appears from a treasure chest. However, the effect mode XC2 may be another mode. On the other hand, if the effect operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time (S3102: NO), the effect mode XC2 is executed when the predetermined time has elapsed (S3103).

When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts executing the second button effect XC, it executes the effect mode XC1 (S3104) in the same manner as the first button effect XC. After executing the effect mode XC1, whether the effect operation button 24 is pressed or not (S3105), the effect mode XC2 is executed (S3106). Specifically, when the effect operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time (S3105: YES), the effect mode XC2 is executed in response to the pressing of the effect operation button 24 ( S3106). On the other hand, if the effect operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time (S3105: NO), the effect mode XC2 is executed when the predetermined time has elapsed (S3106).

When the second button effect XC is completed, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment suggests to the player that the same button effect XC has been executed a plurality of times (two times in the above example). Effect F is executed (S3107). In the example shown in FIG. 52, the suggestive effect F is a effect in which a female character throws a message such as "Did you mean deja vu!?" to the player. However, the suggestive effect F may be in another form. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 executes other effects such as the battle effects described above.

When the button effect XC is executed three times or more, the same control as when the first and second button effects XC are executed is repeatedly executed, and the suggestive effect F is executed after the last button effect XC is completed. Just run it.

As described above, when the button effect is executed a plurality of times, it is executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player (for example, whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed, the timing, the number of times of pressing, etc.). may be In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when executing the button effect XC for the first time and when executing the button effect XC for the second and subsequent times, similarly, after executing the effect mode XC1, the input operation by the player is performed. The effect mode XC2 is executed regardless of the operation mode of . Therefore, even when the button effect XC is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the button effect XC to be executed for the first and subsequent times can be the same. Then, as in the above-described embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of déjà vu that the same button effect XC has been executed multiple times.

A player who has recognized the sense of déjà vu has a sense of expectation that the sense of déjà vu has a special meaning, for example, that a privilege may be given. Furthermore, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the effect element with the same content is executed multiple times, the player anticipates that the effect element with the same content will be executed multiple times, and the effect element is executed. Every time it is executed, they always pay attention to the production element with a high sense of expectation. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the performance element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, and to suitably increase the degree of attention of the player to the performance element which is sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game. can be achieved.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the suggestive effect F is executed, the player can be made to recognize that the button effect XC having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the same It is possible to convince the player that there is a special meaning in executing the button effect XC of the content multiple times. However, it is not essential to execute the suggestive effect F, and the pachinko machine 10 may be configured not to execute the suggestive effect F.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player presses the production operation button 24 within a predetermined time, the production mode XC2 is triggered by the depression of the production operation button 24. Since it is executed, the player can be actively involved in the button effect XC, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game. Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even if the player does not press the effect operation button 24 within the predetermined time, the effect mode XC2 is executed when the predetermined time has passed. can do. Furthermore, even if the player does not press the performance operation button 24 within a predetermined time, the performance mode XC2 is executed, so that the game can be given a sense of surprise, and the interest in the game can be improved. can be done. However, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to execute the effect mode XC2 at a predetermined timing without being triggered by the pressing of the effect operation button 24 or the passage of the predetermined time.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment forcibly executes the effect mode XC2 even if the player does not press the effect operation button 24 within a predetermined time in the first button effect XC. Therefore, a player who knows this mechanism expects that the effect mode XC2 is forcibly executed without depressing the effect operation button 24 when the first button effect XC is executed. will do. Further, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 capable of executing the above button effects XA and XB in addition to the button effects XC, even if the effect mode XC2 is not forcibly executed in the first button effect. Even if there is, the player recognizes and suggests that the button effect being executed this time is not the button effect XC but the button effect XA or the button effect XB. It is expected that there is still a possibility that the effect F will be executed. Therefore, the player can play the game with expectation for the second and subsequent button effects.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment selects the button effect XC as an effect element for the déjà vu notice when the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied, and repeats the button effect XC a plurality of times. In the case of execution, the time parameter indicating whether or not it is within the time during which pressing of the effect operation button 24 can be accepted is not displayed. The reason for this will be explained. The player may press the effect operation button 24 at different timings in each of the button effects executed a plurality of times. Here, if the time parameter is displayed, the player will recognize that the player presses the effect operation button 24 at different timings in each of the button effects executed a plurality of times, and the button effects will be the same. is executed a plurality of times, there is a risk that the player will be less likely to feel a sense of déjà vu with respect to the button effects that have been executed a plurality of times. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the time parameter is not displayed when the button effect is executed a plurality of times as the effect element for the déjà vu notice, so that the player hardly feels the déjà vu. It can be suppressed. However, the pachinko machine 10 selects a button effect as an effect element for the déjà vu notice and executes the button effect a plurality of times when the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied. The configuration may be such that the parameters are displayed.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment determines whether or not the condition for generating the déjà vu advance notice is satisfied before the reservation information becomes a target of the jackpot lottery, and generates the déjà vu advance notice. When it is determined that the condition is satisfied, the button performance XC which is the target of executing a plurality of times before the reservation information determined to be the target of the jackpot lottery for which the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is determined to be satisfied. start executing. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for the sense of deja vu over a plurality of game rounds. However, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the condition for generating the notice of déjà vu is satisfied when the reservation information becomes an object of the jackpot lottery, and performs a button presentation in one game round related to the reservation information. The configuration may be such that XC is executed multiple times.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with changing means for changing the mode of the effect operation button 24 to the mode when it is pressed (that is, the mode depressed by pressing). Then, when the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed (S3105: NO) and the effect mode XC2 is to be executed (S3106), the changing means changes the mode of the effect operation button 24 to the state where the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. It is good to change to the aspect in a case. If such a changing means is provided, the mode of the effect operation button 24 is changed, so that the game can be given unexpectedness, and the effect mode XC2 can be changed even if the effect operation button 24 is not pressed. It can be persuasive to be carried out. The changing means can be realized by, for example, providing an actuator such as a solenoid or a motor inside the production operation button 24 .

In the present embodiment, control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XC is executed based on whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed. The control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XC may be executed based on whether or not the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 satisfies a predetermined operation condition, such as the time or number of times the button is pressed. .

Further, in the above example, the effect operation button 24 is used as an example of operation receiving means for receiving an input operation by a player, but the operation receiving means is not limited to this. For example, as the operation receiving means, adopt a stick or lever that the player operates back and forth or left and right, a button that detects the hand held up by the player, a touch sensor that detects the hand approaching the LCD screen, etc. can be done. An example of the processing of the button effect XC will be described below.

FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when a button effect XC is executed as an effect element (announcement effect) for foretelling a sense of deja vu. In this button effect XC, the same process is executed when it is executed for the first time and when it is executed for the second and subsequent times.

In step S3201, the pattern display device 41, the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 as the effect execution means are caused to execute the effect mode XC1 described above. The effect mode XC1 includes contents suggesting that the player should press the effect operation button 24 . After that, the process proceeds to step S3202.

In step S3202, it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. In step S3202, if it is determined that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S3202: YES), the process proceeds to step S3204, and the pattern display device 41, the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 as effect execution means are provided with the effect described above. After the mode XC2 is executed, the button effect XC is terminated.

If it is determined in step S3202 that the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed (S3202: NO), the process advances to step S3203 to determine whether or not a predetermined period of time has elapsed. In step S3203, when it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S3203: NO), the process returns to step S3202 to determine whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, the presence or absence of pressing of the effect operation button 24 is monitored until a predetermined time has elapsed. On the other hand, in step S3203, if it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (S3203: YES), that is, if the effect operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time, the process proceeds to step S3204, and the effect execution means as After causing the pattern display device 41, the speaker 46 and various lamps 47 to execute the effect mode XC2, the button effect XC is terminated.

According to the above processing, the button effect XC can be executed multiple times with the same contents regardless of the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 . Note that the processing described above is an example, and the processing of the button effect XC may be realized by another algorithm.

<Example 4 of déjà vu notice using button effect>
FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing the flow when the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect XA as the effect element for the déjà vu preview and executes the button effect XD twice. FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the effect selection screen XD1, the effect mode XD2, and the suggestive effect F executed in the button effect XD.

When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts executing the first button effect XD, it first includes the content that suggests the player to press the effect operation button 24, and selects one of a plurality of options. An effect selection screen XD1 for allowing the player to select an option is displayed (S3301). The effect selection screen XD1 is a selection screen whose selection state changes each time the effect operation button 24 is pressed. In the example shown in FIG. 55, the effect selection screen XD1 has a female character appearing in the center of the screen, and a plurality of turtle characters carrying shells appear in front of the female character. Each time, the turtle character moves to the left (S3302), and a new turtle character appears from the right side of the screen. In this embodiment, since the turtle characters have the same design, the appearance of the effect selection screen XD1 does not change before and after the effect operation button 24 is pressed. However, the effect selection screen XD1 may have a mode other than that shown in FIG. 55, and may have a different mode before and after pressing the effect operation button.

Then, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment executes the effect mode XD2 corresponding to the selected option at the timing when the predetermined time has passed (S3303). In the example shown in FIG. 55, in the production mode XD2, a turtle character in front of the female character is selected at the timing when a predetermined time has passed, and the shell carried by the selected turtle character opens. This is a presentation mode in which a pearl having a predetermined characteristic appears from among them. In the present embodiment, each turtle character has the same pattern, but the characteristics of an object such as a pearl appearing in a shell differ for each turtle character.

When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts executing the second button effect XD, it displays the same effect selection screen XD1 as the effect selection screen XD1 displayed in the first button effect XD (S3304). Then, each time the effect operation button 24 is pressed, the turtle character is moved to the left (S3305), and at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed, the same effect mode XD2 corresponding to the option selected for the first time is displayed. Effect mode XD2 is executed (S3306). In the example shown in FIG. 55, a turtle character in front of the female character is selected at the timing when a predetermined time has passed, and the shell carried by the selected turtle character opens, and the first time from among the shells is opened. A presentation mode XD2 in which pearls having the same characteristics appear is executed.

When the second button effect XD ends, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment suggests to the player that the same button effect XD has been executed a plurality of times (two times in the above example). Effect F is executed (S3307). In the example shown in FIG. 55, the suggestion effect F is a effect in which a female character throws a message such as "Did you mean deja vu!?" to the player. However, the suggestive effect F may be in another form. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 executes other effects such as the battle effects described above.

When the button effect XD is executed three times or more, the same control as when the second button effect XD is executed is repeatedly executed, and the suggestive effect F is executed after the last button effect XD is completed. good.

As described above, when the button effect is executed a plurality of times, it is executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player (for example, whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed, the timing, the number of times of pressing, etc.). may be The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment executes the button effects XD from the second time onwards, regardless of the operation mode of the input operation by the player, when executing the button effects XD multiple times as the effect elements for the foretelling of déjà vu. , the same effect mode as that executed in the first button effect XD is executed. Therefore, even when the button effect XD is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the button effect XD to be executed for the first and subsequent times can be the same. Then, as in the above embodiment, the player can be given a sense of déjà vu (déjà vu) that the same button effect XD has been executed multiple times.

A player who has recognized the sense of déjà vu has a sense of expectation that the sense of déjà vu has a special meaning, for example, that a privilege may be given. Furthermore, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the effect element with the same content is executed multiple times, the player anticipates that the effect element with the same content will be executed multiple times, and the effect element is executed. Every time it is executed, they always pay attention to the production element with a high sense of expectation. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the performance element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, and to suitably increase the degree of attention of the player to the performance element which is sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game. can be achieved.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the suggestive effect F is executed, the player can be made to recognize that the same button effect XD has been executed a plurality of times, and the same It is possible to convince the player that there is a special meaning in the fact that the content of the button effect XD is executed multiple times. However, it is not essential to execute the suggestive effect F, and the pachinko machine 10 may be configured not to execute the suggestive effect F.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect selection screen XD1 has the same aspect before and after the selection state is switched. The same effect mode XD2 is executed from the selection screen XD1. Therefore, the sense of déjà vu given to the player can be enhanced.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment selects the button effect XD as an effect element for the déjà vu notice when the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied, and repeats the button effect XD a plurality of times. In the case of execution, the time parameter indicating whether or not it is within the time during which pressing of the effect operation button 24 can be accepted is not displayed. The reason for this will be explained. The player may press the effect operation button 24 at different timings in each of the button effects executed a plurality of times. Here, if the time parameter is displayed, the player will recognize that the player presses the effect operation button 24 at different timings in each of the button effects executed a plurality of times, and the button effects will be the same. is executed a plurality of times, there is a risk that the player will be less likely to feel a sense of déjà vu with respect to the button effects that have been executed a plurality of times. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the time parameter is not displayed when the button effect is executed a plurality of times as the effect element for the déjà vu notice, so that the player hardly feels the déjà vu. It can be suppressed. However, the pachinko machine 10 selects a button effect as an effect element for the déjà vu notice and executes the button effect a plurality of times when the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied. The configuration may be such that the parameters are displayed.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment determines whether or not the condition for generating the déjà vu advance notice is satisfied before the reservation information becomes a target of the jackpot lottery, and generates the déjà vu advance notice. When it is determined that the condition is satisfied, the button performance XD which is the target of execution multiple times before the reservation information determined to be the target of the jackpot lottery for which the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is determined to be satisfied. start executing. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for the sense of deja vu over a plurality of game rounds. However, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the condition for generating the notice of déjà vu is satisfied when the reservation information becomes an object of the jackpot lottery, and performs a button presentation in one game round related to the reservation information. The configuration may be such that XD is executed multiple times.

In the present embodiment, control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XD is executed based on whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed. The control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XD may be executed based on whether or not the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 satisfies a predetermined operation condition, such as the time or number of times the button is pressed. .

Further, in the above example, the effect operation button 24 is used as an example of operation receiving means for receiving an input operation by a player, but the operation receiving means is not limited to this. For example, as the operation receiving means, adopt a stick or lever that the player operates back and forth or left and right, a button that detects the hand held up by the player, a touch sensor that detects the hand approaching the LCD screen, etc. can be done. An example of the processing of the button effect XD will be described below.

FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when a button effect XD is executed as an effect element (announcement effect) for foretelling a sense of deja vu. In step S3401, it is determined whether or not the first execution completion flag is stored in the flag storage area 94a of the RAM 94 on the sound and light side. If it is determined in step S3401 that the first execution completion flag is not stored (S3401: NO), that is, if the button effect XD has not been executed even once after the déjà vu notice flag was stored. At step S3402, the effect selection screen XD1 described above is displayed on the pattern display device 41, and the speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are caused to execute sound and light patterns corresponding to the effect selection screen XD1. The effect selection screen XD1 includes contents suggesting that the player should press the effect operation button 24 . After that, the process advances to step S3403.

In step S3403, it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. In step S3403, when it is determined that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S3403: YES), the process proceeds to step S3404, and the pattern display device 41 is caused to display the effect selection screen XD1 in which the selection state has been switched. In the example shown in FIG. 55, the effect selection screen XD1 displays a mode in which a turtle character moves to the left and a new turtle character appears from the right side of the screen. After that, the process advances to step S3405 to determine whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed.

If it is determined in step S3405 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S3405: NO), the process returns to step S3403 to determine whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, the presence or absence of pressing of the effect operation button 24 is monitored until a predetermined time has elapsed.

In step S3405, when it is determined that the predetermined time has passed (S3405: YES), the process proceeds to step S3406, and the selected effect mode XD2 is displayed on the symbol display device 41, speaker 46 and various lamps 47 as effect execution means. let it run. After that, the process advances to step S3407.

In step S3407, the type information of the effect mode XD2 executed in step S3406 is stored. Thereafter, the process advances to step S3408 to store the first execution completion flag in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound and light side RAM 94, and then the first button effect XD ends.

If it is determined in step S3401 that the first execution completion flag is stored (S3401: YES), that is, if the button effect XD has already been executed at least once after the déjà vu notice flag is stored. , the process advances to step S3409 to display the same effect selection screen XD1 as the first time on the pattern display device 41, and to cause the speaker 46 and various lamps 47 to execute sound and light patterns corresponding to the effect selection screen XD1. After that, the process proceeds to step S3410.

In step S3410, it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. In step S3410, when it is determined that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S3410: YES), the process proceeds to step S3411, and the pattern display device 41 is caused to display the effect selection screen XD1 in which the selection state has been switched. After that, the process advances to step S3412 to determine whether or not a predetermined time has passed.

If it is determined in step S3412 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S3412: NO), the process returns to step S3410 to determine whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, the presence or absence of pressing of the effect operation button 24 is monitored until a predetermined time has elapsed.

In step S3412, when it is determined that the predetermined time has passed (S3412: YES), the process proceeds to step S3413, and the effect mode XD2 stored in step S3407 is executed by the pattern display device 41, the speaker 46, and the After executing the various lamps 47, the second and subsequent button effects XD are terminated.

According to the above process, the button effect XD can be executed multiple times with the same content regardless of the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 . Note that the processing described above is an example, and the processing of the button effect XD may be realized by another algorithm.

<Example 5 of déjà vu notice using button effect>
FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing the flow when the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect XE as the effect element for the déjà vu preview and executes the button effect XE twice. FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the effect selection screen XE1, the effect mode XE2, and the suggestive effect F executed in the button effect XE.

When the execution of the first button effect XE is started, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment includes contents suggesting that the player presses the effect operation button 24, and selects one effect from among a plurality of effect modes. An effect selection screen XE1 for allowing the player to select a mode is displayed (S3501). The effect selection screen XE1 is a selection screen in which the selection state of the effect mode changes over time. In the example shown in FIG. 58, the effect selection screen XE1 is a roulette-type selection screen in which the selection cursor moves over time to select one effect mode from four effect modes. In this embodiment, the movement speed of the selection cursor is so high that the player cannot select a specific presentation mode. Note that the effect selection screen XE1 may be in another form.

Then, regardless of whether the effect operation button 24 is pressed or not (S3502), one effect mode is selected from a plurality of effect modes, and the selected effect mode is selected. The effect mode XE2 is executed (S3503). Specifically, if the effect operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time (S3502: YES), the press of the effect operation button 24 is used as a trigger to select one of a plurality of effect modes. One effect mode is selected, and the selected effect mode XE2 is executed (S3503). On the other hand, if the effect operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time (S3502: NO), one effect mode is selected from a plurality of effect modes triggered by the passage of the predetermined time. , and the selected effect mode XE2 is executed (S3503). In the example shown in FIG. 58, the selected rendering mode XE2 is a cut-in announcement rendering with a turtle character as the main character. However, another rendering mode may be selected as the rendering mode, and each selectable rendering mode may be another mode.

When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts executing the button effect XE for the second time, it displays the same effect selection screen XE1 as the effect selection screen XE1 displayed for the first time (S3504). Then, regardless of whether the effect operation button 24 is pressed or not (S3505), the same effect mode as the effect mode selected for the first time is selected. The selected effect mode XE2 is executed (S3506). Specifically, if the effect operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time (S3505: YES), the effect selected for the first time is triggered by the pressing of the effect operation button 24. A state in which the same effect mode as the mode is selected is executed, and the selected effect mode XE2 is executed. On the other hand, if the effect operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time (S3505: NO), the same effect mode as the first selected effect mode is selected with the elapse of the predetermined time as a trigger. Then, the selected effect mode XE2 is executed (S3506).

When the second button effect XE ends, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment suggests to the player that the same button effect XE has been executed a plurality of times (two times in the above example). Effect F is executed (S3507). In the example shown in FIG. 58, the suggestive effect F is a effect in which a female character throws a message such as "Did you mean déjà vu!?" to the player. However, the suggestive effect F may be in another form. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 executes other effects such as the battle effects described above.

When the button effect XE is executed three times or more, the same control as when the second button effect XE is executed is repeatedly executed, and the suggestive effect F is executed after the last button effect XE is completed. good.

As described above, when the button effect is executed a plurality of times, it is executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player (for example, whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed, the timing, the number of times of pressing, etc.). may be In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the button effects XE are executed a plurality of times as the effect element for the déjà vu preview, the button effects XE are executed from the second time onward regardless of the operation mode of the input operation by the player. , the same effect mode as that executed in the first button effect XE is selected and executed. Therefore, even when the button effect XE is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the button effect XE to be executed for the first and subsequent times can be the same. Then, as in the above embodiment, the player can be given a sense of déjà vu that the same button effect XE has been executed multiple times.

A player who recognizes the sense of déjà vu has a sense of expectation that the sense of déjà vu may have a special meaning, for example, a privilege may be given. Furthermore, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the effect element with the same content is executed multiple times, the player anticipates that the effect element with the same content will be executed multiple times, and the effect element is executed. Every time it is executed, they always pay attention to the production element with a high sense of expectation. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the performance element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, and to suitably increase the degree of attention of the player to the performance element which is sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game. can be achieved.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the suggestive effect F is executed, the player can be made to recognize that the button effect XE having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the same It is possible to convince the player that there is a special meaning in the fact that the content of the button effect XE has been executed multiple times. However, it is not essential to execute the suggestive effect F, and the pachinko machine 10 may be configured not to execute the suggestive effect F.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment selects the button effect XE as an effect element for the déjà vu notice when the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied, and repeats the button effect XE a plurality of times. In the case of execution, the time parameter indicating whether or not it is within the time during which pressing of the effect operation button 24 can be accepted is not displayed. The reason for this will be explained. The player may press the effect operation button 24 at different timings in each of the button effects executed a plurality of times. Here, if the time parameter is displayed, the player will recognize that the player presses the effect operation button 24 at different timings in each of the button effects executed a plurality of times, and the button effects will be the same. is executed a plurality of times, there is a risk that the player will be less likely to feel a sense of déjà vu with respect to the button effects that have been executed a plurality of times. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the time parameter is not displayed when the button effect is executed a plurality of times as the effect element for the déjà vu notice, so that the player hardly feels the déjà vu. It can be suppressed. However, the pachinko machine 10 selects a button effect as an effect element for the déjà vu notice and executes the button effect a plurality of times when the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied. The configuration may be such that the parameters are displayed.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the movement speed of the selection cursor is so high that the player cannot target and select a specific effect mode. Therefore, even though the player aims for the selection cursor to stop at a presentation mode different from the first selected presentation mode, the same presentation mode as the first selected presentation mode is forcibly selected. It is possible to reduce the player's sense of incongruity that he or she has been hit.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment determines whether or not the condition for generating the déjà vu advance notice is satisfied before the reservation information becomes a target of the jackpot lottery, and generates the déjà vu advance notice. When it is determined that the conditions are satisfied, the button presentation XE which is the target of execution multiple times before the reservation information determined to be the target of the jackpot lottery for which it is determined that the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied. start executing. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for the sense of deja vu over a plurality of game rounds. However, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the condition for generating the notice of déjà vu is satisfied when the reservation information becomes an object of the jackpot lottery, and performs a button presentation in one game round related to the reservation information. The configuration may be such that XE is executed multiple times.

In the present embodiment, control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XE is executed based on whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed. The control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XE may be executed based on whether or not the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 satisfies a predetermined operation condition, such as the time and number of times the button effect is pressed. .

Further, in the above example, the effect operation button 24 is used as an example of operation receiving means for receiving an input operation by a player, but the operation receiving means is not limited to this. For example, as the operation receiving means, adopt a stick or lever that the player operates back and forth or left and right, a button that detects the hand held up by the player, a touch sensor that detects the hand approaching the LCD screen, etc. can be done. An example of the processing of the button effect XE will be described below.

FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when the button effect XE is executed as an effect element (notice effect) for giving a sense of deja vu. In step S3601, it is determined whether or not the flag storage area 94a of the RAM 94 on the sound and light side stores an initial execution completion flag. In step S3601, when it is determined that the first execution completion flag is not stored (S3601: NO), the process advances to step S3602 to display the above-described roulette-type effect selection screen XE1 on the symbol display device 41, and the speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are caused to execute a sound and light pattern corresponding to the effect selection screen XE1. The effect selection screen XE1 includes contents suggesting that the player should press the effect operation button 24 . After that, the process proceeds to step S3603.

In step S3603, it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. In step S3603, when it is determined that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S3603: YES), the process proceeds to step S3605, the selection cursor is stopped at the timing when the effect operation button 24 is pressed, and one effect is performed. The pattern display device 41 is caused to display an image indicating that the mode has been selected. After that, the process proceeds to step S3606.

If it is determined in step S3603 that the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed (S3603: NO), the process advances to step S3604 to determine whether or not a predetermined period of time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S3604 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S3604: NO), the process returns to step S3603 to determine whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, the presence or absence of pressing of the effect operation button 24 is monitored until a predetermined time has elapsed.

If it is determined in step S3604 that the predetermined time has passed (S3604: YES), the process proceeds to step S3605, where the selection cursor is stopped at the timing when the predetermined time has passed, and an image indicating that one rendering mode has been selected. is displayed on the symbol display device 41 . After that, the process proceeds to step S3606.

In step S3606, the pattern display device 41, speaker 46 and various lamps 47 as the effect executing means are caused to execute the effect mode XE2 selected in step S3605. After that, the process proceeds to step S3607.

At step S3607, the type of effect mode XE2 executed at step S3606 is stored in the sound and light side RAM94. After that, the process proceeds to step S3608.

In step S3608, the first execution completion flag is stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound and light side RAM 94, and then the first button effect XE is terminated.

If it is determined in step S3601 that the first execution completion flag is stored (S3601: YES), that is, if the button effect XE has already been executed at least once after the déjà vu notice flag is stored. In step S3609, the pattern display device 41 displays the same effect selection screen XE1 as the first time, and the speaker 46 and various lamps 47 execute sound and light patterns corresponding to the effect selection screen XE1. After that, the process proceeds to step S3610.

In step S3610, it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. In step S3610, if it is determined that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S3610: YES), the process proceeds to step S3612, and the timing after the effect operation button 24 is pressed is stored in step S3607. The selection cursor is stopped at the timing when the selected performance mode XE2 is selected, and an image showing that the stored performance mode XE2 is selected is displayed on the pattern display device 41.例文帳に追加After that, the process proceeds to step S3613.

If it is determined in step S3610 that the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed (S3610: NO), the process proceeds to step S3611 to determine whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S3611 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S3611: NO), the process returns to step S3610 to determine whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, the presence or absence of pressing of the effect operation button 24 is monitored until a predetermined time has elapsed.

In step S3611, when it is determined that the predetermined time has passed (S3611: YES), the process proceeds to step S3612, and the effect mode XE2 stored in step S3607 at the timing after the predetermined time has passed is selected. The selection cursor is stopped at the timing, and the pattern display device 41 is caused to display an image indicating that the stored effect mode XE2 has been selected. After that, the process proceeds to step S3613.

In step S3613, after executing the effect mode XE2 selected in step S3612 by the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46 and various lamps 47 as effect execution means, the button effect XE after the second time is terminated.

According to the above process, the button effect XE can be executed multiple times with the same contents regardless of the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 . Note that the processing described above is an example, and the processing of the button effect XE may be realized by another algorithm.

<Example 6 of déjà vu notice using button effect>
FIG. 60 is a flow chart showing the flow when the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect XF as the effect element for the déjà vu preview and executes the button effect XF twice. FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the effect modes XF1 and XF2 and the suggestive effect F executed in the button effect XF.

When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts executing the first button effect XF, the contents suggesting the player to repeatedly hit the effect operation button 24 and the predetermined parameters move in a certain direction over time. Effect mode XF1 including changing contents is executed (S3701). In the example shown in FIG. 61, the presentation mode XF1 includes a content in which the crab character on the player side receives an ink attack from the enemy octopus character and tries to withstand the ink attack. This is a production mode in which the parameter indicating the character's physical strength changes in the direction of decreasing after being attacked by ink. In addition, in the effect mode XF1, as an example of a message suggesting that the effect operation button 24 should be hit repeatedly, characters such as "Hit repeatedly and endure!" are displayed. However, the effect mode XF1 may be another mode.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the effect mode XF1 is executed, the parameters decrease over time (S3702). At this time, if the effect operation button 24 is repeatedly hit by the player, the pachinko machine 10 executes control to decrease the parameter decrease speed. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 executes control so that the parameter decrease speed decreases as the number of depressions of the performance operation button 24 per unit time increases. In this way, the player attempts to reduce the rate of decrease of the parameters, and hits the effect operation button 24 repeatedly so that the number of times the effect operation button 24 is pressed per unit time increases. In the example shown in FIG. 61, the player repeatedly hits the performance operation button 24 to decrease the parameter decrease speed so that the crab character can withstand the attack of the octopus. Therefore, the player can be actively involved in the button effect XF, and a sense of unity with the game can be provided to the player.

Then, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment executes the effect mode XF2 after the parameters satisfy the predetermined parameter conditions (S3704). Specifically, after the parameter decreases to 0, the effect mode XF2 is executed (S3704). In the example shown in FIG. 61, the presentation mode XF2 is a presentation mode including the contents in which the crab character on the player side cannot withstand the attack of the octopus character on the enemy side and is defeated. However, the effect mode XF2 may be another mode.

When the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment starts executing the second button effect XF, it executes the same control as in the case of the first button effect XF. Specifically, the performance mode XF1 is executed (S3705), the parameter is decreased with the lapse of time (S3706), and after the parameter becomes 0 (S3707), the performance mode XF2 is executed (S3708). That is, regardless of the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24, the effect mode XF1 and the effect mode XF2 are executed.

When the second button effect XF is completed, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment suggests to the player that the same button effect XF has been executed a plurality of times (two times in the above example). Effect F is executed (S3709). In the example shown in FIG. 61, the suggestive effect F is a effect in which a female character throws a message such as "Did you mean deja vu!?" to the player. However, the suggestive effect F may be in another form. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 executes other effects such as the battle effects described above.

When the button effect XF is executed three times or more, the same control as when the second button effect XF is executed is repeatedly executed, and the suggestive effect F is executed after the last button effect XF is completed. good.

As described above, when the button effect is executed a plurality of times, it is executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player (for example, whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed, the timing, the number of times of pressing, etc.). may be In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when executing the button effect XF for the first time and when executing the button effect XF for the second and subsequent times, similarly, after executing the effect mode XF1, the input operation by the player is performed. Decrease the parameter to 0 regardless of the operation mode of , and execute the effect mode XF2. Therefore, even when the button effect XF is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the button effect XF to be executed for the first and subsequent times can be the same. Then, it is possible to give the player a sense of déjà vu (déjà vu) that the button effect XF having the same content has been executed a plurality of times.

A player who has recognized the sense of déjà vu has a sense of expectation that the sense of déjà vu has a special meaning, for example, that a privilege may be given. Furthermore, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the effect element with the same content is executed multiple times, the player anticipates that the effect element with the same content will be executed multiple times, and the effect element is executed. Every time it is executed, they always pay attention to the production element with a high sense of expectation. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the performance element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, and to suitably increase the degree of attention of the player to the performance element which is sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game. can be achieved.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the suggestive effect F is executed, the player can be made to recognize that the same button effect XF has been executed a plurality of times, and the same It is possible to convince the player that there is a special meaning in the fact that the content of the button effect XF is executed multiple times. In particular, when a performance mode that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, a performance mode in which the player's character is defeated) is executed as the performance mode XF2, the depressed mood is reversed, and the suggestive performance is executed. expectations can be raised at once. However, it is not essential to execute the suggestive effect F, and the pachinko machine 10 may be configured not to execute the suggestive effect F.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment determines whether or not the condition for generating the déjà vu advance notice is satisfied before the reservation information becomes a target of the jackpot lottery, and generates the déjà vu advance notice. When it is determined that the condition is satisfied, the button performance XF which is the target of execution multiple times before the reservation information determined to be the target of the jackpot lottery for which it is determined that the generation condition of the déjà vu notice is satisfied. start executing. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for the sense of deja vu over a plurality of game rounds. However, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the condition for generating the notice of déjà vu is satisfied when the reservation information becomes an object of the jackpot lottery, and performs a button presentation in one game round related to the reservation information. The configuration may be such that XF is executed multiple times.

The pachinko machine 10 stores the process of changing the parameters when executing the first button effect XF, and the process of changing the stored parameters when executing the second and subsequent button effects XF. can be reproduced. In this way, the process of changing the parameters is the same in each of the button effects XF executed a plurality of times, so that the player can be given a stronger sense of deja vu.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with changing means for changing the mode of the effect operation button 24 to the mode when it is pressed (that is, the mode depressed by pressing). When executing the first button performance XF, the pachinko machine 10 memorizes the process of changing the mode of the performance operation button 24 when the performance operation button 24 is repeatedly hit by the player, and the second and subsequent times. When the button effect XF is executed, it is preferable to cause the change means to reproduce the process of changing the mode of the effect operation button 24 stored. By doing so, the mode of the effect operation button 24 is changed, so that the game can be given a sense of surprise. Furthermore, in the second and subsequent button effects XF, the process of changing the mode of the effect operation button 24 in the first button effect XF is reproduced, so that the player can be given a stronger sense of deja vu.

Also, in the above example, an example in which the parameter is changed in the decreasing direction with the lapse of time has been described, but the parameter may be changed in the direction of increasing with the lapse of time. In this case, the pachinko machine 10 may perform control so that the rate of parameter increase increases as the number of depressions of the effect operation button 24 per unit time increases. Parameters that increase over time include, for example, the player's character's attack power parameter and morale parameter. Then, after the parameter increases and reaches a predetermined value such as a maximum value, a positive effect mode such as a victory effect may be executed. In this way, as in the above example, regardless of the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 by the player, since the parameter increases to the predetermined maximum value, the pachinko machine 10 can perform the button effect XF. The same content can be executed multiple times. In addition, the player tries to increase the speed of increase of the parameters, and hits the effect operation button 24 repeatedly so that the number of times the effect operation button 24 is pressed per unit time increases. Therefore, as in the above example, the player can be actively involved in the button effect XF, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game.

Further, in the above example, the parameter is shown in a bar shape, but without being limited to this, it may be shown in another shape such as a circle, and may be shown only by numerical values. It may be in the form of

Further, in the above example, the effect operation button 24 is used as an example of operation receiving means for receiving an input operation by a player, but the operation receiving means is not limited to this. For example, as the operation receiving means, adopt a stick or lever that the player operates back and forth or left and right, a button that detects the hand held up by the player, a touch sensor that detects the hand approaching the LCD screen, etc. can be done. An example of processing of the button effect XF will be described below.

FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when a button effect XF is executed as an effect element (announcement effect) for foretelling a sense of deja vu. In this button effect XF, the same process is executed when it is executed for the first time and when it is executed for the second and subsequent times.

In step S3801, the pattern display device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 as the effect executing means are caused to execute the above-described effect mode XF1. The effect mode XF1 includes a content suggesting that the player repeatedly hit the effect operation button 24 and a content in which the physical strength parameter changes in a decreasing direction with the lapse of time. After executing step S3801, the process proceeds to step S3802.

In step S3802, it is determined whether or not the production operation button 24 has been repeatedly hit. Specifically, for example, the number of presses of the effect operation button 24 within a predetermined time is counted, and when the number of presses is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of times, it is determined that the effect operation button 24 has been repeatedly hit. If it is determined in step S3802 that the effect operation button 24 has been repeatedly hit (S3802: YES), the process proceeds to step S3803 to reduce the physical strength parameter at a predetermined speed. After that, the process advances to step S3805.

If it is determined in step S3802 that the effect operation button 24 has not been repeatedly hit (S3802: NO), the process proceeds to step S3804 to decrease the physical strength parameter at a speed faster than the predetermined speed in step S3803. After that, the process advances to step S3805.

In step S3805, it is determined whether or not the physical strength parameter has become zero. If it is determined in step S3805 that the physical strength parameter is not 0 (S3805: NO), the process returns to step S3802 to determine whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been repeatedly hit. That is, until the physical strength parameter becomes 0, whether or not the performance operation button 24 is repeatedly hit is monitored, and during the period when the performance operation button 24 is repeatedly hit, the physical strength parameter is lowered at a slow speed, and the performance operation button 24 is not repeatedly hit. Duration lowers the physical strength parameter at a fast rate.

In step S3805, when it is determined that the physical strength parameter has become 0 (S3805: YES), the process proceeds to step S3806, and the above-described effect mode XF2 is applied to the symbol display device 41, speaker 46 and various lamps 47 as effect execution means. let it run. After that, the first or second or later forewarning effect for the foretelling of the feeling of deja vu is ended.

In the above example, the speed at which the physical strength value is lowered is explained as having two stages according to the presence or absence of repeated hits. good.

According to the above processing, the button effect XF can be executed multiple times with the same contents regardless of the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 . Note that the processing described above is an example, and the processing of the button effect XF may be realized by another algorithm.

<Example 7 of déjà vu notice using button effect>
FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing the flow when the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect XG as the effect element for the déjà vu preview and executes the button effect XA twice. FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the effect modes XG1 and XG2 and the suggestive effect F executed in the button effect XG.

When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts executing the first button effect XG, it executes the effect mode XG1 including content suggesting the player to press the effect operation button 24 (S3901). In the example shown in FIG. 64, the presentation mode XG1 is a presentation mode in which an image of a treasure box is displayed, and characters and an image prompting the user to press the presentation operation button 24 are displayed. However, the presentation mode XA1 may be another mode.

If the effect operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time after the effect mode XG1 is executed (S3902: YES), the effect mode XG1 and the effect mode XG1 executes a different presentation mode XG2 (S3903). In the example shown in FIG. 64, the presentation mode XG2 is a presentation mode in which a female character appears from inside a treasure chest. However, the effect mode XG2 may be another mode. On the other hand, if the effect operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time (S3902: NO), the effect mode XG2 is not executed while the effect mode XG1 is being executed.

When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts executing the second button effect XG, it executes the effect mode XG1 (S3904 or S3908) in the same manner as the first button effect XG. Then, after executing the effect mode XG1, if the effect operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time (S3905: YES or S3909: YES), the depression of the effect operation button 24 is triggered. , the effect mode XG2 is executed (S3906 or S3910). On the other hand, if the effect operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time (S3905: NO or S3909: NO), the effect mode XG2 is not executed while the effect mode XG1 is being executed.

Then, in the pachinko machine 10, when the effect mode XG2 is executed in all of the button effects XG executed a plurality of times (two times in the above example), or the effect mode XG2 is executed in all of the button effects XG executed a plurality of times. When XG2 has not been executed even once, a suggestive effect F is executed to suggest to the player that the same button effect XG has been executed a plurality of times (S3907 or S3911). In the example shown in FIG. 64, the suggestive effect F is a effect in which a female character throws a message such as "Did you mean deja vu!?" to the player. However, the suggestive effect F may be in another form. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 executes other effects such as the battle effects described above. On the other hand, if the same content is not executed even once in the button effects XG that have been executed a plurality of times, specifically, although the effect mode XG2 is executed in the first button effect XG, the second button effect XG is executed. If the effect mode XG2 is not executed in the button effect XG of , and even though the effect mode XG2 is not executed in the first button effect XG, the effect mode XG2 is executed in the second button effect XG. If so, the suggestion performance F is not executed, but the normal ready-to-win performance or the like is executed.

When the button effect XG is executed three times or more, the same control as when the second button effect XG is executed is repeatedly executed, and whether the suggestive effect F is executed after the last button effect XG is completed. It is sufficient to determine whether or not

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player performs the same input operation in each of the button effects executed a plurality of times, the button effects XG are executed a plurality of times with the same contents. It is possible to give the player a feeling of déjà vu that the button presentation XG having the content of is executed a plurality of times. Furthermore, when the button performance XG with the same content is executed a plurality of times, the suggestive performance F is executed, so that the player can recognize that the button performance XG with the same content has been executed a plurality of times. In addition, the player can be convinced that the fact that the button performance XG having the same content is executed a plurality of times has a special meaning.

Furthermore, when the player experiences the suggestive performance F after the button performance XG is executed a plurality of times with the same content, the player expects that the suggestive performance F will be executed, and every time the button performance XG is executed, The performance operation button 24 is operated so that the same input operation is performed and the button performance XG is executed with the same content, and generation of the suggestive performance F is expected. Therefore, the player's attention to the button effects XG that are sequentially executed can be favorably increased, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player presses the production operation button 24 within a predetermined time, the production mode XG2 is triggered by the depression of the production operation button 24. Since it is executed, the player can be actively involved in the button presentation XG, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game. However, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to execute the effect mode XG2 at a predetermined timing without being triggered by pressing the effect operation button 24 .

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment selects the button effect XG as the effect element for the déjà vu notice when the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied, and repeats the button effect XG a plurality of times. In the case of execution, the time parameter indicating whether or not it is within the time during which pressing of the effect operation button 24 can be accepted is not displayed. The reason for this will be explained. The player may press the effect operation button 24 at different timings in each of the button effects executed a plurality of times. Here, if the time parameter is displayed, the player will recognize that the player presses the effect operation button 24 at different timings in each of the button effects executed a plurality of times, and the button effects will be the same. is executed a plurality of times, there is a risk that the player will be less likely to feel a sense of déjà vu with respect to the button effects that have been executed a plurality of times. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the time parameter is not displayed when the button effect is executed a plurality of times as the effect element for the déjà vu notice, so that the player hardly feels the déjà vu. It can be suppressed. However, the pachinko machine 10 selects a button effect as an effect element for the déjà vu notice and executes the button effect a plurality of times when the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied. The configuration may be such that the parameters are displayed.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment determines whether or not the condition for generating the déjà vu advance notice is satisfied before the reservation information becomes a target of the jackpot lottery, and generates the déjà vu advance notice. When it is determined that the condition is satisfied, the button performance XG to be executed a plurality of times before the reservation information determined to satisfy the condition for generating the déjà vu notice becomes the object of the jackpot lottery. start executing. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for the sense of deja vu over a plurality of game rounds. However, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the condition for generating the notice of déjà vu is satisfied when the reservation information becomes an object of the jackpot lottery, and performs a button presentation in one game round related to the reservation information. The configuration may be such that XG is executed multiple times.

In the present embodiment, control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XG is executed based on whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed. The control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XG may be executed based on whether or not the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 satisfies a predetermined operation condition, such as the time or number of times the button is pressed. .

Further, in the above example, the effect operation button 24 is used as an example of operation receiving means for receiving an input operation by a player, but the operation receiving means is not limited to this. For example, as the operation receiving means, adopt a stick or lever that the player operates back and forth or left and right, a button that detects the hand held up by the player, a touch sensor that detects the hand approaching the LCD screen, etc. can be done. An example of the processing of the button effect XG will be described below.

FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when a button effect XG is executed as an effect element (announcement effect) for foretelling a sense of deja vu. In step S4001, it is determined whether or not the flag storage area 94a of the RAM 94 on the sound and light side stores an initial execution completion flag.

If it is determined in step S4001 that the first executed flag is not stored (S4001: NO), that is, if the button effect XG has not been executed even once after the déjà vu notice flag was stored. , the process advances to step S4002 to cause the pattern display device 41, the speaker 46, and various lamps 47 as the effect executing means to execute the above-described effect mode XG1. The effect mode XG1 includes contents suggesting that the player should press the effect operation button 24 . After that, the process proceeds to step S4003.

In step S4003, it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. In step S4003, if it is determined that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S4003: YES), the process proceeds to step S4004, and the symbol display device 41, speaker 46 and various lamps 47 as effect execution means are displayed as described above. The performance mode XG2 is executed. After executing step S4004, the process advances to step S4005 to store the button depression flag in the various flag storage area 94a of the RAM 94 on the sound and light side. The button depression flag is a flag for specifying in the sound/light side MPU 92 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed when the first button effect XG is executed. After executing step S4005, the process advances to step S4007.

If it is determined in step S4003 that the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed (S4003: NO), the process advances to step S4006 to determine whether or not a predetermined period of time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S4006 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S4006: NO), the process returns to step S4003 to determine whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, the presence or absence of pressing of the effect operation button 24 is monitored until a predetermined time has elapsed. In step S4006, if it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (S4006: YES), that is, if the effect operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time, step S4004 and step S4005 are not executed. Proceed to S4007.

In step S4007, the first executed flag is stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the RAM94. After that, the process proceeds to step S4008, the suggested effect execution flag is stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the RAM 94, and the first button effect XG is finished.

The suggestive effect execution flag indicates that when the button effect XG is executed a plurality of times after the déjà vu notice flag is stored, the same effect mode XG2 is executed in all of the button effects XG for the plurality of times. Alternatively, it is a flag for specifying in the sound and light side MPU 92 that the effect mode XG2 has never been executed in all of the button effects XG for the plurality of times.

As will be described in the processing of each step below, the suggestive effect execution flag is set in the second and subsequent times when the effect mode XG2 is executed in the first button effect XG after the déjà vu notice flag is stored. If the button effect XG does not execute the effect mode XG2 even once, it is erased. In addition, after the déjà vu notice flag is stored, the suggestive effect execution flag is set even once in the second and subsequent button effects XG when the effect mode XG2 is not executed in the first button effect XG. It is cleared when XG2 is executed. That is, after the déjà vu preview flag is stored, when the button effect XG is executed a plurality of times, when the same effect mode XG2 is executed in all of the button effects XG of the plurality of times, or when the plurality of button effects XG are executed When the performance mode XG2 is never executed in all the button performances XG, the suggestive performance execution flag remains stored without being erased. In the present embodiment, when setting the content of the advance notice effect of the game cycle related to the reservation information determined that the conditions for generating the notice of déjà vu have been satisfied, it is determined whether or not this suggestive effect execution flag is stored. Then, when it is determined that the suggestive effect execution flag is stored, the above-described suggestive effect F is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the suggestive effect execution flag is not stored, the suggestive effect F is not executed, and a normal ready-to-win effect or the like is executed. Hereinafter, the explanation of the processing of each step in FIG. 65 will be returned.

If it is determined in step S4001 that the first execution completion flag is stored (S4001: YES), that is, if the button effect XG has already been executed at least once after the déjà vu notice flag is stored. , the process proceeds to step S4009, and the pattern display device 41, the speaker 46 and various lamps 47 as the effect executing means are caused to execute the effect mode XG1. After that, the process proceeds to step S4010.

In step S4010, it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. In step S4010, when it is determined that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S4010: YES), the process proceeds to step S4011, and the pattern display device 41, speaker 46 and various lamps 47 as effect execution means are displayed in effect mode XG2. to run. After that, the flow advances to step S4012 to determine whether or not the button depression flag is stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound and light side RAM 94. FIG.

In step S4012, when it is determined that the button depression flag is stored (S4012: YES), the second and subsequent button effects XG are terminated without erasing the suggestive effect execution flag. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4012 that the button depression flag is not stored (S4012: NO), the process proceeds to step S4015.

In step S4015, when the suggestive effect execution flag is stored, the suggestive effect execution flag is erased, and the second and subsequent button effects XG are terminated. When the suggestive effect execution flag is not stored, the second and subsequent button effects XG are terminated as they are.

If it is determined in step S4010 that the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed (S4010: NO), the process proceeds to step S4013 to determine whether or not a predetermined period of time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S4013 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S4013: NO), the process returns to step S4010 to determine whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, the presence or absence of pressing of the effect operation button 24 is monitored until a predetermined time has elapsed. In step S4013, if it is determined that the predetermined time has passed (S4013: YES), that is, if the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed within the predetermined time, the process proceeds to step S4014.

In step S4014, it is determined whether or not the button depression flag is stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound and light side RAM 94. FIG. In step S4014, when it is determined that the button pressing flag is stored (S4014: YES), the process proceeds to step S4015 described above, and when the suggestive effect execution flag is stored, the suggestive effect execution flag is erased. . On the other hand, when it is determined in step S4014 that the button depression flag is not stored (S4014: NO), the second and subsequent button effects XG are terminated without erasing the suggestive effect execution flag.

According to the above processing, the suggestive effect F can be executed only when the button effect XG is executed a plurality of times with the same content. Note that the processing described above is an example, and the processing of the button effect XG may be realized by another algorithm.

<Example 8 of déjà vu notice using button effects>
FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing the flow when the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect XH as the effect element for the déjà vu preview and executes the button effect XH twice. FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the effect modes XH1, XH2, XH3 and the suggestive effect F executed in the button effect XH.

When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts executing the first button effect XH, it executes the effect mode XH1 including content suggesting the player to press the effect operation button 24 (S4101). In the example shown in FIG. 67, the presentation mode XH1 is a presentation mode in which an image of a treasure box is displayed, and characters and an image prompting the user to press the presentation operation button 24 are displayed. However, the effect mode XH1 may be another mode.

If the effect operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time after the effect mode XH1 is executed (S4102: YES), the effect mode XH1 and executes a different presentation mode XH2 (S4103). In the example shown in FIG. 67, the presentation mode XH2 is a presentation mode in which a female character appears from a treasure chest. However, the effect mode XH2 may be another mode. On the other hand, if the effect operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time (S4102: NO), the effect mode XH3, which is different from the effect mode XH1 and the effect mode XH2, is executed after the predetermined time has elapsed (S4109). . In the example shown in FIG. 67, the presentation mode XH3 is a presentation mode in which a fish character carries away a treasure chest. However, the effect mode XH3 may be another mode.

When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts executing the second button effect XH, it executes the effect mode XH1 (S4104 or S4110) in the same manner as the first button effect XH. Then, if the effect operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time after the effect mode XH1 is executed (S4105: YES or S4111: YES), the press of the effect operation button 24 is triggered. , the effect mode XH2 is executed (S4106 or S4112). On the other hand, if the effect operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time (S4105: NO or S4111: NO), the effect mode XH3 is executed when the predetermined time elapses (S4107).

Then, in the pachinko machine 10, when the effect mode XH2 is executed in all of the button effects XH executed a plurality of times (two times in the above example), or the effect mode XH2 is executed in all of the button effects XH executed a plurality of times. When XH3 is executed, a suggestion effect F is executed to suggest to the player that the button effect XH has been executed a plurality of times with the same content (S4108 or S4114). In the example shown in FIG. 67, the suggestion effect F is a effect in which a female character throws a message such as "Did you mean deja vu!?" to the player. However, the suggestive effect F may be in another form. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 executes other effects such as the battle effects described above. On the other hand, if the same content is not executed even once in the button effect XH that has been executed a plurality of times, specifically, although the effect mode XH2 is executed in the first button effect XH, the second button effect XH is executed. and when the effect mode XH3 is executed in the first button effect XH, the effect mode XH2 is executed in the second button effect XH. , the suggestion performance F is not executed, but the normal ready-to-win performance or the like is executed.

When the button effect XH is executed three times or more, the same control as when the second button effect XH is executed is repeatedly executed, and whether the suggestive effect F is executed after the last button effect XH is completed. It is sufficient to determine whether or not

According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player performs the same input operation in each of the button effects executed a plurality of times, the button effects XH are executed a plurality of times with the same contents. It is possible to give the player a sense of déjà vu that the button effect XH having the contents of is executed a plurality of times. Further, when the button performance XH with the same content is executed a plurality of times, the suggestive performance F is executed, so that the player can recognize that the button performance XH with the same content has been executed a plurality of times. In addition, the player can be convinced that the fact that the button effect XH having the same content is executed a plurality of times has a special meaning.

Furthermore, when the player experiences the suggestive effect F after the button effect XH is executed a plurality of times with the same content, the player expects that the suggestive effect F will be executed, and each time the button effect XH is executed, The performance operation button 24 is operated so that the same input operation is performed and the button performance XH is executed with the same content, and generation of the suggestive performance F is expected. Therefore, the player's attention to the sequentially executed button effects XH can be favorably increased, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player presses the production operation button 24 within a predetermined time, the production mode XH2 is triggered by the depression of the production operation button 24. Since it is executed, the player can be actively involved in the button effect XH, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game. However, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to execute the effect mode XH2 at a predetermined timing without using the pressing of the effect operation button 24 as a trigger.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment selects the button effect XH as an effect element for the déjà vu notice when the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied, and repeats the button effect XH a plurality of times. In the case of execution, the time parameter indicating whether or not it is within the time during which pressing of the effect operation button 24 can be accepted is not displayed. The reason for this will be explained. The player may press the effect operation button 24 at different timings in each of the button effects executed a plurality of times. Here, if the time parameter is displayed, the player will recognize that the player presses the effect operation button 24 at different timings in each of the button effects executed a plurality of times, and the button effects will be the same. is executed a plurality of times, there is a risk that the player will be less likely to feel a sense of déjà vu with respect to the button effects that have been executed a plurality of times. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the time parameter is not displayed when the button effect is executed a plurality of times as the effect element for the déjà vu notice, so that the player hardly feels the déjà vu. It can be suppressed. However, the pachinko machine 10 selects a button effect as an effect element for the déjà vu notice and executes the button effect a plurality of times when the condition for generating the déjà vu notice is satisfied. The configuration may be such that the parameters are displayed.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment determines whether or not the condition for generating the déjà vu advance notice is satisfied before the reservation information becomes a target of the jackpot lottery, and generates the déjà vu advance notice. When it is determined that the condition is satisfied, the button presentation XH to be executed a plurality of times before the reservation information determined to satisfy the condition for generating the déjà vu advance notice becomes the object of the jackpot lottery. start executing. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for the sense of deja vu over a plurality of game rounds. However, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the condition for generating the notice of déjà vu is satisfied when the reservation information becomes an object of the jackpot lottery, and performs a button presentation in one game round related to the reservation information. The configuration may be such that XH is executed multiple times.

In the present embodiment, control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XH is executed based on whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed. The control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XH may be executed based on whether or not the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 satisfies a predetermined operation condition, such as the time or number of times the button is pressed. .

Further, in the above example, the effect operation button 24 is used as an example of operation receiving means for receiving an input operation by a player, but the operation receiving means is not limited to this. For example, as the operation receiving means, adopt a stick or lever that the player operates back and forth or left and right, a button that detects the hand held up by the player, a touch sensor that detects the hand approaching the LCD screen, etc. can be done. An example of the processing of the button effect XH will be described below.

FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when the button effect XH is executed as the effect element (previous effect) for the previous notice. In step S4201, it is determined whether or not the first execution completion flag is stored in the flag storage area 94a of the RAM 94 on the sound and light side.

If it is determined in step S4201 that the first execution completion flag is not stored (S4201: NO), that is, if the button effect XH has not been executed even once after the déjà vu notice flag was stored. , the process advances to step S4202 to cause the pattern display device 41, the speaker 46 and various lamps 47 as the effect executing means to execute the above-described effect mode XH1. The effect mode XH1 includes contents suggesting that the player should press the effect operation button 24 . After that, the process proceeds to step S4203.

In step S4203, it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. In step S4203, when it is determined that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S4203: YES), the process proceeds to step S4204, and the symbol display device 41, speaker 46 and various lamps 47 as effect execution means are displayed as described above. The effect mode XH2 is executed. After executing step S4204, the process advances to step S4205 to store the button depression flag in the various flag storage area 94a of the RAM 94 on the sound and light side. The button depression flag is a flag for specifying in the sound and light side MPU 92 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed when the first button effect XH is executed. After executing step S4205, the process advances to step S4207.

If it is determined in step S4203 that the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed (S4203: NO), the process advances to step S4206 to determine whether or not a predetermined period of time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S4206 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S4206: NO), the process returns to step S4203 to determine whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, the presence or absence of pressing of the effect operation button 24 is monitored until a predetermined time has elapsed. In step S4206, if it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (S4206: YES), that is, if the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed within the predetermined time, the process proceeds to step S4207, and symbol display as effect execution means. The device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 are caused to execute the above-described effect mode XH3. After that, the process proceeds to step S4208.

In step S4208, the first execution completion flag is stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the RAM94. After that, the process proceeds to step S4209, the suggestive effect execution flag is stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the RAM 94, and the first button effect XH ends.

The suggestive effect execution flag indicates that when the button effect XH is executed a plurality of times after the déjà vu notice flag is stored, the same effect mode XH2 is executed in all of the button effects XH for the plurality of times. Alternatively, it is a flag for specifying in the sound and light side MPU 92 that the effect mode XH2 has never been executed in all of the button effects XH multiple times.

As will be described in the processing of each step below, the suggestive effect execution flag is set in the second and subsequent times when the effect mode XH2 is executed in the first button effect XH after the déjà vu notice flag is stored. If the effect mode XH3 is executed even once in the button effect XH, it is erased. In addition, after the déjà vu notice flag is stored, the suggestive effect execution flag is set to the effect mode XH2 even once in the second and subsequent button effects XH when the effect mode XH3 is executed in the first button effect XH. is deleted when is executed. That is, when the button effect XH is executed a plurality of times after the déjà vu preview flag is stored, the same effect mode XH2 is executed in all of the button effects XH, or the plurality of button effects XH are executed. When the same effect mode XH3 is executed in all button effects XH, the suggestive effect execution flag remains stored without being erased. In the present embodiment, when setting the content of the advance notice effect of the game cycle related to the reservation information determined that the conditions for generating the notice of déjà vu have been satisfied, it is determined whether or not this suggestive effect execution flag is stored. Then, when it is determined that the suggestive effect execution flag is stored, the above-described suggestive effect F is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the suggestive effect execution flag is not stored, the suggestive effect F is not executed, and a normal ready-to-win effect or the like is executed. Hereinafter, the explanation of the processing of each step in FIG. 68 will be returned.

If it is determined in step S4201 that the first execution completion flag is stored (S4201: YES), that is, if the button effect XH has already been executed at least once after the déjà vu notice flag is stored. , the process advances to step S4210 to cause the pattern display device 41, the speaker 46 and various lamps 47 as the effect execution means to execute the effect mode XH1. After that, the process proceeds to step S4211.

In step S4211, it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. In step S4211, when it is determined that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S4211: YES), the process proceeds to step S4212, and the pattern display device 41, speaker 46 and various lamps 47 as effect execution means are displayed in effect mode XH2. to run. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S4213 to determine whether or not the button depression flag is stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound and light side RAM 94. FIG.

In step S4213, when it is determined that the button depression flag is stored (S4213: YES), the second and subsequent button effects XH are terminated without erasing the suggested effect execution flag. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4213 that the button depression flag is not stored (S4213: NO), the process proceeds to step S4217.

In step S4217, when the suggestive effect execution flag is stored, the suggestive effect execution flag is erased, and the second and subsequent button effects XH are terminated. If the suggestive effect execution flag is not stored, the second and subsequent button effects XH are terminated.

If it is determined in step S4211 that the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed (S4211: NO), the process proceeds to step S4214 to determine whether or not a predetermined period of time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S4214 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S4214: NO), the process returns to step S4211 to determine whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, the presence or absence of pressing of the effect operation button 24 is monitored until a predetermined time has elapsed. In step S4214, if it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (S4214: YES), that is, if the effect operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time, the process proceeds to step S4215, and symbol display as effect execution means. The device 41, the speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are caused to execute the presentation mode XH3. After that, the process proceeds to step S4216.

In step S4216, it is determined whether or not the button depression flag is stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound and light side RAM 94. FIG. In step S4216, when it is determined that the button pressing flag is stored (S4216: YES), the process proceeds to step S4217 described above, and when the suggestive effect execution flag is stored, the suggestive effect execution flag is erased. . On the other hand, when it is determined in step S4216 that the button depression flag is not stored (S4216: NO), the second and subsequent button effects XH are terminated without erasing the suggestion effect execution flag.

According to the above processing, the suggestive effect F can be executed only when the button effect XH is executed a plurality of times with the same content. Note that the processing described above is an example, and the processing of the button effect XH may be realized by another algorithm.

According to the present embodiment described above, various expectations can be given to the player. In particular, if the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to select at least two or more of the above button effects XA, XB, XC, XG, and XH as effect elements for foretelling the feeling of deja vu, the player can press the button While paying attention to the performance mode executed in the performance, various predictions are made as to which kind of button performance is being executed, and generation of suggestive performance is expected. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the amusement of the game.

H. Eighth embodiment:
Next, an eighth embodiment will be described. The main difference between this embodiment and the above-described first to seventh embodiments is that a second start opening unit 200 including a second start opening is provided in the right side area of the game area GA. The difference is that a type of high-frequency support mode is set. In the following description, the configuration of the second starter unit 200 included in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment and the control related to the second starter unit 200 will be mainly described. Description of the same configuration and processing as those of the first to seventh embodiments will be omitted.

FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram showing the game board 30 of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment. In this embodiment, as described above, the second starting opening unit 200 including the second starting opening is provided in the right area of the game area GA. In this embodiment, all game balls fired from the game ball shooting mechanism 81 with a shooting strength equal to or greater than a predetermined number enter the opening 202 of the second starter unit 200 .

FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of the second starting port unit 200. As shown in FIG. The second starting port unit 200 includes an opening 202 into which a game ball can enter, a route R1 provided on the downstream left side of the opening 202, a route R2 provided on the downstream right side of the opening 202, It is provided with an alternate distribution mechanism 204 for alternately distributing the game balls entering the opening 202 to the left path R1 and the right path R2. A through gate 206 through which game balls can pass is provided downstream of the route R1, and an opening/closing ball entry device 208 is provided downstream of the through gate 206 and the route R2.

The alternate distribution mechanism 204 is configured to distribute the game balls entering the opening 202 to the route R1 and distribute the game balls arriving after the game balls distributed to the route R1 to the route R2. Specifically, the alternate distribution mechanism 204 includes a central piece 204a formed in the center, a left piece 204b formed on the left side of the central piece 204a, and a right side piece 204b formed on the right side of the central piece 204a. It has a piece 204c and a rotating shaft 204d provided between the left piece 204b and the right piece 204c. A region sandwiched between the central piece 204a and the left piece 204b functions as a left holding portion 204e that temporarily holds a game ball. Also, the area sandwiched between the central piece 204a and the right piece 204c functions as a right holding portion 204f that temporarily holds the game ball. The behavior of the alternate distribution mechanism 204 when the game ball reaches the alternate distribution mechanism 204 will be described later.

The opening and closing ball entry device 208 includes an opening and closing door 208b as an electric accessory that opens and closes back and forth with the lower rotating shaft as a base point, and a second start opening 208a into which a game ball can enter is provided inside the opening and closing door 208b. I have. In addition, inside the opening/closing door 208b, a guideway 208c inclined toward the second starting port 208a is provided, and a game ball entered inside the opening/closing door 208b is guided along the second guideway 208c. It is guided to the starting port 208a. The second starting port 208a has the same role as the second starting port 34 in the above embodiment. When the opening/closing door 208b is in the closed state, it is in a state where the game ball cannot enter the second starting port 208a. On the other hand, when the opening/closing door 208b is in an open state, it is in a state in which it is possible to enter a game ball into the second starting port 208a. In other words, the opening/closing door 208b has a function of changing the state of the second start opening 208a between a ball-entering impossible state and a ball-entering possible state. It should be noted that the opening/closing door 208b is normally in a closed state, and the second start opening 208a is in a non-enterable state.

The through gate 206 has a through hole extending vertically. When the game ball passes through the through gate 206, the main controller 60 uses the passage of the game ball through the through gate 206 as a trigger to conduct an internal lottery (electric role object release lottery). As a result of the electric accessary item opening lottery, when the opening/closing door 208b is elected to transition to the open state, the main control device 60 causes the general figure unit 38 to display the result of the electric accessary item opening lottery, and closes the opening/closing door 208b. Make a transition from the state to the open state.

The route R1 is configured so that the sorted game balls can pass through the through gate 206, and the sorted game balls can pass through the open/close door 208b of the open/close ball entry device 208 in an open state. In some cases, the ball can enter the second starting port 208a. In addition, in this embodiment, a route R1x branched from the route R1 is provided. However, as another embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which game balls distributed to the route R1 do not pass through the through gate 206, but pass through the route R1x.

The route R2 is configured so that the distributed game balls cannot pass through the through gate 206, and the distributed game balls do not pass through the opening/closing door 208b of the opening/closing ball entry device 208 in an open state. In some cases, it is configured to allow the ball to enter the second starting hole 208a.

In this embodiment, after the game ball has passed through the through gate 206, the result of the electric accessary item open lottery executed when the game ball has passed through the through gate 206 is displayed by the normal figure unit 38. (that is, the variable time from when the light-emitting display unit of the normal figure unit 38 starts the variable display to when the stop display corresponding to the result of the electric accessory open lottery is performed) is the game ball through the gate The time is set to be shorter than the time from when the game ball passes through 206 to when it reaches the opening/closing ball entry device 208 . Specifically, in the present embodiment, since the time from when the game ball passes through the through gate 206 to when the game ball reaches the open/close ball entry device 208 is about 0.2 seconds, the normal figure unit 38 is set to 0.05 seconds.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, after the result of the electric accessory open lottery is displayed by the general figure unit 38, the opening and closing door 208b of the opening and closing ball entry device 208 starts the transition from the closed state to the open state. There is no open waiting time. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when winning the electric role product open lottery, the open/close door 208b is closed immediately after the fluctuation of the general figure unit 38 is completed and the result of the electric role product open lottery is displayed by the general figure unit 38. It will initiate a transition from state to open state.

However, strictly speaking, there is a time required for control from when the result of the electric accessory open lottery is displayed by the normal figure unit 38 to when the open/close door 208b starts to transition from the closed state to the open state. . In this embodiment, the time required for control from when the result of the electric accessary item open lottery is displayed by the normal figure unit 38 until the opening/closing door 208b of the opening/closing ball entry device 208 starts transitioning from the closed state to the open state. is about 0.004 seconds. The reason why the time is about 0.004 seconds is that, as described above, main controller 60 delays the electrical support process (FIG. 12: S407, FIG. 76 to be described later) in the normal process (FIG. 12) by 0.004 seconds. If the winning result is displayed on the normal figure unit 38 (Fig. 76: S4520), it is executed at a 0.004 second cycle. This is because the opening process (FIG. 77: S4698) of the opening/closing door 208b is executed in the electric power opening/closing process (FIG. 76: S4522, FIG. 77 described later) of the electric support process (FIG. 76). That is, in this embodiment, in addition to the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38 and the open waiting time of the open/close door 208b, even if the time required for control is considered, the game ball passes through the through gate 206 before opening and closing. The time until the opening/closing door 208b of the ball device 208 starts to transition from the closed state to the open state is the time from when the game ball passes through the through gate 206 until the game ball reaches the opening/closing ball entry device 208. Time is shorter than time.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a game ball passes through the through gate 206 and wins the electric accessory open lottery, the main controller 60 detects that the game ball that triggered the execution of the electric accessory open lottery opens and closes. Prior to the timing of reaching the ball device 208, the opening/closing door 208b is changed from the closed state to the open state. As a result, the game ball that triggered the execution of the electric accessary item opening lottery enters the second starting port 208a provided inside the open/close door 208b when the electric accessary item opening lottery is won. will do.

In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 has a first high-frequency support mode and a second high-frequency support mode as types of high-frequency support modes for controlling the opening/closing door 208b. In the first high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric accessory open lottery is set to 100%, and when the electric accessory open lottery is won, the open/close door 208b is opened once and the opening time is 0. 0.5 seconds. In the second high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric accessory open lottery is set to 100%, and when the electric accessory open lottery is won, the open/close door 208b is opened once and the opening time is 1. .1 seconds. That is, the difference between the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode is the length of time that the open/close door 208b is maintained in the open state after transitioning from the closed state to the open state, and the game ball shooting mechanism. 81, the number of game balls entering the second starting port 208a is different in a situation where game balls are continuously shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram showing behavior of the second starting port unit 200 when the first high-frequency support mode is being executed. In the example shown in FIG. 71, the game ball is fired by the game ball launching mechanism 81 with a constant firing intensity that can reach the second starting port unit 200 provided on the right side of the game board 30, and is 0.6 Fired continuously at intervals of seconds. Therefore, the game ball enters the opening 202 of the second starting port unit 200 at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

As shown in the state A1, when the game ball GB1 reaches the second starting port unit 200 and enters the second starting port unit 200 through the opening 202, it reaches the alternate distribution mechanism 204. In the example shown in state A1, the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is tilted to the right, so the game ball that reaches the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is temporarily held by the left holding portion 204e. Then, the alternate distribution mechanism 204 rotates about 90 degrees to the left (counterclockwise) around the rotation axis 204d by the weight of the game ball GB1 held by the left holding portion 204e, and enters the state A2. .

As shown in state A2, when the alternating distribution mechanism 204 is tilted leftward, the game ball GB1 held by the left holding portion 204e falls from the left holding portion 204e and is distributed to the left path R1. . After that, the game ball GB1 distributed to the route R1 passes through the through gate 206. - 特許庁When the game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 206, the main controller 60 executes the electric accessory opening lottery. As described above, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning the electric accessory open lottery in the first high-frequency support mode is set to 100%. The opening/closing door 208b is opened once, and the opening time is set to 0.5 seconds. Further, the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38 for displaying the lottery result of the electric accessory open lottery is set to 0.05 seconds. And, as described above, in this embodiment, the opening waiting time of the opening and closing door 208b is not provided, and after the winning result of the electric accessary item open lottery is displayed on the normal figure unit 38, the opening and closing ball entering device 208 The time required for control until the opening/closing door 208b starts to transition to the open state is approximately 0.004 seconds. Therefore, the opening/closing door 208b of the opening/closing ball entry device 208 transitions to the open state after about 0.06 seconds after the game ball GB1 has passed through the through gate 206, and maintains the open state for 0.5 seconds. As described above, in this embodiment, the time from when the game ball passes through the through gate 206 to when the game ball reaches the open/close ball entry device 208 is about 0.2 seconds, so the through gate 206 is At the timing when the passing game ball GB1 reaches the opening/closing ball entering device 208, the opening/closing door 208b is in an open state, and the game ball GB1 enters the second starting port 208a. After that, the game ball GB2 next to the game ball GB1 distributed to the route R1 enters the opening 202, and the state A3 is reached.

As shown in state A3, when the game ball GB2 next to the game ball GB1 distributed to the path R1 enters the opening 202, the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is tilted leftward. The game ball GB2 that has reached the distribution mechanism 204 is temporarily held by the right holding portion 204f. Then, the alternate distribution mechanism 204 rotates about 90 degrees to the right (clockwise) around the rotating shaft 204d due to the weight of the game ball GB2 held by the right holding portion 204f, and enters state A4.

As shown in state A4, when the alternating distribution mechanism 204 is tilted to the right, the game ball GB2 held by the right holding portion 204f falls from the right holding portion 204f and is distributed to the right path R2. . After that, the game ball GB2 distributed to the route R2 reaches the opening/closing ball entry device 208. - 特許庁Here, in this embodiment, since the interval between game balls fired from the game ball shooting mechanism 81 is 0.6 seconds, after the game ball GB1 reaches the open/close ball entry device 208, the game ball GB2 opens and closes. The interval until reaching the ball-entering device 208 is also about 0.6 seconds. Therefore, in the first high-frequency support mode of the present embodiment, at the timing when the game ball GB2 reaches the open/close ball entering device 208, the open/close door 208b has already shifted to the closed state. The ball cannot enter the second starting hole 208a provided inside the device 208. After that, the state A1 is reached again, and the states A1 to A4 are repeated.

That is, in the first high-frequency support mode of the present embodiment, the game ball has a predetermined launch intensity that can reach the second starting port unit 200 by the game ball launching mechanism 81, and continues at intervals of 0.6 seconds. In the situation where the game ball GB1 that has been distributed to the route R1 and passed through the through gate 206 reaches the open/close ball entry device 208, the open/close door 208b is transitioned to the open state, and the game ball GB1 is distributed to the route R2. At the timing when the received game ball GB2 reaches the opening/closing ball entry device 208, the opening/closing door 208b has transitioned to the closed state.

FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram showing behavior of the second starting port unit 200 when the second high-frequency support mode is executed. States A1 to A3 in FIG. 72 are the same as states A1 to A3 in FIG. 71 described above. However, in the second high-frequency support mode, the opening time of the opening/closing door 208b is set to 1.1 seconds, so as shown in state A4 in FIG. At the timing when the game ball GB2 reaches the opening/closing ball entry device 208, the opening/closing door 208b of the opening/closing ball entry device 208 is maintained in an open state, and the game ball GB2 is pushed through the second starting port provided inside the opening/closing door 208b. 208a will be entered.

That is, in the second high-frequency support mode of the present embodiment, the game ball has a predetermined launch intensity that can reach the second start port unit 200 by the game ball launching mechanism 81, and continues at intervals of 0.6 seconds. In the situation where the game ball GB1 that has been distributed to the first path and passed through the through gate 206 reaches the opening and closing ball entry device 208, the opening and closing door 208b is transitioned to the open state, and the second The opening/closing door 208b maintains the open state even at the timing when the game ball GB2 distributed to the path 2 reaches the opening/closing ball entry device 208.

FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment. For reference, FIG. 73 also describes the type and content of the high-frequency support mode executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends. As described above, in the present embodiment, the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode are set as types of high-frequency support modes executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends. In this embodiment, the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls when the game balls enter the second starting hole 208a is set to one.

As shown in FIG. 73(a), when winning the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 obtained is 0 to 9, 8R It shifts to the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the normal jackpot, and shifts to the first high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Also, when the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 10 to 19, it shifts to the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R normal jackpot, and shifts to the first high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Further, when the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 20 to 24, it shifts to the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 8R probability variable jackpot, and shifts to the second high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Also, when the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 25 to 29, it shifts to the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R probability variable jackpot, and shifts to the second high frequency support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends.

As shown in FIG. 73(b), when winning the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 208a and the value of the obtained jackpot type counter C2 is 0 to 5, 8R It shifts to the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the normal jackpot, and shifts to the first high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Also, when the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 6 to 11, it shifts to the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R normal jackpot, and shifts to the first high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Also, when the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 12 to 20, it shifts to the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 8R probability variable jackpot, and shifts to the second high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Also, when the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 21 to 29, it shifts to the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R probability variable jackpot, and shifts to the second high frequency support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends.

Here, the game ball is fired continuously at intervals of 0.6 seconds with a predetermined firing intensity that can reach the second starting port unit 200 by the game ball firing mechanism 81. The ratio of the number of game balls paid out to the number of game balls is defined as the ball output rate, and the ball output rate when the i-th (i is an integer of 1 or more) high-frequency support mode is executed. It is defined as the ball rate Mi. Below, the pitching rate M1 when the first high-frequency support mode is executed and the pitching rate M2 when the second high-frequency support mode is executed will be described.

In the first high-frequency support mode, game balls are fired continuously at intervals of 0.6 seconds with a predetermined firing intensity that can reach the second starting port unit 200 by the game ball firing mechanism 81. Then, as described above, one game ball out of the two game balls launched enters the second starting port 208a of the open/close ball entry device 208, and one game ball is paid out as a prize ball. It will be. Therefore, the pitching rate M1 when the first high-frequency support mode is executed is as follows.
M1 = 1/2 = 0.50

Here, the ball output rate is less than 1 means that the game ball has a predetermined launch intensity that can reach the second starting port unit 200 by the game ball launching mechanism 81, and is continuous at intervals of 0.6 seconds. It means that the number of game balls in the player's hand is reduced in a situation where the ball is being shot. Therefore, in the first high-frequency support mode, it means that the number of game balls held by the player is reduced. Specifically, in the first high-frequency support mode, two game balls are fired in 1.2 seconds and one game ball is paid out as a prize ball. , will decrease at a rate of 1 every 1.2 seconds.

In the second high-frequency support mode, game balls are fired continuously at intervals of 0.6 seconds with a predetermined firing intensity that can reach the second starting port unit 200 by the game ball firing mechanism 81. Then, as described above, two game balls out of the two game balls launched enter the second starting port 208a of the open/close ball entry device 208, and two game balls are paid out as prize balls. It will be. Therefore, the pitching rate M2 when the second high-frequency support mode is executed is as follows.
M2 = 2/2 = 1.00

Here, the ball output rate of 1 means that the game ball has a predetermined launch intensity that can reach the second starting port unit 200 by the game ball launching mechanism 81, and continuously at intervals of 0.6 seconds. It means that the number of game balls in the player's hand does not increase or decrease while being shot. Therefore, in the second high-frequency support mode, it means that the number of game balls held by the player does not increase or decrease. Specifically, in the second high-frequency support mode, two game balls are fired in 1.2 seconds and two game balls are paid out as prize balls, so the game balls held by the player are It will not increase or decrease.

In addition, PAi is defined as the ratio of execution of the i-th high-frequency support mode in the case where the high-frequency support mode is executed by winning the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33. Then, the ratio PA1 at which the first high-frequency support mode is executed and the ratio PA2 at which the second high-frequency support mode is executed are as follows.

PA1 = The number of values (0 to 19) of the jackpot type counter C2 that wins the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 and shifts to the first high-frequency support mode/jackpot Total number of values of type counter C2=20/30
PA2 = Number of values (20 to 29) of the jackpot type counter C2 that wins the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 and shifts to the second high-frequency support mode/jackpot Total number of values of type counter C2=10/30

Further, if the total ball throwing rate in the case where the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 is won and the high frequency support is executed, the total throwing rate is defined as the first total throwing rate T1. , the first total ball hitting rate T1 can be defined by the following equation (1).

n in the above formula (1) is the number of types of high-frequency support modes, and n=2 in this embodiment. Therefore, the first total ball hitting rate T1 in this embodiment is as follows.

T1=M1×PA1+M2×PA2
= 0.50 x (20/30) + 1.00 x (10/30) = 0.67

That is, the first total ball-balling rate T1 is the sum of the ball-balling rates of the high-frequency support modes executed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 multiplied by the execution rate. It means the expected value of the ball rate.

In addition, PBi is defined as the ratio of execution of the i-th high-frequency support mode in the case where the high-frequency support mode is executed by winning the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 208a. do. Then, the ratio PB1 at which the first high-frequency support mode is executed and the ratio PB2 at which the second high-frequency support mode is executed are as follows.
PB1 = the number of values (0 to 11) of the jackpot type counter C2 that wins the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 208a and shifts to the first high-frequency support mode/jackpot Total number of values of type counter C2=12/30
PB2 = The number of values (12 to 29) of the jackpot type counter C2 that wins the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 208a and shifts to the second high-frequency support mode/jackpot Total number of values of type counter C2=18/30

Further, if the total ball throwing rate in the case where the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 208a is won and the high-frequency support is executed, is defined as the second total throwing rate T2. , the second total ball hitting rate T2 can be defined by the following equation (2).

n in the above formula (2) is the number of types of high-frequency support modes, and n=2 in this embodiment. Therefore, the second total ball hitting rate T2 in this embodiment is as follows.

T2=M1×PB1+M2×PB2
= 0.50 x (12/30) + 1.00 x (18/30) = 0.80

That is, the second total ball-balling rate T2 is the sum of the ball-balling rates of the high-frequency support modes executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 208a multiplied by the execution ratio. It means the expected value of the ball rate.

As described above, in the present embodiment, both the value of the first total ball rolling rate T1 and the value of the second total ball rolling rate T2 are less than one. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the total number of game balls held by the player does not increase, but decreases.

Next, an example of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. In the following, processing different from that of the first embodiment will be described, and description of the same processing will be omitted.

FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing the prize-winning process for the starter executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment. Differences from the processing (FIG. 10) executed by the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment will be described below.

The main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment sets a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out one game ball in step S4306. Since the processing in other steps is the same as the processing (FIG. 10) executed by the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, description thereof is omitted.

FIG. 75 is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment. Differences from the processing (FIG. 19) executed by the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment will be described below.

The main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment stores the second high frequency support flag in step S4404. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the probability variable jackpot is finished, the game state shifts to the game state in which the support mode is the second high-frequency support mode. Note that the second high-frequency support flag is used to determine whether or not the second high-frequency support mode is being executed.

Also, the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment stores the first high frequency support flag in step S4407. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the normal jackpot is ended, the game state shifts to the game state in which the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode. Since the processing in other steps is the same as the processing (FIG. 19) executed by the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, description thereof is omitted. Note that the first high-frequency support flag is used to determine whether or not the first high-frequency support mode is being executed.

FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing a process for electric support performed by the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment. Differences from the processing (FIG. 20) executed by the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment will be described below.

In step S4509, the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment conducts an electric accessory open lottery. As described above, in this embodiment, the probability of winning the electric accessory open lottery in the high frequency support mode is set to 100%. Specifically, since the value that the electric accessory opening counter C4 can take is 0 to 249, the electric accessory opening lottery is won when the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 is 0 to 249. . Also, at the same time as the electric accessory open lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "25" (that is, 0.05 sec).

Further, in step S4511, the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment stores the support winning flag and sets "1" to the second round counter area RC2 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. do. This means that the open/close door 208b is opened once when winning the electric accessory open lottery during the high-frequency support mode of the present embodiment. Since the processing in other steps is the same as the processing (FIG. 20) executed by the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, description thereof is omitted.

FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing electric opening/closing processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment. The main difference from the processing executed by the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment (FIG. 21) is that different open times are set for each of the two high-frequency support modes. A specific description will be given below.

In step S4601, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing door 208b as an electric accessory is open. Whether or not the opening/closing door 208b is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessary product driving section 34b is in a driving state. If it is determined that the opening/closing door 208b is open (S4601: YES), the process proceeds to step S4602.

In step S4602, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening continuation time of the door 208b. If it is determined in step S4602 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S4602: NO), the electric opening/closing process is terminated. In other words, if the opening continuation time of the opening/closing door 208b has not ended, the electric opening/closing process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S4602 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S4602: YES), the flow advances to step S4603 to perform closing processing for controlling the opening/closing door 208b to a closed state. 2 "25" (that is, 0.05 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as means for measuring the opening duration time of the opening/closing door 208b is "0", the opening/closing door 208b is closed, and the second timer counter area T2 is set to the opening/closing door 208b. "25" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step S4603, the process proceeds to step S4604.

In step S4604, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the flow advances to step S4605 to determine whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". If it is determined in step S4605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (S4605: NO), the electric opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (S4605: YES), the process advances to step S4606 to clear the supported flag. After that, the main electrical opening/closing process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S4601 that the opening/closing door 208b is not open (S4601: NO), the process advances to step S4607 to determine whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration time of the door 208b. If it is determined in step S4607 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S4607: NO), the electric opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4607 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S4607: YES), the process advances to step S4608 to execute opening processing for controlling the opening/closing door 208b to the open state. After that, the process advances to step S4609.

In step S4609, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (S4609: NO), the process advances to step S4610 to determine whether the first high-frequency support mode is in progress. determine whether

If it is determined in step S4610 that the first high-frequency support mode is in effect (S4610: YES), the process advances to step S4611 to set "250" (that is, 0.5 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the main electrical opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4610 that the first high-frequency support mode is not in effect (S4610: NO), the flow advances to step S4612 to determine whether or not the second high-frequency support mode is in effect.

If it is determined in step S4612 that the second high-frequency support mode is in effect (S4612: YES), the process advances to step S4613 to set "550" (that is, 1.1 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the main electrical opening/closing process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4609 that the open/close execution mode is in progress (S4609: YES), or if it is determined in step S4612 that the second high-frequency support mode is not in progress (S4612: NO), the process proceeds to step S4614. It advances and sets "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the main electrical opening/closing process is terminated.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the game ball GB1 distributed to the route R1 can pass through the through gate 206, and when the open/close door 208b is in the open state, the second It becomes possible to enter the ball into the starting hole 208a. On the other hand, since the game ball GB2 arriving after the game ball GB1 is distributed to the route R2, when it is impossible to pass through the through gate 206 and the opening/closing door 208b is in the open state, the second starting port 208a It is possible to enter the ball. That is, of the two game balls GB1 and GB2, only the game ball GB1 can pass through the through gate 206, and each of the two game balls GB1 and GB2 enters the second start hole 208a. Whether or not depends on whether or not the opening/closing door 208b is in an open state at the timing when each of the two game balls GB1 and GB2 reaches the opening/closing ball entry device 208 or not. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, while the number of game balls passing through the through gate 206 is one among the two game balls GB1 and GB2, the number of game balls entering the second start opening 208a is It can be changed depending on the state of the opening/closing door 208b.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the main controller 60 executes the electric accessory open lottery triggered by the passage of the game ball GB1 through the through gate 206, and based on the result of the electric accessory open lottery. It controls the open/close door 208b. Since the game ball GB2 arriving after the game ball GB1 does not pass through the through gate 206, the main controller 60 controls the opening/closing door 208b at the timing when each of the two game balls GB1 and GB2 reaches the opening/closing ball entry device 208. When the game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 206, it is determined whether the state is closed or open, that is, whether the game balls GB1 and GB2 are entered into the second starting port 208a. It is determined by the result of the electric accessory open lottery executed as and the type of support mode. Therefore, a series of controls triggered by the passage of one game ball GB1 through the through gate 206 is performed to control whether each of the two game balls GB1 and GB2 is allowed to enter the second start hole 208a. can be realized by

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the variable time from when the light-emitting display unit of the normal figure unit 38 starts the variable display to when the stop display corresponding to the result of the electric accessory open lottery is The time is set to be shorter than the time from when the first game ball GB1 that triggered the opening lottery passes through the through gate 206 until the game ball GB1 reaches the open/close ball entry device 208. - 特許庁Therefore, the normal figure unit 38 can display the result of the lottery before the timing when the game ball GB1, which has passed through the through gate 206 and triggered the lottery, reaches the opening/closing ball entry device 208.例文帳に追加Here, after the result of the lottery is displayed by the normal figure unit 38, the main controller 60 starts the control based on the result of the lottery. Control based on the result of the lottery can be started before the timing when the ball GB1 reaches the opening/closing ball-entering device 208 .

Furthermore, in this embodiment, after the light emitting display unit of the general figure unit 38 starts the variable display, the stop display corresponding to the winning result of the electric accessory open lottery is performed, and the opening and closing door 208b of the opening and closing ball entry device 208 The time until the transition to the open state starts is the time from when the first game ball GB1 that triggered the electric accessory open lottery passes through the through gate 206 to when the game ball GB1 opens and closes the ball entry device. The time is set to be shorter than the time up to 208 . Therefore, the main controller 60 can realize a high-frequency support mode in which the opening/closing door 208b is open at the timing when the game ball GB1 that has passed through the through gate 206 reaches the opening/closing ball entry device 208.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, main controller 60 changes the length of time for which the open state is maintained after the open/close door 208b transitions from the closed state to the open state for each type of high-frequency support mode. Therefore, the number of game balls entering the second starting hole 208a out of the two game balls GB1 and GB2 can be made different for each type of high frequency support mode. Specifically, in this embodiment, the game ball GB1 distributed to the route R1 enters the second start hole 208a, and the game ball GB2 that arrives after the game ball GB1 does not enter the second start hole 208a. A first high frequency support mode (ball throwing rate M1=0.50) and a second high frequency support mode (ball throwing rate M2=1.00) in which both game balls GB1 and GB2 enter the second starting port 208a. ) are realized. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to realize a plurality of types of high-frequency support modes with different ball-putting rates.

I. Ninth embodiment:
Next, a ninth embodiment will be described. The difference between this embodiment and the above-described eighth embodiment is that the configuration of the second starting port unit is different, and that three types of high-frequency support modes are set. In the following description, mainly the configuration of the second starter unit 300 included in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment and the control related to the second starter unit 300 will be described. Description of the same configuration and processing as those of the first to eighth embodiments will be omitted.

FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of the second starter unit 300 provided in the pachinko machine of the ninth embodiment. The second starting port unit 300 includes an opening 302 into which a game ball can enter, a route R1 provided on the downstream left side of the opening 302, a route R2 provided on the downstream right side of the opening 302, A first alternate distribution mechanism 304 is provided for alternately distributing game balls entering the opening 302 to the left path R1 and the right path R2. The second starting port unit 300 further includes a second alternate distribution mechanism 305 provided downstream of the route R1, a route R11 provided on the left downstream of the second alternate distribution mechanism 305, and a second alternate distribution mechanism 305. and a path R12 provided on the right downstream side of the minute mechanism 305 . A through gate 306 through which game balls can pass is provided downstream of the route R11, and an opening/closing ball entry device 308 is provided downstream of the through gate 306, the route R12 and the route R2.

The first alternate distribution mechanism 304 is configured to alternately distribute game balls entered into the opening 302 to the left path R1 and the right path R2. Specifically, the alternate distribution mechanism 304 includes a central piece 304a formed in the center, a left piece 304b formed on the left side of the central piece 304a, and a right side piece 304b formed on the right side of the central piece 304a. It has a piece 304c and a rotating shaft 304d provided between the left piece 304b and the right piece 304c. A region sandwiched between the central piece 304a and the left piece 304b functions as a left holding portion 304e that temporarily holds a game ball. Also, the area sandwiched between the central piece 304a and the right piece 304c functions as a right holding portion 304f that temporarily holds the game ball. The behavior of the first alternate distribution mechanism 304 when the game ball reaches is the same as the behavior of the alternate distribution mechanism 204 described in the eighth embodiment.

The second alternate distribution mechanism 305 is configured to alternately distribute the game balls distributed to the route R1 to the left route R11 and the right route R12. Specifically, the second alternate distribution mechanism 305 includes a central piece 305a formed in the center, a left piece 305b formed on the left side of the central piece 305a, and a right side of the central piece 305a. and a rotating shaft 305d provided between the left and right side pieces 305b and 305c. A region sandwiched between the central piece 305a and the left piece 305b functions as a left holding portion 305e that temporarily holds a game ball. Also, the area sandwiched between the central piece 305a and the right piece 305c functions as a right holding portion 305f that temporarily holds the game ball. The behavior of the second alternate distribution mechanism 305 when the game ball reaches is the same as the behavior of the alternate distribution mechanism 204 described in the eighth embodiment.

The open/close ball entry device 308 is provided with an open/close door 308b that opens and closes back and forth around the lower rotating shaft, and is provided with a second starting port 308a into which a game ball can enter inside the open/close door 308b. In addition, inside the opening/closing door 308b, a guideway 308c inclined toward the second starting port 308a is provided, and a game ball entered inside the opening/closing door 308b is guided along the second guideway 308c. It is guided to the starting port 308a. The second starting port 308a has the same role as the second starting port 34 in the above embodiment. When the opening/closing door 308b is in a closed state, it is in a state where the game ball cannot enter the second starting port 308a. On the other hand, when the opening/closing door 308b is in an open state, it is in a state in which it is possible to enter a game ball into the second starting port 308a. In other words, the opening/closing door 308b has a function of changing the state of the second start opening 308a between a ball-entering impossible state and a ball-entering possible state. It should be noted that the opening/closing door 308b is normally closed, and the second start opening 308a is in a non-enterable state.

The through gate 306 has a through hole extending vertically. When the game ball passes through the through gate 306, the main controller 60 uses the passage of the game ball through the through gate 306 as a trigger to conduct an internal lottery (electric role object release lottery). As a result of the electric accessary item opening lottery, when the opening/closing door 308b is elected to transition to the open state, the main control device 60 causes the general figure unit 38 to display the result of the electric accessary item opening lottery, and closes the opening/closing door 308b. Make a transition from the state to the open state.

The route R11 is configured so that the sorted game balls can pass through the through gate 306, and the sorted game balls can pass through the open/close door 308b of the open/close ball entry device 308 in an open state. In some cases, the ball is configured to be able to enter the second starting hole 308a. In addition, in this embodiment, a route R11x branched from the route R11 is provided. However, as another embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which game balls distributed to the route R11 do not pass through the through gate 306, but pass through the route R11x.

The route R2 and the route R12 are configured so that the distributed game balls cannot pass through the through gate 306, and the distributed game balls do not pass through the opening/closing door 308b of the opening/closing ball entry device 308. In the open state, it is configured such that the ball can be entered into the second starting port 308a.

In this embodiment, after the game ball passes through the through gate 306, the result of the electric accessary item open lottery executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 306 is displayed by the normal figure unit 38. (that is, the variable time from when the light-emitting display unit of the normal figure unit 38 starts the variable display until the stop display corresponding to the result of the electric accessory open lottery) is the game ball through the gate The time is set to be shorter than the time from when the game ball passes through 306 to when it reaches the opening/closing ball entry device 308 . Specifically, in the present embodiment, since the time from when the game ball passes through the through gate 306 to when the game ball reaches the open/close ball entry device 308 is about 0.2 seconds, the normal figure unit 38 is set to 0.05 seconds.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, after the result of the electric accessory open lottery is displayed by the general figure unit 38, the opening and closing door 208b of the opening and closing ball entry device 208 starts the transition from the closed state to the open state. There is no open waiting time. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when winning the electric accessory open lottery, the open/close door 208b is closed immediately after the fluctuation of the normal figure unit 38 is completed and the result of the electric accessory open lottery is displayed by the normal figure unit 38. It will initiate a transition from the state to the open state.

Also in this embodiment, as in the eighth embodiment described above, after the result of the electric accessary item open lottery is displayed by the normal figure unit 38, the open/close door 208b starts to transition from the closed state to the open state. Although there is a time required for control of about 0.004 seconds until the game The time from when the ball passes through the through gate 306 to when the opening/closing door 308b of the opening/closing ball entry device 308 starts to transition from the closed state to the open state is, after the game ball passes through the through gate 306, The time is set to be shorter than the time required for the game ball to reach the opening/closing ball entry device 308 .

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a game ball passes through the through gate 306 and is won in the electric accessory open lottery, the main controller 60 determines whether the game ball that triggered the execution of the electric accessory open lottery opens or closes. Prior to the timing of reaching the ball device 308, the opening/closing door 308b is changed from the closed state to the open state. As a result, the game ball that triggered the execution of the electric accessory opening lottery enters the second start port 308a provided inside the open/close door 308b when the electric accessory opening lottery is won. will do.

In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 has a first high-frequency support mode, a second high-frequency support mode, and a third high-frequency support mode as types of high-frequency support modes for controlling the opening/closing door 308b. ing. In the first high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric accessory open lottery is set to 100%, and when the electric accessory open lottery is won, the open/close door 308b is opened once and the opening time is 0. 0.5 seconds. In the second high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric accessory open lottery is set to 100%, and when the electric accessory open lottery is won, the open/close door 308b is opened once and the opening time is 1. .1 second. In the third high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric accessory open lottery is set to 100%, and when the electric accessory open lottery is won, the open/close door 308b is opened once and the opening time is 1. .7 seconds. That is, the difference between the first to third high-frequency support modes is the length of time that the open state is maintained after the open/close door 308b transitions from the closed state to the open state.

FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram showing the trajectory of the game ball when the game ball enters the second starting port unit 300. As shown in FIG. When the first alternate distribution mechanism 304 provided in the second starting port unit 300 is tilted to the right and the second alternate distribution mechanism 305 is tilted to the right, the first When the game ball GB1 enters from the opening 302, the game ball GB1 is distributed to the route R1 by the first alternate distribution mechanism 304 and to the route R11 by the second alternate distribution mechanism 305. As a result, the game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 306, and if the opening/closing door 308b of the opening/closing ball entry device 308 is in an open state, the game ball GB1 enters the second starting port 308a provided inside the opening/closing door 308b. It will be. That is, the trajectory of the gaming ball GB1 that hits the first ball becomes the trajectory L1 shown in FIG.

When the second game ball GB2 following the game ball GB1 enters from the opening 302, the game ball GB2 is distributed to the route R2 by the first alternate distribution mechanism 304. - 特許庁As a result, the game ball GB2 reaches the open/close ball entry device 308 without passing through the through gate 306. The ball will enter the second starting port 308a. That is, the trajectory of the gaming ball GB2 that hits the second ball becomes the trajectory L2 shown in FIG.

When the third game ball GB3 following the game ball GB2 enters from the opening 302, the game ball GB3 is distributed to the route R1 by the first alternate distribution mechanism 304, and is routed by the second alternate distribution mechanism 305. Allocated to R12. As a result, the game ball GB3 reaches the open/close ball entry device 308 without passing through the through gate 306. The ball will enter the second starting port 308a. That is, the trajectory of the game ball GB3 that hits the third ball becomes the trajectory L3 shown in FIG.

When the fourth game ball GB4 following the game ball GB3 enters from the opening 302, the game ball GB4 is distributed to the route R2 by the first alternate distribution mechanism 304. - 特許庁As a result, the game ball GB4 reaches the open/close ball entry device 308 without passing through the through gate 306. The ball will enter the second starting port 308a. That is, the trajectory of the gaming ball GB4 that hits the fourth ball becomes the trajectory L4 shown in FIG.

In addition, when the fifth game ball following the game ball GB4 enters from the opening 302, the first alternate distribution mechanism 304 is tilted to the right, and the second alternate distribution mechanism 305 It is tilted to the right. Therefore, the trajectory of the fifth hit game ball becomes the same as the trajectory L1 of the first hit game ball GB1. That is, the second starter unit 300 of this embodiment returns to its original state when four game balls enter.

Here, in a situation where the game ball is fired continuously at intervals of 0.6 seconds with a predetermined firing intensity that can reach the second starting port unit 300 by the game ball firing mechanism 81, the above-mentioned second A case where the first to third high-frequency support modes are executed will be described.

When the first high-frequency support mode is executed, the probability of winning the electric accessory open lottery executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 306 is set to 100%. The number of opening times of the opening/closing door 308b is set to 1, and the opening time is set to 0.5 seconds when winning the accessory opening lottery. Therefore, the opening/closing door 308b is in an open state at the timing when the first game ball GB1 that has passed through the through gate 306 reaches the opening/closing ball entry device 308, but the second to fourth game balls GB2 to GB4 are opened. reaches the opening/closing ball entry device 308, it is in a closed state. As a result, when the first high-frequency support mode is executed, only the first game ball GB1 among the four game balls GB1 to GB4 is provided inside the opening/closing door 308b. The ball will enter the mouth 308a.

When the second high-frequency support mode is executed, the probability of winning the electric accessory open lottery executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 306 is set to 100%. The number of openings of the opening/closing door 308b is set to 1 and the opening time is set to 1.1 seconds in the case of winning the lottery to open the accessory. Therefore, the opening/closing door 308b is open at the timing when the first game ball GB1 that has passed through the through gate 306 reaches the opening/closing ball entry device 308 and at the timing when the second game ball GB2 reaches the opening/closing ball entry device 308. However, at the timing when the third and fourth game balls GB3 and GB4 reach the opening/closing ball entry device 308, it is in a closed state. As a result, when the second high frequency support mode is executed, the first and second game balls GB1 and GB2 out of the four game balls GB1 to GB4 are provided inside the opening/closing door 308b. The ball will enter the second starting port 308a.

When the third high frequency support mode is executed, the probability of winning the electric accessory open lottery executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 306 is set to 100%. The number of openings of the opening/closing door 308b is set to 1, and the opening time is set to 1.7 seconds when the winning lottery is won. Therefore, the opening/closing door 308b is operated at the timing when the first game ball GB1 that has passed through the through gate 306 reaches the opening/closing ball entry device 308, the timing when the second game ball GB2 reaches the opening/closing ball entry device 308, and the third game ball GB2 reaches the opening/closing ball entry device 308. At the timing when the game ball GB3 reaches the opening/closing ball entry device 308, it is in the open state, but at the timing when the fourth game ball GB4 reaches the opening/closing ball entry device 308, it is in the closed state. As a result, when the third high-frequency support mode is executed, the first to third game balls GB1 to GB3 among the four game balls GB1 to GB4 are provided inside the opening/closing door 308b. The ball will enter the second starting hole 308a.

FIG. 80 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment. For reference, FIG. 80 also describes the type and content of the high-frequency support mode executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends. As described above, in the present embodiment, the first high-frequency support mode, the second high-frequency support mode, and the third high-frequency support mode are the types of high-frequency support modes that are executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends. is set. In this embodiment, the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls when the game balls enter the second starting port 308a is set to two.

As shown in FIG. 80(a), winning the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, and when the value of the jackpot type counter C2 obtained is 0 to 9, 8R It shifts to the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the normal jackpot, and shifts to the first high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Also, when the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 10 to 19, it shifts to the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R normal jackpot, and shifts to the first high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. In addition, when the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 20 to 24, it shifts to the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 8R probability variable jackpot, and shifts to the second high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Also, when the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 25 to 29, it shifts to the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R probability variable jackpot, and shifts to the third high frequency support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends.

As shown in FIG. 80(b), when winning the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 308a and the value of the obtained jackpot type counter C2 is 0 to 5, 8R It shifts to the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the normal jackpot, and shifts to the first high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Further, when the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 6 to 11, it shifts to the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R normal jackpot, and shifts to the first high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Also, when the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 12 to 20, it shifts to the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 8R probability variable jackpot, and shifts to the second high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Also, when the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 21 to 29, it shifts to the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R probability variable jackpot, and shifts to the third high frequency support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends.

Here, the game ball is fired continuously at intervals of 0.6 seconds with a predetermined firing intensity that can reach the second starting port unit 300 by the game ball firing mechanism 81. The ratio of the number of game balls paid out to the number of game balls is defined as the ball output rate, and the ball output rate when the i-th (i is an integer of 1 or more) high-frequency support mode is executed. It is defined as the ball rate Mi. Below, the pitching rate M1 when the first high-frequency support mode is performed, the pitching rate M2 when the second high-frequency support mode is performed, and the second high-frequency support mode are performed. The ball output rate M3 in the case will be described.

In the first high-frequency support mode, game balls are fired continuously at intervals of 0.6 seconds with a predetermined firing intensity that can reach the second starting port unit 300 by the game ball firing mechanism 81. Then, as described above, one game ball out of the four shot game balls enters the second starting port 308a of the open/close ball entry device 308, and two game balls are paid out as prize balls. It will be. Therefore, the pitching rate M1 when the first high-frequency support mode is executed is as follows.
M1 = 2/4 = 0.50

Here, the ball output rate is less than 1 means that the game ball has a predetermined launch intensity that can reach the second starting port unit 200 by the game ball launching mechanism 81, and continues at intervals of 0.6 seconds. It means that the number of game balls in the player's hand is reduced in a situation where the ball is being shot. Therefore, in the first high-frequency support mode, it means that the number of game balls held by the player is reduced. Specifically, in the first high-frequency support mode, 4 game balls are shot in 2.4 seconds and 2 game balls are paid out as prize balls, so the game balls held by the player are , will decrease at a rate of 2 per 2.4 seconds (1 per 1.2 seconds).

In the second high-frequency support mode, game balls are fired continuously at intervals of 0.6 seconds with a predetermined firing intensity that can reach the second starting port unit 300 by the game ball firing mechanism 81. Then, as described above, two game balls out of the four game balls launched enter the second starting port 308a of the open/close ball entry device 308, and four game balls are paid out as prize balls. It will be. Therefore, the pitching rate M2 when the second high-frequency support mode is executed is as follows.
M2 = 4/4 = 1.00

Here, the ball output rate of 1 means that the game ball has a predetermined launch intensity that can reach the second starting port unit 200 by the game ball launching mechanism 81, and continuously at intervals of 0.6 seconds. It means that the number of game balls in the player's hand does not increase or decrease while being shot. Therefore, in the second high-frequency support mode, it means that the number of game balls held by the player does not increase or decrease. Specifically, in the second high-frequency support mode, 4 game balls are shot in 2.4 seconds and 4 game balls are paid out as prize balls, so the game balls held by the player are It will not increase or decrease.

In the third high-frequency support mode, game balls are continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds with a predetermined firing intensity that can reach the second starting port unit 300 by the game ball firing mechanism 81. Then, as described above, 3 game balls out of the 4 game balls launched enter the second starting port 308a of the open/close ball entry device 308, and 6 game balls are paid out as prize balls. It will be. Therefore, the pitching rate M3 when the third high-frequency support mode is executed is as follows.
M3 = 6/4 = 1.50

Here, the fact that the ball output rate exceeds 1 means that the game ball has a predetermined launch intensity that can reach the second starting port unit 200 by the game ball launching mechanism 81, and continuously at intervals of 0.6 seconds. It means that the number of game balls in the player's hand is increased in the situation where the ball is being shot. Therefore, in the third high-frequency support mode, it means that the number of game balls held by the player increases. Specifically, in the third high-frequency support mode, 4 game balls are shot in 2.4 seconds and 6 game balls are paid out as prize balls, so the game balls held by the player are , increases at a rate of 2 per 2.4 seconds (1 per 1.2 seconds).

In addition, PAi is defined as the ratio of execution of the i-th high-frequency support mode in the case where the high-frequency support mode is executed by winning the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33. do. Then, the rate PA1 at which the first high-frequency support mode is performed, the rate PA2 at which the second high-frequency support mode is performed, and the rate PA3 at which the third high-frequency support mode is performed are as follows.

PA1 = The number of values (0 to 19) of the jackpot type counter C2 that wins the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 and shifts to the first high-frequency support mode/jackpot Total number of values of type counter C2=20/30
PA2 = the number of values (20 to 24) of the jackpot type counter C2 that wins the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 and shifts to the second high-frequency support mode/jackpot Total number of values of type counter C2=5/30
PA3 = the number of values (25 to 29) of the jackpot type counter C2 that wins the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 and shifts to the third high-frequency support mode/jackpot Total number of values of type counter C2=5/30

Further, if the total ball throwing rate in the case where the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 is won and the high frequency support is executed, the total throwing rate is defined as the first total throwing rate T1. , the first total ball hitting rate T1 can be defined by the following equation (3).

n in the above formula (3) is the number of types of high-frequency support modes, and n=3 in this embodiment. Therefore, the first total ball hitting rate T1 in this embodiment is as follows.

T1=M1×PA1+M2×PA2+M3×PA3
= 0.50 x (20/30) + 1.00 x (5/30) + 1.50 x (5/30)
= 0.75

That is, the first total ball-balling rate T1 is the sum of the ball-balling rate of each high-frequency support mode executed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 multiplied by the execution rate. It means the expected value of the ball rate.

In addition, PBi is defined as the ratio of execution of the i-th high-frequency support mode in the case where the high-frequency support mode is executed by winning the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 308a. do. Then, the rate PB1 at which the first high-frequency support mode is performed, the rate PB2 at which the second high-frequency support mode is performed, and the rate PB3 at which the third high-frequency support mode is performed are as follows.

PB1 = The number of values (0 to 11) of the jackpot type counter C2 that wins the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 308a and shifts to the first high-frequency support mode/jackpot Total number of values of type counter C2=12/30
PB2 = The number of values (12 to 20) of the jackpot type counter C2 that wins the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 308a and shifts to the second high-frequency support mode/jackpot Total number of values of type counter C2=9/30
PB3 = The number of values (21 to 29) of the jackpot type counter C2 that wins the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 308a and shifts to the third high-frequency support mode/jackpot Total number of values of type counter C2=9/30

Further, if the total ball throwing rate in the case where the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 308a is won and the high-frequency support is executed, is defined as the second total throwing rate T2. , the second total ball hitting rate T2 can be defined by the following equation (4).

n in the above formula (4) is the number of types of high-frequency support modes, and n=3 in this embodiment. Therefore, the second total ball hitting rate T2 in this embodiment is as follows.

T2=M1×PB1+M2×PB2+M3×PB3
= 0.50 x (12/30) + 1.00 x (6/30) + 1.50 x (6/30)
= 0.95

That is, the second total ball-balling rate T2 is the sum of the ball-balling rate of each high-frequency support mode executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 308a multiplied by the execution ratio. It means the expected value of the ball rate.

As described above, in the present embodiment, although the third high-frequency support mode in which the pitching rate exceeds 1 can be executed, the values of the first total pitching rate T1 and the second pitching rate T2 All of the values are less than 1. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the total number of game balls held by the player does not increase, but decreases.

Next, an example of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. In the following, processing different from that of the eighth embodiment will be described, and description of the same processing will be omitted.

FIG. 81 is a flow chart showing the prize-winning process for the starter executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment. Differences from the processing (FIGS. 10 and 74) executed by the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first and eighth embodiments will be described below.

In step S4706, the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment sets a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out two game balls. Since the processing in other steps is the same as the processing (FIGS. 10 and 74) executed by the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first and eighth embodiments, description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 82 is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment. The main difference from the processing executed by the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment (FIG. 75) is that the first to third high-frequency support corresponding to each of the three types of high-frequency support modes The point is to store flags. Note that the first to third high-frequency support flags are used to determine whether the first to third high-frequency support modes are being executed, respectively. A specific description will be given below.

In step S4801, it is determined whether or not a 16R probability variation flag is stored in the RAM 64 as a jackpot type flag.

In step S4801, when it is determined that the 16R probability variation flag is stored in the RAM 64 (S4801: YES), the process proceeds to step S4802 to execute flag erasing processing. The flag erasing process is a process of erasing information for specifying a game state. Specifically, if the opening/closing execution mode flag, the high probability mode flag, the first high frequency support flag, the second high frequency support flag, and the third high frequency support flag are stored, they are deleted, If these flags are not stored, they remain in that state. After executing step S4802, the process proceeds to step S4803.

In step S4803, the high-probability mode flag is stored, and then the process advances to step S4804 to store the third high-frequency support flag. Thus, after the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R probability variable jackpot is ended, the game state shifts to a game state in which the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the third high frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and third high-frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next jackpot winning occurs. After that, the process advances to step S4805.

In step S4805, a high-probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. do. Thereafter, proceeding to step S4806, a third high-frequency support command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the third high-frequency support mode, is sent to the sound emission control device 90. set as a command to be sent by After that, the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is ended. Note that the sound emission control device 90 that has received the third high-frequency support command starts control to execute an effect suggesting to the player that the support mode is the third high-frequency support mode. As an effect suggesting that the support mode is the third high-frequency support mode, for example, the number of game balls is increasing, and even in a situation where it is difficult to win the jackpot, it is advantageous to the player. can be mentioned.

In step S4801, if it is determined that the 16R probability variation flag is not stored in the RAM64 (S4801: NO), the process proceeds to step S4807, and whether or not the 8R probability variation flag is stored in the RAM64 as the jackpot type flag judge. In step S4807, when it is determined that the 8R probability variation flag is stored in the RAM 64 (S4807: YES), the process proceeds to step S4808 to execute the flag erasing process. After that, the process proceeds to step S4809.

In step S4809, the high-probability mode flag is stored, and then the process advances to step S4810 to store the second high-frequency support flag. Thus, after the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 8R probability variable jackpot is ended, the game state shifts to a game state in which the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the second high frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and second high-frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next jackpot winning occurs. After that, the process proceeds to step S4811.

In step S4811, a high-probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. do. After that, proceeding to step S4812, a second high-frequency support command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the second high-frequency support mode, is sent to the sound emission control device 90. command to be sent. After that, the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode ends. Note that the sound emission control device 90 that has received the second high-frequency support command starts control to execute an effect suggesting that the support mode is the second high-frequency support mode. As an effect suggesting that the support mode is the second high-frequency support mode, for example, it is not disadvantageous to the player even if the number of game balls is neither increasing nor decreasing and it is difficult to win the jackpot. A suggestive production can be mentioned.

In step S4807, when it is determined that the 8R probability variation flag is not stored in the RAM 64 (S4807: NO), the process proceeds to step S4813 to execute the flag erasing process. After that, the process proceeds to step S4814.

In step S4814, after storing the first high-frequency support flag, the process proceeds to step S4815, and "100" is set in the number-of-games counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM64. The value set in the number-of-games counter area is a value indicating the number of games when the number of games is limited and the first high-frequency support mode is executed. Thus, after the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the normal jackpot is ended, the game state shifts to a game state in which the success/failure lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the first high frequency support mode. However, in this case, the first high-frequency support mode ends after 100 game rounds are executed, and after that, the win/fail lottery mode is a low-probability mode, and the support mode is a low-frequency support mode. Transition. After executing step S4815, the process proceeds to step S4816.

In step S4816, a first high-frequency support command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. command. After that, the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode ends. Note that the sound emission control device 90 that has received the first high-frequency support command starts control to execute an effect suggesting to the player that the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode. As an effect suggesting that the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode, for example, an effect suggesting that the number of game balls is decreasing and a situation in which it is difficult to win a jackpot is disadvantageous to the player. can be done.

FIG. 83 is a flow chart showing electric opening/closing processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment. The main difference from the processing executed by the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment (FIG. 77) is that different open times are set for each of the three types of high frequency support modes. A specific description will be given below.

In step S4901, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing door 308b as an electric accessory is open. Whether or not the open/close door 308b is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessary product driving section 34b is in a driving state. If it is determined that the opening/closing door 308b is open (S4901: YES), the process proceeds to step S4902.

In step S4902, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening continuation time of the opening/closing door 308b. If it is determined in step S4902 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S4902: NO), the main electric opening/closing process is terminated. In other words, if the opening continuation time of the opening/closing door 308b has not ended, the electric opening/closing process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S4902 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S4902: YES), the flow advances to step S4903 to perform closing processing for controlling the opening/closing door 308b to the closed state. 2 "25" (that is, 0.05 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as means for measuring the open duration time of the open/close door 308b is "0", the open/close door 308b is closed, and the second timer counter area T2 is set to the open/close door 308b. The second timer counter area T2 is set to "25". After executing step S4903, the process advances to step S4904.

In step S4904, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process advances to step S4905 to determine whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". If it is determined in step S4905 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (S4905: NO), the electric opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4905 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (S4905: YES), the process advances to step S4906 to clear the supported flag. After that, the main electrical opening/closing process is ended.

If it is determined in step S4901 that the opening/closing door 308b is not open (S4901: NO), the process advances to step S4907 to determine whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the door 308b. If it is determined in step S4907 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S4907: NO), the electric opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4907 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S4907: YES), the process advances to step S4908 to execute opening processing for controlling the opening/closing door 308b to the open state. After that, the process advances to step S4909.

In step S4909, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (S4909: NO), the process advances to step S4910 to determine whether the first high-frequency support mode is in progress. determine whether

If it is determined in step S4910 that the first high-frequency support mode is in effect (S4910: YES), the process advances to step S4911 to set "250" (that is, 0.5 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the main electrical opening/closing process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4910 that the first high-frequency support mode is not in effect (S4910: NO), the flow advances to step S4912 to determine whether or not the second high-frequency support mode is in effect.

If it is determined in step S4912 that the second high frequency support mode is in effect (S4912: YES), the process advances to step S4913 to set "550" (that is, 1.1 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the main electrical opening/closing process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4912 that the second high-frequency support mode is not in progress (S4912: NO), the flow advances to step S4914 to determine whether or not the third high-frequency support mode is in progress.

If it is determined in step S4914 that the third high-frequency support mode is in effect (S4914: YES), the process advances to step S4915 to set "850" (that is, 1.7 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the main electrical opening/closing process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4909 that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress (S4909: YES), or if it is determined in step S4914 that the third high-frequency support mode is not in progress (S4914: NO), the process proceeds to step S4916. It advances and sets "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the main electrical opening/closing process is ended.

As described above, according to this embodiment, the first game ball GB1 distributed to the route R11 can pass through the through gate 306, and when the door 308b is open, , the ball can enter the second starting port 308a. On the other hand, the three game balls GB2, GB3 and GB4 arriving after the first game ball GB1 are sorted to the route R2 or the route R12, so that they cannot pass through the through gate 306 and are opened and closed. When the door 308b is in the open state, it becomes possible to enter the ball into the second start opening 308a. That is, only the first game ball GB1 out of the four game balls can pass through the through gate 306, and each game ball out of the four game balls enters the second starting port 308a. Whether or not the game ball is entered depends on whether or not the opening/closing door 308b is in an open state at the timing when each game ball among the four game balls reaches the opening/closing ball entry device 308.例文帳に追加Therefore, while the number of game balls passing through the through gate 306 is one among the four game balls, the number of game balls entering the second starting port 308a is changed depending on the state of the open/close door 308b. can be made

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the main controller 60 controls the opening/closing door 308b based on the result of the electric accessory opening lottery executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 306. Since the three game balls GB2, GB3, and GB4 that have arrived after the first game ball GB1 do not pass through the through gate 306, the main controller 60 determines that each of the four game balls has reached the opening/closing ball entry device 308. Whether the state of the opening and closing door 308b at the timing reached is the closed state or the open state, that is, whether each of the four game balls is entered into the second start port 308a is determined by the first game It is determined by the result of the electric accessory open lottery executed when the ball GB1 passes through the through gate 306 and the type of the support mode. Therefore, the control of whether or not each of the four game balls is allowed to enter the second starting hole 308a is realized by a series of controls triggered by the passage of the first game ball GB1 through the through gate 306. can do.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the variable time from when the light-emitting display unit of the normal figure unit 38 starts the variable display to when the stop display corresponding to the result of the electric accessory open lottery is The time is set to be shorter than the time from when the first game ball GB1 that triggered the opening lottery passes through the through gate 206 until the game ball GB1 reaches the open/close ball entry device 208. - 特許庁Therefore, the normal figure unit 38 passes through the through gate 306 and the first game ball GB1, which triggered the electric accessory opening lottery, reaches the opening and closing ball entry device 308, before the electric accessory is opened. It becomes possible to display the results of the lottery. Here, after the result of the electric accessory open lottery is displayed by the normal figure unit 38, the main controller 60 starts control based on the result of the electric accessory open lottery, so the through gate 306 is passed. Control based on the results of the electric accessory opening lottery can be started before the timing when the first game ball GB1, which triggered the electric accessory opening lottery, reaches the opening/closing ball entry device 308.例文帳に追加As a result, the main controller 60 realizes a high-frequency support mode in which the open/close door 308b is open at the timing when the first game ball GB1 that has passed through the through gate 306 reaches the open/close ball entry device 308. becomes possible.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, main controller 60 sets the length of time for which the opening/closing door 208b is maintained in the open state after the transition from the closed state to the open state differs for each type of high-frequency support mode. , the number of game balls entering the second starting hole 308a out of the four game balls GB1 to GB4 can be made different for each type of high frequency support mode. Specifically, in this embodiment, the first game ball GB1 enters the second start hole 308a and the three game balls GB2, GB3, and GB4 that arrive after the game ball GB1 are the second start holes. A first high-frequency support mode (ball-out rate M1 = 0.50) that does not enter the ball 308a, and the first and second game balls GB1 and GB2 enter the second start port 308a and the third ball And the fourth game balls GB3 and GB4 do not enter the second starting hole 308a in the second high frequency support mode (ball throwing rate M2 = 1.00), the first to third game balls GB1, A third high-frequency support mode (ball throwing rate M3=1.50) is realized, in which GB2 and GB3 enter the second starting hole 308a and the fourth game ball GB4 does not enter the second starting hole 308a. It is Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to realize a plurality of types of high-frequency support modes with different ball-putting rates.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the alternate distribution mechanism (first alternate distribution mechanism 304, second alternate distribution mechanism 305) that alternately distributes the game balls to one of the two paths is provided in two stages. , one game ball GB1 that has reached the second starting port unit 300 is distributed to the route R11, and three game balls GB1, GB2 that have arrived after the game ball GB1, The function of distributing GB3 to routes (routes R2 and R12) different from route R11 can be realized with a simple configuration compared to a configuration realized using electronic control or the like. In addition, as a configuration that realizes the function using electronic control, for example, a structure that measures the number of game balls that have reached the second starter unit 300 using a counter or the like and is driven by electric force A configuration in which the game balls are distributed using the like can be mentioned.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, as a type of high-frequency support mode, although the third high-frequency support mode in which the ball output rate exceeds 1 can be executed, when the high-frequency support mode is executed Since the total ball-balling rate (first total ball-balling rate T1 and second total ball-balling rate T2) is less than 1, the third high-frequency support mode in which the number of game balls increases is expected to give the player a sense of exhilaration. By suppressing the first total ball throwing rate T1 and the second total ball throwing rate T2 to less than 1, it is possible to prevent the player's gambling spirit from becoming excessively high. As a result, it is possible to appropriately improve the interest in the game.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the number of game balls held by the player increases during the period in which the third high-frequency support mode in which the ball output rate exceeds 1 is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an expectation that the third high-frequency support mode will continue for a long time. In particular, in this embodiment, when the 16R probability variable jackpot is won, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the jackpot drawing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode and the third high-frequency support mode is executed. The high-probability mode and the third high-frequency support mode are continued until the next big win lottery is won. That is, since the high probability mode does not end until the next big winning lottery is won (so-called loop machine), winning the big winning lottery during the high probability mode is guaranteed, and until the big winning lottery is won, The third high-frequency support mode in which the number of game balls increases continues. Therefore, since the player is guaranteed to win the jackpot lottery during the high-probability mode, the player does not win the jackpot lottery for as long as possible, and wants the third high-frequency support mode to continue for a long time. You will feel hopeful. Thus, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to provide the player with a new sense of expectation that the third high-frequency support mode should be continued for a long time without winning the jackpot lottery for as long as possible during the high-probability mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in such a configuration, if the winning probability of the jackpot lottery during the high-probability mode is set low, the probability that the high-probability mode and the third high-frequency support mode will continue for a long time increases. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expected value of the number of game balls that can be increased in the third high-frequency support mode, thereby improving the interest in the game.

It should be noted that the high probability mode and the third high frequency support mode, when adopting a configuration (so-called special time machine (ST machine)) that ends after the jackpot lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 120 times), Since the player wants to increase the number of game balls by continuing the third high-frequency support mode for as long as possible, there is a sense of anticipation that he does not want to win a jackpot lottery in a game cycle that has just shifted to the high probability mode. , and expects to win the jackpot lottery before the high-probability mode ends.

Then, when the player wins the jackpot lottery in the game round that has just moved to the high probability mode, the player feels regret that the third high frequency support mode has ended in a short period of time. So, you will have a sense of satisfaction that you won the jackpot lottery before the high probability mode ended. In addition, when the player wins the jackpot lottery in the game round just before the high-probability mode ends, the player can continue the third high-frequency support mode for a long period of time and can greatly increase the number of game balls. You will have a sense of satisfaction and a sense of satisfaction that you won the jackpot lottery before the high probability mode ended. In other words, if the player wins the jackpot lottery in the game round just before the high-probability mode ends, the player can enjoy double satisfaction. In addition, when the big winning lottery is not won by the end of the high-probability mode, the player is satisfied that the third high-frequency support mode continues for a long period of time and the number of game balls can be greatly increased. On the one hand, you will have the regret that you did not win the jackpot lottery before the high-probability mode ended. In other words, since it is possible to provide the player with complex emotional inflections in the high-probability mode, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Next, another example of the configuration of the second starting port unit will be described. Various configurations can be employed for the second starting port unit, as described below.

FIG. 84 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing another example of the configuration of the second starting port unit. For reference, FIG. 84(A) schematically shows the second starting port unit 300 of the ninth embodiment. In addition, FIG. 84 shows the order and distribution destination of the game balls that entered the second starter unit.

FIG. 84(B) schematically shows the second starting port unit 300B as example 1. As shown in FIG. The difference from the second starting port unit 300 of the ninth embodiment shown in FIG. 84(A) is that the game balls distributed to the route R2 are not in the second starting port 308a even if the open/close door 308b is open. It is a point that it is configured so that it is impossible to enter the ball into. Specifically, since the horizontal length of the opening/closing ball entry device 308 is shortened, regardless of the control mode of the opening/closing door 308b in each high-frequency support mode, the second and fourth game balls cannot enter the second starting hole 308a. According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of game balls entering the second starting port 308a among the game balls entering the opening 302 of the second starting port unit 300. FIG.

FIG. 84(C) schematically shows a second starting port unit 300C as example 2. As shown in FIG. Further, FIG. 85 shows a specific configuration of the second starting port unit 300C. The difference from the second starting port unit 300 of the ninth embodiment shown in FIGS. 84A and 78 is that the route R2 and the route R12 join together to form one route. With such a configuration, the size of the second starter unit can be reduced, so that the mountability on the game board 30 can be improved.

FIG. 84(D) schematically shows a second starting port unit 300D as example 3. As shown in FIG. The difference from the second starting port unit 300 of the ninth embodiment shown in FIG. 84(A) is that a third alternate distribution mechanism 305A is provided downstream of the second alternate distribution mechanism 305. be. The third alternate distribution mechanism 305A alternately distributes the game balls flowing down the route R11 to the left route R111 and the right route R112.

The route R111 is configured so that the distributed game balls pass through the through gate 306, and the distributed game balls pass through the second path when the opening/closing door 308b of the opening/closing ball entry device 308 is in the open state. It is configured so that it is possible to enter the ball into the starting hole 308a. The route R112 is configured so that the distributed game balls cannot pass through the through gate 306, and the distributed game balls do not pass through when the opening/closing door 308b of the opening/closing ball entry device 308 is open. In some cases, it is configured to allow the ball to enter the second starting hole 308a.

According to such a configuration, only one game ball passes through the through gate 306 among the eight game balls entering the opening 302 of the second starter unit 300D. In other words, after one game ball passes through the through gate 306, the following seven game balls do not pass through the through gate 306, and the ninth game ball passes through the through gate 306 again. Therefore, by setting the opening time of the open/close door 308b to a different length for each high-frequency support mode, the number of game balls entering the second starting port 308a can be set to any number from 1 to 8. can be set to a value. For example, when the number of game balls paid out as prize balls when one game ball enters the second start hole 308a (the number of prize balls) is set to two, the following eight types A high frequency support mode can be realized.

・First high-frequency support mode:
Opening time of open/close door 308b: 0.5 seconds Number of game balls entered/Number of game balls fired: 1/8 Number of game balls to be paid out = Number of game balls entered x Number of prize balls: 1 x 2 = 2 Increase/decrease in game balls: 6 game balls decrease in 4.8 seconds when 8 game balls are fired Ball output rate: number of game balls paid out/number of game balls fired = 2/ 8 = 0.25

・Second high-frequency support mode:
Opening time of open/close door 308b: 1.1 seconds Number of game balls entered / Number of game balls launched: 2 / 8 Number of game balls to be paid out = Number of game balls entered x Number of prize balls: 2 x 2 = 4 Increase/decrease in game balls: 4 game balls decrease in 4.8 seconds when 8 game balls are fired Ball output rate: Number of game balls paid out / number of game balls fired = 4 / 8 = 0.50

・Third high-frequency support mode:
Opening time of open/close door 308b: 1.7 seconds Number of game balls entered / Number of game balls launched: 3 / 8 Number of game balls to be paid out = Number of game balls entered x Number of prize balls: 3 x 2 = 6 Increase/decrease in game balls: 2 game balls decrease in 4.8 seconds when 8 game balls are fired Ball output rate: number of game balls paid out/number of game balls fired = 6/ 8 = 0.75

・Fourth high-frequency support mode:
Opening time of open/close door 308b: 2.3 seconds Number of game balls entered/number of game balls fired: 4/8 Number of game balls to be paid out = Number of game balls entered x Number of prize balls: 4 x 2 pieces = 8 pieces Game ball increase/decrease: no increase/decrease Ball output rate: number of game balls paid out / number of game balls fired = 8 pieces/8 pieces = 1.00

・Fifth high-frequency support mode:
Opening time of open/close door 308b: 2.9 seconds Number of game balls entered / Number of game balls launched: 5 / 8 Number of game balls to be paid out = Number of game balls entered x Number of prize balls: 5 x 2 = 10 Increase/decrease in game balls: 2 game balls increase in 4.8 seconds when 8 game balls are fired Ball output rate: Number of game balls paid out / Number of game balls fired = 10 / 8 = 1.25

・6th high-frequency support mode:
Opening time of open/close door 308b: 3.5 seconds Number of game balls entered/Number of game balls launched: 6/8 Number of game balls to be paid out = Number of game balls entered x Number of prize balls: 6 x 2 = 12 Increase/decrease in game balls: 4 game balls increase in 4.8 seconds when 8 game balls are fired Ball output rate: number of game balls paid out/number of game balls fired = 12/ 8 = 1.50

・Seventh high-frequency support mode:
Opening time of open/close door 308b: 4.1 seconds Number of game balls entered/number of game balls fired: 7/8 Number of game balls to be paid out = Number of game balls entered x Number of prize balls: 7 x 2 pieces = 14 pieces Increase/decrease in game balls: 6 game balls increase in 4.8 seconds when 8 game balls are fired Ball output rate: number of game balls paid out / number of game balls fired = 14 8 = 1.75

・8th high-frequency support mode:
Opening time of open/close door 308b: 4.7 seconds Number of game balls entered / Number of game balls launched: 8 / 8 Number of game balls to be paid out = Number of game balls entered x Number of prize balls: 8 x 2 = 16 Increase/decrease in game balls: 8 game balls increase by 8 in 4.8 seconds when 8 game balls are fired Ball output rate: number of game balls paid out/number of game balls fired = 16/ 8 = 2.00

By adopting the configuration of the second starting port unit 300D in this way, it is possible to set the type of the high-frequency support mode in multiple stages. In addition, if the alternating distribution mechanism is configured in multiple stages, it is possible to further increase the number of game balls that do not pass through the through gate 306, and it is possible to set the types of the high-frequency support mode in multiple stages. It becomes possible. Also, the number of game balls (the number of prize balls) paid out as prize balls when one game ball enters the second start hole 308a can be set to a value other than one or two. For example, when the prize balls are set to 3 in the 8 types of high-frequency support modes described above, the high-frequency support modes are as follows.

・First high-frequency support mode:
Opening time of open/close door 308b: 0.5 seconds Number of game balls entered/Number of game balls fired: 1/8 Number of game balls to be paid out = Number of game balls entered x Number of prize balls: 1 x 3 = 3 Increase/decrease in game balls: 5 game balls decrease in 4.8 seconds when 8 game balls are fired Ball output rate: number of game balls paid out/number of game balls fired = 3/ 8 = 0.375

・Second high-frequency support mode:
Opening time of open/close door 308b: 1.1 seconds Number of game balls entered / Number of game balls launched: 2 / 8 Number of game balls to be paid out = Number of game balls entered x Number of prize balls: 2 x 3 pieces = 6 pieces Increase/decrease in game balls: 2 game balls decrease in 4.8 seconds when 8 game balls are fired Ball output rate: number of game balls paid out/number of game balls fired = 6/ 8 = 0.75

・Third high-frequency support mode:
Opening time of open/close door 308b: 1.7 seconds Number of game balls entered / Number of game balls launched: 3 / 8 Number of game balls to be paid out = Number of game balls entered x Number of prize balls: 3 x 3 pieces = 9 pieces Increase or decrease in game balls: 1 game ball increases in 4.8 seconds when 8 game balls are fired Ball output rate: number of game balls paid out/number of game balls fired = 9 pieces/ 8 = 1.125

・Fourth high-frequency support mode:
Opening time of open/close door 308b: 2.3 seconds Number of game balls entered/number of game balls fired: 4/8 Number of game balls to be paid out = Number of game balls entered x Number of prize balls: 4 x 3 pieces = 12 pieces Increase/decrease in game balls: 4 game balls increase in 4.8 seconds when 8 game balls are fired Ball output rate: number of game balls paid out / number of game balls fired = 12 pieces / 8 = 1.50

・Fifth high-frequency support mode:
Opening time of open/close door 308b: 2.9 seconds Number of game balls entered / Number of game balls launched: 5 / 8 Number of game balls to be paid out = Number of game balls entered x Number of prize balls: 5 x 3 pieces = 15 pieces Increase/decrease in game balls: 7 game balls increase in 4.8 seconds when 8 game balls are fired Ball output rate: number of game balls paid out/number of game balls fired = 15/ 8 = 1.875

・6th high-frequency support mode:
Opening time of open/close door 308b: 3.5 seconds Number of game balls entered/Number of game balls launched: 6/8 Number of game balls to be paid out = Number of game balls entered x Number of prize balls: 6 x 3 pieces = 18 pieces Increase/decrease in game balls: 10 game balls increase in 4.8 seconds when 8 game balls are fired Ball output rate: number of game balls paid out / number of game balls fired = 18 pieces / 8 = 2.25

・Seventh high-frequency support mode:
Opening time of open/close door 308b: 4.1 seconds Number of game balls entered/number of game balls fired: 7/8 Number of game balls to be paid out = Number of game balls entered x Number of prize balls: 7 x 3 pieces = 21 pieces Increase/decrease in game balls: 13 game balls increase in 4.8 seconds when 8 game balls are fired Ball output rate: number of game balls paid out / number of game balls fired = 21 pieces / 8 = 2.625

・8th high-frequency support mode:
Opening time of open/close door 308b: 4.7 seconds Number of game balls entered / Number of game balls launched: 8 / 8 Number of game balls to be paid out = Number of game balls entered x Number of prize balls: 8 x 3 pieces = 24 pieces Increase or decrease in game balls: 16 game balls increase in 4.8 seconds when 8 game balls are fired Ball output rate: Number of game balls paid out / number of game balls fired = 24 pieces / 8 = 3.00

FIG. 84(E) schematically shows the second starting port unit 300E as example 4. As shown in FIG. The difference from the second starting port unit 300D of Example 3 shown in FIG. It is a point that is constructed so that it is impossible to sphere. Specifically, since the horizontal length of the opening and closing ball entry device 308 is shortened, regardless of the control mode of the opening and closing door 308b in each high-frequency support mode, the 2nd, 4th, 6th and 8th It is impossible for the game ball to enter the second starting port 308a. According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of game balls entering the second starting port 308a among the game balls entering the opening 302 of the second starting port unit 300E.

FIG. 84(F) schematically shows the second starting port unit 300F as example 5. As shown in FIG. The difference from the second starting port unit 300D of Example 3 shown in FIG. 84(D) is that the route R2, the route R12, and the route R112 are merged into one route. With such a configuration, the size of the second starter unit can be reduced, so that the mountability on the game board 30 can be improved.

J. Tenth embodiment:
Next, a tenth embodiment will be described. This embodiment has the same second starting port unit 200 (FIG. 70) as the eighth embodiment. The difference from the eighth embodiment is that the mode of controlling the open/close door 208b is different. In the following, mainly the mode of control of the opening/closing door 208b will be described. Description of the same configuration and processing as in the eighth embodiment will be omitted.

In this embodiment, one type of high-frequency support mode is set, and there are two types of winning when winning the electric role open lottery during the high-frequency support mode (first type electric role open and second 2 types of electric role open) is set. In addition, one type of winning type (3rd type electric role open) is set when winning the electric accessory open lottery during the low frequency support mode. Variation time of the general figure unit 38 and details of the control mode of the opening and closing door 208b for each type of winning of the electric accessory open lottery are as follows.

・Electric accessory open lottery during high-frequency support mode Fluctuation time of normal unit 38: 0.05 seconds Winning probability: 100%
As a result of winning, the ratio of being allocated to the first type electric role open: 50%
As a result of winning, the ratio of being allocated to the second type electric role open: 50%
・If you win the 1st type electric role open Waiting time for opening the opening/closing door 208b: 0.05 seconds Number of times the opening/closing door 208b is opened: 1 time Opening time for the opening/closing door 208b: 0.8 seconds ・2nd kind electric role open Waiting time for opening/closing door 208b: 0.25 seconds Opening times for opening/closing door 208b: 1 time Opening time for opening/closing door 208b: 0.8 seconds

・Electric accessory open lottery during low frequency support mode Fluctuation time of normal figure unit 38: 29.5 seconds Winning probability: 10%
As a result of winning, the ratio of being allocated to the third type electric role open: 100%
・If you win the 3rd type electric role open Waiting time for opening the opening and closing door 208b: 0.25 seconds Number of times the opening and closing door 208b is opened: 1 time Opening time for the opening and closing door 208b: 0.2 seconds

In the aspect of the control of the opening and closing door 208b described above, the difference between the case of winning the first type electric role opening and the case of winning the second type electric role opening in the high frequency support mode is the fluctuation display of the normal figure unit 38 is the length of the open standby time, which is the time from the stop of the open/close door 208b to the start of the transition to the open state. , the number of game balls entering the second starting port 208a is different. In addition, the time of 0.8 seconds set as the opening time of the opening and closing door 208b is longer than 0.6 seconds, which is the shooting interval between the first game ball and the second game ball, and the first game ball This time is shorter than 1.2 seconds, which is the interval between shots of the ball and the third game ball.

FIG. 86 is an explanatory diagram showing the behavior of the second starting port unit 200 when winning the type 1 electric role opening. FIG. 87 is a timing chart showing the timing at which the game ball reaches the through gate 206 and the opening/closing ball entry device 208, and also shows the control mode of the opening/closing door 208b when winning the first type electric role opening. In the example shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, the game ball is fired by the game ball launching mechanism 81 with a constant firing intensity that can reach the second starting port unit 200 provided on the right side of the game board 30. It is continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds. Therefore, the game ball enters the opening 202 of the second starting port unit 200 at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

As shown in the state A1 of FIG. 86, when the game ball GB1 reaches the second starting port unit 200 and enters the inside of the second starting port unit 200 from the opening 202, it reaches the alternate distribution mechanism 204. In the example shown in state A1, since the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is tilted to the right, the game balls reaching the alternate distribution mechanism 204 are temporarily held by the left holding portion 204e. Then, the alternate distribution mechanism 204 rotates about 90 degrees to the left (counterclockwise) around the rotating shaft 204d by the weight of the game ball GB1 held by the left holding portion 204e, and enters the state shown in FIG. becomes A2.

As shown in the state A2 of FIG. 86, when the alternating distribution mechanism 204 is tilted to the left, the game ball GB1 held by the left holding portion 204e falls from the left holding portion 204e and moves to the left path R1. distributed to. After that, the game ball GB1 distributed to the route R1 passes through the through gate 206. - 特許庁When the game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 206, the main controller 60 executes the electric accessory opening lottery. As described above, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38 during the high frequency support mode is set to 0.05 seconds, and the probability of winning the electric accessory open lottery in the high frequency support mode is set to 100%. Then, when the first type electric role opening is won in the electric accessory opening lottery, the opening standby time of the opening and closing door 208b is 0.05 seconds, the number of times the opening and closing door 208b is opened is 1 time, and the opening time is 0.05 seconds. Set to 8 seconds. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, when main controller 60 determines that the waiting time for opening has elapsed (FIG. 91: S5123, which will be described later), the opening/closing door 208b starts to transition to the open state. The process for turning on is executed not in the electrical opening/closing process in the next patrol which is executed at a cycle of 0.004 seconds, but in the electrical opening/closing process in the same patrol (FIG. 91: S5124, FIG. 92 to be described later). Therefore, the time required for control from the elapse of the waiting time for opening until the opening/closing door 208b of the opening/closing ball-entering device 208 starts to transition to the open state is much shorter than 0.004 seconds. there is

Therefore, the opening and closing door 208b of the opening and closing ball entry device 208 transitions to the open state about 0.1 seconds after the game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 206, and maintains the open state for 0.8 seconds (Fig. 87). As described above, in this embodiment, the time from when the game ball passes through the through gate 206 to when the game ball reaches the open/close ball entry device 208 is about 0.2 seconds, so the through gate 206 is At the timing when the passing game ball GB1 reaches the opening/closing ball entering device 208, the opening/closing door 208b is in an open state, and the game ball GB1 enters the second starting port 208a. After that, the game ball GB2 next to the game ball GB1 distributed to the route R1 enters the opening 202, and the state A3 in FIG. 86 is reached.

As shown in the state A3 of FIG. 86, when the game ball GB2 next to the game ball GB1 distributed to the path R1 enters the opening 202, the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is tilted to the left. Therefore, the game ball GB2 reaching the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is temporarily held by the right holding portion 204f. Then, the alternate distribution mechanism 204 rotates about 90 degrees to the right (clockwise) around the rotation axis 204d by the weight of the game ball GB2 held by the right holding portion 204f, and enters state A4 in FIG. becomes.

As shown in the state A4 of FIG. 86, when the alternating distribution mechanism 204 is tilted to the right, the game ball GB2 held by the right holding portion 204f falls from the right holding portion 204f and passes through the right path R2. distributed to. After that, the game ball GB2 distributed to the route R2 reaches the opening/closing ball entry device 208. - 特許庁Here, in the present embodiment, since the interval between game balls fired from the game ball shooting mechanism 81 is 0.6 seconds, after the game ball GB1 reaches the open/close ball entry device 208, the game ball GB2 opens and closes. The interval until reaching the ball entry device 208 is also about 0.6 seconds. Further, in the present embodiment, the opening time of the opening/closing door 208b is set to 0.8 seconds, so the opening/closing door 208b is kept open even at the timing when the game ball GB2 reaches the opening/closing ball entry device 208. . As a result, the game ball GB2 enters the second starting hole 208a provided inside the open/close ball entering device 208. As shown in FIG. After the game ball GB2 enters the second starting port 208a, the opening/closing door 208b is closed, and the state A1 is restored. Since the opening time of the opening/closing door 208b is set to 0.8 seconds, the opening/closing door 208b is opened before the game ball GB3 next to the game ball GB2 passes through the through gate 206, as shown in FIG. to the closed state.

That is, in the present embodiment, the game ball is fired continuously at intervals of 0.6 seconds with a predetermined firing intensity that allows the game ball firing mechanism 81 to reach the second starting port unit 200. , in the case of winning the first type electric role opening lottery in the electric role item opening lottery in the high frequency support mode, at the timing when the game ball GB1 that triggered the electric role item opening lottery reaches the opening and closing ball entry device 208. The opening/closing door 208b is in the open state, and the opening/closing door 208b is maintained in the open state even at the timing when the game ball GB2 distributed to the route R2 reaches the opening/closing ball entry device 208.例文帳に追加As a result, both of the two game balls GB1 and GB2 enter the second starting hole 208a.

FIG. 88 is an explanatory diagram showing the behavior of the second starting port unit 200 when winning the second type electric role opening. FIG. 89 is a timing chart showing the timing at which the game ball reaches the through gate 206 and the opening/closing ball entry device 208, and also shows the control mode of the opening/closing door 208b when winning the second type electric role opening. The example shown in FIGS. 88 and 89 differs from the example shown in FIGS. 86 and 87 in that the waiting time for opening the opening/closing door 208b is set to 0.25 seconds, and the through gate 206 is passed through. The point is that the game ball GB1 does not enter the second starting hole 208a. A specific description will be given below.

As shown in the state A1 of FIG. 88, when the game ball GB1 reaches the second starting port unit 200 and enters the inside of the second starting port unit 200 from the opening 202, it reaches the alternate distribution mechanism 204. In the example shown in state A1, since the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is tilted to the right, the game balls reaching the alternate distribution mechanism 204 are temporarily held by the left holding portion 204e. Then, the alternate distribution mechanism 204 rotates about 90 degrees to the left (counterclockwise) around the rotating shaft 204d due to the weight of the game ball GB1 held by the left holding portion 204e, and enters the state A2. .

As shown in the state A2 of FIG. 88, when the alternating distribution mechanism 204 is tilted to the left, the game ball GB1 held by the left holding portion 204e falls from the left holding portion 204e and moves to the left path R1. distributed to. After that, the game ball GB1 distributed to the route R1 passes through the through gate 206. - 特許庁When the game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 206, the main controller 60 executes the electric accessory opening lottery. As described above, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38 during the high frequency support mode is set to 0.05 seconds, and the probability of winning the electric accessory open lottery in the high frequency support mode is set to 100%. Then, when the first type electric role opening is won in the electric accessory opening lottery, the opening standby time of the opening and closing door 208b is 0.25 seconds, the number of times the opening and closing door 208b is opened is 1 time, and the opening time is 0.25 seconds. Set to 8 seconds. Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the time required for control from the elapse of the open standby time until the open/close door 208b of the open/close ball entry device 208 starts to transition to the open state is 0.004. It is much shorter than seconds.

Therefore, the opening and closing door 208b of the opening and closing ball entry device 208 transitions to the open state about 0.3 seconds after the game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 206, and maintains the open state for 0.8 seconds (Fig. 89). As described above, in this embodiment, the time from when the game ball passes through the through gate 206 to when the game ball reaches the open/close ball entry device 208 is about 0.2 seconds, so the through gate 206 is At the timing when the passing game ball GB1 reaches the opening/closing ball entry device 208, the opening/closing door 208b is maintained in a closed state, and the game ball GB1 does not enter the second starting port 208a and the opening/closing ball entry device. Pass 208. After that, the game ball GB2 next to the game ball GB1 distributed to the route R1 enters the opening 202, and the state A3 in FIG. 88 is reached.

As shown in the state A3 of FIG. 88, when the game ball GB2 next to the game ball GB1 distributed to the path R1 enters the opening 202, the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is tilted to the left. Therefore, the game ball GB2 reaching the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is temporarily held by the right holding portion 204f. Then, the alternate distribution mechanism 204 rotates about 90 degrees to the right (clockwise) around the rotating shaft 204d due to the weight of the game ball GB2 held by the right holding portion 204f, and enters state A4.

As shown in the state A4 of FIG. 88, when the alternating distribution mechanism 204 is tilted to the right, the game ball GB2 held by the right holding portion 204f falls from the right holding portion 204f, and passes through the right path R2. distributed to. After that, the game ball GB2 distributed to the route R2 reaches the opening/closing ball entry device 208. - 特許庁Here, in the present embodiment, since the interval between game balls fired from the game ball shooting mechanism 81 is 0.6 seconds, after the game ball GB1 reaches the open/close ball entry device 208, the game ball GB2 opens and closes. The interval until reaching the ball entry device 208 is also about 0.6 seconds. Further, in the present embodiment, the opening waiting time of the opening/closing door 208b is set to 0.25 seconds, so the opening/closing door 208b is in an open state at the timing when the game ball GB2 reaches the opening/closing ball entry device 208. . As a result, the game ball GB2 enters the second starting hole 208a provided inside the open/close ball entering device 208. As shown in FIG. After the game ball GB2 enters the second starting port 208a, the opening/closing door 208b is closed, and the state A1 is restored. Since the opening time of the opening/closing door 208b is set to 0.8 second, the opening/closing door 208b is opened before the game ball GB3 next to the game ball GB2 passes through the through gate 206, as shown in FIG. to the closed state.

That is, in the present embodiment, the game ball is fired continuously at intervals of 0.6 seconds with a predetermined firing intensity that allows the game ball firing mechanism 81 to reach the second starting port unit 200. , in the case where the second type electric role opening lottery is won in the electric role item opening lottery in the high frequency support mode, at the timing when the game ball GB1 that triggered the electric role item opening lottery reaches the opening and closing ball entry device 208. , the opening/closing door 208b maintains the closed state, and at the timing when the game ball GB2 distributed to the route R2 reaches the opening/closing ball entry device 208, the opening/closing door 208b transitions to the open state. As a result, one game ball GB2 out of the two game balls GB1 and GB2 enters the second start hole 208a.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, by changing the opening standby time of the opening and closing door 208b, the game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 206 for 1.2 seconds (FIGS. 87 and 89). It is possible to change the number of game balls that enter the second starting port 208a.

In addition, when winning the third type electric role opening in the electric role item opening lottery in the low frequency support mode, the fluctuation time of the general figure unit 38 is 29.5 seconds, and the opening standby time of the opening and closing door 208b is 0.5 seconds. Since it is set to 25 seconds, the opening/closing door 208b will transition to the open state after the game ball GB1 and the game ball GB2 have passed through the opening/closing ball entry device 208. FIG. That is, when the third type electric role opening is won in the electric role opening lottery in the low frequency support mode, both the game ball GB1 and the game ball GB2 will not enter the second start hole 208a.

Next, an example of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. In the following, processing different from that of the eighth embodiment will be described, and description of the same processing will be omitted.

FIG. 90 is a flow chart showing transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment. The main difference from the processing executed by the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment (FIG. 75) is that in this embodiment, there is one type of high-frequency support mode, so the high-frequency support flag The difference is that the type is not set. A specific description will be given below.

The main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment stores a high frequency support flag in step S5004. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the probability variable jackpot is ended, the game state shifts to the game state in which the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. Further, the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment stores a high frequency support flag in step S5007. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the normal jackpot is ended, the game state shifts to the game state in which the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. Since the processing in other steps is the same as the processing (FIG. 75) executed by the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment, the description is omitted.

FIG. 91 is a flow chart showing processing for electric support performed by the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment. The main difference from the processing executed by the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment (FIG. 76) is that the opening standby time corresponding to the type of opening of the electric role won in the electric role opening lottery This is the point to set. A specific description will be given below.

In step S5101, it is determined whether support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a supported flag is stored in a supported flag storage area provided in the various flag storage area 64 e of the RAM 64 . If it is determined in step S5101 that the supported flag is not stored (S5101: NO), the process proceeds to step S5102.

In step S5102, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag is stored in the support winning flag storage area provided in the various flags storage area 64e of the RAM 64 or not. The support winning flag is a flag that is stored when the electric role opening is won in the electric accessory opening lottery, and is erased when the supporting flag is stored. If it is determined in step S5102 that the support winning flag is not stored (S5102: NO), the process proceeds to step S5103.

In step S5103, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the variation time of the normal figure unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec.

If it is determined in step S5103 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S5103: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S5103: YES), the process proceeds to step S5104.

In step S5104, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the variable display of symbols in the normal unit 38 . If it is determined in step S5104 that it is time to end the variable display (S5104: YES), the process advances to step S5105 to set off display, and then ends the electronic support process. By setting the deviation display, the variable display of the symbols in the general pattern unit 38 is terminated while the deviation display is stopped. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5104 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (S5104: NO), the process proceeds to step S5106.

In step S5106, it is determined whether or not the value of the reserved accessory number SN is greater than "0". In step S5106, if it is determined that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is "0" (S5106: NO), the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S5106 that the value of the reserved accessory number SN is larger than "0" (S5106: YES), the process proceeds to step S5107.

In step S5107, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode is in progress, and then the flow advances to step S5108 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. If it is not the opening/closing execution mode at step S5107 (S5107: NO) and if it is the high-frequency support mode at step S5108 (S5108: YES), the process proceeds to step S5109 to perform the electric accessary item opening lottery. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64c is shifted to the lottery execution area, and the value in the lottery execution area is collated with the electric accessory open lottery table for the high-frequency support mode. In this embodiment, the probability of winning in the electric role opening lottery during the high frequency support mode is set to 100%, the ratio of being allocated to the first type electric role opening is 50%, the second kind electric role opening The distribution ratio is set to 50%. Specifically, since the value that the electric accessary product open counter C4 can take is 0 to 249, when the value of the electric accessary product open counter C4 shifted to the lottery execution area is 0 to 124, the When the first type electric role opening is won and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 is 125 to 249, the second type electric role opening is won. Then, after executing the electric accessory open lottery, "25" (that is, 0.05 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time timer interrupt processing is started. Thereafter, the process advances to step S5110.

In step S5110, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessary item open lottery in step S5109 is winning (support winning) for opening the electric role. In step S5110, when it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is support winning (S5110: YES), the process proceeds to step S5111, stores the support winning flag, and is provided in various counter areas 64d of RAM64 "1" is set in the second round counter area RC2. In addition, in this embodiment, as a result of the electric role opening lottery in the high frequency support mode, if the first type electric role opening is won, the first type support winning flag is stored, and the second type electric role opening When winning, the second type support winning flag is stored. After that, the process proceeds to step S5112. On the other hand, in step S5110, when it is determined that the result of the electric accessory open lottery is not support winning (S5110: NO), the process proceeds to step S5112 without executing the process of step S5111.

In step S5112, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the low probability mode. When it is determined in step S5112 that the lottery mode is the low probability mode (S5112: YES), the process proceeds to step S5113. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5112 that the winning/failure lottery mode is not the low-probability mode (S5112: NO), the electronic support process is terminated.

In step S5113, it is determined whether or not the number-of-games counter area is "0". The number-of-games counter is decremented by one each time one game round is completed in the low-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode. In step S5113, when it is determined that the number-of-games counter area is not "0" (S5113: NO), the electronic role support process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S5113 that the number-of-games counter area is "0", the process proceeds to step S5114 to clear the high frequency support flag. After that, the process proceeds to step S5115.

In step S5115, a low-frequency support command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. do. After that, the electronic support processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S5107 that it is in the opening/closing execution mode (S5107: YES), or if it is determined in step S5118 that it is not in the high-frequency support mode (S5108: NO), the process proceeds to step S5116, and the electric accessory open lottery I do. Specifically, the value stored in the electric role holding area 64c is shifted, and the value in the lottery execution area is collated with the electric accessory open lottery table for the low frequency support mode. In the present embodiment, the probability of winning the electric accessory open lottery in the high-frequency support mode is set to 10%, and the percentage of allocating to the third type electric role open is set to 100%. Specifically, since the value that the electric accessary product open counter C4 can take is 0 to 249, when the value of the electric accessary product open counter C4 shifted to the lottery execution area is 0 to 24, the It will be elected to open the 3 types of electric roles. In addition, after executing the electric accessory open lottery, the second timer counter area T2 is set to "14750" (that is, 29.5 sec). After that, the process proceeds to step S5117.

In step S5117, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessary item open lottery in step S5116 is elected (support elected) to open the electric role. In step S5117, if it is determined that the support has not been won (S5117: NO), the electronic role support process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S5117, if it is determined that the support is won (S5117: YES), the process advances to step S5118 to store the support win flag and after setting "1" to the second round counter area RC2, End the electronic support process.

If it is determined at step S5102 that the support winning flag is stored (S5102: YES), the process proceeds to step S5119 to determine whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the variation time of the normal figure unit 38. In step S5119, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S5119: NO), since the symbol in the normal figure unit 38 is being displayed in a variable manner, the main electric role support process is performed as it is. exit. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5119 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S5119: YES), the process proceeds to step S5120.

In step S5120, a win display corresponding to the type of electric role release that has been won is set. As a result, the variable display of the symbols in the normal figure unit 38 is finished, and the symbols corresponding to the type of winning display are stopped and displayed. After that, the process proceeds to step S5121.

In step S5121, an opening standby time corresponding to the type of the elected electric power opening is set. Specifically, when the first type electric role opening is won, "25" (that is, 0.05 sec) is set in the opening waiting time timer counter area Tw, and the second type electric role opening or the third kind electric role is set. If the game is elected to open, "125" (that is, 0.25 sec) is set in the open waiting time timer counter area Tw. The open standby time timer counter area Tw is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started. After that, the process advances to step S5122 to store the supporting flag and erase the support winning flag. After that, the electronic support process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S5101 that the supported flag is stored (S5101: YES), the process advances to step S5123 to determine whether or not the release waiting time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the open waiting time timer counter area Tw is "0". In step S5123, when it is determined that the value of the open standby time timer counter area Tw is "0" (S5123: YES), the process proceeds to step S5124, in which the controller for controlling the opening and closing of the door 208b as an electric accessory. Execute the electrical opening/closing process. The details of the electrical opening/closing process will be described later. After that, the electronic support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5123 that the value of the open waiting time timer counter area Tw is not "0" (S5123: NO), this electric supporting process is terminated without executing the electric opening/closing process. do.

FIG. 92 is a flow chart showing electric opening/closing processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment. The main difference from the processing executed by the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment (FIG. 77) is that when the electric role opening is won during the high-frequency support mode, the elected electric role The opening time of the opening and closing door 208b is set to 0.8 seconds regardless of the type of opening, and the opening time of the opening and closing door 208b is set to 0.2 seconds when winning the electrical opening during the low-frequency support mode. is set to . A specific description will be given below.

In step S5201, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing door 208b as an electric accessory is open. Whether or not the opening/closing door 208b is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessary product driving section 34b is in a driving state. If it is determined that the opening/closing door 208b is open (S5201: YES), the process proceeds to step S5202.

In step S5202, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening continuation time of the door 208b. If it is determined in step S5202 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S5202: NO), the electric opening/closing process is terminated. In other words, if the opening continuation time of the opening/closing door 208b has not ended, the electric opening/closing process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S5202 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S5202: YES), the process advances to step S5203 to perform closing processing for controlling the opening/closing door 208b to the closed state. 2 "25" (that is, 0.05 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. It should be noted that the value of the second timer counter area T2 set in step S5203, when the opening and closing door 208b as the electric accessory is opened multiple times in one winning of the electric accessory opening lottery, the opening and closing door 208b is It means the length of time (interval) from closing to next opening, and is the final transition from the open state to the closed state of the open/close door 208b triggered by one winning of the electric accessory open lottery. In the case, it means the length of time to wait from the closing of the open/close door 208b to the execution of the next electric accessory opening lottery. After executing step S5203, the process advances to step S5204.

In step S5204, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process advances to step S5205 to determine whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". If it is determined in step S5205 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (S5205: NO), the electric opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5205 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (S5205: YES), the process advances to step S5206 to clear the supported flag. After that, the main electrical opening/closing process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S5201 that the opening/closing door 208b is not open (S5201: NO), the process advances to step S5207 to determine whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closed duration time of the door 208b. If it is determined in step S5207 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S5207: NO), the electric opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5207 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S5207: YES), the flow advances to step S5208 to execute opening processing for controlling the opening/closing door 208b to the open state. After that, the process advances to step S5209.

In step S5209, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (S5209: NO), the process advances to step S5210 to determine whether the high-frequency support mode is in progress. judge.

If it is determined in step S5210 that the high frequency support mode is in effect (S5210: YES), the process advances to step S5211 to set "400" (that is, 0.8 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the main electrical opening/closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5210 that the high-frequency support mode is not in progress (S5210: NO), and if it is determined in step S5209 that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress (S5209: YES), the process proceeds to step S5212. It advances and sets "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the main electrical opening/closing process is terminated.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the same effects as those of the eighth embodiment are obtained, and the game ball GB1 can pass through the through gate 206 by changing the waiting time for opening the opening/closing door 208b. It is possible to change the number of game balls that enter the second starting hole 208a in 1.2 seconds (FIGS. 87 and 89). Therefore, the intonation can be added to the game, and the interest in the game can be improved. Further, according to this embodiment, even if the opening time of the open/close door 208b is set to the same length (0.8 seconds in this embodiment), if the length of the open waiting time is changed, Since the number of game balls entering the second starting hole 208a can be changed, the degree of freedom in designing the game machine can be improved.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, even when the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38 is set to the same length (0.05 seconds in the present embodiment) during the high-frequency support mode, the open/close door 208b By setting the open waiting time to a plurality of lengths (0.05 seconds and 0.25 seconds in this embodiment), the opening and closing door 208b is opened from the closed state after the game ball passes through the through gate 206 A plurality of types of lengths can be set for the time (fluctuation time of normal unit 38 + open waiting time of open/close door 208b) until the transition to the state is started. That is, according to the present embodiment, the time from when the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is displayed by the normal figure unit 38 to when the opening/closing door 208b starts to transition from the closed state to the open state (the opening of the opening/closing door 208b By changing the waiting time), the time from when the game ball passes through the through gate 206 until the opening and closing door 208b starts to transition from the closed state to the open state (variation time of the normal figure unit 38 + opening and closing door 208b (Open waiting time) can be changed, and the number of game balls entering the second start port 208a can be changed.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the main controller 60, during the high-frequency support mode, sets the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38 to the opening and closing of the game ball GB1 after the game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 206. The time is set to be shorter than the time to reach the sphere device 208 . Therefore, the general figure unit 38 passes through the through gate 206 and the game ball GB1 that triggered the electric accessory open lottery reaches the opening and closing ball entry device 208, before the result of the electric accessory open lottery. can be displayed. As a result, the main controller 60 determines that the game ball GB1 that passed through the through gate 206 and triggered the electric accessory open lottery after the result of the electric accessory open lottery was displayed by the normal figure unit 38 Before the timing reaches the opening and closing ball entry device 208, it is possible to execute control (control when winning the first type electric role opening) to start the transition from the closed state to the open state of the opening and closing door 208b. Become. Therefore, the game ball GB1 that triggered the opening/closing door 208b to transition to the open state (the game ball GB1 that passed through the through gate 206 and triggered the electric accessory opening lottery) is allowed to enter the second start port 208a. control can be executed.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when winning the first type electric role opening (FIGS. 86 and 87), the main controller 60 sets the open waiting time of the open/close door 208b to 0.05 seconds. At the timing when the game ball GB1 that has passed through the through gate 206 reaches the opening/closing ball entry device 208, the opening/closing door 208b has transitioned to an open state, and the game ball GB1 enters the second starting port 208a. On the other hand, when winning the second type electric role opening (FIGS. 88 and 89), the main controller 60 sets the open standby time of the opening/closing door 208b to 0.25 seconds, so that the through gate 206 is passed. At the timing when the game ball GB1 reaches the opening/closing ball entering device 208, the opening/closing door 208b has not yet transitioned to the open state, and the game ball GB1 does not enter the second starting port 208a. That is, according to the present embodiment, the number of game balls entering the second starting hole 208a can be changed by changing the waiting time for opening, so that the game can be inflated. Interest can be improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, based on the type won in the electric accessory opening lottery in the high-frequency support mode, the opening waiting time of the opening and closing door 208b is set. 208b may be configured to set the waiting time for opening. For example, in a configuration in which a plurality of types of support modes can be executed, a configuration may be adopted in which different lengths of waiting time for opening the opening/closing door 208b are set for each type of support mode. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which sets the opening standby time of the opening-and-closing door 208b to different length for every classification of the lottery mode (low probability mode and high probability mode) of a jackpot lottery. Alternatively, a random number counter for setting the waiting time for opening may be provided, and the waiting time for opening the opening/closing door 208b may be set based on the acquired value of the random number counter. In addition, when a jackpot lottery is won, the opening standby time of the open/close door 208b is determined based on the type of the jackpot lottery won in a predetermined number of game rounds after the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot lottery ends. may be set.

In addition, in this embodiment, by changing the open standby time of the opening and closing door 208b, it is configured to change the number of game balls entering the second start opening 208a, but the variation time of the normal figure unit 38 is changed It may be configured to change the number of game balls entering the second starting port 208a by changing the number of game balls. Further, by changing both the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38 and the open waiting time of the open/close door 208b, the number of game balls entering the second start opening 208a may be changed. In addition to the opening standby time of the opening and closing door 208b and the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38, by changing the opening time of the opening and closing door 208b, the number of game balls entering the second start port 208a is changed. may be

In addition, by changing the open standby time of the open/close door 208b, the configuration for changing the number of game balls entering the second start opening 208a is changed from the second start opening units 300, 300B to 300B of the above-described ninth embodiment. 300F (FIGS. 78, 84 and 85).

K. Eleventh embodiment:
Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described. This embodiment has the same second starting port unit 200 (FIG. 70) as the tenth embodiment. The difference from the tenth embodiment is that the mode of controlling the open/close door 208b is different. In the following, mainly the mode of control of the opening/closing door 208b will be described. Description of the same configuration and processing as in the tenth embodiment will be omitted.

In this embodiment, three types of high-frequency support modes are set, and one type of winning type (first type electric role open) is set when winning the electric role open lottery during the high-frequency support mode. It is In addition, one type of winning type (2nd type electric role open) is set when winning the electric accessory open lottery during the low frequency support mode. Variation time of the normal figure unit 38 and details of the control mode of the opening and closing door 208b for each type of winning of the electric accessory open lottery are as follows.

・Electric accessory open lottery during the first high-frequency support mode Fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38: 0.05 seconds Winning probability: 100%
As a result of winning, the ratio of being allocated to the first type electric role open: 100%
・If you win the 1st type electric role opening Waiting time for opening the opening/closing door 208b: 0.95 seconds Number of times the opening/closing door 208b is opened: 1 time Opening time for the opening/closing door 208b: 0.8 seconds

・Electric accessory open lottery during the second high-frequency support mode Fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38: 0.05 seconds Winning probability: 100%
As a result of winning, the ratio of being allocated to the first type electric role open: 100%
・If you win the 1st type electric role open Waiting time for opening the opening/closing door 208b: 0.25 seconds Number of times the opening/closing door 208b is opened: 1 time Opening time for the opening/closing door 208b: 0.8 seconds

・Electric accessory open lottery during the 3rd high frequency support mode Fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38: 0.05 seconds Winning probability: 100%
As a result of winning, the ratio of being allocated to the first type electric role open: 100%
・If you win the 1st type electric role open Waiting time for opening the opening/closing door 208b: 0.05 seconds Number of times the opening/closing door 208b is opened: 1 time Opening time for the opening/closing door 208b: 0.8 seconds

・Electric accessory open lottery during low frequency support mode Fluctuation time of normal figure unit 38: 0.05 seconds Winning probability: 10%
As a result of winning, the ratio of being allocated to the second type electric role open: 100%
・If you win the 2nd type electric role open Waiting time for opening the opening/closing door 208b: 0.35 seconds Number of times the opening/closing door 208b is opened: 1 time Opening time for the opening/closing door 208b: 0.2 seconds

In the mode of control of the opening/closing door 208b described above, the difference between the three high-frequency support modes is the time from when the fluctuation display of the normal figure unit 38 stops until the opening/closing door 208b starts transitioning to the open state. It is the length of the waiting time for opening, and as will be described later, the number of game balls that enter the second start hole 208a in a situation where the game ball shooting mechanism 81 continuously shoots game balls at intervals of 0.6 seconds. number is different. In addition, the time of 0.8 seconds set as the opening time of the opening and closing door 208b is longer than 0.6 seconds, which is the shooting interval between the first game ball and the second game ball, and the first game ball This time is shorter than 1.2 seconds, which is the interval between shots of the ball and the third game ball.

FIG. 93 is a timing chart showing the timing at which a game ball reaches the through gate 206 and the opening/closing ball entry device 208, and also shows the control mode of the opening/closing door 208b in the first high frequency support mode. In the example shown in FIG. 93, the game ball is fired by the game ball launching mechanism 81 with a constant firing intensity that can reach the second starting port unit 200 provided on the right side of the game board 30, and is 0.6 Fired continuously at intervals of seconds. Therefore, the game ball enters the opening 202 of the second starting port unit 200 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. A game ball entering the opening 202 is alternately distributed to the route R1 or the route R2. The behavior when game balls are distributed is the same as in FIG. However, the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing door 208b and the number of game balls entering the second starting hole 208a are different.

As shown in FIG. 93, in the first high-frequency support mode of the present embodiment, when the first game ball GB1 is distributed to the route R1 and passes through the through gate 206, the variable display of the normal figure unit 38 starts. . When 0.05 seconds, which is the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38, and 0.95 seconds, which is the open standby time, have passed, the open/close door 208b transitions to the open state and maintains the open state for 0.8 seconds.

The first game ball GB1 and the second game ball GB2 pass through the closed door 208b in 0.10 seconds until the door 208b transitions to the open state. Then, when the third game ball GB3 passes through the through gate 206 and reaches the opening/closing ball entry device 208, the opening/closing door 208b is in an open state, so the ball enters the second start opening 208a. do. In addition, at the timing when the game ball GB3 passes through the through gate 206, the open/close door 208b is in an open state, so the variable display of the normal figure unit 38 is not started and is suspended.

Then, when 0.8 seconds have passed and the opening/closing door 208b transitions to the closed state, the suspended variable display of the normal figure unit 38 starts. As can be understood from FIG. 93, the fourth game ball GB4 reaches the open/close ball entry device 208 0.2 seconds after the start of the variable display of the normal figure unit 38 . This relationship is the same as the relationship in which the first game ball GB1 reaches the opening and closing ball entry device 208 0.2 seconds after the variable display of the normal figure unit 38 starts. Therefore, the relationship that only the game ball GB3 among the game balls GB1 to GB3 enters the second starting hole 208a continues even after the game ball GB4. The first high-frequency support mode of the present embodiment described above can be summarized as follows. In this embodiment, the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls when the game balls enter the second starting port 208a is set to two.

・First high-frequency support mode:
Number of game balls entered / Number of game balls launched: 1 / 3 Number of game balls paid out = Number of game balls entered x Number of prize balls: 1 x 2 = 2 Increase/decrease in game balls: 3 The number of game balls is reduced by 1 in 1.8 seconds when 1 game ball is fired Ball output rate: Number of game balls paid out / Number of game balls fired = 2 / 3 = 0.67

FIG. 94 is a timing chart showing the timing at which the game ball reaches the through gate 206 and the opening/closing ball entry device 208, and also shows the control mode of the opening/closing door 208b in the second high frequency support mode. In the example shown in FIG. 94, the game ball is fired by the game ball launching mechanism 81 with a constant firing intensity that can reach the second starting port unit 200 provided on the right side of the game board 30, and is 0.6 Fired continuously at intervals of seconds. Therefore, the game ball enters the opening 202 of the second starting port unit 200 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. A game ball entering the opening 202 is alternately distributed to the route R1 or the route R2. The behavior when game balls are distributed is the same as in FIG. However, the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing door 208b and the number of game balls entering the second starting hole 208a are different.

As shown in FIG. 94, in the second high-frequency support mode of the present embodiment, when the first game ball GB1 is distributed to the route R1 and passes through the through gate 206, the variable display of the normal figure unit 38 starts. . When 0.05 seconds, which is the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38, and 0.25 seconds, which is the open standby time, have passed, the open/close door 208b transitions to the open state and maintains the open state for 0.8 seconds.

The first game ball GB1 passes through the closed door 208b during 0.30 seconds until the door 208b transitions to the open state. When the second game ball GB2 reaches the opening/closing ball entry device 208, the opening/closing door 208b is in the open state, so it enters the second starting port 208a. Since the behavior of the third and subsequent game balls repeats the behavior of the first game ball GB1 and the second game ball GB2, the explanation is omitted. The second high-frequency support mode of the present embodiment described above can be summarized as follows.

・Second high-frequency support mode:
Number of game balls entered/Number of game balls launched: 1/2 Number of game balls paid out = Number of game balls entered x Number of prize balls: 1 x 2 = 2 Increase/decrease in game balls: Increase/decrease None Ball output rate: number of game balls paid out / number of game balls fired = 2 / 2 = 1.00

FIG. 95 is a timing chart showing the timing at which the game ball reaches the through gate 206 and the opening/closing ball entry device 208, and also shows the control mode of the opening/closing door 208b in the third high-frequency support mode. In the example shown in FIG. 95, the game ball is fired by the game ball launching mechanism 81 with a constant firing intensity that can reach the second starting port unit 200 provided on the right side of the game board 30, and is 0.6 Fired continuously at intervals of seconds. Therefore, the game ball enters the opening 202 of the second starting port unit 200 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. A game ball entering the opening 202 is alternately distributed to the route R1 or the route R2. The behavior when game balls are distributed is the same as in FIG. However, the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing door 208b and the number of game balls entering the second starting hole 208a are different.

As shown in FIG. 95, in the third high-frequency support mode of the present embodiment, when the first game ball GB1 is distributed to the route R1 and passes through the through gate 206, the variable display of the normal figure unit 38 starts. . When 0.05 seconds, which is the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38, and 0.05 seconds, which is the open standby time, have passed, the open/close door 208b transitions to the open state and maintains the open state for 0.8 seconds.

When the first game ball GB1 and the second game ball GB2 reach the opening/closing ball entry device 208, the opening/closing door 208b is in an open state, so they enter the second starting port 208a. Since the behavior of the third and subsequent game balls repeats the behavior of the first game ball GB1 and the second game ball GB2, the explanation is omitted. A summary of the third high-frequency support mode of the present embodiment described above is as follows.

・Third high-frequency support mode:
Number of game balls entered / Number of game balls launched: 2 / 2 Number of game balls paid out = Number of game balls entered x Number of prize balls: 2 x 2 = 4 Increase/decrease in game balls: 2 The number of game balls increases by 2 in 1.2 seconds when 1 game ball is fired Ball output rate: Number of game balls paid out / number of game balls fired = 4 / 2 = 2.00

FIG. 96 is a timing chart showing the timing at which a game ball reaches the through gate 206 and the open/close ball entry device 208, and also shows the control mode of the open/close door 208b in the low frequency support mode. In the example shown in FIG. 96, the game ball is fired by the game ball launching mechanism 81 with a constant firing intensity that can reach the second starting port unit 200 provided on the right side of the game board 30, and is 0.6 Fired continuously at intervals of seconds. Therefore, the game ball enters the opening 202 of the second starting port unit 200 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. A game ball entering the opening 202 is alternately distributed to the route R1 or the route R2. The behavior when game balls are distributed is the same as in FIG. However, the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing door 208b and the number of game balls entering the second starting hole 208a are different.

As shown in FIG. 96, in the low frequency support mode of this embodiment, when the first game ball GB1 is distributed to the route R1 and passes through the through gate 206, the variable display of the normal figure unit 38 starts. When 0.05 seconds, which is the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38, and 0.35 seconds, which is the open standby time, have passed, the open/close door 208b transitions to the open state with a probability of 10%, and the open state is changed to 0.2 Hold for seconds. In the following, a description will be given of the case where the second type electric role open is won with a probability of 10%.

The first game ball GB1 passes through the closed door 208b during 0.40 seconds until the door 208b transitions to the open state. When the second game ball GB2 reaches the opening/closing ball entry device 208, the opening/closing door 208b has already transitioned to the closed state. 208b. Since the behavior of the third and subsequent game balls repeats the behavior of the first game ball GB1 and the second game ball GB2, the explanation is omitted. The low-frequency support mode of this embodiment described above can be summarized as follows.

・Infrequent support mode:
Number of game balls entered / Number of game balls launched: 0 / 2 Number of game balls paid out = Number of game balls entered x Number of prize balls: 0 x 2 = 0 Increase/decrease in game balls: 2 The number of game balls is reduced by 2 in 1.2 seconds when 1 game ball is fired Ball output rate: Number of game balls paid out / number of game balls fired = 0 / 2 = 0

FIG. 97 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table in the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment. For reference, FIG. 97 also describes the type and content of the high-frequency support mode executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends. As described above, in the present embodiment, the types of high-frequency support modes that are executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends are the first high-frequency support mode, the second high-frequency support mode, and the third high-frequency support mode. is set.

As shown in FIG. 97(a), winning the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, and when the value of the jackpot type counter C2 obtained is 0 to 15, distribution The result is a 4R normal jackpot A, and the game shifts to the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot, and shifts to the first high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Further, when the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 16 to 19, the distribution result is the 4R normal jackpot B, the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot is shifted, and after the opening and closing execution mode ends. 3 Move to high-frequency support mode. In addition, when the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 20 to 29, the distribution result is an 8R probability variable jackpot, the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the 8R probability variable jackpot is shifted, and after the opening and closing execution mode ends, the second Switch to high-frequency support mode.

As shown in FIG. 97(b), winning the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 208a, and when the value of the obtained jackpot type counter C2 is 0 to 5, distribution The result is a 4R normal jackpot A, and the game shifts to the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot, and shifts to the first high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Further, when the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 6 to 11, the distribution result is the 4R normal jackpot B, the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot is shifted, and after the opening and closing execution mode ends, the 3 Move to high-frequency support mode. In addition, when the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 12 to 20, the distribution result is an 8R probability variable jackpot, the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the 8R probability variable jackpot is shifted, and after the opening and closing execution mode ends, the second Switch to high-frequency support mode. In addition, when the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 21 to 29, the distribution result is a 16R probability variable jackpot, the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R probability variable jackpot is shifted, and after the opening and closing execution mode ends, the second Switch to high-frequency support mode.

The high-frequency support mode that shifts after the end of the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the normal jackpot ends when a predetermined number of game rounds (100 times in this embodiment) are executed without winning the jackpot lottery. , to transition to infrequent support mode. In addition, the high-frequency support mode that shifts after the end of the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the variable probability big win continues without ending until the next big win lottery is won. Further, the high-probability mode that shifts after the end of the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the variable probability big win continues without ending until the next big win lottery is won.

Also, the first total ball-balling rate T1 and the second total ball-balling rate T2 in this embodiment are as follows.

T1=M1×PA1+M2×PA2+M3×PA3
= 0.67 x (16/30) + 1.00 x (10/30) + 2.00 x (4/30) = 0.96
T2=M1×PB1+M2×PB2+M3×PB3
= 0.67 x (6/30) + 1.00 x (18/30) + 2.00 x (6/30) = 0.83

As described above, in the present embodiment, both the value of the first total ball rolling rate T1 and the value of the second total ball rolling rate T2 are less than one. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the total number of game balls held by the player does not increase, but decreases.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, by changing the open standby time, the first high-frequency support mode in which the pitching rate is less than 1 and the second high-frequency support mode in which the pitching rate is 1 Since the mode and the third high-frequency support mode in which the ball output rate exceeds 1 can be executed, it is possible to add excitement to the game and improve the interest of the game. Further, according to the present embodiment, even if the time for which the opening/closing door 208b is kept open is set to the same length (0.8 seconds in the present embodiment), the length of the waiting time for opening is If changed, the three high-frequency support modes described above can be executed, so that the degree of freedom in designing the game machine can be improved.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the second starting unit 200 (FIG. 70), which is a simple configuration using only one alternate distribution mechanism 204, allows the first high-frequency support with a ball output rate of less than 1. mode, a second high-frequency support mode in which the pitching rate is 1, and a third high-frequency support mode in which the pitching rate exceeds 1 can be executed. That is, compared to the configuration in which the three high-frequency support modes are performed by the second starting port unit 300 (FIG. 78) provided with the two alternate distribution mechanisms 304, 305, the three high-frequency support modes are performed. Since the mechanism can be realized in a space-saving manner, the game area can be effectively utilized, such as arranging other accessories in the empty game area.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery is the 4R normal jackpot A, the high probability mode is not started, but the first high frequency support mode is started. When the first high-frequency support mode is started, entry of game balls into the entry ball section is promoted, so execution of the jackpot lottery is promoted. However, since the ball output rate in the first high-frequency support mode is less than 1, the number of game balls held by the player decreases. The first high-frequency support mode ends when the number of executions of the jackpot lottery reaches a specified number of times (100 times) without the result of the jackpot lottery becoming a jackpot. Therefore, the player plays the game expecting a big win in the big win lottery before the number of executions of the big win lottery reaches the specified number and the first high-frequency support mode ends. In addition, since the player wants to minimize the decrease in the number of game balls in his/her hand, the player plays the game expecting a big win in the big win lottery as early as possible.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery is the 8R probability variable jackpot, the high probability mode is started and the second high frequency support mode is started. When the high-probability mode is started, the probability that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot increases. In addition, when the second high-frequency support mode is started, entry of game balls into the entry ball section is promoted, so execution of the big winning lottery is promoted. Also, since the ball output rate in the second high-frequency support mode is 1, the number of game balls held by the player neither increases nor decreases. The high-probability mode continues at least until the jackpot lottery results in a jackpot (various jackpots). In addition, the second high-frequency support mode continues until the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot (various jackpots). Therefore, since the high-probability mode and the second high-frequency support mode continue until a big win is achieved in the jackpot lottery, the player expects that the result of the jackpot lottery will be an 8R probability variable jackpot and the high-probability mode will continue. play while playing. In addition, since the number of game balls in hand does not increase or decrease, the player can concentrate on the kind of result when the big win lottery results in a big win.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the jackpot lottery results in a 4R normal jackpot, the high probability mode is not started, but the third high frequency support mode is started. When the third high-frequency support mode is started, entry of game balls into the entry ball section is promoted, so execution of the jackpot lottery is promoted. Furthermore, since the ball output rate in the third high-frequency support mode exceeds 1, the number of game balls held by the player increases. The third high-frequency support mode ends when the number of executions of the jackpot lottery reaches a specified number of times (100 times) without the result of the jackpot lottery becoming a jackpot. Therefore, the player continues the third high-frequency support mode until just before the number of executions of the jackpot lottery reaches the specified number of times to increase the number of game balls in hand, but before the third high-frequency support mode ends. The game is played while expecting that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot. Even if the result of the jackpot lottery does not result in a big win before the number of executions of the jackpot lottery reaches the specified number of times (100 times), the player can enter the third high-frequency support mode in which the number of game balls increases. You can get the satisfaction of continuing for the longest period of time.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to create a new game property by effectively using the three control modes to give the player a variety of expectations, thereby improving the interest in the game. can be planned. Further, according to the present embodiment, even with the same 4R normal jackpot, it is possible to add excitement to the game by providing a difference in the high-frequency support mode that shifts after the end of the opening/closing execution mode.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery is reach occurrence, a longer fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation time of the special figure unit 37 than when the jackpot lottery result is lost. be. In the period during which the third high-frequency support mode is executed, the more times the jackpot lottery results result in reach occurrence, that is, the more times a long variation time is set as the variation time of the special figure unit 37, The time required for the number of executions of the jackpot lottery (game round) to reach 100 times, which is the specified number of times, is lengthened. As a result, the period during which the third high-frequency support continues becomes longer, so the period during which the number of game balls held by the player increases. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, during the period in which the third high-frequency support mode is being executed, a new game property is created in which the number of game balls increases as the number of times the jackpot lottery results reach the occurrence of reach. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As another embodiment, the longer the variation time of the special figure unit 37, the longer the number of times of the jackpot lottery executed after the third high-frequency support mode is started. According to this configuration, as the number of executions of the jackpot lottery approaches 100, which is the prescribed number, the fluctuation time of the set special figure unit 37 becomes longer, so the third high-frequency support mode in which the number of game balls increases continues. longer period of time. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's frustration that the big winning lottery is not won even though the number of executions of the big winning lottery is approaching 100 times.

Further, as another embodiment, the high-frequency support mode may be configured to set the release standby time to a time longer than 0.95 seconds in the first high-frequency support mode. According to this configuration, it is possible to execute the high frequency support mode in which the ball output rate is lower than that of the first high frequency support mode.

Also, in this embodiment, by setting the open standby time to a plurality of lengths, it is configured to execute a plurality of types of high-frequency support modes. may be configured to execute multiple types of high-frequency support modes by setting the length of .

L. Twelfth embodiment:
Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described. This embodiment has the same second starting port unit 200 (FIG. 70) as the eleventh embodiment. The difference from the eleventh embodiment is that the high-probability mode ends when a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment) of the game rounds are executed without winning the jackpot lottery (so-called special time mode). machine (ST machine)) and the contents of the distribution table are different. Differences from the eleventh embodiment will be mainly described below. Description of the same configuration and processing as in the eleventh embodiment will be omitted.

FIG. 98 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment. For reference, FIG. 98 also describes the type and content of the high-frequency support mode executed after the opening/closing execution mode ends.

As shown in FIG. 98(a), winning the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, and when the value of the jackpot type counter C2 obtained is 0 to 15, distribution The result is a 4R normal jackpot A, and the game shifts to the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot, and shifts to the first high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Further, when the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 16 to 19, the distribution result is the 4R normal jackpot B, the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot is shifted, and after the opening and closing execution mode ends. 3 Move to high-frequency support mode. In addition, when the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 20 to 29, the distribution result is an 8R probability variable jackpot, the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the 8R probability variable jackpot is shifted, and after the opening and closing execution mode ends, the second Switch to high-frequency support mode.

As shown in FIG. 98(b), winning the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 208a, and when the value of the jackpot type counter C2 obtained is 0 to 17, distribution The result is a 10R probability variable jackpot A, and the game shifts to the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the 10R probability variable jackpot, and shifts to the first high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Also, when the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 18 to 26, the distribution result is the 10R probability variable jackpot B, and the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the 10R probability variable jackpot is shifted, and after the opening and closing execution mode ends. 2 Transition to high-frequency support mode. In addition, when the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 27 to 29, the distribution result is the 10R probability variable jackpot C, and the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the 10R probability variable jackpot is shifted, and after the opening and closing execution mode ends. 3 Move to high-frequency support mode.

The high-frequency support mode that shifts after the end of the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the normal jackpot ends when a predetermined number of game rounds (100 times in this embodiment) are executed without winning the jackpot lottery. , to transition to infrequent support mode. In addition, in this embodiment, even in the high-frequency support mode that shifts after the end of the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a predetermined number of game times (100 times in this embodiment) are performed without winning the jackpot lottery. When is executed, it ends and shifts to low frequency support mode. Also, the high-probability mode that shifts after the end of the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the variable probability big win is also ended when the game is played a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment) without winning the big win lottery.

Also, the first total ball-balling rate T1 and the second total ball-balling rate T2 in this embodiment are as follows.

T1=M1×PA1+M2×PA2+M3×PA3
= 0.67 x (16/30) + 1.00 x (10/30) + 2.00 x (4/30) = 0.96
T2=M1×PB1+M2×PB2+M3×PB3
= 0.67 x (18/30) + 1.00 x (9/30) + 2.00 x (3/30) = 0.90

As described above, in the present embodiment, both the value of the first total ball rolling rate T1 and the value of the second total ball rolling rate T2 are less than one. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the total number of game balls held by the player does not increase, but decreases.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery is the 10R probability variable jackpot A, the high probability mode is started and the first high frequency support mode is started. When the high-probability mode is started, the probability that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot increases. In addition, when the first high-frequency support mode is started, entry of game balls into the second starting port 208a is promoted, so execution of the jackpot lottery is promoted. However, since the ball output rate in the first high-frequency support mode is less than 1, the number of game balls held by the player decreases. The high-probability mode and the first high-frequency support mode are ended when the number of executions of the jackpot lottery reaches a specified number of times (100 times) without the result of the jackpot lottery becoming a jackpot. Therefore, the player plays the game expecting a big win in the big win lottery as early as possible before the number of executions of the big win lottery reaches the specified number of times and the high probability mode ends. Furthermore, the player plays the game expecting to win a big win in the early big win lottery, also from the expectation of minimizing the decrease of the game balls in hand.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery is the 10R probability variable jackpot B, the high probability mode is started and the second high frequency support mode is started. When the high-probability mode is started, the probability that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot increases. In addition, when the second high-frequency support mode is started, entry of game balls into the second starting port 208a is promoted, so execution of the jackpot lottery is promoted. Also, since the ball output rate in the second high-frequency support mode is 1, the number of game balls held by the player neither increases nor decreases. The high-probability mode and the second high-frequency support mode are ended when the number of executions of the jackpot lottery reaches a specified number (100 times) without the result of the jackpot lottery becoming a jackpot. Therefore, the player plays the game expecting a big win in the big win lottery as early as possible before the number of executions of the big win lottery reaches the specified number of times and the high probability mode ends.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery is the 10R probability variable jackpot C, the high probability mode is started and the third high frequency support mode is started. When the high-probability mode is started, the probability that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot increases. In addition, when the third high-frequency support mode is started, entry of game balls into the second starting port 208a is promoted, so execution of the jackpot lottery is promoted. Furthermore, since the ball output rate in the third high-frequency support mode exceeds 1, the number of game balls held by the player increases. The high-probability mode and the third high-frequency support mode are ended when the number of executions of the jackpot lottery reaches a specified number (100 times) without the result of the jackpot lottery becoming a big win. Therefore, the player continues the third high-frequency support mode until just before the number of executions of the jackpot lottery reaches the specified number of times to increase the number of game balls in hand, and the number of executions of the jackpot lottery reaches the specified number of times. The game is played while expecting that the result of the big win lottery will be a big win before the probability mode and the third high-frequency support mode are ended. Even if the result of the jackpot lottery does not result in a big win before the number of executions of the jackpot lottery reaches the specified number of times (100 times), the player can enter the third high-frequency support mode in which the number of game balls increases. You can get the satisfaction of continuing for the longest period of time.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to create a new game feature that gives the player a variety of expectations during the period in which the high-probability mode is executed for a limited number of times. Interest can be improved. Further, according to this embodiment, even with the same 10R probability variable jackpot, by providing a difference in the high-frequency support mode that shifts after the end of the opening and closing execution mode, it is possible to add excitement to the game.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery is reach occurrence, a longer fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation time of the special figure unit 37 than when the jackpot lottery result is lost. be. In the period during which the third high-frequency support mode is executed, the more times the jackpot lottery results result in reach occurrence, that is, the more times a long variation time is set as the variation time of the special figure unit 37, The time required for the number of executions of the jackpot lottery (game round) to reach 100 times, which is the specified number of times, is lengthened. As a result, the period during which the third high-frequency support continues becomes longer, so the period during which the number of game balls held by the player increases. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, during the period in which the third high-frequency support mode is being executed, a new game property is created in which the number of game balls increases as the number of times the jackpot lottery results reach the occurrence of reach. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As another embodiment, the longer the variation time of the special figure unit 37, the longer the number of times of the jackpot lottery executed after the third high-frequency support mode is started. According to this configuration, as the number of executions of the jackpot lottery approaches 100, which is the prescribed number, the fluctuation time of the set special figure unit 37 becomes longer, so the third high-frequency support mode in which the number of game balls increases continues. longer period of time. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's frustration that the big winning lottery is not won even though the number of executions of the big winning lottery is approaching 100 times.

Further, as another embodiment, the high-frequency support mode may be configured to set the release standby time to a time longer than 0.95 seconds in the first high-frequency support mode. According to this configuration, it is possible to execute the high frequency support mode in which the ball output rate is lower than that of the first high frequency support mode.

Also, in this embodiment, by setting the open standby time to a plurality of lengths, it is configured to execute a plurality of types of high-frequency support modes. may be configured to execute multiple types of high-frequency support modes by setting the length of .

M. Thirteenth Embodiment:
Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described. This embodiment has the same second starting port unit 200 (FIG. 70) as the twelfth embodiment. The difference from the twelfth embodiment is that the mode of controlling the open/close door 208b is different. In the following, mainly the mode of control of the opening/closing door 208b will be described. Description of the same configuration and processing as in the twelfth embodiment will be omitted.

In this embodiment, one type of high-frequency support mode is set, and one type of winning type (first type electric role open) is set when winning the electric role open lottery during the high-frequency support mode. It is Three types of variation time (0.95 seconds, 0.25 seconds, 0.05 seconds) are prepared for the normal figure unit 38 set during the high-frequency support mode. In addition, one type of winning type (2nd type electric role open) is set when winning the electric accessory open lottery during the low frequency support mode. Variation time of the normal figure unit 38 and details of the control mode of the opening and closing door 208b for each type of winning of the electric accessory open lottery are as follows.

・Electric accessory open lottery during high-frequency support mode Fluctuation time of normal unit 38: 0.95 seconds, 0.25 seconds, or 0.05 seconds Winning probability: 100%
As a result of winning, the ratio of being allocated to the first type electric role open: 100%
・If you win the 1st type electric role opening Waiting time for opening the opening/closing door 208b: 0.95 seconds Number of times the opening/closing door 208b is opened: 1 time Opening time for the opening/closing door 208b: 0.8 seconds

・Electric accessory open lottery during low frequency support mode Fluctuation time of normal figure unit 38: 0.05 seconds Winning probability: 10%
As a result of winning, the ratio of being allocated to the second type electric role open: 100%
・If you win the 2nd type electric role open Waiting time for opening the opening/closing door 208b: 0.35 seconds Number of times the opening/closing door 208b is opened: 1 time Opening time for the opening/closing door 208b: 0.2 seconds

In this embodiment, the length of the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38 set during the high frequency support mode is different, so that the game ball shooting mechanism 81 continuously shoots the game balls at intervals of 0.6 seconds. The number of game balls entering the second starting port 208a is different in the situation. A specific description will be given below. In addition, the time of 0.8 seconds set as the opening time of the opening and closing door 208b is longer than 0.6 seconds, which is the shooting interval between the first game ball and the second game ball, and the first game ball This time is shorter than 1.2 seconds, which is the interval between shots of the ball and the third game ball.

FIG. 99 shows the timing at which the game ball reaches the through gate 206 and the open/close ball entry device 208, and the open/close door when the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38 is set to 0.95 seconds during the high frequency support mode. 208b is a timing chart showing a control mode of 208b. In the example shown in FIG. 99, the game ball is fired by the game ball launching mechanism 81 with a constant firing intensity that can reach the second starting port unit 200 provided on the right side of the game board 30, and is 0.6 Fired continuously at intervals of seconds. Therefore, the game ball enters the opening 202 of the second starting port unit 200 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. A game ball entering the opening 202 is alternately distributed to the route R1 or the route R2. The behavior when game balls are distributed is the same as in FIG. However, the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing door 208b and the number of game balls entering the second starting hole 208a are different.

As shown in FIG. 99, in the high-frequency support mode of the present embodiment, when the first game ball GB1 is distributed to the route R1 and passes through the through gate 206, the variable display of the normal figure unit 38 starts. When 0.95 seconds set as the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38 and 0.05 seconds as the open standby time have passed, the open/close door 208b transitions to the open state and maintains the open state for 0.8 seconds. .

The first game ball GB1 and the second game ball GB2 pass through the closed door 208b in 0.10 seconds until the door 208b transitions to the open state. Then, when the third game ball GB3 passes through the through gate 206 and reaches the opening/closing ball entry device 208, the opening/closing door 208b is in an open state, so the ball enters the second start opening 208a. do. In addition, at the timing when the game ball GB3 passes through the through gate 206, the open/close door 208b is in an open state, so the variable display of the normal figure unit 38 is not started and is suspended.

Then, when 0.8 seconds have passed and the opening/closing door 208b transitions to the closed state, the suspended variable display of the normal figure unit 38 starts. As can be understood from FIG. 99, the fourth game ball GB4 reaches the opening and closing ball entry device 208 0.2 seconds after the start of the variable display of the normal figure unit 38 . This relationship is the same as the relationship in which the first game ball GB1 reaches the opening and closing ball entry device 208 0.2 seconds after the variable display of the normal figure unit 38 starts. Therefore, when the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38 is continuously set to 0.95 seconds, only the game ball GB3 among the game balls GB1 to GB3 enters the second start port 208a. The relationship will continue even after the game ball GB4.

Summarizing the aspect when the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38 is set to 0.95 seconds during the high-frequency support mode described above is as follows. In this embodiment, the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls when the game balls enter the second starting port 208a is set to two.

・High-frequency support mode (normal figure unit 38 fluctuation time = 0.95 seconds):
Number of game balls entered / Number of game balls launched: 1 / 3 Number of game balls paid out = Number of game balls entered x Number of prize balls: 1 x 2 = 2 Increase/decrease in game balls: 3 The number of game balls is reduced by 1 in 1.8 seconds when 1 game ball is fired Ball output rate: Number of game balls paid out / Number of game balls fired = 2 / 3 = 0.67

FIG. 100 shows the timing at which the game ball reaches the through gate 206 and the open/close ball entry device 208, and the open/close door when the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38 is set to 0.25 seconds during the high frequency support mode. 208b is a timing chart showing a control mode of 208b. In the example shown in FIG. 100, the game ball is fired by the game ball launching mechanism 81 with a constant firing intensity that can reach the second starting port unit 200 provided on the right side of the game board 30, and is 0.6 Fired continuously at intervals of seconds. Therefore, the game ball enters the opening 202 of the second starting port unit 200 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. A game ball entering the opening 202 is alternately distributed to the route R1 or the route R2. The behavior when game balls are distributed is the same as in FIG. However, the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing door 208b and the number of game balls entering the second starting hole 208a are different.

As shown in FIG. 100, in the high-frequency support mode of the present embodiment, when the first game ball GB1 is distributed to the route R1 and passes through the through gate 206, the variable display of the normal figure unit 38 starts. When 0.25 seconds set as the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38 and 0.05 seconds as the open standby time have passed, the open/close door 208b transitions to the open state and maintains the open state for 0.8 seconds. .

The first game ball GB1 passes through the closed door 208b during 0.30 seconds until the door 208b transitions to the open state. When the second game ball GB2 reaches the opening/closing ball entry device 208, the opening/closing door 208b is in the open state, so it enters the second starting hole 208a. Regarding the behavior of the third and subsequent game balls, when the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38 continues and is set to 0.25 seconds, the first game ball GB1 and the second game ball GB2 , the description is omitted.

Summarizing the aspect when the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38 is set to 0.25 seconds during the high-frequency support mode described above is as follows.

・High-frequency support mode (fluctuation time of normal map unit 38 = 0.25 seconds):
Number of game balls entered/Number of game balls launched: 1/2 Number of game balls paid out = Number of game balls entered x Number of prize balls: 1 x 2 = 2 Increase/decrease in game balls: Increase/decrease None Ball output rate: number of game balls paid out / number of game balls fired = 2 / 2 = 1.00

FIG. 101 shows the timing when the game ball reaches the through gate 206 and the opening and closing ball entry device 208, and when the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38 is set to 0.05 seconds during the third high frequency support mode 4 is a timing chart showing how an opening/closing door 208b is controlled; In the example shown in FIG. 101, the game ball is fired by the game ball launching mechanism 81 with a constant firing intensity that can reach the second starting port unit 200 provided on the right side of the game board 30, and is 0.6 Fired continuously at intervals of seconds. Therefore, the game ball enters the opening 202 of the second starting port unit 200 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. A game ball entering the opening 202 is alternately distributed to the route R1 or the route R2. The behavior when game balls are distributed is the same as in FIG. However, the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing door 208b and the number of game balls entering the second starting hole 208a are different.

As shown in FIG. 101, in the high-frequency support mode of the present embodiment, when the first game ball GB1 is distributed to the route R1 and passes through the through gate 206, the variable display of the normal figure unit 38 starts. When 0.05 seconds set as the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38 and 0.05 seconds as the open standby time have passed, the opening and closing door 208b transitions to the open state and maintains the open state for 0.8 seconds. .

When the first game ball GB1 and the second game ball GB2 reach the opening/closing ball entry device 208, the opening/closing door 208b is in an open state, so they enter the second starting port 208a. Regarding the behavior of the third and subsequent game balls, when the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38 continues and is set to 0.05 seconds, the first game ball GB1 and the second game ball GB2 , the description is omitted.

Summarizing the aspect when the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38 is set to 0.05 seconds during the high-frequency support mode described above is as follows.

・High-frequency support mode (fluctuation time of normal map unit 38 = 0.05 seconds):
Number of game balls entered / Number of game balls launched: 2 / 2 Number of game balls paid out = Number of game balls entered x Number of prize balls: 2 x 2 = 4 Increase/decrease in game balls: 2 The number of game balls increases by 2 in 1.2 seconds when 1 game ball is fired Ball output rate: Number of game balls paid out / number of game balls fired = 4 / 2 = 2.00

As described above, according to the present embodiment, by changing the fluctuation time of the normal unit 38 during the high-frequency support mode, it is possible to change the pitching rate during the high-frequency support mode. That is, by changing the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38 during the high-frequency support mode, the number of game balls held by the player can be increased, maintained, or decreased.

In this embodiment, when the normal jackpot is won as a result of the jackpot lottery, the high-frequency support mode is entered after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Then, when the jackpot lottery is won after the transition to the high-frequency support mode, or when the jackpot lottery execution count reaches 100 times without winning the jackpot lottery after the transition to the high-frequency support mode, High frequency support mode ends.

In this embodiment, after winning the normal jackpot and shifting to the high-frequency support mode, the period until the end of the high-frequency support mode is determined by referring to the variable time table for the high-frequency support mode. , To set the variation time of the special figure unit 37 and the variation time of the normal figure unit 38. However, even during the period when the variable time table for high-frequency support mode is referenced, when setting the variable time of the game round that will win the jackpot lottery, or setting the variable time of the game round that will generate reach In that case, the variation time of the special figure unit 37 is set by referring to the variation time table for jackpot and the variation time table for reach generation.

FIG. 102 is an explanatory diagram showing a variable time table for high frequency support mode. FIG. 102(A) shows variable time table set A for high-frequency support mode, and FIG. 102(B) shows variable time table set B for high-frequency support mode.

In this embodiment, when shifting to the high frequency support mode, the variable time of the special figure unit 37 and the variable time of the normal figure unit 38 are set by referring to the variable time table set A for the high frequency support mode. In addition, in the present embodiment, as a result of the jackpot lottery, a small win is set, and when a small win is won during the high-frequency support mode, the table to be referred to is the variable time table set A for the high-frequency support mode, Switch between variable time table set B for high frequency support mode. A small win is a lottery result in which the opening/closing execution mode is entered, but the support mode and the lottery mode are not changed.

As shown in FIG. 102(A), the variable time table set A for the high frequency support mode is composed of a special figure unit table A and a normal figure unit table A.

In the special figure unit table A, the number of game rounds after shifting to the high-frequency support mode and the variation time of the special figure unit 37 are stored in association with each other. In this embodiment, 1.0 second is set as the variation time of the special figure unit 37 during the period in which the number of game times after shifting to the high-frequency support mode is 1 to 30 times. 1.6 seconds is set as the variation time of the special figure unit 37 during the period in which the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode is 31 to 70 times. 2.2 seconds is set as the variation time of the special figure unit 37 during the period in which the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode is 71 to 100 times.

The normal figure unit table A stores the number of game rounds after shifting to the high frequency support mode and the variation time of the normal figure unit 38 in association with each other. In addition, in FIG. 102 (A), for reference, the increase and decrease of the game ball when the variable time is set, and the game ball enters the second start port 208a when the variable time is set. Intervals are shown.

In the present embodiment, 0.05 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the normal unit 38 during the period in which the number of game rounds after shifting to the high frequency support mode is 1 to 30 times. Therefore, during this period, one game ball enters the second starting hole 208a at a rate of 0.6 seconds, and the number of game balls held by the player increases. 0.25 second is set as the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38 during the period in which the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode is 31 to 70 times. Therefore, during this period, one game ball enters the second starting hole 208a at a rate of 1.2 seconds, and the number of game balls held by the player neither increases nor decreases. 0.95 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the normal unit 38 during the period in which the number of game times after shifting to the high-frequency support mode is 71 to 100 times. Therefore, during this period, one game ball enters the second starting hole 208a at a rate of 1.8 seconds, and the number of game balls held by the player decreases.

As shown in FIG. 102(B), the variable time table set B for the high frequency support mode is composed of a table B for special figure units and a table B for normal figure units.

In the special figure unit table B, the number of game rounds after shifting to the high-frequency support mode and the variation time of the special figure unit 37 are stored in association with each other. In this embodiment, 2.2 seconds is set as the variation time of the special figure unit 37 during the period in which the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode is 1 to 30 times. 1.6 seconds is set as the variation time of the special figure unit 37 during the period in which the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode is 31 to 70 times. 1.0 second is set as the variation time of the special figure unit 37 during the period in which the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode is 71 to 100 times.

The normal figure unit table B stores the number of game rounds after shifting to the high frequency support mode and the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38 in association with each other. In addition, in FIG. 102 (B), for reference, the increase and decrease of the game ball when the fluctuation time is set, and the game ball entering the second start port 208a when the fluctuation time is set Intervals are shown.

In this embodiment, 0.95 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the normal unit 38 during the period in which the number of game rounds after shifting to the high-frequency support mode is 1 to 30 times. Therefore, during this period, one game ball enters the second starting hole 208a at a rate of 1.8 seconds, and the number of game balls held by the player decreases. 0.25 second is set as the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38 during the period in which the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode is 31 to 70 times. Therefore, during this period, one game ball enters the second starting hole 208a at a rate of 1.2 seconds, and the number of game balls held by the player neither increases nor decreases. 0.05 second is set as the fluctuation time of the normal unit 38 during the period in which the number of game times after shifting to the high-frequency support mode is 71 to 100 times. Therefore, during this period, one game ball enters the second starting hole 208a at a rate of 0.6 seconds, and the number of game balls held by the player increases.

FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an increase or decrease in the number of game balls held by the player during the high-frequency support mode. FIG. 103(A) shows an example of an increase or decrease in game balls when variable time table set A for high-frequency support mode is selected, and FIG. 103(B) shows a variable time table for high-frequency support mode. It shows an example of increase and decrease of game balls when set B is selected.

As shown in FIG. 103 (A), when the variable time table set A for the high-frequency support mode is selected, the period in which the number of games after shifting to the high-frequency support mode is 1 to 30 During the middle, the number of game balls in the player's hand increases. During the period in which the number of games played after shifting to the high-frequency support mode is 31 to 70, the number of game balls held by the player neither increases nor decreases. During the period in which the number of games played after shifting to the high-frequency support mode is 71 to 100, the number of game balls held by the player decreases. In the example shown in FIG. 103(A), the number of game balls held by the player at the end of 100 game rounds is greater than at the start of the high-frequency support mode.

As shown in FIG. 103 (B), when the variable time table set B for the high-frequency support mode is selected, the period in which the number of games after shifting to the high-frequency support mode is 1 to 30 During, the number of game balls held by the player decreases. During the period in which the number of games played after shifting to the high-frequency support mode is 31 to 70, the number of game balls held by the player neither increases nor decreases. During the period in which the number of games played after shifting to the high-frequency support mode is 71 to 100, the number of game balls held by the player increases. In the example shown in FIG. 103(B), the number of game balls held by the player at the end of 100 game rounds is greater than at the start of the high-frequency support mode.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, during a period in which the rate of game balls entering the second starting port 208a in the high frequency support mode is high, the fluctuation time of the special figure unit 37 is short. is set (Fig. 102). Therefore, the jackpot lottery held by the game ball entering the second starting port 208a during the fluctuation of the special figure unit 37 can be quickly digested.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the special figure unit 37 during the high-frequency support mode is set to be longer than the interval of the game balls entering the second start hole 208a (Fig. 102). . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the suspension of the big winning lottery from being interrupted and the sense of rhythm of the big winning lottery in the high frequency support mode being spoiled.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, as a result of the jackpot lottery, when a jackpot or reach occurrence is won, a long fluctuation time (for example, 30 seconds) is set as the fluctuation time of the special figure unit 37 . If a long variation time is set as the variation time of the special figure unit 37 during the period in which the number of game balls increases in the high-frequency support mode, the period in which the number of game balls increases becomes longer. Therefore, during the period when the number of game balls increases, the player plays the game expecting to win as many ready-to-win games as possible. That is, according to the present embodiment, new value can be added to reach generation.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the variable time table set A for the high-frequency support mode is selected, and during the period in which the number of games played after shifting to the high-frequency support mode is 71 to 100, the game The number of game balls held by the player decreases. If a small win is won during this period and the variable time table set B for the high-frequency support mode is selected, the number of game balls in the player's hand increases again. Therefore, during the period when the number of game balls is decreasing, the player plays the game expecting to win a small prize and change the table. That is, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to provide the player with a new sense of expectation during the high-frequency support mode, so that it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In this embodiment, two types of variable time table sets A and B are stored, but the number of variable time table sets may be one, or three or more. good too.

Further, as another embodiment, during the high-frequency support mode, only the fluctuation time of the normal unit 38 may be set by referring to the normal unit table A or the normal unit table B. Also with this configuration, it is possible to increase or decrease the number of game balls held by the player during the high-frequency support mode, so that the interest in the game can be enhanced.

N. Variant:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be implemented in various aspects without departing from the scope of the invention. For example, the following modifications are also possible.

N1. Variant 1:
In the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 stores the contents of the game performance executed in the most recent game round or the contents of the performance elements constituting the game performance, regardless of the presence or absence of the pending information, and executes the notice of déjà vu. In that case, the content of the stored game effect or the effect element constituting the game effect may be executed in the next game round. With such a configuration, even if there is a new winning in a state where there is no reservation information, the game performance or the game performance executed in the previous game round is configured in the game round related to the winning. Since the effect element is executed, the game effect of the same content or the effect element constituting the game effect can be executed a plurality of times, and the player can be given a sense of deja vu.

N2. Modification 2:
In the above embodiment, when the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, the effect element to be executed next may be started at the same time when the effect element to be executed first ends. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a stronger sense of déjà vu.

N3. Variant 3:
In the above-described embodiment, after the effect element having the same content has been executed multiple times, a suggestive effect is executed to suggest to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed multiple times. However, it may be configured to execute a pre-suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the effect element of the same content will be executed multiple times before the effect element of the same content is executed multiple times. . By doing so, it is possible to make the player who has recognized the pre-suggestive effect have a strong interest in the effect element to be executed thereafter. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the game performance, thereby enhancing the interest of the player.

N4. Variant 4:
In the above-described eighth and ninth embodiments, the length of time during which the opening/closing doors 208b and 308b are kept open differs for each type of high-frequency support mode. The number of times the opening/closing doors 208b and 308b transition from the closed state to the open state and the timing at which the opening/closing doors 208b and 308b transition from the closed state to the open state may differ for each type of mode. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to set a plurality of types of high-frequency support modes in which the number of game balls entering the second starting port is different.

N5. Variant 5:
In the ninth embodiment, the main controller 60 is configured to be able to execute only one kind of third high-frequency support mode as the high-frequency support mode in which the ball output rate exceeds 1. However, the main controller 60 , a configuration that can execute a plurality of types of high-frequency support modes in which the ball output rate exceeds one.

For example, in the ninth embodiment, the fourth high-frequency support mode in which the opening time of the opening/closing door 308b is set to 2.3 seconds may be configured to be executable. In the fourth high-frequency support mode in which the opening time of the open/close door 308b is set to 2.3 seconds, the game ball is fired with a predetermined firing intensity that can reach the second starter unit 300 by the game ball shooting mechanism 81. , in a situation where they are continuously shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds, all four game balls enter the second starting port 308a, and eight game balls are paid out as prize balls. become. Therefore, the ball output rate is 2.00 when the fourth high frequency support mode is being executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make a difference in the degree of exhilaration imparted to the player in the high-frequency support mode in which the ball output rate exceeds 1. As a result, it is possible to add intonation to the game, and to improve the amusement of the game. Even in the case where the fourth high-frequency support mode can be executed, by adjusting the respective ratios of executing the first to fourth high-frequency support modes, the above-mentioned first total ball throwing rate The values of T1 and the second total ball hitting rate T2 can be less than one.

N6. Modification 6:
In the ninth embodiment, one game ball GB1 out of the four game balls is distributed to the route R11, and the three game balls GB2, GB3, and GB4 that arrive after the game ball GB1 are separated from the route R11. Although it has been configured to distribute to different routes (route R2 and route R12), instead of this configuration, one game ball GB1 is distributed to a predetermined route, and two game balls arriving after game ball GB1 are transferred to the corresponding game ball GB1. Alternatively, one game ball GB1 may be distributed to a path different from the predetermined path, and a predetermined number of four or more game balls arriving after the game ball GB1 may be distributed to the predetermined path. It is also possible to assign to a route different from the route of . That is, one game ball GB1 may be distributed to a predetermined path, and N (N is an integer equal to or greater than 2) game balls arriving after the game ball GB1 may be distributed to paths different from the predetermined path. good.

Also, instead of the through gate 306 in the ninth embodiment, a prize ball opening into which a game ball can enter or a predetermined It is good also as a structure which provides an accessory. According to such a configuration, of the (N+1) game balls, only one game ball GB1 is caused to reach the prize ball opening or a predetermined accessory, and the N game balls that arrive after the game ball GB1. can be prevented from reaching the prize ball opening or a predetermined accessory.

Furthermore, by setting the value of N (the number of game balls distributed to a path different from the predetermined path) to a desired value at the time of designing the gaming machine, a game that reaches a prize hole or a predetermined accessory can be set. The percentage of spheres can be set to any desired percentage. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the game machine and to diversify the games.

N7. Variant 7:
In the eighth to thirteenth embodiments, instead of the opening/closing doors 208b and 308b, the states of the second starting ports 208a and 308a are changed into a state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter and a state in which it is easy to enter a game ball. Other mechanisms for transitioning between may be employed. For example, a so-called electric tulip may be adopted as another mechanism instead of the opening/closing doors 208b and 308b.

N8. Modification 8:
In the eighth to thirteenth embodiments, a configuration may be adopted in which the probability of winning the electric accessory open lottery in the high-frequency support mode is set to a value other than 100%. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the probability of winning the electric accessory open lottery in the high-frequency support mode is set to 99%, 60%, or the like. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the ball output rate in the high-frequency support mode. For example, when the probability of winning in the electric accessory open lottery in the high frequency support mode is set to 100%, the probability of winning in the electric accessory open lottery is set to 100 for the configuration in which the ball output rate is 1. %, the pitching rate in the high-frequency support mode can be set to less than 1.

Further, in the eighth to thirteenth embodiments, the number of game balls paid out as prize balls (number of prize balls) when one game ball enters the second start opening 208a, 308a Any value other than two may be set. By doing so, the ball output rate in the high frequency support mode can be set to an arbitrary value. Also, the number of game balls paid out as prize balls (number of prize balls) when one game ball enters the second start openings 208a and 308a may be configured to change according to the game state. According to such a configuration, since the ball output rate in the high-frequency support mode changes according to the game state, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

N9. Modification 9:
In the eighth to twelfth embodiments, the type of high-frequency support mode is set for each type of jackpot, but the trigger for executing the high-frequency support mode and the type of high-frequency support mode are determined. Any other configuration can be adopted as the configuration for performing. For example, a configuration in which the high-frequency support mode is executed when the number of consecutive games in which the jackpot lottery is not won exceeds a predetermined number of times, or a high-frequency support mode according to the number of consecutive games in which the jackpot lottery is not won. A configuration that determines the type of high-frequency support mode, a random number counter for determining whether or not to execute high-frequency support mode and the type is provided, and depending on the value of the acquired random number counter, whether or not to execute high-frequency support mode and high-frequency support A configuration that determines the type of mode, a configuration that determines whether or not to execute a high-frequency support mode and the type of a high-frequency support mode according to the type of stop pattern, and a high frequency triggered by the execution of a specific reach production A configuration for executing the support mode, a configuration for determining the type of the high-frequency support mode according to the type of ready-to-win effect to be executed, and the number of game balls entered at the timing when the number of pending starters is the upper limit value. A configuration in which the high-frequency support mode is executed when the total exceeds a predetermined threshold, and the high-frequency support according to the total number of game balls entered at the timing when the number of pending start ports reaches the upper limit. A configuration or the like that determines the type of mode can be employed.

N10. Modification 10:
In the above eighth to twelfth embodiments, the pitching rate and execution ratio in each high-frequency support mode are set so that the first total pitching rate T1 and the second total pitching rate T2 are less than 1. However, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the pitching rate and the execution ratio in each high-frequency support mode are set so that the first total pitching rate T1 and the second total pitching rate T2 become one. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player's gambling spirit from becoming excessively high.

N11. Modification 11:
Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a pachinko machine in which a game ball enters a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a game machine such as a pachinko machine that generates a right and a jackpot, a pachinko machine with other accessories, an arrangement ball machine, and a mammoth ball.

In addition, a non-ball game machine, for example, equipped with a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction, the rotation of the reels is started by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. or after the reels are stopped by the lapse of a predetermined time, if a specific pattern or a combination of specific patterns is formed on an effective line that can be visually recognized from the display window, a privilege such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the game machine main body which is openably and closably supported by the outer frame is provided with a storage portion and a take-in device, and after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage portion are taken in by the take-in device, the start lever is operated. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the reels start rotating.

Further, a part of the functions realized by software in the above embodiments may be realized by hardware, or a part of the functions realized by hardware may be realized by software.

O. Regarding the group of inventions extracted from each of the above embodiments:
Hereinafter, the features of the group of inventions extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described, showing effects and the like as necessary.

<Characteristic group A>
The feature group A is extracted from each embodiment mentioned above, or these combinations.

[Feature A1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
a collation means for collating whether or not the information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means matches the predetermined privilege provision information;
a notification means for notifying the result of the collation of the special information for each game;
privilege giving means for giving a privilege to a player when the information included in the special information matches the privilege giving information as a result of the matching of the special information;
determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of information included in the special information before the special information is subject to the collation;
an effect executing means for executing a game effect constituted by effect elements;
a control means for controlling the effect executing means;
In a gaming machine comprising
The control means is
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, determining a predetermined effect element,
In the production execution means,
Starting the execution of the determined effect element from the game round before the game round related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the determined performance element is executed a plurality of times with the same content until the game round related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is completed.

According to feature A1, since the effect element with the same content is executed multiple times, it is possible to give the player a sense of déjà vu that the effect element with the same content has been executed multiple times. . A player who has recognized the sense of déjà vu has a sense of expectation that the sense of déjà vu has a special meaning, for example, that a privilege may be given. Furthermore, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the effect element with the same content is executed multiple times, the player anticipates that the effect element with the same content will be executed multiple times, and the effect element is executed. Every time it is executed, they always pay attention to the production element with a high sense of expectation. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the performance element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, and to suitably increase the degree of attention of the player to the performance element which is sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game. can be achieved.

Further, according to the feature A1, even if the effect (for example, the red lighting of the look-ahead lamp) directly suggesting that the privilege is highly likely to be granted is not executed, the effect element of the same content It is possible to realize a game in which attention is paid to whether or not is executed multiple times. Therefore, the player can always play the game with a high sense of anticipation for the successively executed performance elements.

The game effect is executed by outputs from a plurality of pieces of hardware such as speakers, display devices, light emitting devices, and physically moving accessories included in the gaming machine. The effect element is a combination of outputs at predetermined timings by these multiple pieces of hardware that control the game effect. For example, a speaker, a display device, and a light emitting device each output at a predetermined timing to configure one effect element (for example, cut-in notice effect, ready-to-win effect, etc.). A game effect is composed of a plurality of effect elements.

As described above, the effect element is a combination of outputs at predetermined timings by a plurality of pieces of hardware that control the game effect. If the content of the output from the display device and the light emitting device at a predetermined timing is the same, the production element A and the production element B obtained by removing the output from the speaker from the production element are the production elements with the same content. will include. When the game machine executes the effect element A and then the effect element B, the game effect B does not include sound (output from the speaker) for the game effect A, but other hardware Since the contents of the output from (the display device and the light emitting device) are the same, it is possible to give the player a sense of déjà vu.

[Feature A2]
The gaming machine according to feature A1,
The gaming machine, wherein the control means controls the number of performance elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times.

According to the feature A2, by increasing or decreasing the number of production elements with the same content to be executed multiple times, the player's expectation can be increased or decreased, or the expectation can be inflated. can change.

[Feature A3]
The gaming machine according to feature A2,
The control means controls the same game to be executed a plurality of times during a period from when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied until the game round related to the special information when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied is completed. A gaming machine characterized in that the number of performance elements of the content of is increased with the lapse of time.

According to feature A3, since the number of effect elements for which the player recognizes the sense of déjà vu increases with the lapse of time, the player's sense of expectation can be increased with the lapse of time.

[Feature A4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, further comprising:
An operation receiving means for receiving an input operation by a player is provided,
The control means is
As the effect element, it is possible to cause the effect execution means to execute an operation acceptance effect element including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the operation acceptance effect element is not selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times.

When the operation acceptance effect element is executed multiple times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a sense of déjà vu.

According to feature A4, since the operation acceptance effect element is not selected as the effect element to be executed multiple times, it is possible to suppress different contents from being executed depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. It is possible to reliably give a sense of déjà vu.

[Feature A5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4,
The control means generates a suggestive effect suggesting to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, after the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, the effect executing means. A gaming machine characterized in that it is executed by

According to feature A5, since the effect executing means is caused to execute the suggestive effect, the player can be made to recognize that the effect element with the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element with the same content has been executed. It can convince the player that there is a special meaning to being executed multiple times.

[Feature A6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5,
The effect elements include a cut-in announcement effect in which a predetermined image is displayed in front of the background image, an object announcement effect in which a predetermined object image is displayed in front of the background image, and a background image that changes in a manner different from normal. Background change notice effect that causes a predetermined character to perform a predetermined action; Lamp light emission effect that causes various lamps to emit light in a predetermined pattern; At least one of a ready-to-win performance of changing the remaining one pattern row in a state where two of the same symbols are stopped on at least one effective line, and a symbol stop performance of stopping a combination of predetermined symbols. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature A6, various effect elements can be used to give the player a sense of déjà vu. can draw attention to.

<Characteristic group B>
The feature group B is extracted from each embodiment described above or a combination thereof.

[Feature B1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
a collation means for collating whether or not the information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means matches with the predetermined privilege provision information;
a notification means for notifying the result of the collation of the special information for each game;
privilege giving means for giving a privilege to a player when the information included in the special information matches the privilege giving information as a result of the matching of the special information;
determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of information included in the special information;
an effect executing means for executing a game effect constituted by effect elements;
a control means for controlling the effect executing means;
In a gaming machine comprising
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control means controls at least one performance element until the game round related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition ends. While causing the production execution means to execute a plurality of times with the same content,
After the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, the effect executing means is caused to execute a suggestive effect suggesting to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature B1, since the effect element with the same content is executed multiple times, it is possible to give the player a sense of déjà vu that the effect element with the same content has been executed multiple times. . A player who has recognized the sense of déjà vu has a sense of expectation that the sense of déjà vu has a special meaning, for example, that a privilege may be given.

Furthermore, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the effect element with the same content is executed multiple times, the player anticipates that the effect element with the same content will be executed multiple times, and the effect element is executed. Every time it is executed, they always pay attention to the production element with a high sense of expectation. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the performance element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, and to suitably increase the degree of attention of the player to the performance element which is sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game. can be achieved.

Furthermore, since the suggestive effect is executed by the effect executing means, the player can be made to recognize that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times. It can convince the player that something has special meaning.

[Feature B2]
The gaming machine according to feature B1,
The gaming machine, wherein the control means controls the number of performance elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times.

According to feature B2, by increasing or decreasing the number of effect elements with the same content that are executed multiple times, the player's expectation can be increased/decreased, or the expectation can be inflated. can change.

[Feature B3]
The gaming machine according to feature B2,
The control means controls the same game to be executed a plurality of times during a period from when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied until the game round related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied is completed. A gaming machine characterized in that the number of performance elements of the content of is increased with the lapse of time.

According to feature B3, the number of effect elements for which the player recognizes the sense of déjà vu increases with the lapse of time, so the player's sense of expectation can be increased with the lapse of time.

[Feature B4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3,
The determination means determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of information included in the special information before the special information is subject to the collation. is a
The control means is
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, from the game time before the game time related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the effect executing means executes the multiple times. A gaming machine characterized in that it starts execution of a performance element to be executed.

According to feature B4, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for the sense of déjà vu from the game round before the game round related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition.

[Feature B5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, further comprising:
An operation receiving means for receiving an input operation by a player is provided,
The control means is
As the effect element, it is possible to cause the effect execution means to execute an operation acceptance effect element including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the operation acceptance effect element is not selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times.

When the operation acceptance effect element is executed multiple times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a sense of déjà vu.

According to feature B5, since the operation acceptance effect element is not selected as the effect element to be executed multiple times, it is possible to suppress execution of different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. It is possible to reliably give a sense of déjà vu.

[Feature B6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B5,
The effect elements include a cut-in announcement effect in which a predetermined image is displayed in front of the background image, an object announcement effect in which a predetermined object image is displayed in front of the background image, and a background image that changes in a manner different from normal. Background change notice effect that causes a predetermined character to perform a predetermined action; Lamp light emission effect that causes various lamps to emit light in a predetermined pattern; At least one of a ready-to-win performance of changing the remaining one pattern row in a state where two of the same symbols are stopped on at least one effective line, and a symbol stop performance of stopping a combination of predetermined symbols. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature B6, since various effect elements can be used to give the player a sense of déjà vu, the player pays attention to whether or not the same content is executed multiple times in the various effect elements. can be made

<Characteristic group C>
The feature group C is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature C1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
a collation means for collating whether or not the information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means matches with the predetermined privilege provision information;
a notification means for notifying the result of the collation of the special information for each game;
determining means for determining a display duration that is the time required for one game;
privilege giving means for giving a privilege to a player when the information included in the special information matches the privilege giving information as a result of the matching of the special information;
determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of information included in the special information before the special information is subject to the collation;
an effect executing means for executing a game effect constituted by effect elements;
a control means for controlling the effect executing means;
In a gaming machine comprising
The control means, when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, performs at least two of the plurality of game times before the game time related to the special information that is determined to satisfy the predetermined condition. In each game round, the effect executing means is caused to execute the effect element having the same contents that can be executed within the shortest display duration time among the display duration times that can be determined by the determining means. game machine.

According to feature C1, since the effect element with the same content is executed a plurality of times (at least twice), the player has a feeling of déjà vu that the effect element with the same content has been executed a plurality of times. can give A player who has recognized the sense of déjà vu has a sense of expectation that the sense of déjà vu has a special meaning, for example, that a privilege may be given. Furthermore, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the effect element with the same content is executed multiple times, the player anticipates that the effect element with the same content will be executed multiple times, and the effect element is executed. Every time it is executed, they always pay attention to the production element with a high sense of expectation. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the performance element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, and to suitably increase the degree of attention of the player to the performance element which is sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game. can be achieved.

Further, according to the feature C1, the control means causes the effect execution means to execute the effect element having the same contents that can be executed within the shortest display duration time among the display duration times that can be determined by the determination means. Even if the display continuation time determined by the means is different for each game round, the production execution means can be made to execute the same performance element for each game round.

[Feature C2]
The gaming machine according to feature C1,
The control means is
When the length of the display duration of one game round for executing the effect element of the same content is a length that allows the effect element of the same content to be executed multiple times, the same display is performed in the one game round A gaming machine characterized in that the effect execution means is caused to execute the effect element having the contents of (1) a plurality of times.

According to feature C2, the effect element having the same content, which is to be executed multiple times (hereinafter also referred to as the effect element for déjà vu announcement), can be executed more times. On the other hand, it is possible to strongly recognize a sense of déjà vu. In addition, since the number of times the performance element for déjà vu preview is executed increases or decreases depending on the length of the display continuation time of one game, it is possible to inflate the player's expectation.

Furthermore, since the rendering element for the déjà vu preview is an rendering element that can be executed within the shortest display duration among the display durations that can be determined by the determining means, the time required for one execution is 1. It is equal to or less than the length of the display duration of the game cycle. Therefore, even if the effect element for the foretelling of déjà vu is executed once in one game, surplus time may occur in the display continuation time. According to this gaming machine, when the length of the display continuation time of one game is a length that allows the performance element for the foretelling of déjà vu (the performance element of the same content) to be executed multiple times, the Since the performance element with the same content is executed a plurality of times in one game, the surplus time of the display duration can be minimized.

[Feature C3]
A gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2,
The gaming machine, wherein the control means controls the number of performance elements having the same contents to be executed a plurality of times.

According to the feature C3, by increasing or decreasing the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed multiple times, the player's expectation can be increased or decreased, or the player's expectation can be inflated. can change.

[Feature C4]
The gaming machine according to feature C3,
The control means controls the same game to be executed a plurality of times during a period from when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied until the game round related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied is completed. A gaming machine characterized in that the number of effect elements of the content of is increased with the lapse of time.

According to feature C4, since the number of effect elements for which the player recognizes the sense of déjà vu increases with the passage of time, the player's sense of expectation can be increased with the passage of time.

[Feature C5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, further comprising:
An operation receiving means for receiving an input operation by a player is provided,
The control means is
As the effect element, it is possible to cause the effect execution means to execute an operation acceptance effect element including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the operation acceptance effect element is not selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times.

When the operation acceptance effect element is executed multiple times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a sense of déjà vu.

According to the feature C5, since the operation acceptance effect element is not selected as the effect element to be executed multiple times, it is possible to suppress different contents from being executed depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. It is possible to reliably give a sense of déjà vu.

[Feature C6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5,
The control means generates a suggestive effect suggesting to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, after the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, the effect executing means. A gaming machine characterized in that it is executed by

According to feature C6, since the effect executing means is caused to execute the suggestive effect, the player can be made to recognize that the effect element with the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element with the same content has been executed. It can convince the player that there is a special meaning to being executed multiple times.

[Feature C7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6,
The effect elements include a cut-in announcement effect in which a predetermined image is displayed in front of the background image, an object announcement effect in which a predetermined object image is displayed in front of the background image, and a background image that changes in a manner different from normal. Background change notice effect that causes a predetermined character to perform a predetermined action; Lamp light emission effect that causes various lamps to emit light in a predetermined pattern; At least one of a ready-to-win performance of changing the remaining one pattern row in a state where two of the same symbols are stopped on at least one effective line, and a symbol stop performance of stopping a combination of predetermined symbols. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature C7, various effect elements can be used to give the player a sense of déjà vu. can draw attention to.

<Characteristic group D>
The feature group D is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments or combinations thereof, and mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature D1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
a collation means for collating whether or not the information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means matches with the predetermined privilege provision information;
a notification means for notifying the result of the collation of the special information for each game;
privilege giving means for giving a privilege to a player when the information included in the special information matches the privilege giving information as a result of the matching of the special information;
determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of information included in the special information before the special information is subject to the collation;
an effect executing means for executing a game effect;
a control means for controlling the effect executing means;
an effect storage means for storing the content of the game effect;
In a gaming machine comprising
If it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied,
The effect storage means stores the contents of at least a part of the game effect executed in the game round prior to the game round related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition,
In a game round after the game round in which the content of the game effect is stored and before the game round related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition, A gaming machine characterized in that the contents of the stored game performance during at least a part of the period are reproduced by the performance executing means.

According to the feature D1, the contents of at least a part of the executed game effect are stored, and the contents of the stored game effect of at least a part of the period are reproduced. A sense of déjà vu that the game effect has been executed a plurality of times can be given. A player who has recognized the sense of déjà vu has a sense of expectation that the sense of déjà vu has a special meaning, for example, that a privilege may be given. Furthermore, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the game effect of the same content is executed multiple times, the player expects that the game effect of the same content is executed multiple times, and the game effect is performed. The player always pays attention to the game performance with a high sense of expectation every time it is executed. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the game performance of the same content is executed a plurality of times, and to suitably increase the degree of attention of the player to the game performance which is sequentially executed, thereby improving the amusement of the game. can be achieved.

Further, according to the feature D1, since the content of the executed game effect is stored and reproduced, the player can experience the game effect with completely the same content. Therefore, it is easy to give the player a sense of déjà vu.

[Feature D2]
The gaming machine according to feature D1, further comprising:
An operation receiving means for receiving an input operation by a player is provided,
The control means is
As the game effect, it is possible to cause the effect execution means to execute an operation acceptance effect including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player,
The gaming machine is characterized in that when the game performance to be stored in the performance storage means is to be executed by the game performance unit, the operation acceptance performance is not selected as the game performance.

When the operation acceptance effect is reproduced as a game effect, it may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a sense of déjà vu.

According to the feature D2, since the operation acceptance effect is not selected as the game effect to be executed a plurality of times, it is possible to suppress different contents from being executed depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. It can certainly give a sense of déjà vu.

[Feature D3]
A gaming machine according to feature D1 or feature D2,
The control means causes the effect execution means to execute a suggestive effect suggesting to the player that the same game effect has been reproduced after the stored game effect is reproduced. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature D3, since the effect executing means is caused to execute the suggestive effect, the player can be made to recognize that the game effect of the same content has been reproduced, and the game effect of the same content is reproduced. It can convince the player that something has special meaning.

<Characteristic group E>
The feature group E is extracted from each embodiment described above or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature E1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
a collation means for collating whether or not the information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means matches with the predetermined privilege provision information;
a notification means for notifying the result of the collation of the special information for each game;
privilege giving means for giving a privilege to a player when the information included in the special information matches the privilege giving information as a result of the matching of the special information;
determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of information included in the special information before the special information is subject to the collation;
an effect executing means for executing a game effect constituted by effect elements;
a control means for controlling the effect executing means;
determining means for determining a display duration that is the time required for one game;
calculating the total time of the shortest display continuation time that can be determined by the determining means as the display continuation time of each of a plurality of consecutive game rounds before the game round related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition; calculating means;
In a gaming machine comprising
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control means calculates the A gaming machine characterized in that the performance execution means is caused to execute a performance element having the same contents that can be executed multiple times within the total time.

According to the feature E1, since the effect element with the same content is executed a plurality of times (at least twice), the player has a sense of déjà vu that the effect element with the same content has been executed a plurality of times. can give A player who has recognized the sense of déjà vu has a sense of expectation that the sense of déjà vu has a special meaning, for example, that a privilege may be given. Furthermore, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the effect element with the same content is executed multiple times, the player anticipates that the effect element with the same content will be executed multiple times, and the effect element is executed. Every time it is executed, they always pay attention to the production element with a high sense of expectation. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the performance element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, and to suitably increase the degree of attention of the player to the performance element which is sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game. can be achieved.

In addition, according to feature E1, the control means selects the effect element of the same content that can be executed multiple times within the total time calculated by the calculation means (the total time of the shortest display duration that can be determined by the determination means). Since the performance executing means is caused to execute multiple times, one performance element to be executed multiple times is not limited to one that can be completed within the display duration time required for one game. That is, the effect element of the same content can be executed multiple times across a plurality of successive game rounds prior to the game round related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition. For example, it is possible to execute one performance element, which is to be executed multiple times, across game rounds. Therefore, when selecting a rendering element to be executed multiple times, the selection can be made without considering the execution time for one execution of the rendering element.

Furthermore, since the effect element with the same content that can be executed multiple times is executed multiple times within the total time of the shortest display duration that can be determined by the determining means, the effect element with the same content is executed multiple times. The time required for this is less than or equal to the total display duration of each actual game round. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a shortage of time when the performance element having the same content is executed a plurality of times across a plurality of consecutive game rounds prior to the game round related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition. It is possible to avoid this and reliably execute the production element with the same content a plurality of times.

[Feature E2]
The gaming machine described in feature E1,
The gaming machine, wherein the control means controls the number of performance elements having the same contents to be executed a plurality of times.

According to the feature E2, by increasing or decreasing the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed multiple times, the player's expectation can be increased/decreased, or the expectation can be inflated. can change.

[Feature E3]
The gaming machine according to feature E2,
The control means controls the same game to be executed a plurality of times during a period from when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied until the game round related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied is completed. A gaming machine characterized by increasing the number of effect elements of the contents of (1) with the lapse of time.

According to feature E3, since the number of effect elements for which the player recognizes the sense of déjà vu increases with the lapse of time, the player's sense of expectation can be increased with the lapse of time.

[Feature E4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, further comprising:
An operation receiving means for receiving an input operation by a player is provided,
The control means is
As the effect element, it is possible to cause the effect execution means to execute an operation acceptance effect element including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the operation acceptance effect element is not selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times.

When the operation acceptance effect element is executed multiple times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a sense of déjà vu.

According to the feature E4, since the operation acceptance effect element is not selected as the effect element to be executed multiple times, it is possible to suppress different contents from being executed depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. It is possible to reliably give a sense of déjà vu.

[Feature E5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4,
The control means generates a suggestive effect suggesting to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, after the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, the effect executing means. A gaming machine characterized in that it is executed by

According to feature E5, since the effect executing means is caused to execute the suggestive effect, the player can be made to recognize that the effect element with the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element with the same content has been executed. It can convince the player that there is a special meaning to being executed multiple times.

[Feature E6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5,
The effect elements include a cut-in announcement effect in which a predetermined image is displayed in front of the background image, an object announcement effect in which a predetermined object image is displayed in front of the background image, and a background image that changes in a manner different from normal. Background change notice effect that causes a predetermined character to perform a predetermined action; Lamp light emission effect that causes various lamps to emit light in a predetermined pattern; At least one of a ready-to-win performance of changing the remaining one pattern row in a state where two of the same symbols are stopped on at least one effective line, and a symbol stop performance of stopping a combination of predetermined symbols. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature E6, various effect elements can be used to give the player a sense of déjà vu. can draw attention to.

<Feature group F>
The feature group F is extracted from each embodiment described above or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment.

[Feature F1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
a collation means for collating whether or not the information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means matches with the predetermined privilege provision information;
a notification means for notifying the result of the collation of the special information for each game;
determining means for determining a display duration that is the time required for one game;
privilege giving means for giving a privilege to a player when the information included in the special information matches the privilege giving information as a result of the matching of the special information;
determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of information included in the special information;
an effect executing means for executing a game effect constituted by effect elements;
a control means for controlling the effect executing means;
In a gaming machine comprising
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control means performs at least one of the game times before the game time related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition. The game machine is characterized in that, in each game, the production executing means is caused to execute the same contents of a production element that can be executed multiple times within the display duration time of the game game multiple times.

According to the feature F1, since the effect element with the same content is executed multiple times, it is possible to give the player a sense of déjà vu that the effect element with the same content has been executed multiple times. .
A player who recognizes the sense of déjà vu has a sense of expectation that the sense of déjà vu may have a special meaning, for example, a privilege may be given.
Furthermore, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the effect element of the same content is executed multiple times, the player expects that the effect element of the same content is executed multiple times, and the effect element is executed. Every time it is executed, they always pay attention to the production element with a high sense of expectation.
Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the performance element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, and to suitably increase the degree of attention of the player to the performance element which is sequentially executed, thereby improving the amusement of the game. can be achieved.

Further, according to the feature F1, in at least one game round, the effect elements that can be executed multiple times within the display duration time of the game round are executed multiple times with the same content, so that the player has a sense of deja vu. can be given in one game.

[Feature F2]
The gaming machine according to feature F1,
The gaming machine, wherein the control means controls the number of performance elements having the same contents to be executed a plurality of times.

According to the feature F2, by increasing or decreasing the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed multiple times, the player's expectation can be increased/decreased, or the player's expectation can be inflated. can change.

[Feature F3]
The gaming machine according to feature F2,
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control means controls, after determining that the predetermined condition is satisfied, to play a game related to the special information that is determined to have satisfied the predetermined condition. A gaming machine characterized in that the number of the performance elements having the same contents to be executed a plurality of times is increased with the lapse of time until the end of the round.

According to the feature F3, since the number of effect elements for which the player recognizes the sense of déjà vu increases with the passage of time, the player's sense of expectation can be increased with the passage of time.

[Feature F4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3,
The determination means determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of information included in the special information before the special information is subject to the collation. is a
The control means is
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, from the game time before the game time related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the effect executing means executes the multiple times. A gaming machine characterized in that it starts execution of a performance element to be executed.

According to the feature F4, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for the sense of deja vu from the game rounds before the game rounds related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition.

[Feature F5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4,
The control means generates a suggestive effect suggesting to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, after the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, the effect executing means. A gaming machine characterized in that it is executed by

According to the feature F5, since the effect executing means is caused to execute the suggestive effect, the player can be made to recognize that the effect element with the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element with the same content has been executed. It can convince the player that there is a special meaning to being executed multiple times.

[Feature F6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F5,
The effect elements include a cut-in announcement effect in which a predetermined image is displayed in front of the background image, an object announcement effect in which a predetermined object image is displayed in front of the background image, and a background image that changes in a manner different from normal. Background change notice effect that causes a predetermined character to perform a predetermined action; Lamp light emission effect that causes various lamps to emit light in a predetermined pattern; At least one of a ready-to-win performance of changing the remaining one pattern row in a state where two of the same symbols are stopped on at least one effective line, and a symbol stop performance of stopping a combination of predetermined symbols. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature F6, various effect elements can be used to give the player a sense of déjà vu, so the player pays attention to whether or not the same content is executed multiple times in the various effect elements. can be made

<Characteristic group G>
The feature G group is extracted from each embodiment described above or a combination thereof, and mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment.

[Feature G1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
a collation means for collating whether or not the information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means matches with the predetermined privilege provision information;
a notification means for notifying the result of the collation of the special information for each game;
privilege giving means for giving a privilege to a player when the information included in the special information matches the privilege giving information as a result of the matching of the special information;
determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of information included in the special information before the special information is subject to the collation;
an effect executing means for executing a game effect constituted by effect elements;
a control means for controlling the effect executing means;
determining means for determining a display duration that is the time required for one game;
In a gaming machine comprising
The determination means sets a display duration of a predetermined length for at least two game rounds out of a plurality of game rounds before the game round related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition. to ensure
The control means executes the effect with the effect element having the same content in at least two game times out of a plurality of game times before the game time related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition. A gaming machine characterized in that it is to be executed by a means.

According to the characteristic G1, it is possible to execute the effect element having the same content in each of at least two game rounds in which the predetermined length of duration is ensured by the determining means. Since the effect element with the same content is executed multiple times, it is possible to give the player a sense of déjà vu that the effect element with the same content has been executed multiple times. A player who has recognized the sense of déjà vu has a sense of expectation that the sense of déjà vu has a special meaning, for example, that a privilege may be given. Furthermore, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the effect element with the same content is executed multiple times, the player anticipates that the effect element with the same content will be executed multiple times, and the effect element is executed. Every time it is executed, they always pay attention to the production element with a high sense of expectation. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the performance element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, and to suitably increase the degree of attention of the player to the performance element which is sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game. can be achieved.

[Feature G2]
The gaming machine according to feature G1,
The determining means, when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, performs at least two games out of a plurality of game times before the game regarding the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition. It is to ensure a display duration of a predetermined length for each time,
The control means causes the effect executing means to execute, in each game round, the effect element having the same contents that can be executed in each game round for which the display duration of the predetermined length is ensured by the determining means. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature G2, the control means causes the effect executing means to execute the effect element having the same contents that can be executed in each game round for which the determining means has secured the display duration of the predetermined length. To avoid shortage of the time required for executing the same performance element in each game cycle, and to surely execute the performance element of the same content in each game cycle.

[Feature G3]
A gaming machine according to feature G1,
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control means controls at least two of a plurality of game times before the game time related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition. The effect executing means is caused to execute the effect element having the same content in the game round,
The determining means determines that the effect executing means performs the same content for at least two game rounds out of a plurality of game rounds before the game rounds related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition. A gaming machine characterized in that it secures a display continuation time long enough to execute a performance element.

According to the feature G3, the determining means secures a display continuation time that is long enough for the effect executing means to execute the same effect element, so the time required for the effect executing means to execute the same effect element is reduced. is avoided in each game round, and performance elements with the same content can be reliably executed in each game round.

[Feature G4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3,
The gaming machine, wherein the control means controls the number of performance elements having the same contents to be executed a plurality of times.

According to feature G4, by increasing or decreasing the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed multiple times, the player's expectation can be increased/decreased, or the player's expectation can be inflated. can change.

[Feature G5]
The gaming machine according to feature G4,
The control means controls the same game to be executed a plurality of times during a period from when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied until the game round related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied is completed. A gaming machine characterized in that the number of effect elements of the content of is increased with the lapse of time.

According to feature G5, the number of effect elements for which the player recognizes the sense of déjà vu increases with the lapse of time, so the player's sense of expectation can be increased with the lapse of time.

[Feature G6]
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G5, further comprising:
An operation receiving means for receiving an input operation by a player is provided,
The control means is
As the effect element, it is possible to cause the effect execution means to execute an operation acceptance effect element including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the operation acceptance effect element is not selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times.

When the operation acceptance effect element is executed multiple times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a sense of déjà vu.

According to feature G6, since the operation acceptance effect element is not selected as the effect element to be executed multiple times, it is possible to suppress execution of different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. It is possible to reliably give a sense of déjà vu.

[Feature G7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G6,
The control means generates a suggestive effect suggesting to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, after the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, the effect executing means. A gaming machine characterized in that it is executed by

According to feature G7, since the effect executing means is caused to execute the suggestive effect, the player can be made to recognize that the effect element with the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element with the same content has been executed. It can convince the player that there is a special meaning to being executed multiple times.

[Feature G8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G7,
The effect elements include a cut-in announcement effect in which a predetermined image is displayed in front of the background image, an object announcement effect in which a predetermined object image is displayed in front of the background image, and a background image that changes in a manner different from normal. Background change notice effect that causes a predetermined character to perform a predetermined action; Lamp light emission effect that causes various lamps to emit light in a predetermined pattern; At least one of a ready-to-win performance of changing the remaining one pattern row in a state where two of the same symbols are stopped on at least one effective line, and a symbol stop performance of stopping a combination of predetermined symbols. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature G8, various effect elements can be used to give the player a sense of déjà vu. can draw attention to.

<Characteristic group H>
The feature H group is extracted from each embodiment described above or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the sixth embodiment.

[Feature H1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
a collation means for collating whether or not the information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means matches with the predetermined privilege provision information;
a notification means for notifying the result of the collation of the special information for each game;
privilege giving means for giving a privilege to a player when the information included in the special information matches the privilege giving information as a result of the matching of the special information;
determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of information included in the special information;
an effect executing means for executing a game effect constituted by effect elements;
a control means for controlling the effect executing means;
a time acquisition means for acquiring time information;
In a gaming machine comprising
The control means is
As the effect element, the effect execution means is caused to execute a time-linked effect element that is continuously executed with the passage of time based on the time information,
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the execution of the time-linked effect element is started before the game round related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied is completed. In this case, a plurality of the time-linked effect elements to be executed during at least a part of the period are provided to the effect executing means by the time the game round related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is completed. A gaming machine characterized in that it is executed twice.

According to the feature H1, since the time-linked effect element that is executed in at least a part of the period is executed a plurality of times, it is possible to provide the player with a new and interesting effect. In addition, since the time-linked effect element that is executed in at least a part of the period is executed multiple times, the player has a sense of déjà vu that the time-linked effect element of the same content has been executed multiple times. can give

A player who has recognized the sense of déjà vu has a sense of expectation that the sense of déjà vu has a special meaning, for example, that a privilege may be given. Furthermore, when the player experiences that the privilege is granted after the time-linked effect element is executed multiple times, the time-linked effect element is executed in anticipation of the time-linked effect element being executed multiple times. Each time, he always has a high sense of expectation and pays attention to the time-linked production element. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the time-linked effect element is executed a plurality of times, and to preferably increase the player's attention to the time-linked effect element executed based on the time information, It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Supposing that a plurality of game machines having the feature H1 are installed in the game hall, the same time-linked effect element is displayed from the same time on the game machine that satisfies the predetermined condition and on the game machine that does not satisfy the predetermined condition. is started, there is a temporal difference (shift) in the time-linked effect elements to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to give a sense of superiority to a player playing a game on a gaming machine that satisfies a predetermined condition.

[Feature H2]
The gaming machine according to feature H1,
The control means sets a specific time position of the time-linked effect element having a predetermined time length as a start position when the time-linked effect element is executed multiple times by the effect execution means. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature H2, since the time-linked effect element is executed multiple times with a specific temporal position as the start position, the player is strongly affected by the part of the time-linked effect element after the specific time position. Visual perception can be made.

[Feature H3]
The gaming machine according to feature H2,
The determination means determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of information included in the special information before the special information is subject to the collation. is a
The control means is a game round to be executed after it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied and is before the game time related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. Triggered by the timing of starting each of at least two of the game rounds, the time-linked effect element is caused to be executed by the effect execution means with the specific time position as the start position. machine.

According to feature H3, by synchronizing the start timing of each time-linked effect element that is executed a plurality of times with the start timing of the game cycle, it is possible to give the player a stronger sense of deja vu.

[Feature H4]
The gaming machine according to feature H2 or feature 3,
The control means stores, as the specific temporal position, the temporal position of the time-linked effect element being executed at the timing when the game cycle is started after it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. A game machine characterized by being.

Supposing that a specific temporal position is set at the end of the time-linked effect element, when the time-linked effect element is started from the specific temporal position, the time-linked effect element corresponding to the specific temporal position is , may not be executed even once at the timing of the start of the first game round of at least two game rounds. In this case, the time-linked effect element, which has been executed as a continuous flow until the first game round is started, is suddenly interrupted at the timing of the start of the first game round, and is not executed even once. The time-linked effect element is started/executed from a specific temporal position not shown.

According to the feature H4, the time-linked effect executed at the timing when the game round after it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, in other words, the first game round of the at least two game rounds is started. The temporal position of the element is stored as a specific temporal position, and the stored specific temporal position is used as the start position of the time-linked effect element for the second time or later out of a plurality of executions, so that the time-linked effect element can be used. The temporal position once executed as a continuous series of flow can be used as the starting position for the second and subsequent times of the time-linked effect element that is executed multiple times. Therefore, the time-linked effect element, which has been executed as a continuous flow until the first game round is started, is prevented from being suddenly interrupted at the timing of the start of the first game round, and is not executed even once. It is possible to avoid starting/executing the time-linked effect element from a specific temporal position that is not displayed.

[Feature H5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H4,
The control means is
As the effect element, it is possible to further cause the effect execution means to execute a non-time-linked effect element that is executed not based on the time information,
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the non-time-linked effect element is executed together with the time-linked effect element, the time-linked effect to be executed during at least a part of the period The element and the non-time-linked effect element are caused to be executed by the effect execution means a plurality of times until the game round related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is completed. Amusement machine.

According to the feature H5, in addition to the time-linked effect element, the non-time-linked effect element is also executed a plurality of times, so it is possible to give the player a stronger sense of deja vu.

[Feature H6]
A gaming machine according to feature H5,
The gaming machine, wherein the control means controls the number of the non-time-linked effect elements to be executed a plurality of times.

According to feature 6, by increasing or decreasing the number of non-time-linked effect elements to be executed multiple times, the expectation of the player can be increased or decreased, or the expectation can be inflated. change can be given.

[Feature H7]
The gaming machine according to feature H6,
The control means causes the game to be executed a plurality of times during a period from when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied until the game round related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied is completed. A gaming machine characterized in that the number of non-time-linked performance elements is increased with the lapse of time.

According to feature H7, the number of non-time-linked effect elements, which are one of the effect elements for which the player recognizes a sense of déjà vu, increases with the lapse of time. can be increased.

[Feature H8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H7,
An operation receiving means for receiving an input operation by a player is provided,
The control means is
As the effect element, it is possible to cause the effect execution means to execute an operation acceptance effect element including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the operation acceptance effect element is not selected as the non-time-linked effect element to be executed a plurality of times.

When the operation acceptance effect element is executed multiple times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a sense of déjà vu.

According to the feature H8, since the operation acceptance effect element is not selected as the non-time-linked effect element to be executed multiple times, it is possible to suppress different contents from being executed depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. A sense of déjà vu can be surely given to the person.

[Feature H9]
A gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H8,
The control means generates a suggestive effect suggesting to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, after the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, the effect executing means. A gaming machine characterized in that it is executed by

According to feature H9, since the effect executing means is caused to execute the suggestive effect, the player can be made to recognize that the effect element with the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element with the same content has been executed. It can convince the player that there is a special meaning to being executed multiple times.

[Feature H10]
A gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H9,
The effect elements include a cut-in announcement effect in which a predetermined image is displayed in front of the background image, an object announcement effect in which a predetermined object image is displayed in front of the background image, and a background image that changes in a manner different from normal. Background change notice effect that causes a predetermined character to perform a predetermined action; Lamp light emission effect that causes various lamps to emit light in a predetermined pattern; At least one of a ready-to-win performance of changing the remaining one pattern row in a state where two of the same symbols are stopped on at least one effective line, and a symbol stop performance of stopping a combination of predetermined symbols. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature H10, various effect elements can be used to give the player a sense of déjà vu. can draw attention to.

<Characteristic group I>
The feature group I is extracted from each embodiment described above or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from example 1 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature I1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
a collation means for collating whether or not the information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means matches with the predetermined privilege provision information;
a notification means for notifying the result of the collation of the special information for each game;
privilege giving means for giving a privilege to a player when the information included in the special information matches the privilege giving information as a result of the matching of the special information;
determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of information included in the special information;
an effect executing means for executing a game effect constituted by effect elements;
a control means for controlling the effect executing means;
an operation receiving means for receiving an input operation by a player;
In a gaming machine comprising
The control means is
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least one effect element is transferred to the effect execution means by the time the game round related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is completed. is to be run multiple times,
When an operation acceptance effect element including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player is selected as the effect element to be executed multiple times,
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the first operation acceptance effect element,
After causing the effect executing means to execute a first effect mode including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player, the operation mode of the input operation accepted by the operation accepting means satisfies a predetermined operation condition. When satisfied, cause the production execution means to execute a second production mode different from the first production mode,
After causing the first effect mode to be executed by the effect execution means, if the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition, the second effect mode is not executed by the effect execution means,
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element for the second and subsequent times,
When the second effect mode is executed when the effect execution means is caused to execute the operation acceptance effect element for the first time,
After causing the effect executing means to execute the first effect mode, the second effect mode is executed regardless of whether the operation mode satisfies the operation condition or not. Let the production execution means execute,
When the second effect mode is not executed when the effect execution means is caused to execute the operation acceptance effect element for the first time,
After causing the effect executing means to execute the first effect mode, the second effect mode is executed regardless of whether the operation mode satisfies the operation condition or not. A game machine characterized in that it does not cause a performance executing means to execute.

When the operation acceptance effect element is executed multiple times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player.

According to the feature I1, regardless of the operation mode of the input operation by the player, when the second effect mode is executed in the operation acceptance effect element for the first time, the second effect mode is executed in the operation acceptance effect element for the second and subsequent times. is executed, and on the other hand, when the second effect mode is not executed in the first operation acceptance effect element, the second effect mode is not executed in the second and subsequent operation acceptance effect elements. Even when the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the operation acceptance effect element to be executed the first time and the second time onward can be the same. Then, it is possible to give the player a feeling of déjà vu that the operation acceptance effect element of the same content has been executed a plurality of times.

A player who has recognized the sense of déjà vu has a sense of expectation that the sense of déjà vu has a special meaning, for example, that a privilege may be given. Furthermore, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the effect element with the same content is executed multiple times, the player anticipates that the effect element with the same content will be executed multiple times, and the effect element is executed. Every time it is executed, they always pay attention to the production element with a high sense of expectation. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the performance element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, and to suitably increase the degree of attention of the player to the performance element which is sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game. can be achieved.

[Feature I2]
The gaming machine according to feature I1,
The control means is
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the first operation acceptance effect element,
When the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within a predetermined time, the second effect execution means is caused to execute the second effect mode when the operation mode satisfies the operation condition,
As a control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element for the second and subsequent times,
A case where the second effect mode is executed when the effect execution means is caused to execute the operation acceptance effect element for the first time, and the first effect mode is executed by the effect execution means. later, when the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within the predetermined time, causing the second effect execution means to execute the second effect mode in response to the operation mode satisfying the operation condition;
A case where the second effect mode is executed when the effect execution means is caused to execute the operation acceptance effect element for the first time, and the first effect mode is executed by the effect execution means. Later, when the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition within the predetermined time, the second effect execution means is caused to execute the second effect mode with the elapse of the predetermined time as a trigger. A game machine characterized by

According to feature I2, when the operation mode of the input operation by the player satisfies a predetermined operation condition within a predetermined time, the second effect mode is triggered by the operation mode satisfying the predetermined operation condition. Since it is executed, the player can be actively involved in the operation acceptance effect element, and a sense of unity with the game can be provided to the player. Further, even if the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the second effect mode can be executed with the lapse of the predetermined time as a trigger. . Furthermore, even if the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the second effect mode is executed, so that the game can be given an unexpectedness. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature I3]
A gaming machine according to feature I1 or feature I2,
The control means is
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied and the operation acceptance effect element is selected as the effect element to be executed multiple times,
As a control for causing the performance execution means to execute the operation acceptance performance element a plurality of times, the performance execution means is not caused to display a time parameter indicating whether or not the input operation is acceptable within a time. Characteristic game machine.

The player may perform input operations at different timings for each of the operation acceptance effect elements that have been executed a plurality of times. Here, when the time parameter is displayed on the effect execution means, the player recognizes that the input operation is performed at different timings in each of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times, and the same content is displayed. Even if the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, there is a possibility that the player will not feel a sense of déjà vu for the operation acceptance effect element that has been executed a plurality of times.

According to the feature I3, when the effect executing means is caused to execute the operation acceptance effect element a plurality of times, the time parameter is not displayed on the effect executing means, so that the player is prevented from feeling a sense of déjà vu. can be done.

[Feature I4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I3, further comprising:
A changing means for changing the mode of the operation receiving means to a mode when the input operation by the player is accepted,
The control means is
When the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the operation condition and the second effect mode is executed by the effect execution means,
The changing means is controlled to change the mode of the operation receiving means to the mode of the operation receiving means when the input operation satisfying the operation condition is received from the player. game machine.

According to feature I4, since the mode of the operation receiving means changes, it is possible to add unexpectedness to the game. Furthermore, it is possible to make it persuasive that the second effect mode is executed even though the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition.

[Feature I5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I4,
The determination means determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied before the special information is subject to the collation,
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control means controls the effect executing means before the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is subject to the collation. and (ii) starting the execution of the performance element to be executed a plurality of times.

According to the feature I5, since the execution of the effect element to be executed multiple times is started before the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition becomes the target of collation, a plurality of game rounds is performed. It is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for the sense of deja vu over the entire period.

[Feature I6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I5,
After the operation acceptance effect element has been executed a plurality of times, the control means provides a suggestive effect to the effect execution means to suggest to the player that the operation acceptance effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times. A gaming machine characterized in that it is to be executed.

According to feature I6, since the effect executing means is caused to execute the suggestive effect, the player can be made to recognize that the effect element with the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element with the same content has been executed. It can convince the player that there is a special meaning to being executed multiple times.

<Characteristic group J>
The feature J group is extracted from each of the embodiments described above or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from example 2 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature J1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
a collation means for collating whether or not the information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means matches with the predetermined privilege provision information;
a notification means for notifying the result of the collation of the special information for each game;
privilege giving means for giving a privilege to a player when the information included in the special information matches the privilege giving information as a result of the matching of the special information;
determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of information included in the special information;
an effect executing means for executing a game effect constituted by effect elements;
a control means for controlling the effect executing means;
an operation receiving means for receiving an input operation by a player;
In a gaming machine comprising
The control means is
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least one effect element is transferred to the effect execution means by the time the game round related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is completed. is to be run multiple times,
When an operation acceptance effect element including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player is selected as the effect element to be executed multiple times,
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the first operation acceptance effect element,
After causing the effect executing means to execute a first effect mode including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player, the operation mode of the input operation accepted by the operation accepting means satisfies a predetermined operation condition. When satisfied, cause the production execution means to execute a second production mode different from the first production mode,
If the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition after the first effect mode is executed by the effect executing means, a third effect mode different from the first and second effect modes is executed. It is to be executed by the production execution means,
As a control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element for the second and subsequent times,
When the second effect mode is executed when the effect execution means is caused to execute the operation acceptance effect element for the first time,
After causing the effect executing means to execute the first effect mode, the second effect mode is executed regardless of whether the operation mode satisfies the operation condition or not. Let the production execution means execute,
When the third effect mode is executed when the effect executing means is caused to execute the first operation acceptance effect element,
After causing the effect executing means to execute the first effect mode, the third effect mode is executed regardless of whether the operation mode satisfies the operation condition or not. A game machine characterized in that it is to be executed by an effect executing means.

When the operation acceptance effect element is executed multiple times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player.

According to the feature J1, regardless of the operation mode of the input operation by the player, when the second effect mode is executed in the operation acceptance effect element for the first time, the second effect mode is executed in the operation acceptance effect element for the second and subsequent times. is executed, and on the other hand, when the third effect mode is executed in the first operation acceptance effect element, the third effect mode is executed in the second and subsequent operation acceptance effect elements, Even when the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the operation acceptance effect element to be executed the first time and the second time onward can be the same. Then, it is possible to give the player a feeling of déjà vu that the operation acceptance effect element of the same content has been executed a plurality of times.

A player who has recognized the sense of déjà vu has a sense of expectation that the sense of déjà vu has a special meaning, for example, that a privilege may be given. Furthermore, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the effect element with the same content is executed multiple times, the player anticipates that the effect element with the same content will be executed multiple times, and the effect element is executed. Every time it is executed, they always pay attention to the production element with a high sense of expectation. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the performance element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, and to suitably increase the degree of attention of the player to the performance element which is sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game. can be achieved.

[Feature J2]
The gaming machine according to feature J1,
The control means is
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the first operation acceptance effect element,
if the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within a predetermined period of time, the second effect execution means is caused to execute the second effect mode when the operation mode satisfies the operation condition;
If the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition within the predetermined time, the third effect execution means is caused to execute the third effect mode when the predetermined time has passed,
As a control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element for the second and subsequent times,
A case where the second effect mode is executed when the effect execution means is caused to execute the operation acceptance effect element for the first time, and the first effect mode is executed by the effect execution means. later, when the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within the predetermined time, the second effect execution means is caused to execute the second effect mode when the operation mode satisfies the operation condition;
A case where the second effect mode is executed when the effect execution means is caused to execute the operation acceptance effect element for the first time, and the first effect mode is executed by the effect execution means. later, when the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition within the predetermined time, causing the second effect execution means to execute the second effect mode when the predetermined time elapses;
A case where the third effect mode is executed when the effect execution means is caused to execute the operation acceptance effect element for the first time, and the first effect mode is executed by the effect execution means. later, if the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within the predetermined time, causing the performance execution means to execute the third effect mode with the fact that the operation mode has satisfied the operation condition as a trigger;
A case where the third effect mode is executed when the effect execution means is caused to execute the operation acceptance effect element for the first time, and the first effect mode is executed by the effect execution means. Later, when the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition within the predetermined time, the third effect execution means is caused to execute the third effect mode with the elapse of the predetermined time as a trigger. A game machine characterized by

According to the feature J2, when the operation mode of the input operation by the player satisfies a predetermined operation condition within a predetermined time, the second or third operation is triggered by the operation mode satisfying the predetermined operation condition. Since the effect mode is executed, the player can be actively involved in the operation acceptance effect element, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game. Further, even if the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the second or third performance mode is executed with the lapse of the predetermined time as a trigger. be able to. Furthermore, even if the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the second or third performance mode is executed, so that the game is given unexpectedness. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature J3]
A gaming machine according to feature J1 or feature J2,
The control means is
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied and the operation acceptance effect element is selected as the effect element to be executed multiple times,
As a control for causing the performance execution means to execute the operation acceptance performance element a plurality of times, the performance execution means is not caused to display a time parameter indicating whether or not the input operation is acceptable within a time. Characteristic game machine.

The player may perform input operations at different timings for each of the operation acceptance effect elements that have been executed a plurality of times. Here, when the time parameter is displayed on the effect execution means, the player recognizes that the input operation is performed at different timings in each of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times, and the same content is displayed. Even if the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, there is a possibility that the player will not feel a sense of déjà vu for the operation acceptance effect element that has been executed a plurality of times.

According to the feature J3, when the effect executing means is caused to execute the operation acceptance effect element a plurality of times, the time parameter is not displayed on the effect executing means, thereby suppressing the player's feeling of déjà vu. can be done.

[Feature J4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J3, further comprising:
A changing means for changing the mode of the operation receiving means to a mode when the input operation by the player is accepted,
The control means is
When the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the operation condition and the second effect mode is executed by the effect execution means,
The changing means is controlled to change the mode of the operation receiving means to the mode of the operation receiving means when the input operation satisfying the operation condition is received from the player. game machine.

According to feature J4, since the mode of the operation receiving means changes, it is possible to add unexpectedness to the game, and even if the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition, the first Persuasiveness can be imparted to the execution of the second presentation mode.

[Feature J5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J4,
The determination means determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied before the special information is subject to the collation,
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control means controls the effect executing means before the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is subject to the collation. and (ii) starting the execution of the performance element to be executed a plurality of times.

According to the feature J5, since the execution of the effect element to be executed multiple times is started before the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition becomes the target of collation, a plurality of game rounds is performed. It is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for the sense of deja vu over the entire period.
[Feature J6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J5,
After the operation acceptance effect element has been executed a plurality of times, the control means provides a suggestive effect to the effect execution means to suggest to the player that the operation acceptance effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times. A gaming machine characterized in that it is to be executed.

According to the feature J6, since the effect executing means is caused to execute the suggestive effect, the player can be made to recognize that the effect element with the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element with the same content has been executed. It can convince the player that there is a special meaning to being executed multiple times.

<Characteristic group K>
The feature K group is extracted from each of the embodiments described above or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from example 3 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature K1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
a collation means for collating whether or not the information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means matches with the predetermined privilege provision information;
a notification means for notifying the result of the collation of the special information for each game;
privilege giving means for giving a privilege to a player when the information included in the special information matches the privilege giving information as a result of the matching of the special information;
determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of information included in the special information;
an effect executing means for executing a game effect constituted by effect elements;
a control means for controlling the effect executing means;
an operation receiving means for receiving an input operation by a player;
In a gaming machine comprising
The control means is
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least one effect element is transferred to the effect execution means by the time the game round related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is completed. is to be run multiple times,
When an operation acceptance effect element including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player is selected as the effect element to be executed multiple times,
As a control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element,
After causing the effect executing means to execute a first effect mode including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player, the operation mode of the input operation accepted by the operation accepting means satisfies a predetermined operation condition. A gaming machine characterized in that it causes the performance execution means to execute a second performance mode different from the first performance mode in either case of satisfaction or non-satisfaction.

When the operation acceptance effect element is executed multiple times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player.

According to the feature K1, the second effect mode is executed after the first effect mode is executed regardless of the operation mode of the input operation by the player. Even so, the contents of the operation acceptance effect element to be executed for the first time and for the second time and thereafter can be the same.
Then, it is possible to give the player a sense of déjà vu that the operation acceptance effect element of the same content has been executed a plurality of times.

A player who has recognized the sense of déjà vu has a sense of expectation that the sense of déjà vu has a special meaning, for example, that a privilege may be given. Furthermore, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the effect element with the same content is executed multiple times, the player anticipates that the effect element with the same content will be executed multiple times, and the effect element is executed. Every time it is executed, they always pay attention to the production element with a high sense of expectation. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the performance element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, and to suitably increase the degree of attention of the player to the performance element which is sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game. can be achieved.

[Feature K2]
The gaming machine according to feature K1,
The control means is
As a control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element,
when the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within a predetermined time, the second effect execution means is caused to execute the second effect mode when the operation mode satisfies the operation condition;
When the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition within the predetermined time, the second effect execution means is caused to execute the second effect mode with the elapse of the predetermined time as a trigger. Amusement machine.

According to the characteristic K2, when the operation mode of the input operation by the player satisfies a predetermined operation condition within a predetermined time, the second effect mode is triggered by the operation mode satisfying the predetermined operation condition. Since it is executed, the player can be actively involved in the operation acceptance effect element, and a sense of unity with the game can be provided to the player. Further, even if the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the second effect mode can be executed with the lapse of the predetermined time as a trigger. . Furthermore, even if the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the second effect mode is executed, so that the game can be given an unexpectedness. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature K3]
A gaming machine according to feature K1 or feature K2,
The control means is
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied and the operation acceptance effect element is selected as the effect element to be executed multiple times,
As a control for causing the performance execution means to execute the operation acceptance performance element a plurality of times, the performance execution means is not caused to display a time parameter indicating whether or not the input operation is acceptable within a time. Characteristic game machine.

The player may perform input operations at different timings for each of the operation acceptance effect elements that have been executed a plurality of times. Here, when the time parameter is displayed on the effect execution means, the player recognizes that the input operation is performed at different timings in each of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times, and the same content is displayed. Even if the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, there is a possibility that the player will not feel a sense of déjà vu for the operation acceptance effect element that has been executed a plurality of times.

According to the feature K3, when the effect executing means is caused to execute the operation acceptance effect element a plurality of times, the time parameter is not displayed on the effect executing means, so that the player is prevented from feeling a sense of déjà vu. can be done.

[Feature K4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K3, further comprising:
A changing means for changing the mode of the operation receiving means to a mode when the input operation by the player is accepted,
The control means is
When the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the operation condition and the second effect mode is executed by the effect execution means,
The changing means is controlled to change the mode of the operation receiving means to the mode of the operation receiving means when the input operation satisfying the operation condition is received from the player. game machine.

According to the characteristic K4, since the mode of the operation receiving means changes, it is possible to add unexpectedness to the game, and the first mode is determined even if the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition. Persuasiveness can be imparted to the execution of the second presentation mode.

[Feature K5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K4,
The determination means determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied before the special information is subject to the collation,
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control means controls the effect executing means before the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is subject to the collation. and (ii) starting the execution of the performance element to be executed a plurality of times.

According to the feature K5, since the execution of the effect element to be executed multiple times is started before the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is to be collated, the performance element is executed multiple times. It is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for the sense of deja vu over the entire period.
[Feature K6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K5,
After the operation acceptance effect element has been executed a plurality of times, the control means provides a suggestive effect to the effect execution means to suggest to the player that the operation acceptance effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times. A gaming machine characterized in that it is to be executed.

According to the feature K6, since the effect executing means is caused to execute the suggestive effect, the player can be made to recognize that the effect element with the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element with the same content has been executed. It can convince the player that there is a special meaning to being executed multiple times.

<Characteristic group L>
The feature group L is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from example 4 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature L1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
a collation means for collating whether or not the information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means matches with the predetermined privilege provision information;
a notification means for notifying the result of the collation of the special information for each game;
privilege giving means for giving a privilege to a player when the information included in the special information matches the privilege giving information as a result of the matching of the special information;
determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of information included in the special information;
an effect executing means for executing a game effect constituted by effect elements;
a control means for controlling the effect executing means;
an operation receiving means for receiving an input operation by a player;
In a gaming machine comprising
The control means is
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least one effect element is transferred to the effect execution means by the time the game round related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is completed. is to be run multiple times,
When an operation acceptance effect element including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player is selected as the effect element to be executed multiple times,
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the first operation acceptance effect element,
A selection screen including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player and allowing the player to select one option from among a plurality of options, wherein the input operation accepted by the operation accepting means. causing the effect executing means to display a selection screen in which a selection state is switched each time a state satisfies a predetermined operation condition;
causing the effect execution means to execute the effect mode corresponding to the selected option at the timing when the predetermined time has passed,
As a control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element for the second and subsequent times,
causing the effect executing means to display the same selection screen as the selection screen displayed for the first time;
A game machine characterized in that, at the timing when the predetermined time has elapsed, the effect executing means is caused to execute the same effect mode as the effect mode corresponding to the option selected for the first time.

When the operation acceptance effect element is executed multiple times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player.

According to the feature L1, regardless of the operation mode of the input operation by the player, the same effect mode as the effect mode executed in the first operation acceptance effect element is performed in the operation acceptance effect element executed for the second and subsequent times. Since it is executed, even if the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the operation acceptance effect element to be executed for the first time and after the second time can be the same. Then, it is possible to give the player a feeling of déjà vu that the operation acceptance effect element of the same content has been executed a plurality of times.

A player who has recognized the sense of déjà vu has a sense of expectation that the sense of déjà vu has a special meaning, for example, that a privilege may be given. Furthermore, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the effect element with the same content is executed multiple times, the player anticipates that the effect element with the same content will be executed multiple times, and the effect element is executed. Every time it is executed, they always pay attention to the production element with a high sense of expectation. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the performance element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, and to suitably increase the degree of attention of the player to the performance element which is sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game. can be achieved.

[Feature L2]
The gaming machine according to feature L1,
The game machine, wherein the selection screen has the same aspect before and after the selection state is switched.

According to the feature L2, when the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, the same effect mode is executed from the same mode selection screen, so that a stronger sense of déjà vu is given to the player. can be done.

[Feature L3]
A gaming machine according to feature L1 or feature L2,
The control means is
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied and the operation acceptance effect element is selected as the effect element to be executed multiple times,
As a control for causing the performance execution means to execute the operation acceptance performance element a plurality of times, the performance execution means is not caused to display a time parameter indicating whether or not the input operation is acceptable within a time. Characteristic game machine.

The player may perform input operations at different timings for each of the operation acceptance effect elements that have been executed a plurality of times. Here, when the time parameter is displayed on the effect execution means, the player recognizes that the input operation is performed at different timings in each of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times, and the same content is displayed. Even if the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, there is a possibility that the player will not feel a sense of déjà vu for the operation acceptance effect element that has been executed a plurality of times.

According to the feature L3, when the effect executing means is caused to execute the operation acceptance effect element a plurality of times, the time parameter is not displayed on the effect executing means, so that the player is prevented from feeling a sense of déjà vu. can be done.

[Feature L4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L3,
The determination means determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied before the special information is subject to the collation,
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control means controls the effect executing means before the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is subject to the collation. and (ii) starting the execution of the performance element to be executed a plurality of times.

According to the feature L4, since execution of the effect element to be executed a plurality of times is started before the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is to be collated, a plurality of game rounds is performed. It is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for the sense of deja vu over the entire period.

[Feature L5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L4,
After the operation acceptance effect element has been executed a plurality of times, the control means provides a suggestive effect to the effect execution means to suggest to the player that the operation acceptance effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times. A gaming machine characterized in that it is to be executed.

According to the feature L5, since the effect executing means is caused to execute the suggestive effect, the player can be made to recognize that the effect element with the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element with the same content is executed. It can convince the player that there is a special meaning to being executed multiple times.

<Characteristic group M>
The feature group M is extracted from each embodiment described above or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from example 5 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature M1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
a collation means for collating whether or not the information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means matches with the predetermined privilege provision information;
a notification means for notifying the result of the collation of the special information for each game;
privilege giving means for giving a privilege to a player when the information included in the special information matches the privilege giving information as a result of the matching of the special information;
determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of information included in the special information;
an effect executing means for executing a game effect constituted by effect elements;
a control means for controlling the effect executing means;
an operation receiving means for receiving an input operation by a player;
In a gaming machine comprising
The control means is
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least one effect element is transferred to the effect execution means by the time the game round related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is completed. is to be run multiple times,
When an operation acceptance effect element including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player is selected as the effect element to be executed multiple times,
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the first operation acceptance effect element,
A selection screen including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player and allowing the player to select one performance mode from among a plurality of performance modes, wherein the selection state is switched with the lapse of time. is displayed on the effect executing means,
One rendering mode is selected from the plurality of rendering modes regardless of whether the operation mode of the input operation accepted by the operation receiving means satisfies or does not satisfy a predetermined operation condition. and causing the selected effect mode to be executed by the effect execution means,
As a control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element for the second and subsequent times,
causing the effect executing means to display the same selection screen as the selection screen displayed for the first time;
Regardless of whether the operation mode satisfies the operation condition or not, the same performance mode as the first selected performance mode is selected, and the selected performance mode is set. A gaming machine characterized in that the mode is executed by the performance executing means.

When the operation acceptance effect element is executed multiple times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player.

According to the feature M1, regardless of the operation mode of the input operation by the player, in the operation acceptance effect element executed for the second time and thereafter, the same effect mode as the effect mode executed in the operation acceptance effect element for the first time is performed. Since it is selected and executed, even when the operation acceptance performance element is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the operation acceptance performance element to be executed for the first time and after the second time can be the same. Then, it is possible to give the player a feeling of déjà vu that the operation acceptance effect element of the same content has been executed a plurality of times.

A player who has recognized the sense of déjà vu has a sense of expectation that the sense of déjà vu has a special meaning, for example, that a privilege may be given. Furthermore, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the effect element with the same content is executed multiple times, the player anticipates that the effect element with the same content will be executed multiple times, and the effect element is executed. Every time it is executed, they always pay attention to the production element with a high sense of expectation. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the performance element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, and to suitably increase the degree of attention of the player to the performance element which is sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game. can be achieved.

[Feature M2]
The gaming machine according to feature M1,
The control means is
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the first operation acceptance effect element,
When the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within a predetermined time, one performance mode is selected from the plurality of performance modes triggered by the operation mode satisfying the operation condition. ,
When the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition within the predetermined time, one performance mode is selected from the plurality of performance modes triggered by the passage of the predetermined time. and
As a control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element for the second and subsequent times,
When the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within the predetermined time, the same performance mode as the first selected performance mode is selected with the fact that the operation mode satisfies the operation condition as a trigger. state and
When the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition within the predetermined time, the same performance mode as the first selected performance mode is selected with the elapse of the predetermined time as a trigger. A gaming machine characterized by being a thing.

According to the characteristic M2, when the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within a predetermined time, one of the plurality of presentation modes is selected when the operation mode satisfies the operation condition. Since it is in the selected state, the player can be actively involved in the operation acceptance effect element, and a sense of unity with the game can be provided to the player. In addition, even if the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, one of the plurality of performance modes is triggered by the lapse of the predetermined time. can be selected.

[Feature M3]
A gaming machine according to feature M1 or feature M2,
The control means is
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied and the operation acceptance effect element is selected as the effect element to be executed multiple times,
As a control for causing the performance execution means to execute the operation acceptance performance element a plurality of times, the performance execution means is not caused to display a time parameter indicating whether or not the input operation is acceptable within a time. Characteristic game machine.

The player may perform input operations at different timings for each of the operation acceptance effect elements that have been executed a plurality of times. Here, when the time parameter is displayed on the effect execution means, the player recognizes that the input operation is performed at different timings in each of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times, and the same content is displayed. Even if the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, there is a possibility that the player will not feel a sense of déjà vu for the operation acceptance effect element that has been executed a plurality of times.

According to the feature M3, when the effect executing means is caused to execute the operation acceptance effect element a plurality of times, the time parameter is not displayed on the effect executing means, so that the player is prevented from feeling a sense of déjà vu. can be done.

[Feature M4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M3,
The determination means determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied before the special information is subject to the collation,
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control means controls the effect executing means before the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is subject to the collation. and (ii) starting the execution of the performance element to be executed a plurality of times.

According to the feature M4, since the execution of the effect element to be executed multiple times is started before the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is to be collated, the performance element is executed multiple times. It is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for the sense of deja vu over the entire period.

[Feature M5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M4,
After the operation acceptance effect element has been executed a plurality of times, the control means provides a suggestive effect to the effect execution means to suggest to the player that the operation acceptance effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times. A gaming machine characterized in that it is to be executed.

According to the feature M5, since the effect executing means is caused to execute the suggestive effect, the player can be made to recognize that the effect element with the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element with the same content is executed. It can convince the player that there is a special meaning to being executed multiple times.

<Characteristic N group>
The N groups of features are extracted from each of the above-described embodiments or combinations thereof, and are mainly extracted from example 6 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature N1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
a collation means for collating whether or not the information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means matches with the predetermined privilege provision information;
a notification means for notifying the result of the collation of the special information for each game;
privilege giving means for giving a privilege to a player when the information included in the special information matches the privilege giving information as a result of the matching of the special information;
determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of information included in the special information;
an effect executing means for executing a game effect constituted by effect elements;
a control means for controlling the effect executing means;
an operation receiving means for receiving an input operation by a player;
In a gaming machine comprising
The control means is
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least one effect element is transferred to the effect execution means by the time the game round related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is completed. is to be run multiple times,
When an operation acceptance effect element including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player is selected as the effect element to be executed multiple times,
As a control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element,
The effect execution means executes a first effect mode for causing the effect execution means to display a predetermined parameter including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player and changing in a certain direction with the passage of time. let
A gaming machine characterized in that, after the parameter satisfies a predetermined parameter condition, the second effect mode different from the first effect mode is executed by the effect executing means.

When the operation acceptance effect element is executed multiple times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player.

According to feature N1, after the first effect mode is executed, the parameters satisfy the predetermined parameter conditions regardless of the operation mode of the input operation by the player, and the second effect mode is executed. Therefore, even when the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the operation acceptance effect element executed the first time and the second time and thereafter can be the same. Then, it is possible to give the player a feeling of déjà vu that the operation acceptance effect element of the same content has been executed a plurality of times.

A player who has recognized the sense of déjà vu has a sense of expectation that the sense of déjà vu has a special meaning, for example, that a privilege may be given. Furthermore, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the effect element with the same content is executed multiple times, the player anticipates that the effect element with the same content will be executed multiple times, and the effect element is executed. Every time it is executed, they always pay attention to the production element with a high sense of expectation. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the performance element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, and to suitably increase the degree of attention of the player to the performance element which is sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game. can be achieved.

[Feature N2]
The gaming machine according to feature N1,
The control means causes the effect execution means to execute speed change processing for changing the change speed of the parameter when the operation mode of the input operation accepted by the operation acceptance means satisfies a predetermined operation condition. A game machine characterized by being.

According to feature N2, the player operates the operation receiving means so that the operation mode of the input operation satisfies a predetermined operation condition in order to change the parameter change speed. Therefore, the player can be actively involved in the operation acceptance effect element, and a sense of unity with the game can be provided to the player.

[Feature N3]
The gaming machine according to feature N2,
When the control means changes the parameter in a decreasing direction over time, the rate of decrease in the parameter decreases as the number of input operations received by the operation receiving means per unit time increases. (2) a game machine characterized in that the speed change processing is executed by the effect executing means;

According to the characteristic N3, the player operates the operation receiving means so as to increase the number of input operations per unit time in order to decrease the speed of parameter decrease. Therefore, the player can be actively involved in the operation acceptance effect element, and a sense of unity with the game can be provided to the player.

[Feature N4]
The gaming machine according to feature N2,
When the control means changes the parameter to increase with the lapse of time, the rate of increase in the parameter increases as the number of input operations received by the operation receiving means per unit time increases. (2) a game machine characterized in that the speed changing process is executed by the effect executing means;

According to feature N4, the player operates the operation receiving means so as to increase the number of input operations per unit time in order to increase the speed of parameter increase. Therefore, the player can be actively involved in the operation acceptance effect element, and a sense of unity with the game can be provided to the player.

[Feature N5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N4,
The control means is
storing a process of changing the parameter when causing the effect executing means to execute the first operation acceptance effect element;
The game machine is characterized in that, when causing the performance execution means to execute the operation acceptance performance element for the second and subsequent times, the performance execution means reproduces the process of changing the stored parameters.

According to the feature N5, the process of changing the parameters is the same in the operation acceptance effect elements that are executed a plurality of times, so it is possible to give the player a stronger sense of déjà vu.

[Feature N6]
The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N5, further comprising:
A changing means for changing the mode of the operation receiving means to a mode when the input operation by the player is accepted,
The control means is
storing a change process of the mode of the operation receiving means when the input operation is accepted when causing the effect executing means to execute the first operation acceptance effect element;
A game characterized in that, when causing the performance execution means to execute the operation acceptance performance element for the second and subsequent times, the process of changing the stored mode of the operation acceptance means is reproduced by the changing means. machine.

According to feature N6, since the mode of the operation receiving means changes, it is possible to add unexpectedness to the game. Furthermore, in the second and subsequent operation acceptance performance elements, the process of changing the mode of the operation acceptance means in the first operation acceptance performance element is reproduced, so that a stronger sense of deja vu can be given to the player.

[Feature N7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N6,
The determination means determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied before the special information is subject to the collation,
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control means controls the effect executing means before the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is subject to the collation. and (ii) starting the execution of the performance element to be executed a plurality of times.

According to the feature N7, since the execution of the effect element to be executed multiple times is started before the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition becomes the target of collation, a plurality of game rounds is performed. It is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for the sense of deja vu over the entire period.

[Feature N8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N7,
After the operation acceptance effect element has been executed a plurality of times, the control means provides a suggestive effect to the effect execution means to suggest to the player that the operation acceptance effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times. A gaming machine characterized in that it is to be executed.

According to feature N8, since the effect executing means is caused to execute the suggestive effect, the player can be made to recognize that the effect element with the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element with the same content has been executed. It can convince the player that there is a special meaning to being executed multiple times.

<Characteristic group O>
The feature group O is extracted from each embodiment described above or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from example 7 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature O1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
a collation means for collating whether or not the information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means matches with the predetermined privilege provision information;
a notification means for notifying the result of the collation of the special information for each game;
privilege giving means for giving a privilege to a player when the information included in the special information matches the privilege giving information as a result of the matching of the special information;
determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of information included in the special information;
an effect executing means for executing a game effect constituted by effect elements;
a control means for controlling the effect executing means;
an operation receiving means for receiving an input operation by a player;
In a gaming machine comprising
The control means is
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least one effect element is transferred to the effect execution means by the time the game round related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is completed. is to be run multiple times,
When an operation acceptance effect element including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player is selected as the effect element to be executed multiple times,
As a control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element,
After causing the effect executing means to execute a first effect mode including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player, the operation mode of the input operation accepted by the operation accepting means satisfies a predetermined operation condition. When satisfied, cause the production execution means to execute a second production mode different from the first production mode,
After causing the first effect mode to be executed by the effect execution means, if the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition, the second effect mode is not executed by the effect execution means,
When the second effect mode is executed in all of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times, or the second effect mode is executed even once in all of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times. If not executed,
A gaming machine characterized in that the performance executing means is caused to execute a suggestive performance suggesting to the player that the operation acceptance performance element has been executed a plurality of times with the same content.

When the operation acceptance effect element is executed multiple times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player.

According to feature O1, when the player performs the same input operation in each of the operation acceptance effect elements that have been executed a plurality of times, the operation acceptance effect elements are executed a plurality of times with the same contents. It is possible to give the player a feeling of déjà vu (déjà vu) that the effect element of has been executed a plurality of times. Then, when the operation acceptance effect element with the same content is executed a plurality of times, the suggestive effect is executed by the effect executing means, so that the player is notified that the effect element with the same content has been executed a plurality of times. It is possible to make the player recognize that the operation acceptance effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times has a special meaning.

Furthermore, when the player experiences the suggestive effect after the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times with the same content, the player expects the suggestive effect to be executed, and each time the operation acceptance effect element is executed, By performing the same input operation, the operation receiving means is operated so that the operation reception performance mode is executed with the same content, and the occurrence of the suggestive performance is expected. Therefore, it is possible to preferably increase the player's attention to the operation acceptance effect elements that are sequentially executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature O2]
The gaming machine according to feature O1,
When the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within a predetermined time, the control means causes the effect execution means to execute the second effect mode when the operation mode satisfies the operation condition. A gaming machine characterized in that it is a machine that allows

According to feature O2, when the operation mode of the input operation by the player satisfies a predetermined operation condition within a predetermined time, the second effect mode is triggered by the operation mode satisfying the predetermined operation condition. Since it is executed, the player can be actively involved in the operation acceptance effect element, and a sense of unity with the game can be provided to the player.

[Feature O3]
A gaming machine according to feature O1 or feature O2,
The control means is
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied and the operation acceptance effect element is selected as the effect element to be executed multiple times,
As a control for causing the performance execution means to execute the operation acceptance performance element a plurality of times, the performance execution means is not caused to display a time parameter indicating whether or not the input operation is acceptable within a time. Characteristic game machine.

The player may perform input operations at different timings for each of the operation acceptance effect elements that have been executed a plurality of times. Here, when the time parameter is displayed on the effect execution means, the player recognizes that the input operation is performed at different timings in each of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times. Even if the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, there is a possibility that the player will not feel a sense of déjà vu for the operation acceptance effect element that has been executed a plurality of times.

According to the feature O3, when the effect executing means is caused to execute the operation acceptance effect element a plurality of times, the time parameter is not displayed on the effect executing means, so that the player is prevented from feeling a sense of déjà vu. can be done.

[Feature O4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O3,
The determination means determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied before the special information is subject to the collation,
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control means controls the effect executing means before the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is subject to the collation. and (ii) starting the execution of the performance element to be executed a plurality of times.

According to the feature O4, since the performance element to be executed a plurality of times is started before the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is to be collated, a plurality of game rounds are performed. It is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for the sense of deja vu over the entire period.

<Characteristic P group>
The feature P group is extracted from each embodiment described above or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from example 8 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature P1]
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
a collation means for collating whether or not the information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means matches with the predetermined privilege provision information;
a notification means for notifying the result of the collation of the special information for each game;
privilege giving means for giving a privilege to a player when the information included in the special information matches the privilege giving information as a result of the matching of the special information;
determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of information included in the special information;
an effect executing means for executing a game effect constituted by effect elements;
a control means for controlling the effect executing means;
an operation receiving means for receiving an input operation by a player;
In a gaming machine comprising
The control means is
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least one effect element is transferred to the effect execution means by the time the game round related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is completed. is to be run multiple times,
When an operation acceptance effect element including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player is selected as the effect element to be executed multiple times,
As a control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element,
After causing the effect executing means to execute a first effect mode including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player, the operation mode of the input operation accepted by the operation accepting means satisfies a predetermined operation condition. When satisfied, cause the production execution means to execute a second production mode different from the first production mode,
A third effect mode different from the first and second effect modes when the operation mode does not satisfy a predetermined operation condition after causing the effect execution means to execute the first effect mode. is to be executed by the production execution means,
When the second effect mode is executed in all of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times, or when the third effect mode is executed in all of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times in case of,
A gaming machine characterized in that the performance executing means is caused to execute a suggestive performance suggesting to the player that the operation acceptance performance element has been executed a plurality of times with the same content.

When the operation acceptance effect element is executed multiple times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player.

According to the feature P1, when the player performs the same input operation in each of the operation acceptance effect elements that have been executed a plurality of times, the operation acceptance effect elements are executed a plurality of times with the same contents. It is possible to give the player a feeling of déjà vu (déjà vu) that the effect element of has been executed a plurality of times. Then, when the operation acceptance effect element with the same content is executed a plurality of times, the suggestive effect is executed by the effect executing means, so that the player is notified that the effect element with the same content has been executed a plurality of times. It is possible to make the player recognize that the operation acceptance effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times has a special meaning.

Furthermore, when the player experiences the suggestive effect after the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times with the same content, the player expects the suggestive effect to be executed, and each time the operation acceptance effect element is executed, By performing the same input operation, the operation receiving means is operated so that the operation reception performance mode is executed with the same content, and the occurrence of the suggestive performance is expected.
Therefore, it is possible to preferably increase the player's attention to the operation acceptance effect elements that are sequentially executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature P2]
The gaming machine according to feature P1,
The control means is
when the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within a predetermined time, the second effect execution means is caused to execute the second effect mode when the operation mode satisfies the operation condition;
When the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition within the predetermined time, the third effect execution means is caused to execute the third effect mode with the lapse of the predetermined time as a trigger. Amusement machine.

According to the feature P2, when the operation mode of the input operation by the player satisfies a predetermined operation condition within a predetermined time, the second performance mode is triggered by the operation mode satisfying the predetermined operation condition. Since it is executed, the player can be actively involved in the operation acceptance effect element, and a sense of unity with the game can be provided to the player. Further, even if the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the third performance mode can be executed with the lapse of the predetermined time as a trigger. . Furthermore, even if the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the third effect mode is executed, so that the game can be given unexpectedness. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature P3]
A gaming machine according to feature P1 or feature P2,
The control means is
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied and the operation acceptance effect element is selected as the effect element to be executed multiple times,
As the control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element a plurality of times, the effect execution means is not caused to display a time parameter indicating whether or not the input operation is acceptable within the time. Characteristic game machine.

The player may perform input operations at different timings for each of the operation acceptance effect elements that have been executed a plurality of times. Here, when the time parameter is displayed on the effect execution means, the player recognizes that the input operation is performed at different timings in each of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times, and the same content is displayed. Even if the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, there is a possibility that the player will not feel a sense of déjà vu for the operation acceptance effect element that has been executed a plurality of times.

According to the feature P3, when the effect executing means is caused to execute the operation acceptance effect element a plurality of times, the time parameter is not displayed on the effect executing means, so that the player is prevented from feeling a sense of déjà vu. can be done.

[Feature P4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features P1 to P3,
The determination means determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied before the special information is subject to the collation,
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control means controls the effect executing means before the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is subject to the collation. and (ii) starting the execution of the performance element to be executed a plurality of times.

According to the feature P4, since the execution of the effect element to be executed multiple times is started before the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is to be collated, the performance element is executed multiple times. It is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for the sense of deja vu over the entire period.

<Characteristic Q group>
The feature Q group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth and ninth embodiments.

[Feature Q1]
A shooting means for shooting game balls (game ball shooting mechanism 81);
A ball-entering portion (second starting port 208a in the eighth embodiment, second starting port 308a in the ninth embodiment) into which the fired game ball can enter;
a passing portion through which the fired game ball can pass (through gate 206 in the eighth embodiment, through gate 306 in the ninth embodiment);
The state of the ball-entering portion is divided into a first state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the ball-entering portion, and a state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the ball-entering portion. State transition means (the opening/closing door 208b in the eighth embodiment, the opening/closing door 308b in the ninth embodiment) for transitioning between the second state which is the state;
Distributing means (alternate distribution mechanism 204 in the eighth embodiment, first alternate distribution mechanism 304 and second alternate distribution mechanism 305 in the ninth embodiment) for distributing the reached game balls to a plurality of paths,
a first route (route R1 in the eighth embodiment, route R11 in the ninth embodiment) configured to allow the distributed game balls to pass through the passing portion;
a second route (route R2 in the eighth embodiment, route R2 and route R12 in the ninth embodiment) configured so that the distributed game balls cannot pass through the passing portion;
with
The sorting means is
While distributing the arrived game balls to the first route,
Distributing the game ball that arrived after the game ball distributed to the first path to the second path,
A game ball that arrives after the game ball that is distributed to the second path is distributed to the first path,
The first path and the second path are arranged so that the distributed game ball can enter the ball-entering section when the ball-entering section is in the second state. A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature Q1, the game ball distributed to the first path (hereinafter also referred to as the first game ball) can pass through the passing portion, and the ball entering portion is in the second state. In some cases, it is possible to enter the ball into the ball entering section. On the other hand, the game ball that has arrived after the first game ball (hereinafter also referred to as the second game ball) is distributed to the second path, so it is impossible to pass through the passing part and the ball enters. When the part is in the second state, it is possible to enter the ball into the ball-entering part. That is, of the first and second game balls, only the first game ball can pass through the passing portion, and each of the first and second game balls enters the ball entering portion. Whether or not depends on whether or not the ball-entering portion is in the second state at the timing when the first and second game balls respectively reach the ball-entering portion. Therefore, of the two game balls (the first game ball and the second game ball), while the number of game balls that may pass through the passing portion is one, the game that enters the ball entering portion Since the number of balls can be changed depending on the state of the ball-entering portion, it is possible to diversify the game.

For example, the length of time the ball-entering portion maintains the second state after transitioning from the first state to the second state, the number of times the ball-entering portion transitions from the first state to the second state, When the configuration is such that the timing at which the ball-entering portion transitions from the first state to the second state is controlled differently for each mode, the ball-entering portion of the first and second game balls Since the number of game balls that enter each mode can be made different for each mode, it is possible to diversify the game.

[Feature Q2]
The gaming machine according to feature Q1,
A lottery executing means (processing shown in step S4509 in FIG. 76) for executing a lottery triggered by the game ball passing through the passing portion;
Control means (processing shown in FIGS. 76, 77, and 83) for controlling the state transition means based on the result of the lottery;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature Q2, the control means controls the state transition means based on the result of the lottery executed when the game ball has passed through the passing portion. Since the second game ball does not pass through the passing portion, the control means controls the first and second game balls in a situation in which the game balls are continuously shot at predetermined intervals by the shooting means at a predetermined firing intensity. Whether the state of the ball-entering portion at the timing when each reaches the ball-entering portion is the first state or the second state, that is, each of the first and second game balls is placed in the ball-entering portion Whether or not to enter the game ball is determined by the result of the lottery executed when the first game ball has passed through the passing portion and the mode of control of the state transition means by the control means. Therefore, one game ball (first game ball) controls whether or not each of the two game balls (first game ball and second game ball) enters the ball entry portion. It can be realized by a series of controls triggered by passing through the passing section.

[Feature Q3]
The gaming machine according to feature Q2,
The control means has a plurality of control modes (first and second high-frequency support modes in the eighth embodiment, first to third high-frequency support modes in the ninth embodiment) for controlling the state transition means. and
For each control mode, the length of time that the ball-entering portion maintains the second state after transitioning from the first state to the second state, and the length of time after the game ball passes through the passing portion the length of time until the ball-entering portion starts transitioning from the first state to the second state, the number of times the ball-entering portion transitions from the first state to the second state, A gaming machine, wherein at least one of timings at which the ball-entering portion transitions from the first state to the second state is different.

According to feature Q3, the number of game balls that enter the ball entry portion of the two game balls (the first game ball and the second game ball) can be made different for each control mode. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the game.

[Feature Q4]
A gaming machine according to feature Q2 or feature Q3,
A display means (normal figure unit 38) for displaying the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means,
The time from when the game ball passes through the passing portion until the result of the lottery executed when the game ball passes through the passing portion is displayed by the display means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the time is set to be shorter than the time from when the game ball passes through the passage portion to when the game ball reaches the ball entry portion.

According to the feature Q4, the display means can display the result of the lottery before the timing when the first game ball that has triggered the lottery by passing through the passage portion reaches the ball entry portion. . After the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means, the control means starts control based on the result of the lottery. Control based on the result of the lottery can be started prior to the timing of reaching.

For example, the control means can realize a control mode in which the ball entering portion is in the second state at the timing when the first game ball that has passed through the passage portion reaches the ball entering portion.

[Feature Q5]
The gaming machine according to feature Q4,
After the game ball has passed through the passing portion, the display means displays the result of the lottery executed when the game ball has passed through the passing portion, and the ball entering portion is in the second state. The time to start the transition to
The gaming machine is characterized in that the time is set to be shorter than the time from when the game ball passes through the passage portion to when the game ball reaches the ball entry portion.

According to feature Q5, the control means can realize a control mode in which the ball-entering section is in the second state at the timing when the first game ball that has passed through the passing section reaches the ball-entering section. Become.

[Feature Q6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features Q2 to Q5,
The control means has a plurality of control modes for controlling the state transition means, and as the plurality of control modes,
In a situation in which game balls are continuously shot at predetermined intervals by the shooting means at a predetermined firing intensity, the game balls distributed to the first path and passing through the passing section reach the ball entering section. The ball-entering portion is in the second state at the timing, and the ball-entering portion is in the first state at the timing when the game ball distributed to the second path reaches the ball-entering portion. control mode (first high-frequency support mode in the eighth embodiment),
In a situation in which game balls are continuously shot at predetermined intervals by the shooting means at a predetermined firing intensity, the game balls distributed to the first path and passing through the passing section reach the ball entering section. The ball-entering portion is in the second state at the timing, and the ball-entering portion is in the second state at the timing when the game ball distributed to the second path reaches the ball-entering portion. control mode (second high-frequency support mode in the eighth embodiment),
A game machine characterized by having

According to the feature Q6, the first game ball enters the ball entry portion, but the second game ball does not enter the ball entry portion; Since it is possible to realize the second control mode in which both game balls enter the ball entry portion, it is possible to add inflection to the game and improve the interest of the game.

[Feature Q7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features Q1 to Q5,
The sorting means is
While distributing the reached one game ball to the first route (route R11 in the ninth embodiment),
Distribute N (where N is an integer equal to or greater than 2) game balls that arrive after the game balls distributed to the first route to the second route (route R2 and route R12 in the ninth embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized in that one game ball arriving after N game balls distributed to the second path is distributed to the first path.

According to the feature Q7, one game ball is distributed to the first path and N game balls are distributed to the second path, so each of the (N+1) game balls is entered. A series of controls triggered by the passage of one game ball (first game ball) through the passing part can be realized to control whether or not to enter the ball into the part. As a result, it is possible to diversify the games. For example, if the number of game balls that enter the ball-entering portion among the (N+1) game balls is made different for each control mode, a variety of controls for different numbers of game balls entering the ball-entering portion can be achieved. mode can be realized.

[Feature Q8]
The gaming machine according to feature Q7,
A lottery executing means for executing a lottery triggered by the passage of the game ball through the passing portion;
display means for displaying the result of the lottery by the lottery executing means;
a control means for controlling the state transition means based on the result of the lottery;
with
The control means has a plurality of control modes for controlling the state transition means, and as the plurality of control modes,
In a situation in which game balls are continuously shot at predetermined intervals by the shooting means at a predetermined firing intensity, one game ball that has passed through the passing section after being distributed to the first path is the entering ball. The ball-entering part is in the second state at the timing of reaching the part, and the ball-entering part is in the above-mentioned state at all the timings when the N game balls distributed to the second path reach the ball-entering part. A first control mode that is a first state (first high-frequency support mode in the ninth embodiment);
In a situation in which game balls are continuously shot at predetermined intervals by the shooting means at a predetermined firing intensity, one game ball that has passed through the passing section after being distributed to the first path is the entering ball. The ball-entering portion is in the second state at the timing of reaching the second path, and at least one game ball out of the N game balls distributed to the second path reaches the ball-entering portion. a second control mode (the second high-frequency support mode and the third high-frequency support mode in the ninth embodiment) in which the ball-entering portion is in the second state;
A game machine characterized by having

According to feature Q8, a first control mode in which the first game ball enters the ball entry portion but N game balls do not enter the ball entry portion, and a first control mode in which the first game ball enters the ball entry portion Since the second control mode in which at least one game ball out of the N game balls enters the ball entering portion can be realized, the game can be given intonation and the game can be played. It is possible to improve the interest of

[Feature Q9]
A gaming machine according to feature Q7 or feature Q8,
The second route is composed of N routes (route R2 and route R12 in the ninth embodiment),
The distribution means includes an alternate distribution mechanism (first alternate distribution mechanism 304 and second alternate distribution mechanism 305 in the ninth embodiment) that alternately distributes game balls to one of two paths. A gaming machine characterized by being configured by combining in multiple stages.

According to the feature Q9, the function of distributing one game ball that has arrived to the first path and distributing the N game balls that have arrived after the game ball that has been distributed to the first path to the second path is electronically controlled. It can be realized with a simple configuration compared to a configuration that is realized using control or the like. In addition, as a configuration that realizes the function using electronic control, for example, the number of game balls that have reached is measured using a counter or the like, and a structure that is driven by electric force is used to control the number of game balls. can be exemplified.

[Feature Q10]
A gaming machine according to any one of features Q1 to Q9,
A third route (route R2 in examples 1 and 4 of FIG. 84) configured so that the distributed game balls cannot pass through the passing portion,
The sorting means is
While distributing one game ball that has reached the first route (route R11 in example 1 of FIG. 84, route R111 in example 4 of FIG. 84),
At least one game ball out of a plurality of game balls that arrived after the game balls distributed to the first path is transferred to the second path (path R12 in example 1 of FIG. 84, path R12 in example 4 of FIG. 84) R12 and route R112),
Distributing at least one game ball among a plurality of game balls arriving after the game ball distributed to the first path to the third path,
One game ball that arrives after the game ball distributed to the second path and the game ball distributed to the third path is distributed to the first path,
The third path is configured such that the distributed game ball cannot enter the ball-entering section even when the ball-entering section is in the second state. A game machine characterized by:

According to the feature Q10, since the third path is configured so that the distributed game ball cannot enter the ball entry portion, it is possible to further diversify the game. For example, if a large number of game balls are distributed to the third path, the number of game balls that enter the ball entry portion can be reduced.

<Characteristic group R>
The feature R group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment.

を満たすように構成されている
ことを特徴とする遊技機。 [Feature R1]
A shooting means for shooting game balls (game ball shooting mechanism 81);
A ball entry portion (second starting port 308a in the ninth embodiment) into which the fired game ball can enter;
Execution means (main controller 60) for executing a ball entry assist mode (high frequency support mode) for assisting entry of a game ball into the ball entry section;
a payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entering portion;
A gaming machine comprising
The ratio of the number of game balls paid out to the number of game balls discharged in a situation in which game balls are continuously fired at predetermined intervals by the shooting means at a predetermined firing intensity is defined as a ball output rate. if
The execution means
It is possible to execute n types of ball entry assist modes (n is an integer of 2 or more) with different ball output rates,
As one of the n types of ball entry assist modes, at least a game ball reduction mode in which the ball output rate is less than 1 (first high-frequency support mode in the ninth embodiment), and a ball output rate It is possible to execute a game ball increase mode exceeding 1 (third high frequency support mode in the ninth embodiment),
Define Mi as the ball output rate when the i-th (i is an integer from 1 to n) ball entry assist mode is being executed,
When the ratio of execution of the i-th ball entry assistance mode to the number of cases where the ball entry assistance mode is executed is defined as Pi,
The following relational expression (R1)

A game machine characterized by being configured to satisfy

According to the feature R1, although the game ball increase mode in which the ball output rate exceeds 1 can be executed as one aspect of the ball input assist mode, the total ball output when the ball input assist mode is executed Since the rate is less than 1, it is possible to give the player an exhilarating feeling in the game ball increase mode, while suppressing an excessive increase in the gambling spirit of the player. As a result, it is possible to appropriately improve the interest in the game.

[Feature R2]
The gaming machine according to feature R1,
The gaming machine, wherein the execution means is capable of executing a plurality of types of game ball increase modes (third high-frequency support mode and fourth high-frequency support mode in modification 5) with different ball output rates. .

According to the feature R2, since it is possible to execute a plurality of types of game ball increase modes with different ball output rates, it is possible to differentiate the degree of elation given to the player in the game ball increase mode. As a result, it is possible to add intonation to the game, and to improve the amusement of the game.

[Feature R3]
A gaming machine according to feature R1 or feature R2,
a passing portion through which the fired game ball can pass (through gate 306 in the ninth embodiment);
The state of the ball-entering portion is divided into a first state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the ball-entering portion, and a state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the ball-entering portion. State transition means (opening/closing door 308b in the ninth embodiment) for transitioning between the second state, which is a state;
A lottery executing means (processing shown in step S4509 in FIG. 76) for executing a lottery triggered by the game ball passing through the passing portion;
Control means (processing shown in FIGS. 76 and 83) for controlling the state transition means based on the result of the lottery;
Distribution means (first alternate distribution mechanism 304 and second alternate distribution mechanism 305 in the ninth embodiment) for distributing game balls that have reached a plurality of paths,
Distributed game balls can pass through the passing portion and can enter the ball-entering portion when the ball-entering portion is in the second state. a first route (route R11 in the ninth embodiment) configured in
Distributed game balls cannot pass through the passing portion, and can enter the ball-entering portion when the ball-entering portion is in the second state. A second route (route R2 and route R12 in the ninth embodiment) configured as
with
The sorting means is
While distributing the reached one game ball to the first path,
Distributing N game balls arriving after the game balls distributed to the first path to the second path,
It is configured so that one game ball arriving after the N game balls distributed to the second path is distributed to the first path,
The control means has a plurality of control modes for controlling the state transition means, and the game ball increase mode is achieved by executing one of the plurality of control modes by the control means. is the mode in which
A gaming machine, wherein the game ball reduction mode is a mode realized by executing another control mode among the plurality of control modes by the control means.

According to the feature R3, one game ball distributed to the first path (hereinafter also referred to as the first game ball) can pass through the passing portion, and the ball entering portion is the second If it is in the state of , it is possible to enter the ball into the ball entering section. On the other hand, since the N game balls arriving after the first game ball are distributed to the second path, they cannot pass through the passing portion and the ball entry portion is in the second state. In this case, it is possible to enter the ball into the ball entering section. That is, of the first game ball and the N game balls, only the first game ball can pass through the passing portion, and each of the first game ball and the N game balls Whether or not the game ball enters the ball entering portion is determined when the first game ball and each game ball out of the N game balls reaches the ball entering portion. It will depend on whether it is in a state or not.

Since the N game balls that arrive after the first game ball do not pass through the passing portion, the control means can be set in a situation where the game balls are continuously shot at predetermined intervals by the shooting means with a predetermined firing intensity. , whether the state of the ball-entering portion at the timing when each game ball of the first game ball and the N game balls reaches the ball-entering portion is the first state or the second state; That is, whether or not the first game ball and each game ball out of the N game balls are allowed to enter the ball entry portion is executed when the first game ball passes through the passing portion. It is determined by the result of the lottery and the mode of control of the state transition means set for each control mode. Therefore, the control of whether or not each of the (N+1) game balls is allowed to enter the ball entry portion is triggered by the passage of one game ball (first game ball) through the passing portion. It can be realized by a series of controls that

Furthermore, according to feature R3, the length of time the ball-entering portion maintains the second state after transitioning from the first state to the second state, and the ball-entering portion transitions from the first state to the second state If the configuration is such that the number of transitions to the state, the timing at which the ball entering section transitions from the first state to the second state, etc. are controlled differently for each control mode, (N+1) game balls Since the number of game balls that enter the ball entering portion can be made different for each control mode, the ball output rate in each control mode can be set to a different value.

[Feature R4]
The gaming machine according to feature R3,
The control means, as the plurality of control modes,
In a situation in which game balls are continuously shot at predetermined intervals by the shooting means at a predetermined firing intensity, one game ball that has passed through the passing section after being distributed to the first path is the entering ball. The ball-entering part is in the second state at the timing of reaching the part, and the ball-entering part is in the above-mentioned state at all the timings when the N game balls distributed to the second path reach the ball-entering part. A first control mode that is a first state (first high-frequency support mode in the ninth embodiment);
In a situation in which game balls are continuously shot at predetermined intervals by the shooting means at a predetermined firing intensity, one game ball that has passed through the passing section after being distributed to the first path is the entering ball. The ball-entering portion is in the second state at the timing of reaching the second path, and at least one game ball out of the N game balls distributed to the second path reaches the ball-entering portion. a second control mode (the second high-frequency support mode and the third high-frequency support mode in the ninth embodiment) in which the ball-entering portion is in the second state;
has
The game ball increase mode is a mode realized by executing the second control mode by the control means,
A gaming machine, wherein the game ball reduction mode is a mode realized by executing the first control mode by the control means.

According to the feature R4, there is a game ball reduction mode in which the first game ball enters the ball entry portion but N game balls do not enter the ball entry portion, and a game ball reduction mode in which the first game ball enters the ball entry portion. A game ball increasing mode in which at least one game ball out of the N number of game balls enters a ball entry part can be realized, so that the game can be given an inflection, and the game is amusement. can be improved.

<Characteristic group S>
The feature S group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment.

[Feature S1]
A shooting means for shooting game balls (game ball shooting mechanism 81);
Distribution means (first alternate distribution mechanism 304 and second alternate distribution mechanism 305 in the ninth embodiment) for distributing game balls that have reached a plurality of paths,
with
The sorting means is
While distributing the reached one game ball to the first route (route R11 in the ninth embodiment),
N (N is an integer equal to or greater than 2) game balls that arrive after the game balls distributed to the first route are transferred to the second route (route in the ninth embodiment) that is a route different from the first route R2 and route R12),
A gaming machine characterized in that one game ball arriving after N game balls distributed to the second path is distributed to the first path.

According to the feature S1, of the (N+1) game balls, one game ball (hereinafter also referred to as the first game ball) is distributed to the first path, and the N Since each game ball can be distributed to the second path, the first path and the second path can be effectively used to diversify the game and improve the interest of the game. be able to.

For example, in the case of a configuration in which a ball-entering portion where a game ball can enter or a predetermined accessory is provided at a position where only the first game ball distributed to the first path can reach, (N+1) Of the game balls, only the first game ball is made to reach the ball entry part or the predetermined accessory, and the N game balls that arrive after the first game ball are made to reach the ball entry part or the predetermined accessory. It is possible not to reach it. Furthermore, by setting the value of N (the number of game balls to be distributed to the second path) to a desired value when designing the game machine, the ratio of game balls reaching the ball entry section or a predetermined accessory can be adjusted. It can be set to any desired ratio. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the game machine and to diversify the games.

[Feature S2]
The gaming machine according to feature S1,
Equipped with a passing portion (thru gate 306 in the ninth embodiment) through which game balls can pass,
The first path is configured so that the game balls distributed to the first path can pass through the passing portion,
A gaming machine, wherein the second path is configured such that game balls distributed to the second path cannot pass through the passing section.

According to the characteristic S2, only the first game ball among the (N+1) game balls can pass through the passing portion. Therefore, when the configuration is such that the predetermined process is executed when the game ball passes through the passing section, the predetermined process is executed once every time (N+1) game balls reach the sorting means. It can be executed at a rate of times.

For example, in the case where a predetermined lottery is executed when a game ball passes through the passing section, the predetermined lottery is executed every time (N+1) game balls reach the sorting means. It will be executed once in a while. Furthermore, by setting the value of N (the number of game balls distributed to the second path) to a desired value when designing the game machine, the frequency of execution of the predetermined lottery is set to a desired frequency. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the game machine and to diversify the games.

[Feature S3]
The gaming machine according to feature S2,
A ball entry portion (second starting port 308a in the ninth embodiment) into which the fired game ball can enter;
The state of the ball-entering portion is divided into a first state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the ball-entering portion, and a state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the ball-entering portion. state transition means (opening/closing door 308b in the ninth embodiment) for transitioning between the second state, which is a state;
with
The first path and the second path are arranged such that the distributed game ball can enter the ball-entering section when the ball-entering section is in the second state. A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature S3, the first game ball distributed to the first path can pass through the passing portion, and when the ball entering portion is in the second state, the ball entering portion It is possible to enter the ball. On the other hand, since the N game balls arriving after the first game ball are distributed to the second path, they cannot pass through the passing portion and the ball entry portion is in the second state. In this case, it is possible to enter the ball into the ball entering section. That is, of the first game ball and the N game balls, only the first game ball can pass through the passing portion, and each of the first game ball and the N game balls Whether or not the game ball enters the ball entering portion is determined when the first game ball and each game ball out of the N game balls reaches the ball entering portion. It will depend on whether it is in a state or not. Therefore, of the (N+1) game balls, the number of game balls that can pass through the passing portion is set to 1, and the number of game balls that enter the ball entering portion is adjusted to the state of the ball entering portion. Since it can be changed depending on the situation, it is possible to diversify the game.

For example, the length of time the ball-entering portion maintains the second state after transitioning from the first state to the second state, the number of times the ball-entering portion transitions from the first state to the second state, When the configuration is such that the timing at which the ball-entering portion transitions from the first state to the second state is controlled differently for each mode, the ball-entering portion of the (N+1) game balls Since the number of entering game balls can be made different for each mode, it is possible to diversify the game.

[Feature S4]
The gaming machine according to feature S3,
A lottery executing means (process shown in step S4509 in FIG. 76) for executing a lottery triggered by the passage of the game ball through the passing portion;
Control means (processing shown in FIGS. 76 and 83) for controlling the state transition means based on the result of the lottery;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature S4, the control means controls the state transition means based on the result of the lottery executed when the game ball has passed through the passing portion. Since the N game balls that arrive after the first game ball do not pass through the passing portion, the control means can be set in a situation where the game balls are continuously shot at predetermined intervals by the shooting means with a predetermined firing intensity. , whether the state of the ball-entering portion at the timing when each game ball of the first game ball and the N game balls reaches the ball-entering portion is the first state or the second state; That is, whether or not the first game ball and each game ball out of the N game balls are allowed to enter the ball entry portion is executed when the first game ball passes through the passing portion. It is determined by the result of the lottery and the mode of control of the state transition means by the control means. Therefore, the control of whether or not each of the (N+1) game balls is allowed to enter the ball entry portion is triggered by the passage of one game ball (first game ball) through the passing portion. It can be realized by a series of controls that

[Feature S5]
The gaming machine according to feature S4,
The control means has a plurality of control modes (first to third high-frequency support modes in the ninth embodiment) for controlling the state transition means,
For each control mode, the length of time that the ball entering portion maintains the second state after transitioning from the first state to the second state, the length of time after the game ball passes through the passing portion the length of time until the ball-entering portion starts transitioning from the first state to the second state, the number of times the ball-entering portion transitions from the first state to the second state, A gaming machine, wherein at least one of timings at which the ball-entering portion transitions from the first state to the second state is different.

According to the feature S5, the number of game balls that enter the ball entry part of the (N+1) game balls can be made different for each control mode, so that the game can be diversified. can.

[Feature S6]
The gaming machine according to feature S5,
A display means (normal figure unit 38) for displaying the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means,
The time from when the game ball passes through the passing portion until the result of the lottery executed when the game ball passes through the passing portion is displayed by the display means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the time is set to be shorter than the time from when the game ball passes through the passage portion to when the game ball reaches the ball entry portion.

According to the feature S6, the display means can display the result of the lottery before the timing when the first game ball that has triggered the lottery by passing through the passage portion reaches the entrance portion. . After the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means, the control means starts control based on the result of the lottery. Control based on the result of the lottery can be started prior to the timing of reaching.

For example, the control means can realize a control mode in which the ball entering portion is in the second state at the timing when the first game ball that has passed through the passage portion reaches the ball entering portion.

[Feature S7]
The gaming machine according to feature S7,
After the game ball has passed through the passing portion, the result of the lottery executed with the passing of the game ball through the passing portion is displayed by the display means, and the ball entering portion is in the second state. The time to start the transition to
The gaming machine is characterized in that the time is set to be shorter than the time from when the game ball passes through the passage portion to when the game ball reaches the ball entry portion.

According to the feature S7, the control means can realize a control mode in which the ball-entering portion is in the second state at the timing when the first game ball that has passed through the passing portion reaches the ball-entering portion. Become.

[Feature S8]
The gaming machine according to feature S7,
The control means has a plurality of control modes for controlling the state transition means, and as the plurality of control modes,
In a situation in which game balls are continuously shot at predetermined intervals by the shooting means at a predetermined firing intensity, one game ball distributed to the first path and passing through the passing portion is the entering ball. The ball-entering part is in the second state at the timing of reaching the part, and the ball-entering part is in the above-mentioned state at all the timings when the N game balls distributed to the second path reach the ball-entering part. A first control mode that is a first state (first high-frequency support mode in the ninth embodiment);
In a situation in which game balls are continuously shot at predetermined intervals by the shooting means at a predetermined firing intensity, one game ball distributed to the first path and passing through the passing portion is the entering ball. The ball-entering portion is in the second state at the timing of reaching the second path, and at least one game ball out of the N game balls distributed to the second path reaches the ball-entering portion. a second control mode (the second high-frequency support mode and the third high-frequency support mode in the ninth embodiment) in which the ball-entering portion is in the second state;
A game machine characterized by having

According to the feature S8, a first control mode in which the first game ball enters the ball entering portion but N game balls do not enter the ball entering portion, and a first control mode in which the first game ball enters the ball entering portion Since the second control mode in which at least one game ball out of the N game balls enters the ball entering portion can be realized, the game can be given intonation and the game can be played. It is possible to improve the interest of

[Feature S9]
A gaming machine according to any one of features S1 to S8,
The second route is composed of a plurality of routes (route R2 and route R12 in the ninth embodiment),
The distribution means includes an alternate distribution mechanism (first alternate distribution mechanism 304 and second alternate distribution mechanism 305 in the ninth embodiment) that alternately distributes game balls to one of two paths. A gaming machine characterized by being configured by combining in multiple stages.

According to the feature S9, the function of distributing one game ball that has reached the first path and distributing the N game balls that have arrived after the game ball that has been distributed to the first path to the second path is electronically controlled. It can be realized with a simple configuration compared to a configuration that is realized using control or the like. In addition, as a configuration that realizes the function using electronic control, for example, the number of game balls that have reached is measured using a counter or the like, and a structure that is driven by electric force is used to control the number of game balls. can be exemplified.

[Feature S10]
A gaming machine according to any one of features S1 to S9,
A third route (route R2 in Example 4 of FIG. 84) configured so that the distributed game balls cannot pass through the passing portion,
The sorting means is
While distributing the reached one game ball to the first route (route R111 in example 4 of FIG. 84),
At least N game balls out of a plurality of game balls arriving after the game balls distributed to the first route are distributed to the second route (route R12 and route R112 in example 4 of FIG. 84),
Distributing at least one game ball among a plurality of game balls arriving after the game ball distributed to the first path to the third path,
One game ball that arrives after the game ball distributed to the second path and the game ball distributed to the third path is distributed to the first path,
The third path is configured such that the distributed game ball cannot enter the ball-entering section even when the ball-entering section is in the second state. A game machine characterized by:

According to the feature S10, since the third path is configured so that the distributed game ball cannot enter the ball entry portion, it is possible to further diversify the game. For example, if a large number of game balls are distributed to the third path, the number of game balls that enter the ball entry portion can be reduced.

<Characteristic T group>
The feature T group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment.

[Feature T1]
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A ball entry portion (second start port 208a in the tenth embodiment) into which a game ball circulating in the game area can enter;
A passing portion (thru gate 206 in the tenth embodiment) through which game balls circulating in the game area can pass;
The state of the ball-entering portion is divided into a first state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the ball-entering portion, and a state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the ball-entering portion. state transition means (opening/closing door 208b in the tenth embodiment) for transitioning between the second state, which is a state;
Control means for controlling the state transition means triggered by the passage of the game ball through the passing portion;
with
The control means is
Based on the game state (in the tenth embodiment, the result of the electric accessory open lottery and the type of support mode),
A transition start waiting time (normal It is possible to set the length of the fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38 + the open waiting time of the open/close door 208b to a plurality of lengths,
In a situation where game balls are continuously shot at predetermined intervals by the shooting means with a predetermined firing intensity, a predetermined time (in the tenth embodiment, 1.2 hours after the game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 206). 87, 89), wherein the number of game balls entering the ball entry portion per second (FIGS. 87 and 89) varies depending on the length of the transition start waiting time set by the control means.

According to the feature T1, the number of game balls entering the ball entering section can be changed by changing the transition start waiting time, so that the game can be added to the intonation, thereby improving the interest of the game. be able to. Further, according to the feature T1, for example, even when the time for which the ball-entering portion maintains the second state (opening time of the opening/closing door 208b in the tenth embodiment) is set to the same length, the transition By changing the length of the start waiting time, it is possible to change the number of game balls entering the ball entering section, so that the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine can be improved.

[Feature T2]
The gaming machine according to feature T1,
A lottery execution means (process shown in step S5109 in FIG. 91) for executing a lottery triggered by the game ball passing through the passing portion;
Display means (normal figure unit 38) for displaying the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means;
with
The control means is
Based on the game state (the result of the electric accessory open lottery in the tenth embodiment),
The time from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means to when the ball-entering portion starts to transition from the first state to the second state (in the tenth embodiment, the open/close door 208b is opened). A gaming machine characterized by being able to set the length of standby time) to a plurality of types of lengths.

According to the feature T2, the transition start waiting time (fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38 + open waiting time of the open/close door 208b) is from the game ball passing through the passage part until the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means. (fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38) and the time from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means to when the ball entering section starts transitioning from the first state to the second state (opening/closing door 208b open waiting time) and the total time. Therefore, according to the feature T2, the time from when the game ball passes through the passing portion until the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means (fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38) is set to the same length. Even if there is, the time from when the lottery result is displayed by the display means until the ball-entering section starts transitioning from the first state to the second state (waiting time for opening/closing door 208b) can be set in a plurality of ways. By setting the length, the transition start waiting time (fluctuation time of normal figure unit 38 + open waiting time of open/close door 208b) can be set to a plurality of lengths. That is, according to feature T2, the time from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means to when the ball-entering portion starts to transition from the first state to the second state (waiting time for opening/closing door 208b). By changing the transition start waiting time (fluctuation time of normal unit 38 + open waiting time of opening and closing door 208b) can be changed, and the number of game balls entering the ball entering section can be changed. can be done.

[Feature T3]
A gaming machine according to feature T1 or feature T2,
The ball-entering portion is configured so that a game ball that has passed through the passing portion can enter when the second state is established,
The control means is
The time from when the game ball passes through the passing portion until the result of the lottery executed when the game ball passes through the passing portion is displayed by the display means (fluctuation of the normal figure unit 38 Time,
Set the time to be shorter than the time from when the game ball passes through the passage part to when the game ball reaches the ball entry part,
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the feature T3, the display means can display the result of the lottery before the timing when the game ball that triggered the lottery by passing through the passing portion reaches the ball entry portion. As a result, after the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means, and before the timing when the gaming ball that triggered the lottery by passing through the passing portion reaches the ball entering portion It is possible to execute control for starting the transition from the first state to the second state. Therefore, the game ball that triggered the transition of the ball entering portion to the second state (the game ball that passed through the passing portion and triggered the lottery) is entered into the ball entering portion that transitioned to the second state. It is possible to

[Feature T4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features T1 to T3,
The ball-entering section is configured so that a game ball that has passed through the passing section can enter the ball-entering section when the ball-entering section is in the second state,
The control means is
The transition start waiting time (normal The first time that the fluctuation time of the figure unit 38 + the open waiting time of the opening and closing door 208b) is set to a time shorter than the time from when the game ball passes through the passage part to when the game ball reaches the ball entry part and control of
The transition start waiting time (normal The variable time of the figure unit 38 + the open standby time of the open/close door 208b) is set to a time longer than the time from when the game ball passes through the passing portion to when the game ball reaches the ball entering portion. and control of
A gaming machine characterized by being capable of executing

According to the feature T4, when the first control is executed, the ball-entering portion transitions to the second state at the timing when the game ball that has passed through the passing portion reaches the ball-entering portion. The game ball that has passed through enters the ball entering section, and on the other hand, when the second control is executed, the ball entering section is still the first ball at the timing when the game ball that passed through the passing section reaches the ball entering section Since there is no transition to state 2, the game ball that has passed through the passing portion does not enter the ball entering portion. That is, according to the feature T4, the number of game balls entering the ball entering portion can be changed by changing the transition start waiting time, so that the game can be enhanced, and the game can be improved in amusement. can be achieved.

[Feature T5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features T1 to T4,
Distributing means (alternating distributing mechanism 204 in the tenth embodiment) for distributing game balls that have reached a plurality of paths,
a first route (route R1 in the tenth embodiment) configured to allow the distributed game balls to pass through the passing portion;
a second route (route R2 in the tenth embodiment) configured so that the distributed game balls cannot pass through the passing portion;
with
The sorting means is
While distributing the arrived game balls to the first route,
Distributing game balls arriving after the game balls distributed to the first path to the second path,
A game ball that arrives after a game ball that is distributed to the second path is distributed to the first path,
The first path and the second path are arranged such that the distributed game ball can enter the ball-entering section when the ball-entering section is in the second state. A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature T5, the game ball distributed to the first path (hereinafter also referred to as the first game ball) can pass through the passing portion, and the ball entering portion is in the second state. In some cases, it is possible to enter the ball into the ball entering section. On the other hand, the game ball that has arrived after the first game ball (hereinafter also referred to as the second game ball) is distributed to the second path, so it is impossible to pass through the passing part and the ball enters. When the part is in the second state, it is possible to enter the ball into the ball-entering part. That is, of the first and second game balls, only the first game ball can pass through the passing portion, and each of the first and second game balls enters the ball entering portion. Whether or not depends on whether or not the ball-entering portion is in the second state at the timing when the first and second game balls respectively reach the ball-entering portion. Therefore, of the two game balls (the first game ball and the second game ball), while the number of game balls that may pass through the passing portion is one, the game that enters the ball entering portion The number of balls can be changed depending on the state of the ball-entering portion. Then, one game ball (first game ball) controls whether or not each of the two game balls (first game ball and second game ball) enters the ball entry portion. It can be realized by a series of controls triggered by passing through the passing section.

Furthermore, according to the characteristic T5, it is possible to set the transition start waiting time to a plurality of types of lengths triggered by the passage of the first game ball through the passing part. 1 game ball and the second game ball) are set to the transition start waiting time in which both of them will enter the ball entering portion (control when winning the first type electric role opening in the tenth embodiment (Fig. 87)), set to the transition start waiting time in which only the second game ball of the two game balls (first game ball and second game ball) enters the ball entering portion. (Control when winning the second type electric role open in the tenth embodiment (FIG. 89)). That is, according to the feature T5, the number of game balls entering the ball entering portion can be changed by changing the length of the transition start waiting time. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.
[Feature T6]
The gaming machine according to feature T5,
The sorting means is
While distributing the reached one game ball to the first route (route R11 in the ninth embodiment),
Distributing N game balls (N is an integer equal to or greater than 2) that arrived after the game balls distributed to the first route to the second route (route R2 and route R12 in the ninth embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so that one game ball arriving after N game balls distributed to the second path is distributed to the first path.

According to feature T6, one game ball is distributed to the first path, and N game balls are distributed to the second path, so each of (N+1) game balls is entered. A series of controls triggered by the passage of one game ball (first game ball) through the passing part can be realized to control whether or not to enter the ball into the part. Furthermore, according to the characteristic T6, the transition start waiting time can be set to a plurality of types of lengths triggered by the passage of the first game ball through the passing portion. That is, according to feature T6, by changing the length of the transition start waiting time, it is possible to change the number of game balls that enter the ball entry portion out of the (N+1) game balls. Inflection can be added to the game, and interest in the game can be improved.

[Feature T7]
The gaming machine according to feature T6,
The second route is composed of N routes (route R2 and route R12 in the ninth embodiment),
The distribution means includes an alternate distribution mechanism (first alternate distribution mechanism 304 and second alternate distribution mechanism 305 in the ninth embodiment) that alternately distributes game balls to one of two paths. A gaming machine characterized by being configured by combining in multiple stages.

According to feature T7, the function of distributing one game ball that has arrived to the first path and distributing the N game balls that have arrived after the game ball that is distributed to the first path to the second path is electronically controlled. It can be realized with a simple configuration compared to a configuration that is realized using control or the like. In addition, as a configuration that realizes the function using electronic control, for example, the number of game balls that have reached is measured using a counter or the like, and a structure that is driven by electric force is used to control the number of game balls. can be exemplified.

[Feature T8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features T5 to T7,
A third route (route R2 in examples 1 and 4 of FIG. 84) configured so that the distributed game balls cannot pass through the passing portion,
The sorting means is
While distributing one game ball that has reached the first route (route R11 in example 1 of FIG. 84, route R111 in example 4 of FIG. 84),
At least one game ball out of a plurality of game balls that arrived after the game balls distributed to the first route is transferred to the second route (route R12 in example 1 of FIG. 84, route R12 in example 4 of FIG. 84) R12 and route R112),
Distributing at least one game ball among a plurality of game balls arriving after the game ball distributed to the first path to the third path,
One game ball that arrives after the game ball distributed to the second path and the game ball distributed to the third path is distributed to the first path,
The third path is configured such that the distributed game ball cannot enter the ball-entering section even when the ball-entering section is in the second state. A game machine characterized by:

According to the feature T8, since the third path is configured so that the distributed game balls cannot enter the ball entry portion, it is possible to further diversify the game. For example, if a large number of game balls are distributed to the third path, the number of game balls that enter the ball entry portion can be reduced.

<Characteristic group U>
The feature U group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment.

[Feature U1]
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A ball entry section (second starting port 208a (FIG. 70) in the eleventh embodiment) into which a game ball circulating in the game area can enter;
The state of the ball-entering portion is divided into a first state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the ball-entering portion, and a state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the ball-entering portion. state transition means (opening/closing door 208b (FIG. 70) in the eleventh embodiment) for transitioning between the second state, which is a state;
a payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball based on the game ball entering the ball entering portion;
A passing portion (thru gate 206 in the eleventh embodiment) through which game balls circulating in the game area can pass;
A lottery execution means for executing a lottery based on the passage of the game ball through the passing portion;
Display means for starting variable display of the identification information based on the passage of the game ball through the passing portion, and for stopping and displaying the identification information corresponding to the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means after ending the variable display. (Universal figure unit 38) and
Control means for controlling the state transition means based on the result of the lottery by the lottery executing means;
with
The ratio of the number of game balls paid out to the number of game balls discharged in a situation in which game balls are continuously fired at predetermined intervals by the shooting means at a predetermined firing intensity is defined as a ball output ratio. in the event that
The control means is
Having a plurality of types of control modes for controlling the state transition means,
Transition start waiting time from when the display means starts the variable display to when the entering ball section starts transitioning from the first state to the second state (normal figure unit in the eleventh embodiment 38 fluctuation time + opening standby time of opening/closing door 208b) is set to a different length for each control mode,
a first control mode (first high-frequency support mode in the eleventh embodiment) in which the ball output rate is less than 1;
a second control mode (second high-frequency support mode in the eleventh embodiment) in which the ball output rate is 1;
a third control mode (third high-frequency support mode in the eleventh embodiment) in which the ball output rate exceeds 1;
A gaming machine characterized by being capable of executing

According to feature U1, by changing the transition start waiting time, a first control mode in which the pitching rate is less than 1, a second control mode in which the pitching rate is 1, and a control mode in which the pitching rate is 1 Since the third control mode exceeding the above can be executed, inflection can be added to the game, and interest in the game can be improved. Further, according to the feature U1, for example, even when the time for which the ball-entering portion maintains the second state (opening time of the opening/closing door 208b in the eleventh embodiment) is set to the same length, the transition By changing the length of the start waiting time, the three control modes described above can be executed, so that the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine can be improved.

[Feature U2]
The gaming machine according to feature U1,
Alternating distribution means (alternating distribution mechanism 204 (FIG. 70) in the eleventh embodiment) for alternately distributing game balls that have reached two paths,
a first route (route R1 in the eleventh embodiment (FIG. 70)) configured to allow the distributed game balls to pass through the passing portion;
a second route (route R2 in the eleventh embodiment (FIG. 70)) configured so that the distributed game balls cannot pass through the passing portion;
with
The alternate distribution means is
While distributing the reached one game ball to the first path,
Distributing one game ball arriving after the game ball distributed to the first path to the second path,
One game ball that arrives after the game ball distributed to the second path is distributed to the first path,
The first path and the second path are arranged such that the distributed game ball can enter the ball-entering section when the ball-entering section is in the second state. is composed of
In a situation in which game balls are continuously shot at predetermined intervals by the shooting means at a predetermined firing intensity, the number of game balls entering the ball entry portion per predetermined time period is set for each control mode. A gaming machine characterized in that it varies depending on the length of the transition start waiting time set.

According to feature U2, a first control mode in which the ball output rate is less than 1, a second control mode in which the ball output rate is 1, and A third control mode in which the ball output rate exceeds 1 can be executed. That is, since the mechanism for executing the three control modes can be realized in a space-saving manner, the game area can be effectively utilized, such as arranging other accessories in the empty game area.

[Feature U3]
A gaming machine according to feature U1 or feature U2,
The control means is
The time from when the identification information corresponding to the result of the lottery is stop-displayed to when the ball-entering portion starts to transition from the first state to the second state (opening/closing door 208b in the eleventh embodiment) (open waiting time) can be set to different lengths for each of the control modes.

According to the feature U3, the transition start waiting time (fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38 + open waiting time of the open/close door 208b) is from the game ball passing through the passage part until the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means. (fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38) and the time from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means to when the ball entering section starts transitioning from the first state to the second state (opening/closing door 208b open waiting time) and the total time. Therefore, according to the feature U3, the time from when the game ball passes through the passing portion until the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means (fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38) is set to the same length. Even if there is, the time from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means to when the ball-entering section starts transitioning from the first state to the second state (waiting time for opening and closing door 208b) can be set to different lengths. , the transition start waiting time (fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38 + open waiting time of the open/close door 208b) can be set to different lengths. That is, according to feature U3, the time from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means to when the ball-entering section starts transitioning from the first state to the second state (waiting time for opening/closing door 208b). By changing the transition start waiting time (fluctuation time of normal unit 38 + open waiting time of opening and closing door 208b) can be changed, and the number of game balls entering the ball entering section can be changed. can be done. As a result, it is possible to realize a first control mode in which the ball output rate is less than 1, a second control mode in which the ball output rate is 1, and a third control mode in which the ball output rate is greater than 1. It becomes possible.

<Characteristic group V>
The feature V group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment.

[Feature V1]
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A ball entry portion (second start port 208a in the eleventh embodiment) into which a game ball circulating in the game area can enter;
The state of the ball-entering portion is divided into a first state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the ball-entering portion, and a state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the ball-entering portion. State transition means (opening/closing door 208b in the eleventh embodiment) for transitioning between the second state, which is a state;
a payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball based on the game ball entering the ball entering portion;
a ball-entering unit lottery executing means for executing a ball-entering unit lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the ball-entering unit;
The variable display of the identification information is started based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entrance section, and the variable display is ended, and the result of the lottery for the ball entrance section by the lottery execution means for the ball entrance section is displayed. Lottery result display means (special figure unit 37) for entrance ball section that stops and displays corresponding identification information;
a special game state transition means for shifting to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) in which a privilege is given to a player based on a predetermined result (various jackpots) of the lottery for the ball entry section;
a starting means for starting a high-probability lottery mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the result of the lottery for the entrance club will be the predetermined result (various jackpots) is improved;
End means for ending the high-probability lottery mode;
A passing portion (thru gate 206 in the eleventh embodiment) through which game balls circulating in the game area can pass;
Passing section lottery execution means for executing a passing section lottery based on the game ball passing through the passing section;
Starting the variable display of the identification information based on the passage of the game ball through the passage portion, and ending the variable display, identification information corresponding to the result of the lottery for the passage portion by the lottery execution means for the passage portion. Passing section lottery result display means (normal figure unit 38) for stop-displaying
control means for causing the ball-entering section to transition from the first state to the second state by controlling the state transition means based on the result of the passing section lottery performed by the passing section lottery executing means; ,
with
The ratio of the number of game balls paid out to the number of game balls discharged in a situation in which game balls are continuously fired at predetermined intervals by the shooting means at a predetermined firing intensity is defined as a ball output rate. in the event that
The control means is
Having a plurality of types of control modes for controlling the state transition means,
a first control mode (first high-frequency support mode in the eleventh embodiment) in which the ball output rate is less than 1;
a second control mode (second high-frequency support mode in the eleventh embodiment) in which the ball output rate is 1;
a third control mode (third high-frequency support mode in the eleventh embodiment) in which the ball output rate exceeds 1;
is executable and
In the first control mode, the result of the lottery for the entrance club is the first result (4R normal jackpot A (Fig. 97) in the eleventh embodiment) among the predetermined results (various jackpots). and the number of times of the lottery for the entering ball club executed after the start of the first control mode, the result of the lottery for the entering ball club is the predetermined result (various jackpots) It ends based on reaching the specified number of times (100 times) without
In the second control mode, the result of the lottery for the entrance club is the second result (8R probability variable jackpot (Fig. 97) in the eleventh embodiment) among the predetermined results (various jackpots). and ends based on the predetermined result (various jackpots) as a result of the lottery for the entering ball section executed after the start of the second control mode,
In the third control mode, the result of the lottery for the entering ball club is the third result (4R normal jackpot B (FIG. 97) in the eleventh embodiment) among the predetermined results (various jackpots). and the number of times of the lottery for the entering ball club executed after the start of the third control mode, if the result of the lottery for the entering ball club is the predetermined result (various jackpots) It ends based on reaching the specified number of times (100 times) without
The high-probability lottery mode is started based on the fact that the result of the lottery for the entering ball club is the second result (8R probability variable jackpot) among the predetermined results, and the previous during the high-probability lottery mode The lottery for entry ball club ends when the first result (4R normal jackpot A) or the third result (4R normal jackpot B) among the predetermined results. game machine.

According to the feature V1, when the result of the lottery for the entering ball club becomes the first result (4R normal jackpot A), the high probability lottery mode is not started, but the first control mode (first high frequency support mode) is activated. be started. When the first control mode is started, entry of game balls into the ball entry section is promoted, so execution of the lottery for the ball entry section is promoted. However, since the ball output rate in the first control mode is less than 1, the number of game balls held by the player decreases. The first control mode ends when the number of executions of the winning club lottery reaches a specified number of times (100 times) without a predetermined result (various jackpots). Therefore, the player wants a predetermined result (various jackpots) in the lottery for the entering ball club before the number of executions of the lottery for the entering ball club reaches the specified number of times and the first control mode ends. I play while expecting. In addition, since the player wants to minimize the decrease in the number of game balls in his/her hand, the player plays the game expecting a predetermined result (various jackpots) in the lottery for the entering ball section as early as possible.

Furthermore, according to feature V1, when the result of the entrance ball lottery is the second result (8R probability variable jackpot), the high probability lottery mode is started, and the second control mode (second high frequency support mode ) is started. When the high-probability lottery mode is started, the probability that the lottery for the entering ball club will result in a predetermined result (various jackpots) increases. Further, when the second control mode is started, entry of game balls into the ball-entering section is promoted, so execution of lottery for the ball-entering section is promoted. Since the ball output rate in the second control mode is 1, the number of game balls held by the player neither increases nor decreases. Then, the high-probability lottery mode continues at least until the result of the lottery for the entering ball club reaches a predetermined result (various jackpots). In addition, the second control mode continues until the result of the lottery for the entering ball club reaches a predetermined result (various jackpots). Therefore, the player continues the high-probability lottery mode and the second control mode until a predetermined result (various jackpots) is obtained in the lottery for the entering ball club. A game is played in anticipation of the continuation of the high-probability lottery mode with (8R probability variable jackpot). In addition, since the number of game balls in hand does not increase or decrease, the player can concentrate on the type of result when the result of the lottery for the entering ball section is a predetermined result (various jackpots).

Furthermore, according to feature V1, when the result of the entrance ball lottery is the third result (4R normal jackpot B), the high probability lottery mode is not started, but the third control mode (third high frequency support mode ) is started. When the third control mode is started, entry of game balls into the ball entry section is promoted, and execution of lottery for the ball entry section is promoted. Since the ball output rate in the third high-frequency support mode exceeds 1, the number of game balls held by the player increases. The third control mode ends when the number of executions of the winning club lottery reaches a specified number of times (100 times) without achieving a predetermined result (various jackpots). Therefore, the player continues the third control mode until just before the number of executions of the lottery for the entering ball section reaches the specified number of times to increase the number of game balls in hand, but the third control mode ends. Players play games while expecting that the result of the lottery for the entering ball club will be a predetermined result (various jackpots). Then, even if the result of the lottery for the entering ball section does not reach a predetermined result (various jackpots) before the number of executions of the lottery for the entering ball section reaches the specified number of times (100 times), the player It is possible to obtain satisfaction that the third control mode in which the number of game balls increases continues for the longest period.

As described above, according to the feature V1, it is possible to create a new game property by effectively using the three control modes to provide the player with a variety of expectations, thereby improving the interest of the game. be able to.

[Feature V2]
The gaming machine according to feature V1,
ball-entering section variation time setting means for setting the length of the ball-entering section variation time, which is the time during which the identification information is variably displayed in the ball-entering section lottery result display means;
The variable time setting means for the ball entry section,
During the period in which the third control mode is executed,
A gaming machine characterized in that, as the number of times of the lottery for the ball entrance section that has been executed after the start of the third control mode increases, a longer time is set as the variation time for the ball entrance section.

According to feature V2, the closer the number of executions of the lottery for the ball entrance section to the specified number of times, the longer the fluctuation time for the ball entrance section to be set. be longer. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's frustration that the result of the lottery for the entering club is not a predetermined result even though the number of executions of the lottery for the entering club is approaching the specified number of times.

[Feature V3]
A gaming machine according to feature V1 or feature V2,
ball-entering section variation time setting means for setting the length of the ball-entering section variation time, which is the time during which the identification information is variably displayed in the ball-entering section lottery result display means;
The lottery executing means for the entering ball club,
Even if it is determined that the result of the entrance lottery lottery is not the predetermined result (various jackpots), if a predetermined condition (reach occurrence condition) is established, the condition establishment result (loss result (reach Occurrence)), and if the predetermined condition is not satisfied, it is determined that the condition is not satisfied (result of non-establishment of reach (no reach)),
The variable time setting means for the ball entry section,
During the period in which the third control mode is executed,
The length of the fluctuation time for the entering ball section corresponding to the lottery for the entering ball section in which the result of the entering ball section lottery results in the condition establishment result (loss result (reach occurrence)),
Than the length of the variable time for the entering ball section corresponding to the lottery for the entering ball section in which the result of the entering ball section lottery results in the condition non-satisfaction result (loss result (no reach)),
A game machine characterized by being set for a long time.

According to the feature V3, when the result of the lottery for the entering ball club is the condition establishment result (loss result (reach occurrence)), the condition non-satisfaction result (loss result (no reach occurrence)). Also, a long variation time is set as the variation time for the ball-entering section. The greater the number of times a long variation time is set as the variation time for the entering club, the longer the time required for the execution count of the lottery for the entering club to reach the specified number of times. As a result, the period during which the third control mode continues becomes longer, so the period during which the number of game balls held by the player increases. Therefore, it is possible to create a new game property that the number of game balls increases as the number of times that the lottery result for the entering ball section becomes the condition establishment result (loss result (reach occurrence)) increases, so that the interest of the game can be improved. can be planned.

[Feature V4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features V1 to V3,
The control means is
After the display means starts the variable display, the transition start waiting time until the ball entering section starts the transition from the first state to the second state (normal figure unit in the eleventh embodiment 38 fluctuation time + opening standby time of opening/closing door 208b) is set to a different length for each control mode,
the first control mode (first high-frequency support mode in the eleventh embodiment);
the second control mode (second high-frequency support mode in the eleventh embodiment);
the third control mode (third high-frequency support mode in the eleventh embodiment);
A gaming machine characterized by being capable of executing

According to the feature V4, by changing the transition start waiting time, the first control mode in which the pitching rate is less than 1, the second control mode in which the pitching rate is 1, and the control mode in which the pitching rate is 1 Since the third control mode exceeding the above can be executed, inflection can be added to the game, and interest in the game can be improved. Further, according to the feature V4, for example, even if the time for which the ball-entering portion maintains the second state (the opening time of the opening/closing door 208b in the eleventh embodiment) is set to the same length, the transition By changing the length of the start waiting time, the three control modes described above can be executed, so that the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine can be improved.

[Feature V5]
The gaming machine according to feature V4,
Alternating distribution means (alternating distribution mechanism 204 (FIG. 70) in the eleventh embodiment) for alternately distributing game balls that have reached two paths,
a first route (route R1 in the eleventh embodiment (FIG. 70)) configured to allow the distributed game balls to pass through the passing portion;
a second route (route R2 in the eleventh embodiment (FIG. 70)) configured so that the distributed game balls cannot pass through the passing portion;
with
The alternate distribution means is
While distributing the reached one game ball to the first path,
Distributing one game ball arriving after the game ball distributed to the first path to the second path,
One game ball that arrives after the game ball distributed to the second path is distributed to the first path,
The first path and the second path are arranged such that the distributed game ball can enter the ball-entering section when the ball-entering section is in the second state. is composed of
In a situation in which game balls are continuously shot at predetermined intervals by the shooting means at a predetermined firing intensity, the number of game balls entering the ball entry portion per predetermined time period is set for each control mode. A gaming machine characterized in that it varies depending on the length of the transition start waiting time set.

According to feature V5, with a simple configuration using only one alternate distribution means, a first control mode in which the ball output rate is less than 1, a second control mode in which the ball output rate is 1, A third control mode in which the ball output rate exceeds 1 can be executed. That is, since the mechanism for executing the three control modes can be realized in a space-saving manner, the game area can be effectively utilized, such as arranging other accessories in the empty game area.

[Feature V6]
A gaming machine according to feature V4 or feature V5,
The control means is
The time from when the identification information corresponding to the result of the lottery is stop-displayed to when the ball-entering portion starts to transition from the first state to the second state (opening/closing door 208b in the eleventh embodiment) (open waiting time) can be set to different lengths for each of the control modes.

According to feature V6, transition start waiting time (fluctuation time of normal unit 38 + open waiting time of open/close door 208b) is from the time the game ball passes through the passing section until the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means. (fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38) and the time from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means to when the ball entering section starts transitioning from the first state to the second state (opening/closing door 208b open waiting time) and the total time. Therefore, according to the feature V6, the time from when the game ball passes through the passing portion until the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means (fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38) is set to the same length. Even if there is, the time from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means to when the ball-entering section starts transitioning from the first state to the second state (waiting time for opening and closing door 208b) can be set to different lengths. , the transition start waiting time (fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38 + open waiting time of the open/close door 208b) can be set to different lengths. That is, according to feature V6, the time from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means to when the ball-entering portion starts to transition from the first state to the second state (waiting time for opening/closing door 208b). By changing the transition start waiting time (fluctuation time of normal unit 38 + open waiting time of opening and closing door 208b) can be changed, and the number of game balls entering the ball entering section can be changed. can be done. As a result, it is possible to realize a first control mode in which the ball output rate is less than 1, a second control mode in which the ball output rate is 1, and a third control mode in which the ball output rate is greater than 1. It becomes possible.

<Characteristic group W>
The feature W group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment.

[Feature W1]
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A ball entry portion (second start port 208a in the eleventh embodiment) into which a game ball circulating in the game area can enter;
The state of the ball-entering portion is divided into a first state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the ball-entering portion, and a state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the ball-entering portion. State transition means (opening/closing door 208b in the eleventh embodiment) for transitioning between the second state, which is a state;
a payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball based on the game ball entering the ball entering portion;
a ball-entering unit lottery executing means for executing a ball-entering unit lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the ball-entering unit;
The variable display of the identification information is started based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entrance section, and the variable display is ended, and the result of the lottery for the ball entrance section by the lottery execution means for the ball entrance section is displayed. Lottery result display means (special figure unit 37) for entrance ball section that stops and displays corresponding identification information;
a special game state transition means for shifting to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) in which a privilege is given to a player based on a predetermined result (various jackpots) of the lottery for the ball entry section;
a starting means for starting a high-probability lottery mode (high-probability mode) in which the probability that the result of the lottery for the entrance club will be the predetermined result (various jackpots) is improved;
End means for ending the high-probability lottery mode;
A passing portion (thru gate 206 in the eleventh embodiment) through which game balls circulating in the game area can pass;
Passing section lottery execution means for executing a passing section lottery based on the game ball passing through the passing section;
Starting the variable display of the identification information based on the passage of the game ball through the passage portion, and ending the variable display, identification information corresponding to the result of the lottery for the passage portion by the lottery execution means for the passage portion. Passing section lottery result display means (normal figure unit 38) for stop-displaying
control means for causing the ball-entering section to transition from the first state to the second state by controlling the state transition means based on the result of the passing section lottery performed by the passing section lottery executing means; ,
with
The ratio of the number of game balls paid out to the number of game balls discharged in a situation in which game balls are continuously fired at predetermined intervals by the shooting means at a predetermined firing intensity is defined as a ball output rate. in the event that
The control means is
Having a plurality of types of control modes for controlling the state transition means,
A game ball non-increase control mode (first high-frequency support mode and second high-frequency support mode in the twelfth embodiment) in which the ball output rate is 1 or less;
A game ball increase control mode (third high-frequency support mode in the twelfth embodiment) in which the ball output rate exceeds 1;
is executable and
In the game ball non-increase control mode, the result of the lottery for the entering ball section is the first result (10R probability variable jackpot A in the 12th embodiment, 10R probability variable jackpot B (Fig. 98 )), and the number of times of the lottery for the entering ball section executed after the game ball non-increase control mode is started, and the result of the lottery for the entering ball section is the predetermined Ended based on reaching the specified number of times (100 times) without a result (various jackpots),
In the game ball increase control mode, the result of the lottery for the entering ball section is the second result (10R probability variable jackpot C (Fig. 98) in the twelfth embodiment) among the predetermined results (various jackpots). and the number of times of the lottery for the entering ball section executed after the game ball increase control mode is started, if the result of the lottery for the entering ball section is the predetermined result (various jackpots) It ends based on reaching the specified number of times (100 times) without
The high-probability lottery mode is based on the result of the lottery for the entering ball club being the first result (10R probability variable jackpot A, 10R probability variable jackpot B) or the second result (10R probability variable jackpot C). and the number of lotteries for the entering ball club executed after the high-probability lottery mode was started, the result of the lottery for the entering ball club did not become the predetermined result (various jackpots), and the specified number of times (100 times), the gaming machine is terminated.

According to the feature W1, when the result of the entrance ball lottery is the first result (10R probability variable jackpot A or 10R probability variable jackpot B), the high probability lottery mode is started, and the game ball non-increase control mode (the 1 high frequency support mode or second high frequency support mode) is started. When the high-probability lottery mode is started, the probability that the lottery for the entering ball club will result in a predetermined result (various jackpots) increases. Further, when the game ball non-increase control mode is started, entry of game balls into the ball entering section is promoted, so execution of lottery for the ball entering section is promoted. However, since the ball output rate in the game ball non-increase control mode is 1 or less, the number of game balls held by the player does not increase. In the high-probability lottery mode and the game ball non-increase control mode, the result of the lottery for the ball-entering club is not a predetermined result (various jackpots), and the number of executions of the lottery for the ball-entering club is a specified number of times (100 times). Terminate when reached. Therefore, the player can achieve a predetermined result (various jackpots) in the lottery for the entering club as early as possible before the number of executions of the lottery for the entering club reaches the prescribed number and the high-probability lottery mode ends. The game is played while expecting that

Furthermore, according to the feature W1, when the result of the entrance ball lottery is the second result (10R probability variable jackpot C), the high probability lottery mode is started, and the game ball increase control mode (third high frequency support mode) is started. When the high-probability lottery mode is started, the probability that the lottery for the entering ball club will result in a predetermined result (various jackpots) increases. In addition, when the game ball increase control mode is started, entry of game balls into the ball entering section is promoted, so execution of lottery for the ball entering section is promoted. Furthermore, since the ball output rate in the game ball increase control mode exceeds 1, the number of game balls held by the player increases. In the high-probability lottery mode and game ball increase control mode, the result of the lottery for the ball-entering club does not reach a predetermined result (various jackpots), and the number of executions of the lottery for the ball-entering club reaches a specified number of times (100 times). Then exit. Therefore, the player continues the game ball increase control mode until just before the number of executions of the lottery for the entering ball section reaches the specified number of times, thereby increasing the number of game balls in hand, while the number of executions of the lottery for the entering ball section is specified. Before the number of times is reached and the high-probability lottery mode and the game ball increase control mode are ended, the game is played while expecting that the result of the lottery for the ball entry part will become a predetermined result (various jackpots). Then, even if the result of the lottery for the entering ball section does not reach a predetermined result (various jackpots) before the number of executions of the lottery for the entering ball section reaches the specified number of times (100 times), the player It is possible to obtain satisfaction that the game ball increase control mode in which the number of game balls increases continues for the longest period.

In this way, according to the feature W1, it is possible to create a new game feature that gives the player a variety of expectations during the period in which the high-probability lottery mode is executed for a limited number of times. Interest can be improved.

[Feature W2]
The gaming machine according to feature W1,
ball-entering section variation time setting means for setting the length of the ball-entering section variation time, which is the time during which the identification information is variably displayed in the ball-entering section lottery result display means;
The variable time setting means for the ball entry section,
During the period in which the game ball increase control mode is being executed,
A gaming machine characterized in that, the greater the number of times the lottery for the ball entry section is executed after the game ball increase control mode is started, the longer the variation time for the ball entry section is set.

According to the feature W2, the closer the number of executions of the lottery for the entering ball section to the specified number of times, the longer the fluctuation time for the entering ball section to be set. be longer. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's frustration that the result of the lottery for the entering club is not a predetermined result even though the number of executions of the lottery for the entering club is approaching the specified number of times.

[Feature W3]
A gaming machine according to feature W1 or feature W2,
ball-entering section variation time setting means for setting the length of the ball-entering section variation time, which is the time during which the identification information is variably displayed in the ball-entering section lottery result display means;
The lottery executing means for the entering ball club,
Even if it is determined that the result of the entrance lottery lottery is not the predetermined result (various jackpots), if a predetermined condition (reach occurrence condition) is established, the condition establishment result (loss result (reach Occurrence)), and if the predetermined condition is not satisfied, it is determined that the condition is not satisfied (result of non-establishment of reach (no reach)),
The variable time setting means for the ball entry section,
During the period in which the game ball increase control mode is being executed,
The length of the fluctuation time for the entering ball section corresponding to the lottery for the entering ball section in which the result of the entering ball section lottery results in the condition establishment result (loss result (reach occurrence)),
Than the length of the variable time for the entering ball section corresponding to the lottery for the entering ball section in which the result of the entering ball section lottery results in the condition non-satisfaction result (loss result (no reach)),
A game machine characterized by being set for a long time.

According to the feature W3, when the result of the lottery for the entering ball club is the condition establishment result (loss result (reach occurrence)), the condition non-satisfaction result (loss result (no reach occurrence)) Also, a long variation time is set as the variation time for the ball-entering section. The greater the number of times a long variation time is set as the variation time for the entering club, the longer the time required for the execution count of the lottery for the entering club to reach the specified number of times. As a result, the period during which the game ball increase control mode continues becomes longer, so the period during which the number of game balls held by the player increases. Therefore, it is possible to create a new game property that the number of game balls increases as the number of times that the lottery result for the entering ball section becomes the condition establishment result (loss result (reach occurrence)) increases, so that the interest of the game can be improved. can be planned.

[Feature W4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features W1 to W3,
The control means is
After the display means starts the variable display, the transition start waiting time until the ball entering section starts the transition from the first state to the second state (normal figure unit in the eleventh embodiment 38 fluctuation time + opening standby time of opening/closing door 208b) is set to a different length for each control mode,
The game ball non-increase control mode (first high-frequency support mode, second high-frequency support mode in the twelfth embodiment);
The game ball increase control mode (third high-frequency support mode in the twelfth embodiment);
A gaming machine characterized by being capable of executing

According to the feature W4, by changing the transition start waiting time, it is possible to execute a game ball non-increase control mode in which the ball output rate is 1 or less and a game ball increase control mode in which the ball output rate exceeds 1. Therefore, it is possible to add inflection to the game and improve the interest of the game. Further, according to feature W4, for example, even when the time for which the ball-entering portion maintains the second state (opening time of opening/closing door 208b in the twelfth embodiment) is set to the same length, transition By changing the length of the start waiting time, the two control modes described above can be executed, so that the degree of freedom in designing the game machine can be improved.

[Feature W5]
The gaming machine according to feature W4,
Alternate distribution means (alternate distribution mechanism 204 (FIG. 70)) for alternately distributing game balls that have reached two paths,
a first route (route R1 (FIG. 70)) configured to allow the distributed game balls to pass through the passing portion;
a second route (route R2 (Fig. 70)) configured so that the distributed game balls cannot pass through the passing portion;
with
The alternate distribution means is
While distributing the reached one game ball to the first path,
Distributing one game ball arriving after the game ball distributed to the first path to the second path,
One game ball that arrives after the game ball distributed to the second path is distributed to the first path,
The first path and the second path are arranged such that the distributed game ball can enter the ball-entering section when the ball-entering section is in the second state. is composed of
In a situation in which game balls are continuously shot at predetermined intervals by the shooting means at a predetermined firing intensity, the number of game balls entering the ball entry portion per predetermined time period is set for each control mode. A gaming machine characterized in that it varies depending on the length of the transition start waiting time set.

According to the feature W5, a game ball non-increase control mode in which the ball output rate is 1 or less and a game ball increase control mode in which the ball output rate exceeds 1 are realized by a simple configuration using only one alternate distribution means. can be executed. That is, since the mechanism for executing the two control modes can be realized in a space-saving manner, the game area can be effectively utilized, such as arranging other accessories in the empty game area.

[Feature W6]
A gaming machine according to feature W4 or feature W5,
The control means is
The time from when the identification information corresponding to the result of the lottery is stop-displayed to when the ball-entering portion starts to transition from the first state to the second state (opening/closing door 208b in the twelfth embodiment) (open waiting time) can be set to different lengths for each of the control modes.

According to the feature W6, the transition start waiting time (fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38 + opening waiting time of the open/close door 208b) is from the game ball passing through the passing part until the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means. (fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38) and the time from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means to when the ball entering section starts transitioning from the first state to the second state (opening/closing door 208b open waiting time) and the total time. Therefore, according to the feature W5, the time from when the game ball passes through the passing portion until the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means (fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38) is set to the same length. Even if there is, the time from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means until the ball-entering section starts transitioning from the first state to the second state (waiting time for opening/closing door 208b) can be set to different lengths. , the transition start waiting time (fluctuation time of normal unit 38 + open waiting time of open/close door 208b) can be set to different lengths. That is, according to feature W5, the time from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means to when the ball-entering portion starts to transition from the first state to the second state (waiting time for opening/closing door 208b). By changing the transition start waiting time (fluctuation time of normal unit 38 + open waiting time of opening and closing door 208b) can be changed, and the number of game balls entering the ball entering section can be changed. can be done. As a result, it is possible to realize a game ball non-increase control mode in which the ball output rate is 1 or less and a game ball increase control mode in which the ball output rate exceeds 1.

[Feature W7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features W1 to W6,
The control means is
As a game ball non-increase mode (first high-frequency support mode, second high-frequency support mode in the twelfth embodiment) in which the ball output rate is 1 or less,
A game ball reduction control mode (first high-frequency support mode in the twelfth embodiment) in which the ball output rate is less than 1;
A game ball maintenance control mode (second high frequency support mode in the twelfth embodiment) in which the ball output rate is 1;
A gaming machine characterized by being capable of executing

According to the feature W7, when the game ball reduction control mode is started, entry of game balls into the ball entering section is promoted, so execution of lottery for the ball entering section is promoted. However, since the ball output rate in the game ball reduction control mode is less than 1, the number of game balls held by the player decreases. Therefore, the player wants to minimize the decrease in the number of game balls in his/her possession, and thus plays the game expecting a predetermined result (various jackpots) in the lottery for the entering ball section as early as possible. As described above, according to the feature W7, it is possible to provide the player with a variety of expectations, so that it is possible to improve the interest in the game ball.

<Characteristic group X>
The feature X group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment.

[Feature X1]
A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A ball entry portion (second start port 208a in the eleventh embodiment) into which a game ball circulating in the game area can enter;
The state of the ball-entering portion is divided into a first state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the ball-entering portion, and a state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the ball-entering portion. State transition means (opening/closing door 208b in the eleventh embodiment) for transitioning between the second state, which is a state;
a payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball based on the game ball entering the ball entering portion;
Acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entering portion;
a ball-entering club lottery executing means for executing a ball-entering club lottery based on the acquired special information;
The variable display of the identification information is started based on the execution of the lottery for the ball entering club, and the identification information corresponding to the result of the lottery for the ball entering club by the lottery executing means for the ball entering club after the variable display is ended. Lottery result display means (special figure unit 37) for entrance ball section that stops and displays
a ball entering section variation time setting means for setting the length of the ball entering section variation time (variation time of the special figure unit 37), which is the time during which the identification information is variably displayed in the ball entering section lottery result display means;
A passing portion (thru gate 206 in the eleventh embodiment) through which game balls circulating in the game area can pass;
Passing section lottery execution means for executing a passing section lottery based on the game ball passing through the passing section;
Starting the variable display of the identification information based on the passage of the game ball through the passage portion, and ending the variable display, identification information corresponding to the result of the lottery for the passage portion by the lottery execution means for the passage portion. Passing section lottery result display means (normal figure unit 38) for stop-displaying
The length of the passing section fluctuation time (fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38), which is the time during which the identification information is displayed in the passing section lottery result display means, is set, and after the passing section fluctuation time has passed a control means for causing the ball-entering section to transition from the first state to the second state by controlling the state transition means based on the result of the passing section lottery performed by the passing section lottery execution means; When,
A variation time table for the entrance section (special figure unit table A in the thirteenth embodiment (FIG. 102) in which the length of the variation time for the entrance section is stored corresponding to the number of execution times of the lottery for the entrance section ), and a passing section variation time table (normal figure unit table A in the thirteenth embodiment (Fig. 102 )) as a set of tables (variation time table set A for high-frequency support mode in the thirteenth embodiment (FIG. 102));
with
The ratio of the number of game balls paid out to the number of game balls discharged in a situation in which game balls are continuously fired at predetermined intervals by the shooting means at a predetermined firing intensity is defined as a ball output ratio. in the event that
The control means is
It is possible to execute a plurality of types of control modes for controlling the state transition means,
By setting the length of the passing portion fluctuation time to a different length for each of the control modes,
a first control mode in which the ball output rate is less than 1 (the mode shown in FIG. 99 of the high-frequency support mode in the thirteenth embodiment);
a second control mode in which the ball output rate is 1 (the mode shown in FIG. 100 of the high-frequency support mode in the thirteenth embodiment);
a third control mode in which the ball output rate exceeds 1 (the mode shown in FIG. 101 of the high-frequency support mode in the thirteenth embodiment);
is capable of executing at least two control aspects of
When the ball-entering section variable time setting means sets the length of the ball-entering section variable time by referring to the ball-entering section variable time table,
A gaming machine, wherein the length of the passing portion variable time is set by referring to the passing portion variable time table stored as a set of table groups and the ball entering portion variable time table.

According to the feature X1, by setting the length of the fluctuation time for passing section (the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38) to a different length for each control mode, the first control in which the ball output rate is less than 1 a second control mode in which the ball output rate is 1; and a third control mode in which the ball output rate exceeds 1. Interest can be improved.

Furthermore, according to the feature X1, the length of the passing section variation time and the length of the ball entry section variation time are set based on the number of execution times of the ball entry section lottery (game times). Then, the ball output rate changes depending on the length of the set passing section fluctuation time. That is, the percentage of game balls entering the ball entering portion changes. Therefore, if the length of the variable time period for the ball-entering section suitable for the percentage of game balls entering the ball-entering section is stored in advance in the ball-entering section variable time table, the lottery for the ball-entering section (game round) can be performed. It is possible to set a ball-entering variation time suitable for the percentage of game balls entering the ball-entering portion that changes based on the number of executions.

[Feature X2]
The gaming machine according to feature X1,
holding storage means for holding and storing the special information acquired from the start of the variable display of the identification information by the lottery result display means for entering ball until the end of the stop display, up to a specified number as an upper limit;
When the length of the passage section fluctuation time is set in the ball entry section fluctuation time table (special figure unit table A (FIG. 102) in the thirteenth embodiment), the ball enters the ball entry section. A game machine characterized in that a variable time longer than an interval between game balls to be played is stored.

According to the feature X2, since the special information can be always stored in the reserve storage means, it is possible to realize a state in which the lottery for entering ball club is continuously executed without interruption.

[Feature X3]
A gaming machine according to feature X1 or feature X2,
The table storage means stores a plurality of the table groups (fluctuation time table sets A and B (FIG. 102) in the thirteenth embodiment),
A gaming machine, wherein the control means switches the group of tables to be referred to when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when a small win is won).

According to the feature X3, since the group of tables to be referred to is switched, it is possible to change the change time for the entrance section, the change time for the passage section, and the ball output rate set based on the number of execution times of the lottery for the entrance section. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature X4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features X1 to X3,
Alternate distribution means (alternate distribution mechanism 204 (FIG. 70)) for alternately distributing game balls that have reached two paths,
a first route (route R1 (FIG. 70)) configured to allow the distributed game balls to pass through the passing portion;
a second route (route R2 (Fig. 70)) configured so that the distributed game balls cannot pass through the passing portion;
with
The alternate distribution means is
While distributing the reached one game ball to the first path,
Distributing one game ball arriving after the game ball distributed to the first path to the second path,
One game ball that arrives after the game ball distributed to the second path is distributed to the first path,
The first path and the second path are arranged such that the distributed game ball can enter the ball-entering section when the ball-entering section is in the second state. is composed of
In a situation where game balls are continuously shot at predetermined intervals by the shooting means at a predetermined firing intensity, the number of game balls entering the ball entrance portion per predetermined time is determined by the passage portion variable time A gaming machine characterized in that it varies depending on the length of the .

According to feature X4, a simple configuration using only one alternate distribution means enables the first control mode in which the ball-out rate is less than 1, the second control mode in which the ball-out rate is 1, A third control mode in which the ball output rate exceeds 1 can be executed. That is, since the mechanism for executing the three control modes can be realized in a space-saving manner, the game area can be effectively utilized, such as arranging other accessories in the empty game area.

The inventions of the above feature group A to feature group X solve the following problems.

2. Description of the Related Art In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as structure and performance for the purpose of increasing the interest of games.

Here, in the gaming machine as described above, there is a demand for further improvement in technology for the purpose of enhancing the interest of the game.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or to which each feature is applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: shooting means for shooting a game ball toward a game area based on a shooting operation by a player; and information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry section;
a gaming machine comprising acquired information storage means for storing special information acquired by said information acquiring means when a game ball enters said starting ball entering section.

A game machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a pattern display device for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, the variable display of the plurality of patterns is started by the operation of the start operation means, and the operation of the stop operation means is caused by the operation of the stop operation means. The game machine stops the variable display of the plurality of pictures after a predetermined period of time has passed, and gives a privilege to the player according to the pictures after the stop.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modifications, and can be implemented in various configurations without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, the technical features in the embodiments and modifications corresponding to the technical features in each form described in the summary column of the invention are used to solve some or all of the above problems, or In order to achieve some or all of the effects, it is possible to appropriately replace or combine them. Also, if the technical features are not described as essential in this specification, they can be deleted as appropriate.

10...Pachinko machine 11...Outer frame 12...Pachinko machine body 13...Inner frame 14...Front door frame 15...Hinge 16...Hinge 17...Cylinder lock 18. ..Window part 19...Glass unit 20...Upper tray 21...Lower tray 22...Exhaust port 23...Lever 24...Production operation button 25...Operating handle 30... Game board 31... Guidance rail 31a... Inner rail part 31b... Outer rail part 32... General winning opening 33... First starting opening 34... Second starting opening 34a... Electric Accessory 34b...Electric Accessory Drive Part 35...Through Gate 36...Variable Winning Device 36a...Large Winning Port 36b...Open/Close Door 36c...Variable Winning Drive Part 37...Special Figure unit 37a... First result display part 37b... Second result display part 37c... First reservation display part 37d... Second reservation display part 38... General figure unit 39... Round Display part 40... Variable display unit 41... Pattern display device 41a... Display surface 41aL... Display area 41aS... Display area 42... Nail 43... Out port 45... Main Display unit 46...Speaker 47...Various lamps 51...First control unit 52...Second control unit 53...Third control unit 54...Tank 55...Tank rail 56. ..Case rail 60...Main controller 61...Main control board 62...Main MPU
63... Main side ROM
63a... Success/failure table storage area 63b... Distribution table storage area 63c... Reach judgment table storage area 63d... Display duration table storage area 63e... Stop result table storage area 63f... Command information storage area 64...Main side RAM
64a... Buffer for lottery counter 64b... Reserved ball storage area 64b... Reserved information storage area 64c... Electrician reservation area 64d... Various counter areas 64e... Various flag storage areas 67a.. Various detection sensors 70... Payout control device 71... Payout device 80... Launch control device 81... Game ball launching mechanism 85... Power supply device 86... Power failure monitoring circuit 90... Sound Light emission control device 91... Audio light emission control board 92... Sound and light side MPU
93...Sound and light side ROM
93a... Hold confirmation table storage area 93b... Déjà vu notice generation table storage area 93c... Déjà vu notice notice effect table storage area 93d... Déjà vu notice stop pattern table storage area 93e... Variable display pattern table storage area 94... Sound and light side RAM
94a...Various flags storage area 94b...Various counter areas 94c...Raffle counter area 94d...Déjà vu notice effect storage area 100...Display control device 101...Display control board 102...Display side MPU
103... Program ROM
104...Work RAM
105... VDP
106...Character ROM
107...Video RAM
200...Second starting port unit 202...Opening 204...Alternate distribution mechanism 204a...Center piece 204b...Left piece 204c...Right piece 204d...Rotating shaft 204e... Left side holding part 204f... Right side holding part 206... Through gate 208... Opening/closing ball entry device 208a... Second start opening 208b... Opening/closing door 208c... Taxiway 300. ..Second start unit 300B...Second start unit 300C...Second start unit 300D...Second start unit 300E...Second start unit 300F...Second start Mouth unit 302... Opening 304... Alternate distribution mechanism (first alternate distribution mechanism)
304a... Center piece 304b... Left piece 304c... Right piece 304d... Rotating shaft 304e... Left holding part 304f... Right holding part 305... Second alternate distribution Mechanism 305A...Third alternate distribution mechanism 305a...Center piece 305b...Left piece 305c...Right piece 305d...Rotating shaft 305e...Left holding part 305f...Right Holding part 306... Through gate 308... Opening/closing ball entry device 308a... Second start opening 308b... Opening/closing door 308c... Guideway

Claims (1)

a shooting means for shooting game balls toward the game area;
a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball circulating in the game area;
Passage detection means through which game balls circulating in the game area can pass;
By operating one opening/closing means between a closed state and an open state, the ball entering state of the game ball into the ball entering means can be changed to the state where the entering of the game ball into the ball entering means is impossible or difficult. state transition means for transitioning between a first state that is a state and a second state that is a state in which a game ball can or easily be entered into the ball entry means;
Control means for controlling the state transition means triggered by the passage of the game ball through the passage detection means;
Distributing means for distributing arriving game balls to a plurality of paths;
a first path configured to allow the distributed game balls to pass through the passage detection means;
a second path configured so that the distributed game balls cannot pass through the passage detection means;
A gaming machine comprising
The sorting means is
The game balls that have reached can be distributed to the first route,
A game ball that arrives after the game ball that is distributed to the first path can be distributed to the second path,
A game ball that arrives after the game ball that is distributed to the second path can be distributed to the first path,
The first path and the second path are arranged so that the distributed game ball can enter the ball entering means when the ball entering state is the second state. is composed of
The control means is
The length of the transition start waiting time, which is the time from when the game ball passes through the passage detecting means until when the ball entering state starts to transition from the first state to the second state, is set in a plurality of types. can be set to a length of
When the ball-entering means transitions the opening/closing means from the closed state to the open state and then to the closed state, the time during which the ball-entering state is in the second state is the first state. The game balls distributed to the second route and the game balls distributed to the second route are configured to be the same
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images